Jvc Kw Avx716 Users Manual LVT1778 001A

LVT1778-001A to the manual fb369ef8-3440-43b1-80b1-e99bbde79828

2015-01-23

: Jvc Jvc-Kw-Avx716-Users-Manual-320841 jvc-kw-avx716-users-manual-320841 jvc pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 666

DownloadJvc Jvc-Kw-Avx716-Users-Manual- LVT1778-001A  Jvc-kw-avx716-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
KW-ADV790
KW-AVX710

RECEPTOR DVD CON MONITOR

KW-ADV790
KW-AVX710

ESPAÑOL

RÉCEPTEUR DVD ET MONITEUR

KW-ADV790
KW-AVX710

FRANÇAIS

ENGLISH

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
Para cancelar la demonstración en pantalla, consulte la página 8.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.

INSTRUCTIONS
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS

For customer Use:
Enter below the Model No.
and Serial No. which are
located on the top or bottom
of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future
reference.
Model No.
Serial No.

LVT1778-001A
[J]

Cover_KW-AVX710J.indd 2

07.11.27 8:20:33 PM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: (For U.S.A.) Visible and/or invisible class II laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam.
(For Canada) Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with
optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

WARNINGS:
To prevent accidents and damage

INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and
gearshift lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

CAUTION
This product has a fluorescent lamp that
contains mercury. Disposal of these materials
may be regulated in your community due to
environmental considerations. For disposal or
recycling information, please contact your local
authorities or for USA, the Electronic Industries
Alliance: http://www.eiae.org.

Caution
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
[European Union only]
2

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 2

07.12.5 11:58:46 AM

How to reset your unit

INTRODUCTION
Playable disc types .......................... 4
Basic operations—
Monitor panel/touch panel............ 5
Basic operations—
Remote controller (RM-RK252) ...... 6

How to forcibly eject a disc
ENTER

NO EJECT?
EMERGENCY EJECT?

3

OPERATIONS
Before operating the unit ................ 8
Common operations ........................ 9
Listening to the radio ...................... 10
Disc operations ................................ 13

Exit

Back

2
at the same time
1

1

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Bluetooth® operations—
Cellular phone/audio player .......... 27
Listening to the CD changer .............. 34
Listening to the satellite radio ......... 36
Listening to the HD Radio™ Broadcast .... 39
Listening to the iPod........................ 40
Using other external components ..... 42

• If this does not work, reset the unit.

Cautions on the monitor:
• The monitor built in this unit has been produced
with high precision, but it may have some
ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not
malfunction.
• Do not expose the monitor to direct sunlight.
• Do not operate the touch panel using a ball-point
pen or similar tool with the sharp tip.
Touch the buttons on the touch panel with your
finger directly (if you are wearing a glove, take it
off).
• When the temperature is very cold or very hot...
– Chemical changes occur inside, causing
malfunction.
– Pictures may not appear clearly or may move
slowly. Pictures may not be synchronized with
the sound or picture quality may decline in
such environments.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 3

ENGLISH

Contents

• Your preset
adjustments will
also be erased.

SETTINGS
Sound equalization .......................... 45
Assigning titles to the sources .......... 46
Menu operations ............................. 47
REFERENCES
Maintenance ................................... 56
More about this unit ........................ 57
Troubleshooting .............................. 64
Specifications .................................. 68

3

INTRODUCTION
07.12.5 11:58:53 AM

ENGLISH

Playable disc types
Disc type

Recording format, file type, etc.

DVD

DVD Video (Region Code: 1)*1

Playable

DVD Audio
DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
DVD Video
(DVD-R/-RW*2, +R/+RW*3)
DVD-VR
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
• DVD-VR
JPEG
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/
MP3/WMA/WAV
WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level 1,
AAC
level 2, Romeo, Joliet
MPEG4
DVD+VR
DVD-RAM
Dual Disc
DVD side
Non-DVD side
CD/VCD
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)/DTS-CD
VCD (Video CD)
SVCD (Super Video CD)
CD-ROM
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
MP3/WMA/WAV
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo, JPEG
Joliet
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
AAC
MPEG4
*1 If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).
DVD-RW dual layer discs are not playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs.
+RW double layer discs are not playable.
Caution for DualDisc playback
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
4

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 4

07.12.5 11:58:54 AM

Display  screen. ☞ page 47
Display  screen. ☞ page 9
Display and erase the Short Cut windows.
Available functions vary among the sources. For details, see each source operation
section.

Adjust the volume.
Change the display information.
Change the sources. ☞ page 9
Display  screen.
☞ page 47

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Monitor panel/touch panel

Remote sensor

• Display  menu.
• Eject the disc and display 
menu. [Hold]
• Close the monitor panel when 
menu is displayed.

• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power. [Hold]
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

 menu

Reset the unit.
• Use only when the internal system malfunctions.
•
•
•
•
•
•

• In the explanation, buttons on the touch panel
are indicated inside [ ].
• For details on the touch panel operations, see
each source operation section.
5

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 5

[OPEN]: Open the monitor panel.
[EJECT]: Eject the disc.
[CLOSE]: Close the monitor panel.
[TILT +/–]: Tilt the monitor panel.
[Exit]: Erase this screen.
Shaded icons cannot be used.

INTRODUCTION
07.12.5 11:58:55 AM

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Remote controller (RM-RK252)
Installing the battery

Main elements and features
R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace both batteries.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel
remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate
volume) for connection.

1

• Turns on the power.
• Attenuates the sound if the power is on.
• Turns off the power if pressed and held (while
the power is on).

2

• Reverse search
• Reverse slow motion (during pause)

3

Adjusts the volume level.
• Does not function as “2nd VOL.”

4

• Displays  screen.
• Displays  menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

5

• DVD/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.

6

Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “ .“

6

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 6

07.12.5 11:58:55 AM

Functions with other buttons (see i and o).

8

Changes the display information.

9

For disc operations:
• 5 / ∞:
DVD: Selects the title.
DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
Other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders.
• 4 / ¢:
– Press briefly: reverse skip/forward skip
– Press and hold: reverse search/forward
search
For FM/AM and HD Radio operations:
• 5 / ∞:
FM/AM: Selects the preset stations.
HD Radio: Selects a multicast channel.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for stations.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For satellite tuner operations:
• 5 / ∞: Selects the categories.
• 4 / ¢:
– Selects a channel rapidly if pressed and held.
– Selects a channel if pressed.
For Apple iPod operations:
• ∞: Starts playback/pauses
• 5: Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞
/ 4 / ¢ work as menu selecting
buttons).
In the main menu:
• 5: Returns to the previous menu.
• ∞: Confirms the selection.
• 4/¢
– Press briefly: Selects an item.
– Press and hold: Skips ten items at a time.
For Bluetooth operations:
• 4 / ¢: reverse skip/forward skip (for
audio player operation)

• Forward search
• Forward slow motion (during pause)

q

Selects the source.

w

For disc operations:
Starts playback/pauses.
For Bluetooth operations:
• Answers incoming calls.
• Starts playback/pauses. (for audio player
operation).

e

Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.

r

“TUNER”/”SAT”/”HD Radio”: Selects the bands.
“DISC”: Stops playback.
“Bluetooth PHONE”: Ends the call.
“Bluetooth AUDIO”: Starts playback/pauses.

t

VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

y

• DVD Video/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.

u

• Makes selection/settings.
• @ / #: Skips back or forward by five minutes
for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2.
• % / fi: Changes discs for “CD-CH.”

i*3 • Switches number entry mode for “DISC.”
• Erases the misentry after entering a wrong
number.
• Does not function as “SURROUND.”
o*3 Number buttons
• Enters numbers.
• “TUNER”/”SAT”/”HD Radio”: Selects the preset
station directly.
*1 Functions as a number button only (see o ).
*2 Not used for this unit.
*3 Functions when pressed with SHIFT.

7

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 7

p

ENGLISH

7

INTRODUCTION
07.12.5 11:58:56 AM

ENGLISH

Before operating the unit
@

You can cancel the demonstration on the screen and set
the clock.
• Non-available items will be shaded on the AV Menu
screens.

Set the clock settings.
Moves to the preceding menu page

Indication language:
In this manual, English indications are used
for purpose of explanation. You can select the
indication language. (☞ page 49)
Moves to the succeeding menu page

~

Turn on the power.

Ÿ

Display  screen.

!

Display  menu.

¤
⁄

Finish the procedure.

Cancel the demonstration.
Select .

Return to the previous screen.

8

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 8

07.12.5 11:58:57 AM

Selecting the playback source

ENGLISH

Common operations
Changing the display
information

• Available sources depend on the external
components you have connected, media you have
attached, and the  settings you have made
(☞ page 52).

• Available display information varies among the
playback sources.

On the monitor panel only:

On the touch panel:

• Each time you press DISP, the display changes to
show the various information.
Ex. When the playback source is a DivX disc.
Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen
Exit

On the monitor panel:
Track list

Clock time in large numbers

TUNER or HD Radio = SAT = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD)
=CD-CH, iPod, or EXT-IN = Bluetooth PHONE
= Bluetooth AUDIO = AV-IN = (back to the
beginning)

Navigation screen
(When  is
selected for )
(☞ page 52)

• You cannot select these sources if they are not ready.
Back to the beginning

9

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 9

OPERATIONS
07.12.5 11:58:57 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset no.

Assigned station name (☞ page 46). If no name is assigned,
the frequency of the station is displayed instead.

Band
Sound mode
(☞ page 45)
☞ page 45
Tuner indicators

☞ page 9

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ
!

Press [BAND].

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In
the explanation,
they are
indicated inside
[ ].

Press [4] or [¢] to search for a station—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.
• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

3

When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
1

Press [AV MENU].

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• The MONO indicator lights up.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

Press [Mode].

To restore stereo effect, select .

10

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 10

07.12.5 11:58:58 AM

FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)

This function works only for FM bands. Once you have
activated this function (selected ), it always
works when searching for FM stations.

1

This function works only for FM bands.
You can preset six stations for each band.

Press [AV MENU].

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

ENGLISH

Tuning in to stations with
sufficient signal strength

Press [AV MENU].

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Mode].

2

3

Press [Mode].

3

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be
detected.
• The DX indicator goes off, then the LO indicator
lights up.

11

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 11

OPERATIONS
07.12.5 11:58:59 AM

ENGLISH

Manual presetting

Selecting a preset station

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number
4 of the FM1 band.

On the remote:

1

1

Display the Preset List.

2
or
Hold

On the unit:
• To select directly on the touch panel

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

• To select from the Preset List

1
3

Select a preset number.

2
[Hold]

The station selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 4.

12

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 12

07.12.5 11:58:59 AM

The disc type is automatically detected, and playback starts automatically (for some discs: automatic start depends
on its internal program).
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks on it will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject
the disc.

ENGLISH

Disc operations

If “ ” appears on the screen, the unit cannot accept the operation you have tried to do.
• In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted.

~

!

Open the monitor panel.

Insert a disc.

Label side

 menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Ÿ

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [CLOSE].

Press [OPEN].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

When playing back a multi-channel encoded disc,
the multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• You can fully enjoy multi-channel sound by
connecting an amplifier or a decoder compatible
with these multi-channel sources. (☞ also page
61)

Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
13

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 13

OPERATIONS
07.12.5 11:59:00 AM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information. (☞ page 9)

DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter no./Playing time

Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal
channel no.

Disc type *1
Audio format
Sound mode
(☞ page 45)
Playback mode

☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select chapter
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2
[5 ∞]
Select title/program/playlist

*1 DVD-VR also indicates either PRG (program) or PLAY (playlist) playback.
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback pictures
on the screen).

14

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 14

07.12.5 11:59:01 AM

For DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2: Folder no./Track no./Playing time
For JPEG: Folder no./File no.

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information (☞ page 9).

Disc type
Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

Total track no.
included on the
disc

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 *1
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

Track no./Playing time

The PBC indicator
lights up when PBC is
in use.

Total track no.
included on the
disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

Total playing time

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10
15

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 15

OPERATIONS
07.12.5 11:59:01 AM

ENGLISH

Track no./Playing time

Only for CD Text *3
Total track no.
included on the disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

Total playing time
☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

Audio format
(MP3/WMA/WAV)
Tag data appears
only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 45)
Total track no. included on the disc

☞ page 19

[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

*3 “No Name” appears for conventional CDs.
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10
16

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 16

07.12.5 11:59:02 AM

You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• While the operation buttons are displayed, aspect ratio is fixed to . (☞ page 49)
• If no operation is done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is
displayed).

ENGLISH

Operation buttons on the screen

☞ pages 20 to 24 on how the operation buttons
particularly work for a variety of the discs

A
[SOURCE]
[AV MENU]
[SHORT CUT]
[3 / 8]
[7]
[4 ¢]

Display  screen
Display  screen
Display the Short Cut buttons
Start and pause playback
Stop playback
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Select folders
• The above buttons also work when they are not shown on
the screen (while watching the playback picture).
* While a disc menu is played back for DVD, [KEY] is
automatically displayed. On the disc menu, you can select a
menu item directly by touching it on the screen.

Touch the screen (center portion).

*

Touch [KEY].

B
For DVD/VCD/DivX menu operation playback
[2 3 5 ∞] Select the menu items
[ENT]
Confirm the selection
[TOP MENU] Display the disc menu
[MENU]
Display the disc menu
[RETURN]
Return to the previous menu or display the
menu (only for VCD with PBC)

Touch [KEY].

C
For entering the numbers
[DIRECT CLR] • Switch between chapter/track entry and
title/group/folder entry
• Erase the last entry when you enter a
wrong number
[0]–[9]=[ENT]
Enter numbers
Ex.: To enter “105,” press [1], [0], [5], then [ENT]

Touch [KEY].

To erase the operations, touch the screen again.
17

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 17

OPERATIONS
07.12.5 11:59:02 AM

ENGLISH

Selecting playback modes
You can use the following playback modes—Repeat or Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat

1

3

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select .

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Title: Repeats current title
Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Program: Repeats current program (not
available for Playlist playback)
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Repeats current folder

Folder: Repeats current folder

—
—
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks
—

Track:

Repeats current track (PBC not in
use)

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks (PBC not
in use)

Track:

Repeats current track*1

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

Track: Repeats current track*1
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder

Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

*1 You can also use [SHORT CUT] to turn on and off Track Repeat.

18

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 18

07.12.5 11:59:03 AM

Prohibiting disc ejection

If a disc includes folders, you can display the Folder/
Track (File) Lists, then start playback.

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

ENGLISH

Selecting tracks on the list
1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
at the same time

3

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select .

Select a folder (1), then a track (2).

Using Short Cut Icons
You can easily access the some frequently used
functions by using [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel.

1
Selected track starts playing. (* Press to move to
the previous/next pages of the list)
1 Current folder list number/total folder list
number
2 Current track list number/total track list
number of the current folder
You can easily access the Track List by pressing DISP
on the monitor panel.

2
• For video software:
Aspect ratio
(☞ page 49)
Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

• For audio software:

Turn on or off Track Repeat
(Repeat play: ☞ page 18)

Selected track starts playing.
19

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 19

OPERATIONS
07.12.5 11:59:04 AM

ENGLISH

Operations using the remote controller—RM-RK252
Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No sound can be heard.)
Select title (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select title (when not playing).

twice

Select title (during playback or pause).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

You can change the following items using the on-screen bar—audio language, audio stream, audio channel,
subtitle language, view angle, etc. (☞ pages 25 and 26)

20

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 20

07.12.5 11:59:05 AM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4 (No sound can be heard.)
Forward slow motion during pause*5 (No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*6
Select program.
Select playlist (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.
Select chapter.
Select program (when not playing).
Select program/playlist (during playback or pause).
twice

Using Original Program/Playlist screens ( ☞ page 25)
1

For Original Program
For Playlist

2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3

To erase the screen.

*4 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*5 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*6 Search speed: x2 ] x10

21

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 21

OPERATIONS
07.12.5 11:59:05 AM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.

Select track (within the same folder).
twice

Select folder.
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

While playing...
Reverse/advance the scenes by five minutes.
Current playback position

2nd press

1st press

1st press

2nd press

3rd press

For DivX6: Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2 ] ¡3
*2 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2

22

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 22

07.12.5 11:59:06 AM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause. (Slide show: each file is shown for a few seconds.)
Shows the current file until you change it if pressed during Slide show.
Select file.
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.
Select file (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed
during playback).
Reverse/forward search*3
Forward slow motion during pause*4
(No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5 (No
sound can be heard.)

During PBC playback...

Select aspect ratio.

2 Select the desired track.

Select an item on the menu.
To return to the previous menu, press
To cancel PBC playback
1

• To resume PBC, press
Select track.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*5 Search speed: x2 ] x10

23

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 23

OPERATIONS
07.12.5 11:59:07 AM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

Select track.
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Reverse/forward search*3
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
Select folder.

Select track (within the same folder).

twice

Select folder.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10

24

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 24

07.12.5 11:59:08 AM

Operations using the on-screen
bar

You can use Original Program or Playlist
screen anytime while playing DVD-VR with its data
recorded.

1

2

These operations are possible on the screen using
the remote controller, while playing the following
discs—DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG.

Display the Original Program/Playlist screen.

1

Display the on-screen bar. (☞page 26)

2

Select an item.

3

Make a selection.
If a pop-up menu appears...

ENGLISH

Using the list screens

Select an item you want.

To erase the screen

Ex. For DVD-Video

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
the recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/playlist*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of playlist
8 Total number of chapters included in the playlist
9 Playback time

• For entering time/numbers...
:
Move the entry position

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

:
Select a number
To remove the on-screen bar

25

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 25

OPERATIONS
07.12.5 11:59:08 AM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Information
Operation

Above example is of DVD Video. Items shown on the bar vary due to the disc type.
1 Disc type
2 • DVD: Audio signal format
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD Video:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
T. RPT:
Title repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
F. RND: Folder random
A. RND: All (Disc) random
JPEG:
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
VCD:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter

5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
Remaining title time (for DVD)
Remaining disc time (for others)
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track *2
Remaining time of the current
chapter/track *2
6 Playback status
Play
Reverse/forward search
Reverse/forward slow-motion
Pause
Stop
7 Operation icons
Change time indication (see 5)
Time Search (Specify a certain
scene by entering time.)
Title Search (by its number)
Chapter Search (by its number)
Track Search (by its number)
Repeat play *1
Random play *1
Change the audio language, audio
stream, or audio channel
Change or erase the subtitle
language
Change the view angle

Current program/chapter
Current Playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file

*1 ☞ page 18
*2 Not applicable for DVD-VR

26

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 26

07.12.5 11:59:09 AM

For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the
Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD changer jack
on the rear.
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the
countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.

1

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press
[5] or [∞] to select it.

ENGLISH

Bluetooth® operations — Cellular phone/audio player

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

To use a Bluetooth device through the unit (“Bluetooth
PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“Bluetooth PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”).

3

Connecting a new Bluetooth
device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in 
menu to register and establish the connection with a
device.
• Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as
the source to operate  menu.
Open

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Search

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating this unit.

Go to other menu items

4

Enter a PIN (Personal Identification
Number)* code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number).
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.

To register using 
Preparation:
Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth
function.
Continued on the next page

27

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 27

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.5 11:59:11 AM

ENGLISH

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Enter]: Confirms the entry.

5

To connect a special device 

1

Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the above
step) on the device to be connected.

2
3
4
5

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use  (or activate
) to connect the same device
from next time (☞ the following, and page 55).

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.
Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Special Device].
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
Select a device you want to connect.
Use  (or ) to connect.

To connect/disconnect a registered
device

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to connect/disconnect.

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press [5]
or [∞] to select it.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

1

3
4

To register using 

2
3

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.
Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Search].
The unit searches for available devices and displays
the list of them. (If no available device is detected,
“Device Unfound” appears.)

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Connect] or [Disconnect].
• Select  to connect the selected
device.
• Select  to disconnect the selected
device.

4
5

Select a device you want to connect.

To delete a registered device

Enter the specific PIN code of the device to
the unit.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to delete.

6

Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Connecting...” is displayed on the
screen.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

3
4

Press [Bluetooth].

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

Press [Delete Pairing].
Confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

28

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 28

07.12.5 11:59:11 AM

Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

*1

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 31

Adjust the volume of the incoming calls.*2

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside
[ ].

[AV MENU] Hold: Activates  function
[5 ∞] Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can be registered.)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of the other sources.

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ

Press [AV MENU].

!
⁄

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.
• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Bluetooth].
Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using 
menu).
☞ page 55

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

When  is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

To end the call
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.

When  is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(☞ page 55)

• You can adjust the microphone volume. (☞ page 55)

29

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 29

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.5 11:59:12 AM

3

ENGLISH

When a Text Message comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with Text Message,
you can read the messages on the screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.
When  is set to ...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (☞ page 55)

4

Select a calling method, then call.

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into  =
. (☞ page 54)
When  is set to ...
Access the message list to read messages. (☞ pages
54 and 55)

Cancel

Redial

Shows the list of the phone
numbers you have dialed.
Received Calls Shows the list of the received
calls.
Phonebook
Shows the phone book of the
connected cellular phone.
Missed Calls Shows the list of the missed
calls.
Phone
Shows the phone number entry
Number
screen = “Entering a phone
number” (☞ page 31).
Voice Dialling (Only when the connected
cellular phone has the voice
recognition system): = Speak
the name you want to call.

To make a call

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

30

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 30

07.12.5 11:59:13 AM

To redial previously dialed numbers

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or +/–).

1

/ATT

ENGLISH

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

Entering a phone number
• You cannot use the remote controller to enter phone
numbers.

2

You can enter [0] – [9], [*], [#] (up to 32 numbers)
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Preset]: Goes to Preset List. You can preset the
entered number by selecting a preset
number. (☞ page 32)
• [Dial]: Calls the entered number.

3

• You can easily access  by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
When using the remote controller, you can
display  menu anytime .
You can also access  by holding
SOURCE on the monitor panel.
[Hold]
• You can easily activate  by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

You can also activate  by
holding [AV MENU].

31

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 31

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.5 11:59:14 AM

ENGLISH

Presetting the phone numbers

To call a preset number

You can preset up to six phone numbers.

1

1

Select the phone number you want to preset
from , , , or .
1 Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.
2 Press [Bluetooth].
3 Press [Dial Menu], then...

2
Ex.: Selecting 

2

Select a telephone number to store.

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth phone operations.

[Hold]

3

: • Display  screen/Answer
the incoming call.
• Display the  menu if pressed
and held (regardless of the current
source).

Select a preset number.

: End the call.
: Adjust the volume.

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

:
[Hold] Make a call to the preset numbers.

32

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 32

07.12.5 11:59:14 AM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

*1

*2
Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 45
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

[3 / 8] [7] Start and pause playback
[4 ¢] Reverse/forward skip
[5 ∞]
Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can
be registered.*3)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the operation status.
*3 You cannot select “New Device” when a Bluetooth audio player is connected.

~
Ÿ

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth audio operations.

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth
AUDIO]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Start and pause playback.

Start playback.

:
:

Reverse/forward skip
Adjust the volume.

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: 
33

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 33

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.5 11:59:15 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the CD changer
MP3 indicator

Folder no./Track no./Playing time
Ex. while playing an MP3 disc

Disc no.
Tag data appears only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

Total track no. included on the
disc
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[ 5 ∞]
Press: Select folders (only for MP3)
Hold: Display Disc list

☞ page 35
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.

⁄

Preparation:
Make sure  is selected for . (☞ page 52)

~

Select a disc to start playing.

Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH]. (☞
page 9)

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

To go to the other list

• If you select an MP3 disc, the Track list of the
current folder appears. You can select a track
and start playing. (☞ also page 19)

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor
panel.

!

Display the Disc List.

• If you select a folder on the list, you can start
playing the first track of the folder.
34

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 34

07.12.5 11:59:16 AM

Selecting playback modes

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Mode].

ENGLISH

You can use following playback modes—Repeat or
Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat for an MP3 disc

When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select .

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Track: Repeats current track
Disc:
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
All:

Randomly plays all tracks of the
current disc
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder, then tracks of next folders
folder
Disc: Randomly plays all tracks of the
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
current disc
All:
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller to operate the CD changer.

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

: Select disc.

☞ page 45

: Select folder (MP3 only).
• Press: Select track.
• Hold: Reverse/forward search

35

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 35

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.5 11:59:16 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the satellite radio
Before operating, connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of
this unit.
• JVC SIRIUS Satellite radio interface, KS-SRA 100, for listening to SIRIUS Satellite radio.
• JVC Smart Digital Adaptor, XMDJVC 100, for listening to XM Satellite radio.

For SIRIUS Radio

For XM Radio

Activate your subscription after connection:

Activate your subscription after connection:

1 Turn on the power.

• Only Channel 0, 1, and 247 are available before
activation.
1 Turn on the power.

2 Select “SAT” for the source.
2 Select “SAT” for the source.
• ☞ also page 9.
• ☞ also page 9.
The SIRIUS Satellite radio starts updating all the
SIRIUS channels. (☞ “GCI update” column below.)
• Once completed, SIRIUS Satellite radio tunes in
to the preset channel, CH184.

The XMDirectTM Universal Tuner Box starts
updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1” is tuned
in automatically. (☞ “GCI update” column below.)

3 Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 51.
3 Check your XM Satellite radio ID labelled on
the casing of the XMDirectTM Universal Tuner
Box, or tune in to “Channel 0” (see page 37).

4 Contact SIRIUS on the internet at  to activate your
subscription, or you can call SIRIUS toll-free
at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).
“Subscription Updated Press Any Key to Continue”
appears on the monitor once subscription has been
completed.

4 Contact XM Satellite radio on the internet
at  to
activate your subscription, or you can call 1800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).
Once completed, the unit tunes in to one of the
available channels (Channel 4 or higher).

GCI (Global Control Information) update:
• If channels are updated after subscription, updating starts automatically, and no sound can be heard.
For SIRIUS: “Channel is Updating XX% completed” appears.
For XM : “UPDATING” appears.
• Updating takes a few minutes to complete.
• Do not press any buttons or perform any operations until updating is completed.
36

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 36

07.12.5 11:59:17 AM

Preset No.

ENGLISH

Tuning in to a channel you want
Channel No.

Band
Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

☞ page 38

Signal Reception
indicator

☞ page 9

Only for SIRIUS

For SIRIUS Radio

~

For XM Radio

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [SAT].
(☞ page 9)

Ÿ

Ÿ

Press [BAND].

!

Press [5] or [∞] to select a category.

⁄

• To select a channel from all categories, select
.
Press [4] or [¢] to make a

channel to listen to.
• Holding either button changes the channel
rapidly.
• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed
channels are skipped.

⁄

Press [BAND].
Press [5] or [∞] to select a category.
• To select a channel from all categories
(including non-categorised channels), skip
this step.
• If you do not select a channel within 15
seconds, the category selected is canceled.
You can select a channel from all categories
now.

Press [4] or [¢] to select a
channel to listen to.
• Holding either button changes the channel
rapidly.
• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed
channels are skipped.

37

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 37

Press [SOURCE], then press [SAT].
(☞ page 9)

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

!

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In the
explanation, they
are indicated inside
[ ].

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.5 11:59:18 AM

ENGLISH

Storing channels in memory

Selecting on the lists

You can preset six channels for each band.
Ex.: Storing a channel into preset number 4

You can select a channel using the lists—Category
list/Channel list.

1

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2

Press [List].

3

Select a category (1), then a channel (2)
from the selected category.

Display the Preset List.

• If you want to select a channel by channel name,
first select a channel, then display the Preset List.

2

3

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

Select a preset number.
* Press to move to the previous/next pages of the
list
1 Current category list number/total category
list number
2 Current channel list number/total channel list
number of the current category
The station selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 4.

•  menu can also be accessed by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 45
☞ page 51
(only SIRIUS Satellite
radio)

Selecting preset channels
On the remote only:

1

2
38

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 38

07.12.5 11:59:18 AM

Before operating, connect HD Radio tuner box, KT-HD300 (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear
of the unit.

What is HD Radio Technology?

ENGLISH

Listening to the HD Radio™ Broadcast

HD Radio Technology can deliver high-quality digital sound—AM digital will have FM-like quality (in stereo) and FM
digital will have CD-like quality—with staticfree and clear reception. Furthermore, stations can offer text and data,
such as artist names and song titles.
• When the HD Radio tuner box is connected, it can also receive conventional analog broadcasts.
• Many HD Radio stations also offer more than one channel of programming. This service is called multicasting.
• To find HD Radio stations in your area, visit www.hdradio.com .
Refer also to page 10 for basic radio operations.

Station Call Sign and channel number
Flashes first then lights
up when a digital audio
broadcast is tuned in.

Searching for HD Radio stations only

Up and down
the HD Radio
multicast
channels.

HD Radio reception mode

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In
the explanation,
they are
indicated inside
[ ].

Changing HD Radio reception
mode
While receiving an HD Radio broadcast, the unit tunes
to digital or analog audio automatically due to the
receiving condition.

1

Press [AV MENU].
• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Mode].

• If no sound can be heard from the selected setting,
change the setting to ANALOG or DIGITAL.
• The setting automatically changes to AUTO if you
tuned in to or change to another station, or if you
turned off the power.
• This setting cannot take effect for the conventional
FM/AM stations.
• If the radio station forces the reception mode to
digital, the DIGITAL indicator flashes.

• Auto: Switch between digital and analog audio
automatically
• Digital: Tuning to digital audio only
• Analog: Tuning to analog audio only
39

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 39

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.5 11:59:19 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod
Track no./Playing time

Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

☞ page 41
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5]
Enter player’s menu
[∞]
Start playback/pause
• To resume, press again.

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

It is required to connect the Interface adapter for iPod (KS-PD100) to the CD changer jack on the rear.
Preparation:
Make sure  is selected for . (☞ page 52)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod] (☞ page 9)
Playback starts automatically.
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

40

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 40

07.12.5 11:59:20 AM

3

1

Press [5] to enter the player’s menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about five seconds.

2

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.
Press: Select an item.
Hold: Skip ten items at a time if there are more
than ten items.

Repeat

One:
All:

Random

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs Ô
Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the beginning)

3
4

Select an appropriate option.

ENGLISH

Selecting a track from the
player’s menu

Functions the same as
“Repeat One.”
Functions the same as
“Repeat All.”

Album: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Albums.”
Song: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Songs.”

Press [∞] to confirm the selection.
• When the playback modes are selected, the
corresponding indicators light up alternately on
the screen.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [5].

To cancel, select .

Selecting playback modes
1

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 45

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

41

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 41

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.5 11:59:20 AM

ENGLISH

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN terminals.
Assigned title (☞ page 46)

Sound mode (☞ page 45)

You can easily access to  setting
menu by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...
☞ page 45

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback picture).

~
Ÿ

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while watching the playback picture

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• [KEY] does not work when the source is “AV-IN.”

42

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 42

07.12.5 11:59:21 AM

Navigation screen
ENGLISH

You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN terminal so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure  is selected for . (☞ page 52)

To view the navigation screen (and listen to the navigation guidance*)
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (☞ page 9)
• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to
 regardless of the  setting. (☞ page
49)

* If your Navigation System is equipped with the voice guidance function.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while viewing the navigation screen
• The operation buttons displayed on the screen vary among the playback sources.

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• The above buttons except [KEY] also work when they are not shown on the screen (while viewing the navigation
screen).
When  is selected for  (☞ page 52)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN terminals.
• Some status messages such as volume level will not appear on the screen.

43

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 43

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.5 11:59:21 AM

ENGLISH

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter—KS-U57
(not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (☞ page 46)

Sound mode
(☞ page 45)

☞ page 45

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

Preparation:
Make sure  is selected for . (☞ page 52)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

44

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 44

07.12.5 11:59:22 AM

ENGLISH

Sound equalization

While playing back any source other
than “Bluetooth PHONE,” you can easily
access  menu by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

~

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into ,
, and .

1

Repeat steps ~ and Ÿ, then in step !...

2

Adjust (1), then store (2).

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Ÿ

!

Select a sound mode.

Ex.: When storing into .
Move to other six sound modes

• For preset values of each sound mode, ☞ page 62.

45

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 45

SETTINGS
07.12.5 11:59:22 AM

ENGLISH

Assigning titles to the sources

In the explanation, buttons on the
touch panel are indicated inside [ ].

!

You can assign titles as follows.
FM/AM stations

Up to 16 characters—up to 30
stations.

AV-IN
EXT-IN

Up to 16 characters

~
Ÿ

Assign a title.

Select the source. (☞ page 9)
• For FM/AM stations: Select the band, then
tune into a station.

You can enter up to 16 characters (for available
characters, ☞ page 63).
• [Store]: Confirm the entry.
• [2/3]: Move the cursor.
• [BS]:
Erase the character before the
cursor.
• [Del]:
Erase the character on the cursor.
• [Cap]:
Change the letter case (upper/
lower).
• [Change]: Change the character set.
• [Space]: Enter a space.

Display  screen.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

46

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 46

07.12.5 11:59:23 AM

ENGLISH

Menu operations

!

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures. Some of the settings do not open the
sub-setting window, but just selecting an option will
change the setting.
• The display indications may change according to
change of the specifications.
Ex.: Changing the <AV Input> setting

~

Ÿ

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Non-available items will be shaded.

47

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 47

SETTINGS
07.12.5 11:59:23 AM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 47.

Display

ENGLISH

Setup
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Demonstration

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it temporarily,
touch the screen.

Wall Paper

You can select the background picture of the screen.
Horizon, Metal, Art, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

Off: Cancels.
Once: Scrolls the disc information once.
Auto: Repeats scrolling (five-second intervals).
• Holding DISP on the monitor panel scrolls the information regardless
of this setting.

Dimmer

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Auto: Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.*1
Dimmer Time Set : Activates the Dimmer Time setting below.

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On/Off times.

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
1 (bright), 2 (middle), 3 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust brightness of the screen.
–15 (darkest) to +15 (brightest); Initial 00

Picture Adjust*2

You can adjust the following to make the screen clear and legible for
watching the playback picture. The setting will be stored—one for
“DISC” (common) and the other for “AV-IN.”
–15 to +15; Initial 0
Bright: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Contrast: Adjust the contrast.
Color: Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
Tint: Adjust the tint if the human skin color is unnatural.
• Press [5] or [∞] to adjust.

*1 The ILLUMINATION lead connection is required. (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
*2 Adjustable only when the source is “DISC” (the inserted disc must contain pictures or movies) or “AV-IN.”

48

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 48

07.12.5 11:59:24 AM

Menu items
3

Aspect*

Selectable settings, [reference page]
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.
Aspect ratio of incoming signal
4:3
16:9

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures

Clock

Display

Full:
For 16:9 original pictures
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match to the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language*4

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands,
Svenska, Dansk, Руccĸий, Português
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change
according to the language selected. ☞ [63]

Time Set

Initial 1:00AM ☞ [8]

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system.
12Hours, 24Hours ☞ [8]

OSD Clock

When <On> is selected, the clock time is displayed on the playback
picture. ☞ [8]
Off, On

Clock Adjust*5

Off : Cancels.
Auto : The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the clock time
data provided via the satellite radio channel.

*3 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*4 After you change the indication language setting, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.
*5 Appears only when SIRIUS Satellite Radio or XM Satellite Radio is connected.

49

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 49

SETTINGS
07.12.5 11:59:25 AM

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 47.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Clock

1 2

Time Zone* *

Select your residential area from one of the following time zones for
clock adjustment.
Alaska, Pacific, Mountain, Central, Eastern, Atlantic,
Newfoundland

DST (Daylight Saving Time)*1
*2

Activates this if your residential area is subject to DST.
Off : Cancels.
On : Activates daylight saving time.

Menu Language*3

Select the initial disc menu language; Initial English (☞ also page
62).

Audio Language*3

Select the initial audio language; Initial English (☞ also page 62).

Subtitle*3

Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off); Initial Off
(☞ also page 62).

Monitor Type*3
16:9

4:3LB

Disc

4:3PS

OSD Position*3
Position 1

Position 2

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
16:9 : Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor is 16:9.
4:3 LB (Letterbox)/4:3 PS (Pan Scan): Select when the aspect ratio of
the external monitor is 4:3.
• Refer to the illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are
shown on the screen.
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [25]
1: Higher position
2: Lower position

File Type*3

Select playback file type when a disc contains different types of files.
Audio: Plays back audio files.
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
Audio&Video: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

DivX Regist. (Registration)*3

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a
file with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration
Code is overwritten for copyright protection.

*1 Appears only when SIRIUS Satellite Radio or XM Satellite Radio is connected.
*2 Appears only when <Clock Adjust> is set to <Auto>.
*3 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
50

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 50

07.12.5 11:59:25 AM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Tuner

Disc

3

D. Audio Output*

Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (☞ also page 61)
PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio, or when
connecting to a recording device.
Dolby D : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital.
Stream : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.

Down Mix*3

When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT terminals.
Dolby SR : Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio by
connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby Surround.
Stereo : Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic) Range
Compres. (Compression)*3

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing
Dolby Digital software.
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded software.
On: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

Area Setting

US : When using in North/Central/South America. FM/AM intervals are
set to 200 kHz/10 kHz.
Europe : When using in any other areas. FM/AM intervals are set to 50
kHz (100 kHz during auto search)/9 kHz.
SA : When using in South American countries where FM interval is 100
kHz. AM interval is set to 10 kHz.

Sirius ID*4

Your SIRIUS identification number appears on the monitor.

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

*4 Appears only when SIRIUS Satellite Radio is connected.

51

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 51

SETTINGS
07.12.5 11:59:26 AM

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 47.

Menu items

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN terminals. ☞ [42, 43]
Off: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is skipped while
selecting the source).
Audio&Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as a
VCR.
Audio: Select when connecting an audio component such as a portable
audio player.
Camera*2 : Select when connecting a rear view camera.
Navigation : Select when connecting a Navigation System.

External Input*3

For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the
rear.
Changer/iPod*4: CD changer or iPod. ☞ [34, 40]
External: Any other than the above. ☞ [44]
• For connecting the Bluetooth adapter, this setting is not required. It is
automatically detected.

Beep

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting

Off: Cancels.
Muting1, Muting2: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Power LED Flash

Off: Cancels.
On: When the ignition is turned off, the lamp on the
flashes.

Input
Others

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AV Input*

1

button

TouchPanel Sens.

Change the sensitivity of the touch panel. As the number decreases,
sensitivity becomes higher. 1/2/3

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold
[Enter] to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. ☞ [3]

*1 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*2 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the control panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.
*3 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*4 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.

52

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 52

07.12.5 11:59:27 AM

Flat/Hard Rock/R&B/Pop/Jazz/Dance/Country/Reggae/Classic/User1/User2/User3 ☞ [45]

Sound
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Fader/Balance

Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front and rear speakers.
• Upmost—front only (F6)
• Downmost—rear only (R6)
When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the center (0).
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left and right speakers.
• Leftmost—left only (L6)
• Rightmost—right only (R6) Initial 0

Volume Adjust

Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing to
the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
–12 to +12; Initial 00
• You can make the adjustments separately for DVD and other discs.

Amplifier Gain

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Low: VOL 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speakers is less
than 50 W.)
High: VOL 00 to 50

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Equalizer

Mode*5
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Mono

Only for FM. (Off, On) ☞ [10]

DX/Local

Only for FM. (Local, DX) ☞ [11]
Only for FM. Press and hold to start SSM. ☞ [11]

SSM*6
7

Title Entry*

Only for FM/AM stations, “AV-IN,” and “EXT-IN.” ☞ [46]

Blend Hold*

Only for HD Radio broadcast. ☞ [39]

Repeat

☞ [18, 35, 41]

Random

☞ [18, 35, 41]

8

*5
*6
*7
*8

Items listed under <Mode> vary among the playback sources.
Also available for AM when an HD Radio tuner box is connected.
Unavailable for AM/FM stations when an HD Radio tuner box is connected.
Appears only when an HD Radio tuner box is connected.
53

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 53

SETTINGS
07.12.5 11:59:27 AM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 47.

ENGLISH

List

For “DISC”: Folder List and Track List (☞ page 19)
For “CD-CH”: Disc List, Folder List, and Track List (☞ page 34)
For “SAT”: Category List and Channel List (☞ page 38)
• For the other playback sources, you can display a list by pressing DISP on the monitor panel. (☞ page 9)

Bluetooth*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Dial Menu *2

Select the method to make a call. ☞ [30]

Message*

3

You can read a message from the following message histories.
Unread: Messages you have not read.
Read: Messages you have read.
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.
Sent: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Open

☞ [27]

Search

☞ [28]

Special Device

Only for “New Device.”
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which require some special procedure to
establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want to connect.
• After selecting the device, use <Open> or <Search> (☞ page 27 or 28)
for connection.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You can
connect the unit and the device by using <Connect> (☞ page 55) from
the next time.

*1 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO.” Select a device (or “New Device”) before operating the
menu.
*2 Only for the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*3 Selectable only when the source is “Bluetooth PHONE” and the connected cellular phone is compatible with Text
Message.

When operating the Bluetooth device, refer also to the instructions supplied with the device.

54

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 54

07.12.5 11:59:28 AM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ pages 27 and
28), establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the device being connected.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Delete the registered devices.

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Auto Connect *4

When the unit is turned on, the connection is established automatically
with...
Off: No Bluetooth device.
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found first.

Auto Answer *5

Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the calls
manually.
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.

Message Info *5

Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and
displaying “Receiving Message.” To read the message, ☞ page 30.
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.
01/02/03

Version *6

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

Settings

Menu items

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Bluetooth (continued)

4

* Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “New Device” is selected.
*6 If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc-victor.
co.jp/english/car/>

55

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 55

SETTINGS
SETTINGS
07.12.5 11:59:29 AM

ENGLISH

Maintenance
Moisture condensation

To keep discs clean

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.

How to handle discs

To play new discs
Center holder

When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder of
the case and lift the disc out, holding it
by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:
SingleCD—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc

Unusual shape

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)

Stick-on label

Transparent or semi-transparent on its
recording area

56

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 56

07.12.5 11:59:29 AM

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

General

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters for file/
folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

ENGLISH

More about this unit

Playing DVD-VR

Disc

• For details about DVD-VR format and Playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

General
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are
interchangeably used.
• This unit can only play back audio CD (CD-DA) files
if different type of audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV) are
recorded on the same disc.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.

File playback
Playing DivX files
• This unit can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx>, <.div>, or <.avi> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit supports the DivX files whose resolution is
720 x 576 pixels or less.
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or Dolby Digital.
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode
may not be played back correctly.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

Ejecting a disc
• If “No disc“ appears after removing a disc, insert a
disc or select another playback source.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust.

Continued on the next page

57

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 57

REFERENCES
07.12.5 11:59:30 AM

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO
format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional,
and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

ENGLISH

Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2
files recorded by JVC Everio camcorders.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Playing JPEG files

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
on the disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)

58

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 58

07.12.5 11:59:30 AM

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
p

• Connection Error: The device is registered but the
connection has failed. Use <Connect> to connect
the device again. (☞ page 28)
• Error: Try the operation again. If “Error” appears
again, check if the device supports the function you
have tried.
• Device Unfound: No available Bluetooth device is
detected by <Search>.
• Loading: The unit is updating the phone book and/
or Text Message.
• Please Wait...: The unit is preparing to use
the Bluetooth function. If the message does not
disappear, turn off and turn on the unit, then connect
the device again (or reset the unit).
• Reset 08: Check the connection between the
adapter and this unit.

Current folder (highlighted bar)
Current folder number/total folder number
Folder list
Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not
displayed for JPEG)
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
in the current folder (total number of tracks on
the disc)
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)
Track list
Current track (highlighted)

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline
JPEG), it will be displayed.

Bluetooth operations

:

Cellular phone

:

Household phone

:

Office

:

General

:

Other than above

CD changer

General

• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (☞ page 34), you will hear a
beep. Select another folder including music files.

• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

HD Radio reception
• During SSM search...
– All stations including conventional FM/AM stations
are searched and stored for the selected band.

59

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 59

ENGLISH

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations

REFERENCES
07.12.5 11:59:31 AM

ENGLISH

Satellite radio operations

Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>

• You can also connect the JVC SIRIUS radio PnP (Plug
and Play), using the JVC SIRIUS radio adapter, KSU100K (not supplied) to the CD changer jack on the
rear. (Select “EXT-IN” as the source.)
By turning on/off the power of the unit, you can turn
on/off the JVC PnP. However, you cannot control it
from this unit.
• To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or to sign
up, visit <http://www.sirius.com>.
• For the latest channel listings and programming
information, or to sign up for XM Satellite radio, visit
<http://www.xmradio.com>.

Menu settings
• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from
<High> to <Low> while the volume level is set
higher than “30,” the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio
Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the
power, and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc)
so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect
ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may
become <4:3LB> for some discs.

iPod operations
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano *1
– iPod video (5th Generation) *2
*1 When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
*2 It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu while the iPod is connected to the
interface adapter.
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the adapter connected to this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the screen. This unit
can display up to 40 characters.

60

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 60

07.12.5 11:59:32 AM

2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Through the DIGITAL OUT terminal

ENGLISH

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT)

Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted.
• To reproduce the multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set <D. Audio Output> correctly.
(☞ page 51)
Output signals

<D. Audio Output>
Playback disc
DVD

<Stream>

<Dolby D>

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital bitstream

with DTS
with MPEG Audio

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

DTS bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD, Video CD

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD with DTS

DTS bitstream

DivX/ with Dolby Digital
MPEG
with MPEG Audio

Dolby Digital bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

MP3/WMA

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

WAV

44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the
discs are not copy-protected.

61

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 61

REFERENCES
07.12.5 11:59:32 AM

ENGLISH

Preset equalizing values
Frequency
Sound mode
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User1/2/3

60 Hz

150 Hz

400 Hz

1 kHz

2.5 kHz

6.3 kHz

15 kHz

00
+03
+03
00
+03
+04
+02
+03
+02
00

00
+03
+02
+02
+02
+02
+01
00
+03
00

00
+01
+02
00
+01
00
00
00
+01
00

00
00
00
00
+01
–02
00
+01
00
00

00
00
+01
+01
+01
–01
00
+02
00
00

00
+02
+01
+01
+03
+01
+01
+02
+02
00

00
+01
+03
+02
+02
+01
+02
+03
00
00

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)
Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU

Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque

Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian

Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali

Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

62

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 62

07.12.5 11:59:33 AM

• Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan
and other countries.
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®
6) with enhanced playback of DivX® media files
and the DivX® Media Format
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
• “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo are registered
trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
• XM and its corresponding logos are registered
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
• “SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all related
marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Inc., and XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Victor Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
• iPod and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is
selected for <Language>. (☞ page 49)
Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

63

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 63

ENGLISH

Characters shown on the screen
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you
can use the following characters to assign titles.
(☞ page 46)
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>.
(☞ page 49)

REFERENCES
07.12.5 11:59:34 AM

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied with the adapters used for the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
Symptoms
• No sound comes out of the speakers.

• The screen is not clear and legible.

Disc in general

FM/AM

General

• “Position Error Push Open Key” appears on
the screen.
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on the
screen, and the panel does not move.
• “No Signal” appears.

• The buttons on the monitor panel do not
work.
• The unit does not work at all.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced through the analog
terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT).
Sunshine from the windshield may cause this symptom.
Adjust <Bright>. (☞ page 48)
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press OPEN/TILT.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected
to VIDEO IN terminal.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
When the monitor panel is open, only +/– (volume) and
OPEN/TILT work. The other buttons do not function.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Store stations manually. (☞ page 12)

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

• Disc can be neither recognized nor played
back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.

Eject the disc forcibly. (☞ page 3)

• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot be
played back.
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable discs
cannot be skipped.
• Playback does not start.

• Insert a finalized disc.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used
for recording.

Unlock the disc. (☞ page 19)

• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.

64

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 64

07.12.5 11:59:35 AM

Disc in general

• The playback picture is not clear and legible.
• Sound and pictures are sometimes
interrupted or distorted.
• No playback picture is shown and “Parking
Brake” appears on the screen, even when the
parking brake is engaged.
• No picture appears on the external monitor.

Bluetooth

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

• “Eject Error” or “Loading Error” appears on
the screen.
• “Region code error” appears on the screen
when you insert a DVD Video.
• Disc cannot be played back.

• Noise is generated.
• Tracks are not played back as you have
intended them to play.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.
• “Not Support” appears on the screen and
track skips.
• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit.

• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.

• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.

• Echo or noise occurs.

Remedies/Causes
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 48)
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
(☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
• Connect the video cord correctly.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.
Change the source by pressing SOURCE.
Region code is not correct. (☞ page 4)
• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (☞ page 4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Playback order may differ from that played back using
other players.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded.
The track is unplayable.
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected device
and search again.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select <Open> on the unit to connect
the device. (☞ page 27)
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device. If the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its
instructions, try “0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then
try to connect again. (☞ pages 28, 54)
Adjust the microphone unit position.

65

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 65

ENGLISH

Symptoms

REFERENCES
07.12.5 11:59:35 AM

Symptoms

ENGLISH

• Phone sound quality is poor.

HD Radio reception

Bluetooth

• The sound is interrupted or skipped during
playback of a Bluetooth audio player.

• “New Device” cannot be selected for
“Bluetooth AUDIO.”
• The connected audio player cannot be
controlled.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• Sound quality changes when receiving HD
Radio stations.
• No sound can be heard.

CD changer

• “Reset 8” appears on the display.
• “No Disc” appears on the screen.
• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.
• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• The CD changer does not work at all.

Remedies/Causes
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
cellular phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal
reception.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
audio player.
• Disconnect the player connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player
again.
Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “New
Device,” disconnect it. (☞ page 28)
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Fix the reception mode either to “Digital” or “Analog” (see
page 39).
• “Analog” is selected when receiving all digital broadcast
of HD Radio station. Select “Digital” or “Auto” (see page
39).
• “Digital” is selected when receiving weak digital signals
or receiving conventional radio broadcast. Select
“Analog” or “Auto” (see page 39).
Recconect this unit and the HD Radio tuner box correctly,
then reset the unit.
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Current disc does not include playable files. Replace the disc
with one including playable files.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)

66

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 66

07.12.5 11:59:36 AM

Satellite radio

• “LOADING” appears on the monitor while
listening to the XM Satellite radio.
• “Reset08” flashes on the monitor.
• Satellite radio does not work at all.
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work.

AV-IN

iPod

• Sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.
• Playback stops.
• “No Files” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• No picture appears on the screen.
• Playback picture is not clear and legible.

Remedies/Causes
Starts subscribing SIRIUS Satellite radio. (☞ page 36)
Move to an area with stronger signals.
Connect the antenna firmly.
No broadcast on the selected channel.
Select another channel or continue listening to the previous
channel.
Selected channel is no longer available or is unauthorized.
Select another channel or continue listening to the previous
channel.
No text information for the selected channel.
The receiver is updating the channel information and it
takes a few minutes to complete.
Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time. Select
another channel or continue listening to the previous
channel.
The unit is loading the channel information and audio. Text
information is temporarily unavailable.
Reconnect this unit and the Satellite radio correctly and
reset the unit.
Reconnect the Satellite radio after a few seconds.
• Check the connection.
• Charge the battery.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
Check the connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart
playback.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod. Then,
connect them again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 48)
67

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 67

ENGLISH

Symptoms
• “CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE”
appears on the monitor.
• “No Signal” or “NO SIGNAL” appears on the
monitor.
• “No Antenna” or “ANTENNA” appears on the
monitor.
• “No CH” appears on the monitor for about 5
seconds, then returns to the previous display
when listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.
• “CH–––” appears on the display for about
2 seconds, then returns to the previous
channel while listening to the XM Satellite
radio.
• “NO NAME” appears on the monitor.
• “UPDATING” appears on the monitor and no
sound can be heard.
• “OFF AIR” appears on the monitor while
listening to the XM Satellite radio.

REFERENCES
07.12.5 11:59:36 AM

ENGLISH

Specifications
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω and
≤ 1% THD+N
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Frequencies:

Audio Output Level
REAR OUT:

Level:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:

AMPLIFIER

Power Output:

Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:

DVD/CD

FM/AM TUNER

Frequency Range:

FM Tuner

Input:
Output:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
6.3 kHz, 15 kHz
±10 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
NTSC
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Antenna input
VIDEO OUT

Others:

CD changer, OE REMOTE, Reverse gear
signal, DIGITAL OUT (optical)

FM (with channel interval set to 100
kHz or 200 kHz):
FM (with channel interval set to 50
kHz):
AM (with channel interval set to 10
kHz):
AM (with channel interval set to 9 kHz):

87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

65 dB

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation:

35 dB

AM Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/35 dB

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Frequency Response:

DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:

16 Hz to 22 000 Hz

VCD/CD:

16 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

93 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

95 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

68

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 68

07.12.5 11:59:37 AM

7 inch wide liquid crystal display

Number of Pixel:

336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)

Drive Method:

TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format

Color System:

NTSC/PAL

Aspect Ratio:

16:9 (wide)

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

ENGLISH

MONITOR
GENERAL

Screen Size:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System:

Negative ground

Allowable Storage Temperature:

–10°C to +60°C (14°F to 140°F)

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Dimensions (W × H × D)
(with trim plate and sleeve
attached):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 111 mm × 160 mm
(7-3/16” × 4-3/8” × 6-5/16”)

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 117 mm × 10 mm
(7-7/16” × 4-5/8” × 7/16”)

Mass (approx.):

2.9 kg (6.4 lbs) (including trims and sleeve)

100 (3-15/16)

Required space for the monitor ejection

160 (6-5/16)

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm (inch)

90.5 (3-5/8)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.

69

EN_KW-AVX710[J].indb 69

REFERENCES
07.12.5 11:59:37 AM

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Still having trouble??
USA ONLY

Call 1-800-252-5722
http://www.jvc.com
We can help you!

EN, SP, FR
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

Rear_KW-AVX710J.indd 2

1207MNMMDWJEIN

07.11.21 3:08:53 PM

KW-ADV790/KW-AVX710
LVT1778-002A
[J]

Installation/Connection Manual
Installation/Connection Manual
Manuel d’installation/raccordement

ENGLISH

1207MNMMDWJEIN
EN, SP, FR
©2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio
dealers.

Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con
sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee
este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser
adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para
automóviles.

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant
continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce
type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous
pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

WARNINGS

ADVERTENCIAS

AVERTISSEMENTS

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations,
as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as
this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as
this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to
carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around
carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” flashes on the
monitor, and no playback picture will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake wire is
connected to the parking brake system built in the car.

• NO instale ningún receptor o tienda ningún cable en una ubicación
donde;
– Donde pueda obstruir la maniobra del volante de dirección y del
cambio de engranajes, con el consiguiente riesgo de accidentes
de tráfico.
– Donde pueda obstruir el funcionamiento de dispositivos de
seguridad tales como bolsas de aire, pues podría resultar en un
accidente fatal.
– Donde pueda obstruir la visibilidad.
• NO OPERE la unidad mientras está maniobrando el volante de
dirección, pues podría producirse un accidente de tráfico.
• El conductor no debe mirar el monitor mientras conduce. Podría
producirse un descuido, y causar un accidente.
• Si necesita operar la unidad mientras conduce, asegúrese de mirar
atentamente a su alrededor pues de lo contrario, se podría producir
un accidente de tráfico.
• Si el freno de estacionamiento no está aplicado, parpadeará “Parking
Brake” en el monitor, y no se visualizará la imagen reproducida.
– Esta advertencia aparece únicamente cuando el cable del freno de
estacionamiento se encuentra conectado al sistema del freno de
estacionamiento incorporado al automóvil.

• N’INSTALLEZ aucun appareil ni aucun câble dans un endroit où:
– où il peut gêner l’accès au volant ou au levier de vitesse car cela
peut entraîner un accident de la circulation.
– où il peut gêner la manipulation de dispositifs de sécurité tels que
les airbags car cela peut entraîner un accident fatal.
– où il peut gêner la visibilité.
• NE COMMANDEZ pas l’appareil lors de la manipulation du volant
car cela peut entraîner un accident de la circulation.
• Le conducteur ne doit pas regarder le moniteur lorsqu’il conduit. Cela
peut lui faire perdre sa concentration et causer un accident.
• Si vous souhaitez opérer l’appareil pendant que vous conduisez,
assurez-vous de bien regarder autour de vous afin de ne pas causer
un accident de la circulation.
• Si le frein de stationnement n’est pas engagé, “Parking Brake” clignote
sur le moniteur et aucune image de lecture n’apparaît.
– Cet avertissement apparaît uniquement quand le fil du frein de
stationnement est connecté au système de frein de stationnement
intégré à la voiture.

Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amplifier Gain”
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 53 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.

Notas sobre las conexiones eléctricas:
• Reemplace el fusible por otro del régimen especificado. Si el fusible
se funde frecuentemente, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de
equipos de audio para automóviles.
• Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima de
más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia de 4
Ω a 8 Ω).
Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie “Amplifier
Gain” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 53 de
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los terminales de los cables NO
UTILIZADOS con cinta aislante.
• La unidad estará muy caliente después del uso. Tenga la precaución
de no quemarse al efectuar su desmontaje.

Remarques sur les connexions électriques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute
souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance
de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant,
avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance
maximum est inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amplifier Gain” pour
éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 53 du MANUAL
D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont
PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire
attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.

Heat sink
Sumidero térmico
Dissipateur de chaleur

Parts list for installation and connection

Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement

The following parts are provided for this unit.
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.

Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas.
Si hay algún elemento faltante, póngase inmediatamente en contacto
con su concesionario.

Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose
manquait, contactez votre revendeur immédiatement.

*1 Fitted to the main unit when shipped

*1 Fijado a la unidad principal cuando se expide de fábrica

*1 Fixé à l’appareil lors de l’expédition.

Sleeve*1
Cubierta*1
Manchon*1

Main unit
Unidad principal
Appareil principal

Remote controller
Control remoto
Télécommade

Batteries
Pilas
Piles

Power cord
Cable de alimentación
Cordon d’alimentation

Crimp connector
Conectores a presión
Raccord à sertir

Brackets*1
Ménsulas*1
Supports*1

Trim plate
Placa de guarnición
Plaque d’assemblage

Flat head screws*1
(M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8”)
Tornillos de cabeza plana*1
(M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête plate*1
(M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8 pouces)

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8”)
Tornillos de cabeza plana
(M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8 pouces)

Round head screws*1
(M2.6 x 3 mm/M2.6 x 1/8”)
Tornillos de cabeza esférica*1
(M2.6 x 3 mm/M2.6 x 1/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête ronde*1
(M2.6 x 3 mm/M2.6 x 1/8 pouces)

Round head screws (M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8”)
Tornillos de cabeza esférica
(M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête ronde (M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8 pouces)
Use these screws when installing the unit without the supplied sleeve.
Utilice estos tornillos cuando instale la unidad sin la funda suministrada.
Utilisez ces vis lors de l’installation de l’appareil sans le manchon fourni.

1

AVX710J_install.indb 1

07.12.5 10:13:09 AM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you
should make adjustments corresponding to your specific car. If you
have any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed
by a qualified technician.

Before installing the unit
• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as
instructed. If other screws are used, parts could become loose or
damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any
connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper
ventilation when installing the unit.

INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL TABLERO DE
INSTRUMENTOS)

INSTALLATION (MONTAGEDANS LE TABLEAU DE
BORD)

La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Sin embargo
usted deberá efectuar los ajustes correspondientes a su automóvil.
Si tiene alguna pregunta o necesita información acerca de las
herramientas para instalación, consulte con su concesionario de
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles o a una compañía que
suministra tales herramientas.
• Si no está seguro de poder instalar la unidad correctamente, déjela
en manos de un técnico cualificado.

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique.
Cependant, vous devez faire les ajustements correspondant à votre
voiture. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des
kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une
compagnie d’approvisionnement.
• Si vous n’êtes pas sûr de pouvoir installer l’appareil correctement,
faite-le installer par un technicien qualifié.

Antes de instalar la unidad

Avant d’installer l’appareil

• Al instalar la unidad, asegúrese de usar los tornillos suministrados,
de acuerdo con las instrucciones. Si emplea otros tipos de tornillos,
corre el riesgo de que las piezas se aflojen o se dañen.
• Al apretar los tornillos o los pernos, asegúrese de que ningún cable
de conexión quede pillado.
• Al efectuar la instalación, asegúrese de no bloquear el ventilador del
panel trasero a fin de mantener una ventilación correcta.

• Lors du montage de l’appareil, assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis fournies,
de la façon indiquée. Si vous utilisez d’autres vis, certaines pièces
peuvent être perdues ou endommagées.
• Lorsque vous serrez des vis ou des boulons, faites attention de ne pas
pincer un cordon de connexion.
• Assurez-vous de ne pas bloquer le ventilateur sur le panneau arrière
lors de l’installation afin de permettre une ventilation correcte.

1

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together
with its mounting brackets.
• Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from your car
for future use.

1

Desmonte el sistema de audio instalado originalmente en el
coche, junto con los ménsulas de montaje.
• Asegúrese de guardar todos los tornillos y piezas quitados de
su vehículo para poderlos usar en el futuro.

1

Retirez le système audio d’origine installé dans la voiture en même
temps que les supports de montage.
• Assurez-vous de conserver toutes les vis et pièces détachées de
votre voiture pour une utilisation dans le future.

2
3

Install thesleeve in the dashboard of the car.

2
3

Instale la cubierta en el cubretablero del automóvil.

2
3

Installez le manchon dans le tableau de bord de la voiture.

4
5
6

Attach the brackets to the main unit.
• make sure to use the supplied flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm/M5
x 3/8”). If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 and 4.

Attachez les supports à l’appareil principal.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis à tête plate fournis —(M5 x 8
mm/M5 x 3/8 pouces). Vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil si
vous utilisez des vis plus longues.

4

Realice todas las conexiones eléctricas necesarias.
• Consulte las páginas 3 y 4.

4

Réalisez les connexions électriques requises.
• Référez-vous aux pages 3 et 4.

5
6

Coloque la unidad principal en la cubierta.

5
6

Installez l’appareil principal dans le manchon.

Install the main unit in the sleeve.
Attach the trim plate.

Fije los ménsulas a la unidad principal.
• Certifique-se de que utiliza parafusos de cabeça chata (M5 x 8
mm/M5 x 3/8 pulgada). Parafusos maiores podem danificar a
unidade.

Fije la placa de guarnición.

1

Fixez la plaque d’assemblage.

4

2

5

Sleeve
Cubierta
Manchon

Round head screws (M2.6 x 3 mm/M2.6 x 1/8”)
Tornillos de cabeza esférica (M2.6 x 3 mm/M2.6 x
1/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête ronde (M2.6 x 3 mm/M2.6 x 1/8 pouces)
Brackets
Ménsulas
Supports

3

Flat head screws
(M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8”)
Tornillos de cabeza plana
(M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8 pulgada)
Vis à tête plate
(M5 x 8 mm/M5 x 3/8 pouces)

6
Trim plate
Placa de guarnición
Plaque d’assemblage

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject when in use.
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30°, teniendo en cuenta que el monitor debe extraerse para su
uso (véase a la izquierda).
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30°, en tenant compte du fait que le moniteur doit être déployé
lors de son utilisation (voir ci-à gauche).

100 (3-15/16)

Required space for the monitor ejection
Espacio requerido para la expulsión del monitor
Espace requis pour le déploiement du moniteur

160 (6-5/16)

90.5 (3-5/8)

30˚
Unit: mm (inch)
Unidad: mm (pulgada)
Unité: mm (pouces)
2

AVX710J_install.indb 2

07.12.5 10:13:18 AM

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.

Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal
negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas
antes de instalar la unidad.
• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis
del automóvil después de la instalación.

Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher
la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements
électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de
cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.

PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la fuente de
alimentación y de los altavoces:
• NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de
alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían
producirse graves daños en las unidades.
• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su
automóvil.

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon
d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait
sérieusement endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation
aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.

Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del
vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en
la unidad. Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector
procedentes de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes
en color.

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le
câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager
sérieusement l’appareil. Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des
connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car
body may be different in color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified

1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.

1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el

in the illustration below.

orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.

2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

2 Conecte el cable de antena.
3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.

2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

Rear ground terminal/Terminal de tierra posterior/Borne arrière de masse

Fan
Ventilador
Ventilateur
See each diagram on pages 4-6.
Vea cada uno de los diagramas en las páginas 4-6.
Référez-vous à chaque diagramme des pages 4-6.

*1 Not included for this unit
*1 No suministrado con esta unidad
*1 Non fourni avec cet appareil

3
Black
Negro
Noir

15 A fuse
Fusible de 15 A
Fusible 15 A

To metallic body or chassis of the car
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

Yellow *2
2

Red
Rojo
Rouge

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible

Blue
Azul
Bleu
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
power cannot be turned on.

Blue with white stripe
Azul con rayas blancas
Bleu avec bande blanche
Orange with white stripe
Naranja con rayas blancas
Orange avec bande blanche

2

* Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil
avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon
l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.

Fuse block
Bloque de fusibles
Porte-fusible

To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
A la antena automática, si hubiere (250 mA máx.)
À l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une (250 mA max.)

2

* Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta
unidad previa a de la instalación, es necesario
conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se podrá
conectar la alimentación.

*1

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del
automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)

Amarillo *2

Jaune *

*1

Ignition switch
Interruptor de encendido
Interrupteur d’allumage

Brown
Marrón
Marron

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Al conductor remoto del otro equipo (200 mA máx.)
Au fil de télécommande d’un autre appareil (200 mA max.)
To car light control switch
Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
To cellular phone system
Al sistema de teléfono celular
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
To parking brake (see diagram Å on page 4.)
Al freno de estacionamiento (véase diagrama Å de la página 4.)
Au frein de stationnement (voir le diagramme Å de la page 4.)

Light green
Verde claro
Vert clair

Crimp connector
Conectore a presión
Raccord à sertir

White with black stripe
Blanco con rayas negras
Blanc avec bande noire

White
Blanco
Blanc

Gray with black stripe
Gris con rayas negras
Gris avec bande noire

Left speaker (front)
Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)
Enceinte gauche (avant)

Gray
Gris
Gris

Green with black stripe
Verde con rayas negras
Vert avec bande noire

Right speaker (front)
Altavoz derecho (frontal)
Enceinte droit (avant)

Green Purple with black stripe
Verde Púrpura con rayas negras
Vert Violet avec bande noire

Left speaker (rear)
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)

Purple
Púrpura
Violet
Right speaker (rear)
Altavoz derecho (trasero)
Enceinte droit (arrière)

3

AVX710J_install.indb 3

07.12.5 10:13:21 AM

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

A Connecting the parking brake lead
Connect the parking brake lead to the parking brake system
built in the car.

FRANÇAIS

Conexión del cable del freno de
estacionamiento

Connexion du fil de frein de stationnement

Conecte el cable del freno de estacionamiento al sistema del freno de
estacionamiento instalado en el coche.

Connectez le fil de frein de stationnement au système de frein de
stationnement intégré à la voiture.

a
Parking brake lead (light green)
Cable del freno de estacionamiento (verde claro)
Fil du frein de stationnement (vert clair)

Crimp connector
Conectore a presión
Raccord à sertir

Parking brake
Freno de estacionamiento
Frein de stationnement

To metallic body or chassis of the car
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Interruptor del freno de estacionamiento
(dentro del automóvil)
Commutateur de frein de stationnement
(intérieur de la voiture)

A Connecting an external amplifier / Conexión de un amplificador externo / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• You can supply the power to the amplifier by connecting the
remote leads (blue with white stripe) of this unit to the amplifier.
(To connect other equipment using the remote leads, Yconnectors need to be separately purchased.)
• Disconnect the speakers from the unit, and connect them to the
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of the unit unused.
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio
signals only to the external amplifier to get clear sound and to
prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page 53 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.

Puede conectar un amplificador para mejorar su sistema car estéreo.
• Puede suministrar alimentación al amplificador conectando los
conductores remotos (azul con rayas blancas) de esta unidad al
amplificador. (Para conectar otro equipo usando los conductores
remotos, se deben adquirir separadamente conectores en Y).
• Desconecte los altavoces de la unidad principal y conéctelos al
amplificador. Los conductores de los altavoces de la unidad quedan
sin usar.
• Puede desconectar el amplificador incorporado y enviar las señales
de audio sólo al(los) amplificador(es) externo(s) para obtener
sonidos nítidos y evitar la generación de calor dentro de la unidad.
Consulte la página 53 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Cable remoto (azul con rayas blancas)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)

Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système
stéréo.
• Vous pouvez alimenter l’amplificateur en connectant les fils
de télécommande (bleu à bande blanche( de cet appareil à
l’amplificateur. (Pour connecter un autre appareil en utilisant
les fils de télécommande, vous devez acheter des connecteurs Y
séparément.)
• Déconnectez les enceintes de l’appareil principal et connectez-les
aux amplificateurs. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de l’appareil inutilisés.
• Vous pouvez mettre hors service l’amplificateur intégré et envoyer
les signaux audio uniquement vers un ou plusieurs amplificateurs
extérieurs pour obtenir des sons plus clairs et éviter un échauffement
interne de l’appareil. Référez-vous à la page 53 du MANUEL
D’INSTRUCTIONS.

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Remote lead
Cable remoto
Fil d’alimentation à distance

JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur

To the remote lead of other equipment
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil
Rear speakers
Altavoces traseros
Enceintes arrière

Front speakers
Altavoces delanteros
Enceintes avant

*3 Firmly attach the ground lead to the metallic body or to the
chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated
with paint, remove the paint before attaching the lead). Failure to
do so may cause damage to the unit.

*3 Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a un cuerpo metálico o chasis del
automóvil—a un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto
con pintura, quítela antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se
podrían producir daños en la unidad.

*3 Firmly attach the ground lead to the metallic body or to the chassis
of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint,
remove the paint before attaching the lead). Failure to do so may
cause damage to the unit.

B Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Conexión al control remoto del volante de dirección / Connexion d’un amplificateur
extérieur
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,
you can operate this unit using the controller. For connection, an
exclusive remote adapter (not supplied) which matches your car is
required. For details, consult the same car audio dealer as where the
unit is purchased.

Si su vehículo está equipado con control remoto en el volante de
dirección, podrá hacer funcionar este receptor utilizando dicho
control. Para la conexión, se requiere un adaptador remoto exclusivo
(no suministrado) que sea adecuado para su automóvil. Para los
detalles, consulte con el concesionario car audio donde compró el
receptor.

OE REMOTE
Steering wheel remote
Entrada remota del volante de dirección
Télécommande de volant

Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous
pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant la télécommande.
Pour la connexion, un adaptateur de télécommande exclusif (non
fourni) correspondant à votre voiture est requis. Pour en savoir plus,
consultez le revendeur autoradio auprès duquel vous avez acheté cet
autoradio.
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Control remoto del volante de dirección (equipado en el vehículo)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)

KW-ADV790
KW-AVX710

OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Adaptador para control remoto OE (no suministrado)
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)

4

AVX710J_install.indb 4

07.12.5 10:13:25 AM

C Connections for external component playback / Conexiones para la reproducción del componente externo / Connexions pour un appareil de
lecture extérieur

Reverse lamp
Luces de marcha atrás
Feux de recul

Extension lead (not supplied)
Cable prolongador (no suministrado)
Cordon prolongateur (non fourni)

AV amplifier or decoder
Amplificador o decodificador AV
Amplificateur AV ou décodeur

Crimp connector (not supplied)*5
Conector de sujeción (no suministrado)*5
Raccord à sertir (non fourni)*5
To reverse lamp
A la luz de marcha atrás
Aux feux de recul

To car battery
A la batería del automóvil
À la batterie de la voiture
Reverse lamp lead*4
Conductor de la luz de marcha atrás*4
Fil des feux de recul*4

Digital optical cable (not supplied)
Cable óptico digital (no suministrado)
Câble optique numérique (non fourni)

Video cord (not supplied)
Cable de video (no suministrados)
Cordon vidéo (non fourni)

Audio/video cord (not supplied)
Cable de audio/vídeo (no suministrados)
Cordon audio/vidéo (non fourni)
External monitor
Monitor externo
Moniteur extérieur

Camcorder, Navigation System, etc.
Videocámara, sistema de
navegación, etc.
Caméscope, système de navigation,
etc.

Rear view camera KV-CM1*6
Cámara de reprovisión KV-CM1*6
Caméra de recul KV-CM1*6

*4 Required only when connecting a rear view camera to
VIDEO IN terminal.
*5 Refer to å in diagram Å on page 4.
*6 Set “AV Input” setting to “Camera” when using (see page 52 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).

*4 Se requiere solamente cuando se conecta una cámara de
retrovisión al terminal VIDEO IN.
*5 Consulte å en el diagrama Å de la página 4.
*6 Para usar, ajuste “AV Input” a “Camera” (véase la página 52 del
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).

*4 Requis uniquement lors de la connexion d’une caméra de recul à
la prise VIDEO IN.
*5 Reportez vous à å du diagramme Å de la page 4.
*6 Réglez “AV Input” sur “Camera” lors de l’utilisation (voir page 52
du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

5

AVX710J_install.indb 5

07.12.5 10:13:27 AM

D Connections to the CD changer jack / Conexión al jack del cambiador de CD / Connexions à la prise du changeur de CD
When connecting the external components, refer also to the
manuals supplied for the components and adapter.

Cuando conecte componentes externos, consulte, también, los
manuales suministrados con los componentes y el adaptador.

Lors de la connexion des appareils extérieurs, référez-vous aussi aux
manuels fournis avec les appareils et les adaptateurs.

CAUTION:

PRECAUCIÓN:

PRECAUTION:

Before connecting the external components, make sure that
the unit is turned off.

Antes de conectar los componentes externos, asegúrese de que
la unidad esté apagada.

Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs, assurez-vous que
l’appareil est hors tension.

You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer
jack.

Puede conectar los siguientes componentes JVC al jack del
cambiador de CD.

Vous pouvez connecter les appareils JVC suivants à la prise de
changeur de CD.

JVC component

Model name

Componente JVC

Nombre del modelo

Appareil JVC

Nom du modèle

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

Cambiador de CD (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

Changeur de CD (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

HD Radio™ tuner box

KT-HD300

Sintonizador HD Radio™

KT-HD300

Tuner HD Radio™

KT-HD300

You can also connect the following components through the various También puede conectar los siguientes componentes mediante los
JVC adapters.
diversos adaptadores JVC.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
• Puede ser necesario comprar los cables de conexión por separado.
Component
Bluetooth device
iPod

Adapter
Bluetooth adapter
Interface adapter
for iPod
XMDirect™ Universal Tuner Smart Digital
Box
Adapter
SIRIUS satellite radio
SIRIUS satellite
radio interface
JVC SIRIUS PnP
SIRIUS radio
adapter
Portable audio player with Line input adapter
line output jacks
Portable audio player with AUX input adapter
3.5 mm stereo mini jack

Model name
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100

Componente

Adaptador

Dispositivo Bluetooth

XMDJVC100

iPod

KS-SRA100
KS-U100K

Sintonizador universal
XMDirecto™
Radio por satélite SIRIUS

KS-U57

SIRIUS PnP de JVC

KS-U58

Reproductor de audio
portátil con jacks de salida
de línea
Reproductor de audio
portátil con jack mini
estéreo de 3.5 mm

Adaptador
Bluetooth
Adaptador de
interfaz para iPod
Adaptador digital
inteligente
Interfaz para radio
por satélite SIRIUS
Adaptador para
radio SIRIUS
Adaptador de
entrada por línea

When connecting more than one component (maximum: three),
it is recommended that you connect the components in series as
explained below.
• XM Radio and SIRIUS satellite radio cannot be used together.

Adaptador de
entrada AUX

Nombre del
modelo
KS-BTA200

Adaptateur

Périphérique Bluetooth

Adaptateur
Bluetooth
Adaptateur
d’interface pour iPod
Adaptateur
numérique intelligent
Interface pour radio
satellite SIRIUS
Adaptateur radio
SIRIUS
Adaptateur d’entrée
de ligne
Adaptateur d’entrée
auxiliaire

iPod
XMDJVC100
Tuner universel XMDirect™
KS-SRA100
Radio satellite SIRIUS
KS-U100K
JVC SIRIUS PnP
KS-U57

KS-U58

Lecteur audio portable avec
prises de sortie de ligne
Lecteur audio portable avec
mini fiche stéréo de 3.5 mm

Nom du
modèle
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
XMDJVC100
KS-SRA100
KS-U100K
KS-U57
KS-U58

Lors de la connexion de plus d’un appareil (maximum: trois), il est
recommandé que vous connectiez les appareils en série comme nous
l’expliquons ci-dessous.
• La radio XM et SIRIUS ne peuvent pas être utilisées en même
temps.

When connecting three components in series / Cuando conecta tres componentes en serie /
Lors de la connexion de trois appareils en série

KW-ADV790
KW-AVX710

*7

CD changer jack / Jack para el cambiador de CD / Prise du changeur de CD
A KT-HD300*8 / KS-SRA100*8 / KS-BTA200 / XMDJVC100
B*7 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58 / KS-U100K
To disconnect the connector / Para desconectar el conector / Pour déconnecter le
connecteur
Hold the connector top tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).
Sujete firmemente la parte superior del conector ( 1 ) y
seguidamente, extráigalo ( 2 ).
Tenez fermement le connecteur par-dessus ( 1 ) et tirez vers
l’extérieur ( 2 ).
HD Radio™ is a proprietary trademark of iBiquity Digital Corp.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.

Appareil

KS-PD100

Cuando conecte más de un componente (máximo: tres), se
recomienda que conecte los componentes en serie, como se explica
a continuación.
• No puede utilizar juntas la radio XM y la radio satelital SIRIUS.

When connecting two components in series
Cuando conecta dos componentes en serie
Lors de la connexion de deux appareils en série

Vous pouvez aussi connecter les appareils suivants en utilisant divers
adaptateurs JVC.
• Vous pouvez avoir besoin d’acheter certains cordons de connexion
séparément.

KW-ADV790
KW-AVX710

*7

CD changer jack / Jack para el cambiador de CD/ Prise du
changeur de CD

A KT-HD300*8 / KS-SRA100*8 / XMDJVC100
B KS-BTA200
C*7 KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58 / KS-U100K

It is not recommended to connect KS-U57/KS-U58/KS-U100K at C in series with XMDJVC100/KS-BTA200.
No se recomienda conectar el KS-U57/KS-U58/KS-U100K en C en serie con XMDJVC100 y KS-BTA200.
Il n’est pas recommandé de connecter le KS-U57/KS-U58/KS-U100K en série à C in avec le XMDJVC100 et le
KS-BTA200.
KW-ADV790
KW-AVX710

HD Radio™ es una marca comercial de iBiquity Digital Corp.
iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Inc., registrada en los EE.UU.
y otros países.

*7 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly *7 Para utilizar estos componentes, configure el ajuste de entrada
(see page 52 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
externa correctamente (consulte la página 52 del MANUAL DE
*8 Power cannot be supplied to the component through the CD
INSTRUCCIONES).
*8 No puede suministrar energía eléctrica al componente a través
changer jack. You need to connect the power cord supplied for
the component separately.
del jack del cambiador de CD. Es necesario conectar, aparte, el
cable de alimentación suministrado con el componente.

HD Radio™ est une marque de commerce d’iBiquity Digital Corp.
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Inc., enregistrée aux
États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
*7 Pour utiliser ces appareils, réglez l’entrée extérieure correctement
(voir page 52 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
*8 L’alimentation ne peut pas être fournie à l’appareil par la prise
de changeur de CD. Vous devez connecter séparément le cordon
d’alimentation fourni pour l’appareil.

TROUBLESHOOTING

LOCALIZACIÓN DE AVERIAS

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• El fusible se quema.
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?

• Le fusible saute.
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

• No es posible conectar la alimentación.
* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• No sale sonido de los altavoces.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?

• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?

• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• El sonido presenta distorsión.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?

• Le son est déformé.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises
ensemble à la masse?

• Perturbación de ruido.
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?

• Interférence avec les sons.
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la
voiture avec un cordon court et épais?

• La unidad se calienta.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?

• L’appareil devient chaud.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises
ensemble à la masse?

• Este receptor no funciona en absoluto.
* ¿Reinicializó el receptor?

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
• Unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

6

AVX710J_install.indb 6

07.12.5 10:13:29 AM

ENGLISH
DEUTSCH

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR
DVD-RECEIVER MIT MONITOR
RÉCEPTEUR DVD ET MONITEUR
DVD-RECEIVER MET MONITOR

NEDERLANDS

FRANÇAIS

KW-AVX710

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 8.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8.
Zie bladzijde 8 voor het annuleren van de displaydemonstratie.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
Bijzonderheden over de installatie en aansluiting van het apparaat vindt u in de desbetreffende handleiding.

INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

LVT1779-001A
[E]

Cover_KW-AVX710[E]f.indd 2

07.12.7 2:33:37 PM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1.
2.
3.
4.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

WARNINGS:
To prevent accidents and damage

This symbol is only valid in
the European Union.

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and
gearshift lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

Information for Users on Disposal of Old
Equipment
This symbol indicates that the product with
this symbol should not be disposed as general
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance
with applicable national legislation or other rules in
your country and municipality. By disposing of this
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural
resources and will help prevent potential negative
effects on the environment and human health.

Cautions on the monitor:
• The monitor built in this unit has been produced
with high precision, but it may have some
ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not
malfunction.
• Do not expose the monitor to direct sunlight.
• Do not operate the touch panel using a ball-point
pen or similar tool with the sharp tip.
Touch the buttons on the touch panel with your
finger directly (if you are wearing a glove, take it
off).

• When the temperature is very cold or very hot...
– Chemical changes occur inside, causing
malfunction.
– Pictures may not appear clearly or may move
slowly. Pictures may not be synchronized with
the sound or picture quality may decline in such
environments.

2

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 2

07.12.7 10:44:01 AM

How to reset your unit

INTRODUCTION
Playable disc types .......................... 4
Basic operations—
Monitor panel/touch panel............ 5
Basic operations—
Remote controller (RM-RK252) ...... 6

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc
ENTER

NO EJECT?
EMERGENCY EJECT?

3

OPERATIONS
Before operating the unit ................ 8
Common operations ........................ 9
Listening to the radio ...................... 10
Disc operations ................................ 16

Exit

Back

2
1

at the same time

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Bluetooth® operations—
Cellular phone/audio player .......... 30
Listening to the CD changer .............. 37
Listening to the DAB tuner ............... 39
Listening to the iPod........................ 43
Using other external components ..... 45

1

• If this does not work, reset the unit.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

SETTINGS
Sound equalization .......................... 48
Assigning titles to the sources .......... 49
Menu operations ............................. 50

For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.

REFERENCES
Maintenance ................................... 60
More about this unit ........................ 61
Troubleshooting .............................. 68
Specifications .................................. 72

3

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 3

ENGLISH

Contents

INTRODUCTION
07.12.7 10:44:05 AM

ENGLISH

Playable disc types
Disc type

Recording format, file type, etc.

DVD

DVD Video (Region Code: 2)*1

Playable

DVD Audio
DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
DVD Video
(DVD-R/-RW*2, +R/+RW*3)
DVD-VR
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
• DVD-VR
JPEG
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/
MP3/WMA/WAV
WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level 1,
AAC
level 2, Romeo, Joliet
MPEG4
DVD+VR
DVD-RAM
Dual Disc
DVD side
Non-DVD side
CD/VCD
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)/DTS-CD
VCD (Video CD)
SVCD (Super Video CD)
CD-ROM
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
MP3/WMA/WAV
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo, JPEG
Joliet
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
AAC
MPEG4
*1 If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).
DVD-RW dual layer discs are not playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs.
+RW double layer discs are not playable.
Caution for DualDisc playback
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
4

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 4

07.12.7 10:44:06 AM

Display <AV Menu> screen. ☞ page 50
Display <Source Menu> screen. ☞ page 9
Display and erase the Short Cut windows.
Available functions vary among the sources. For details, see each source operation
section.

Adjust the volume.
Change the display information.
Change the sources. ☞ page 9
• Activate/deactivate TA
Standby Reception.
• Display <PTy Search> menu.
[Hold]
☞ page 12

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Monitor panel/touch panel

Remote sensor

• Display <Open/Tilt> menu.
• Eject the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
menu. [Hold]
• Close the monitor panel when <Open/Tilt>
menu is displayed.

• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power. [Hold]
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

<Open/Tilt> menu

Reset the unit.
• Use only when the internal system malfunctions.
•
•
•
•
•
•

• In the explanation, buttons on the touch panel
are indicated inside [ ].
• For details on the touch panel operations, see
each source operation section.
5

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 5

[OPEN]: Open the monitor panel.
[EJECT]: Eject the disc.
[CLOSE]: Close the monitor panel.
[TILT +/–]: Tilt the monitor panel.
[Exit]: Erase this screen.
Shaded icons cannot be used.

INTRODUCTION
07.12.7 10:44:07 AM

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Remote controller (RM-RK252)
Installing the battery

Main elements and features
R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace both batteries.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel
remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate
volume) for connection.

1

• Turns on the power.
• Attenuates the sound if the power is on.
• Turns off the power if pressed and held (while
the power is on).

2

• Reverse search
• Reverse slow motion (during pause)

3

Adjusts the volume level.
• Does not function as “2nd VOL.”

4

• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

5

• DVD/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.

6

Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “ .“

6

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 6

07.12.7 10:44:07 AM

Functions with other buttons (see i and o).

8

Changes the display information.

9

For disc operations:
• 5 / ∞:
DVD: Selects the title.
DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
Other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders.
• 4 / ¢:
– Press briefly: reverse skip/forward skip
– Press and hold: reverse search/forward
search
For FM/AM operations:
• 5 / ∞: Selects the preset stations.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for stations.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For DAB tuner operations:
• 5 / ∞: Select the services.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for
ensembles.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For Apple iPod operations:
• ∞: Starts playback/pauses
• 5: Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞
/ 4 / ¢ work as menu selecting
buttons).
In the main menu:
• 5: Returns to the previous menu.
• ∞: Confirms the selection.
• 4/¢
– Press briefly: Selects an item.
– Press and hold: Skips ten items at a time.
For Bluetooth operations:
• 4 / ¢: reverse skip/forward skip (for
audio player operation)

• Forward search
• Forward slow motion (during pause)

q

Selects the source.

w

For disc operations:
Starts playback/pauses.
For Bluetooth operations:
• Answers incoming calls.
• Starts playback/pauses. (for audio player
operation).

e

Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.

r

“TUNER”/”DAB”: Selects the bands.
“DISC”: Stops playback.
“Bluetooth PHONE”: Ends the call.
“Bluetooth AUDIO”: Starts playback/pauses.

t

VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

y

• DVD Video/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.

u

• Makes selection/settings.
• @ / #: Skips back or forward by five minutes
for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2.
• % / fi: Changes discs for “CD-CH.”

i*3 • Switches number entry mode for “DISC.”
• Erases the misentry after entering a wrong
number.
• Does not function as “SURROUND.”
o*3 Number buttons
• Enters numbers.
• “TUNER”/”DAB”: Selects the preset station/
service directly.
*1 Functions as a number button only (see o ).
*2 Not used for this unit.
*3 Functions when pressed with SHIFT.

7

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 7

p

ENGLISH

7

INTRODUCTION
07.12.7 10:44:08 AM

ENGLISH

Before operating the unit
@

You can cancel the demonstration on the screen and set
the clock.
• Non-available items will be shaded on the AV Menu
screens.

Set the clock settings.
Moves to the preceding menu page

Indication language:
In this manual, English indications are used
for purpose of explanation. You can select the
indication language. (☞ page 52)
Moves to the succeeding menu page

~

Turn on the power.

Ÿ

Display <AV Menu> screen.

!

Display <Setup> menu.

¤
⁄

Finish the procedure.

Cancel the demonstration.
Select <Off>.

Return to the previous screen.

8

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 8

07.12.7 10:44:09 AM

Selecting the playback source

ENGLISH

Common operations
Changing the display
information

• Available sources depend on the external
components you have connected, media you have
attached, and the <Input> settings you have made
(☞ page 55).

• Available display information varies among the
playback sources.

On the monitor panel only:

On the touch panel:

• Each time you press DISP, the display changes to
show the various information.
Ex. When the playback source is a DivX disc.
Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen
Exit

On the monitor panel:
Track list

Clock time in large numbers

TUNER = DAB = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD) =CD-CH,
iPod, or EXT-IN = Bluetooth PHONE =
Bluetooth AUDIO = AV-IN = (back to the
beginning)

Navigation screen
(When <Navigation> is
selected for <AV Input>)
(☞ page 55)

• You cannot select these sources if they are not ready.
Back to the beginning

9

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 9

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:09 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset no.

PS (station name) for FM RDS. If no PS signal is coming in, the
tuned frequency appears.

Band

PTY code for FM RDS

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
☞ page 12
Tuner/Standby Reception
indicators

☞ page 9

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ
!

Press [BAND].

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In
the explanation,
they are
indicated inside
[ ].

Press [4] or [¢] to search for a station—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.
• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

3

When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
1

Press [AV MENU].

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• The MONO indicator lights up.
To restore stereo effect, select <Off>.

2

Press [Mode].

10

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 10

07.12.7 10:44:10 AM

Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number
4 of the FM1 band.

This function works only for FM bands. Once you have
activated this function (selected <Local>), it always
works when searching for FM stations.

1
2
3

1

Display the Preset List.

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

3

Select a preset number.

ENGLISH

Tuning in to stations with
sufficient signal strength

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be
detected.
• The DX indicator goes off, then the LO indicator
lights up.

FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)
This function works only for FM bands.
You can preset six stations for each band.

1
2
3

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

The station selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 4.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

11

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 11

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:10 AM

ENGLISH

Selecting a preset station

The following features are available only for FM RDS
stations.

On the remote:

1

Searching for FM RDS
programme—PTY Search

2

You can search for your favorite programmes being
broadcast by selecting the PTY code for your favorite
programmes.

or
Hold

1

Display <PTy Search> menu.

On the unit:
• To select directly on the touch panel

• To select from the Preset List
You can also easily access <PTy Search> menu
by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel,
then...

1

☞ page 48
☞ page 14

2

12

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 12

07.12.7 10:44:11 AM

Storing your favorite programme types

Select a PTY code.
• In the example below, a PTY code is selected
from the Preset List.
If you enter <PTy Code> menu below, you can
select one from 29 PTY codes.

You can store your favorite PTY codes into the PTY
Preset List.
Ex.: Storing <Drama> into <Preset 1>

ENGLISH

2

PTY Search starts.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.

Available PTY codes:
News, Current Affairs, Information, Sport,
Education, Drama, Cultures, Science, Varied Speech,
Pop Music, Rock Music, Easy Listening, Light Classics
M, Serious Classics, Other Music, Weather & Metr,
Finance, Children’s Progs, Social Affairs, Religion,
Phone In, Travel & Touring, Leisure & Hobby, Jazz
Music, Country Music, National Music, Oldies Music,
Folk Music, Documentary

13

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 13

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:12 AM

ENGLISH

To activate PTY Standby Reception

Activating/deactivating TA/PTY
Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception

Indicator

Press
activate.

TP

on the monitor panel to

1
2
3

The unit will temporarily switch to
Lights up
Traffic Announcement (TA) if available,
from any source other than AM.
• The volume changes to the preset
TA volume level if the current level is
lower than the preset level (☞ page
54).
Not yet activated. Tune in to another
station providing the RDS signals.

Flashes

Press

Goes off

to deactivate.

PTY Standby Reception
To activate, display <AV Menu>
screen, press [Mode], then press
[On] for <PTy Standby>. (☞ next
column)

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

PTY Standby Reception is now activated for PTY
code <News>: the initial setting.

You can easily activate or deactivate the PTY
Standby Reception by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...

Indicator

☞ page 48
☞ page 12

PTY

The unit will temporarily switch to
Lights up
your favorite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
Not yet activated. Tune in to another
station providing the RDS signals.

Flashes

To deactivate, press [Off] for <PTy
Standby> in step 3 on the next
column.

Goes off

• When a DAB tuner is connected, TA Standby/PTY
Standby Reception also works for the DAB tuner and
searches for the services.

14

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 14

07.12.7 10:44:12 AM

Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception

1
2
3

When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly
broadcasting the same programme with stronger
signals.

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

ENGLISH

To change the PTY code for PTY Standby
Reception

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency
areas (01 – 05)
A

4

Select your favorite PTY code.
Ex.: Selecting <Easy Listening>

When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking
Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see <AF Regional>. (☞ page 54)
• When the DAB tuner is connected, refer also to
“Tracing the same programme—Alternative
Frequency Reception (DAB AF).” (☞ page 42)

Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you select preset stations, the preset
station is tuned in.
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF
data, tunes in to another station broadcasting the
same programme as the original preset station is
broadcasting. To activate this function, select <On> for
<Program Search>.(☞ page 54)
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.

15

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 15

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:13 AM

ENGLISH

Disc operations
The disc type is automatically detected, and playback starts automatically (for some discs: automatic start depends
on its internal program).
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks on it will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject
the disc.
If “ ” appears on the screen, the unit cannot accept the operation you have tried to do.
• In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted.

~

!

Open the monitor panel.

Insert a disc.

Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Ÿ

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [CLOSE].

Press [OPEN].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

When playing back a multi-channel encoded disc,
the multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• You can fully enjoy multi-channel sound by
connecting an amplifier or a decoder compatible
with these multi-channel sources. (☞ also page
65)

Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
16

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 16

07.12.7 10:44:13 AM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information. (☞ page 9)

DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter no./Playing time

Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal
channel no.

Disc type *1
Audio format
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
Playback mode

☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select chapter
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2
[5 ∞]
Select title/program/playlist

*1 DVD-VR also indicates either PRG (program) or PLAY (playlist) playback.
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback pictures
on the screen).

17

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 17

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:14 AM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information (☞ page 9).

For DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2: Folder no./Track no./Playing time
For JPEG: Folder no./File no.

Disc type
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total track no.
included on the
disc

☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 *1
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

Track no./Playing time

The PBC indicator
lights up when PBC is
in use.

Total track no.
included on the
disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total playing time

☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10
18

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 18

07.12.7 10:44:14 AM

ENGLISH

Track no./Playing time

Only for CD Text *3
Total track no.
included on the disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total playing time
☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

Audio format
(MP3/WMA/WAV)
Tag data appears
only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
Total track no. included on the disc

☞ page 22

[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

*3 “No Name” appears for conventional CDs.
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10
19

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 19

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:15 AM

ENGLISH

Operation buttons on the screen
You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• While the operation buttons are displayed, aspect ratio is fixed to <Full>. (☞ page 52)
• If no operation is done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is
displayed).

☞ pages 23 to 27 on how the operation buttons
particularly work for a variety of the discs

A
[SOURCE]
[AV MENU]
[SHORT CUT]
[3 / 8]
[7]
[4 ¢]

Display <Source Menu> screen
Display <AV Menu> screen
Display the Short Cut buttons
Start and pause playback
Stop playback
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Select folders
• The above buttons also work when they are not shown on
the screen (while watching the playback picture).
* While a disc menu is played back for DVD, [KEY] is
automatically displayed. On the disc menu, you can select a
menu item directly by touching it on the screen.

Touch the screen (center portion).

*

Touch [KEY].

B
For DVD/VCD/DivX menu operation playback
[2 3 5 ∞] Select the menu items
[ENT]
Confirm the selection
[TOP MENU] Display the disc menu
[MENU]
Display the disc menu
[RETURN]
Return to the previous menu or display the
menu (only for VCD with PBC)

Touch [KEY].

C
For entering the numbers
[DIRECT CLR] • Switch between chapter/track entry and
title/group/folder entry
• Erase the last entry when you enter a
wrong number
[0]–[9]=[ENT]
Enter numbers
Ex.: To enter “105,” press [1], [0], [5], then [ENT]

Touch [KEY].

To erase the operations, touch the screen again.
20

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 20

07.12.7 10:44:15 AM

Selecting playback modes
1

ENGLISH

You can use the following playback modes—Repeat or Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat

3

2
When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.
Disc type

Repeat

Random

Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Title: Repeats current title
Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Program: Repeats current program (not
available for Playlist playback)
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Repeats current folder

Folder: Repeats current folder

—
—
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks
—

Track:

Repeats current track (PBC not in
use)

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks (PBC not
in use)

Track:

Repeats current track*1

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

Track: Repeats current track*1
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder

Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

*1 You can also use [SHORT CUT] to turn on and off Track Repeat.

21

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 21

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:16 AM

ENGLISH

Selecting tracks on the list

Prohibiting disc ejection

If a disc includes folders, you can display the Folder/
Track (File) Lists, then start playback.

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

1

2

at the same time

3

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.

Select a folder (1), then a track (2).

Using Short Cut Icons
You can easily access the some frequently used
functions by using [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel.

1
Selected track starts playing. (* Press to move to
the previous/next pages of the list)
1 Current folder list number/total folder list
number
2 Current track list number/total track list
number of the current folder

2
• For video software:
Aspect ratio
(☞ page 52)

You can easily access the Track List by pressing DISP
on the monitor panel.

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

• For audio software:

Turn on or off Track Repeat
(Repeat play: ☞ page 21)

Selected track starts playing.
22

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 22

07.12.7 10:44:17 AM

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No sound can be heard.)

ENGLISH

Operations using the remote controller—RM-RK252

Select title (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select title (when not playing).

twice

Select title (during playback or pause).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

You can change the following items using the on-screen bar—audio language, audio stream, audio channel,
subtitle language, view angle, etc. (☞ pages 28 and 29)

23

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 23

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:17 AM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Forward slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3
Select program.
Select playlist (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select program (when not playing).

twice
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Select program/playlist (during playback or pause).
Using Original Program/Playlist screens ( ☞ page 28)
1

For Original Program
For Playlist

2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3

To erase the screen.

*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

24

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 24

07.12.7 10:44:18 AM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5 (No sound can be heard.)
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.
Select track (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

While playing...
Reverse/advance the scenes by five minutes.
Current playback position

2nd press

1st press

1st press

2nd press

3rd press

For DivX6: Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*4 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2 ] ¡3
*5 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2

25

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 25

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:19 AM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause. (Slide show: each file is shown for a few
seconds.)
Shows the current file until you change it if pressed during Slide show.
Select file.
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.

Select file (within the same folder).

twice

Select folder.

Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed while holding SHIFT.

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed
during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1
Forward slow motion during pause*2
(No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No
sound can be heard.)

During PBC playback...

Select aspect ratio.

2 Select the desired track.

Select an item on the menu.
To return to the previous menu, press
To cancel PBC playback
1

• To resume PBC, press
Select track.
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10
26

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 26

07.12.7 10:44:19 AM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5
Select track.

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5
Select folder.
Select track (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

*4 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*5 Search speed: x2 ] x10

27

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 27

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:20 AM

ENGLISH

Using the list screens

Operations using the on-screen
bar

You can use Original Program or Playlist
screen anytime while playing DVD-VR with its data
recorded.

1

2

These operations are possible on the screen using
the remote controller, while playing the following
discs—DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG.

Display the Original Program/Playlist screen.

1

Display the on-screen bar. (☞page 29)

2

Select an item.

3

Make a selection.
If a pop-up menu appears...

Select an item you want.

To erase the screen

Ex. For DVD-Video

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
the recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/playlist*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of playlist
8 Total number of chapters included in the playlist
9 Playback time

• For entering time/numbers...
:
Move the entry position

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

:
Select a number
To remove the on-screen bar

28

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 28

07.12.7 10:44:21 AM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Information
Operation

Above example is of DVD Video. Items shown on the bar vary due to the disc type.
1 Disc type
2 • DVD: Audio signal format
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD Video:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
T. RPT:
Title repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
F. RND: Folder random
A. RND: All (Disc) random
JPEG:
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
VCD:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter

5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
Remaining title time (for DVD)
Remaining disc time (for others)
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track *2
Remaining time of the current
chapter/track *2
6 Playback status
Play
Reverse/forward search
Reverse/forward slow-motion
Pause
Stop
7 Operation icons
Change time indication (see 5)
Time Search (Specify a certain
scene by entering time.)
Title Search (by its number)
Chapter Search (by its number)
Track Search (by its number)
Repeat play *1
Random play *1
Change the audio language, audio
stream, or audio channel
Change or erase the subtitle
language
Change the view angle

Current program/chapter
Current Playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file

*1 ☞ page 21
*2 Not applicable for DVD-VR

29

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 29

OPERATIONS
07.12.7 10:44:22 AM

ENGLISH

Bluetooth® operations — Cellular phone/audio player
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the
Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD changer jack
on the rear.
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the
countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.

To register using <Open>
Preparation:
Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth
function.

1

To use a Bluetooth device through the unit (“Bluetooth
PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“Bluetooth PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”).

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press
[5] or [∞] to select it.

2

3

Connecting a new Bluetooth
device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in <Bluetooth>
menu to register and establish the connection with a
device.
• Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as
the source to operate <Bluetooth> menu.
Open

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Search

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating this unit.

Go to other menu items

4

Enter a PIN (Personal Identification
Number)* code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number).
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.

30

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 30

07.12.7 10:44:23 AM

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Enter]: Confirms the entry.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the above
step) on the device to be connected.

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

To register using <Search>
• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press [5]
or [∞] to select it.

4
5

6

Press [AV MENU].

4
5

Select a device you want to connect.

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Special Device].
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
Use <Open> (or <Search>) to connect.

To connect/disconnect a registered
device

The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use <Connect> (or activate
<Auto Connect>) to connect the same device
from next time (☞ the following, and pages 58
and 59).

1
2
3

1
2
3

ENGLISH

5

To connect a special device <Special
Device>

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to connect/disconnect.

2
3
4

Press [AV MENU].

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Search].
The unit searches for available devices and displays
the list of them. (If no available device is detected,
“Device Unfound” appears.)

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Connect] or [Disconnect].
• Select <Connect> to connect the selected
device.
• Select <Disconnect> to disconnect the selected
device.

To delete a registered device

Select a device you want to connect.
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to
the unit.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Connecting...” is displayed on the
screen.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to delete.

2
3
4

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Delete Pairing].
Confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

31

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 31

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.7 10:44:24 AM

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

*1

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 34

Adjust the volume of the incoming calls.*2

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside
[ ].

[AV MENU] Hold: Activates <Voice Dialing> function
[5 ∞] Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can be registered.)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of the other sources.

~
Ÿ
!
⁄

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Bluetooth].
Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu).
☞ pages 58 and 59

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

When <Auto Answer> is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

To end the call
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(☞ page 59)

• You can adjust the microphone volume. (☞ page 59)

32

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 32

07.12.7 10:44:24 AM

3

When an SMS comes in...

ENGLISH

If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.
When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (☞ page 59)

4

Select a calling method, then call.

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (☞ page 58)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages. (☞ pages
58 and 59)

Cancel

Redial

Shows the list of the phone
numbers you have dialed.
Received Calls Shows the list of the received
calls.
Phonebook
Shows the phone book of the
connected cellular phone.
Missed Calls Shows the list of the missed
calls.
Phone
Shows the phone number
Number
entry screen = “Entering a
phone number” (☞ page 34).
Voice Dialing (Only when the connected
cellular phone has the voice
recognition system): = Speak
the name you want to call.

To make a call

1

2

33

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 33

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.7 10:44:25 AM

ENGLISH

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

To redial previously dialed numbers

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or +/–).

1

/ATT

Entering a phone number
• You cannot use the remote controller to enter phone
numbers.

2

You can enter [0] – [9], [*], [#] (up to 32 numbers)
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Preset]: Goes to Preset List. You can preset the
entered number by selecting a preset
number. (☞ page 35)
• [Dial]: Calls the entered number.

3

• You can easily access <Dial Menu> by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
When using the remote controller, you can
display <Redial> menu anytime .
You can also access <Dial Menu> by holding
SOURCE on the monitor panel.
[Hold]
• You can easily activate <Voice Dialing> by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

You can also activate <Voice Dialing> by
holding [AV MENU].

34

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 34

07.12.7 10:44:26 AM

To call a preset number

You can preset up to six phone numbers.

1

1

ENGLISH

Presetting the phone numbers
Select the phone number you want to preset
from <Phonebook>, <Redial>, <Received
Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
1 Press [AV MENU].
2 Press [Bluetooth].
3 Press [Dial Menu], then...

2
Ex.: Selecting <Received Calls>

2

Select a telephone number to store.

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth phone operations.

3

Select a preset number.

: • Display <Dial Menu> screen/Answer
the incoming call.
• Display the <Redial> menu if pressed
and held (regardless of the current
source).
: End the call.

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

: Adjust the volume.

:
[Hold] Make a call to the preset numbers.

35

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 35

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.7 10:44:27 AM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

*1

*2
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 48
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

[3 / 8] [7] Start and pause playback
[4 ¢] Reverse/forward skip
[5 ∞]
Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can
be registered.*3)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the operation status.
*3 You cannot select “New Device” when a Bluetooth audio player is connected.

~
Ÿ

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth audio operations.

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth
AUDIO]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Start and pause playback.

Start playback.

:
:

Reverse/forward skip
Adjust the volume.

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.
jvc-victor.co.jp/english/car/>
36

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 36

07.12.7 10:44:27 AM

MP3 indicator

Folder no./Track no./Playing time
Ex. while playing an MP3 disc

ENGLISH

Listening to the CD changer

Disc no.
Tag data appears only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total track no. included on the
disc
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folders (only for MP3)
Hold: Display Disc list

☞ page 38
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.

⁄

Preparation:
Make sure <Changer> is selected for <External
Input>. (☞ page 55)

~

Select a disc to start playing.

Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH]. (☞
page 9)

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

To go to the other list

• If you select an MP3 disc, the Track list of the
current folder appears. You can select a track
and start playing. (☞ also page 22)

!

Display the Disc List.

• If you select a folder on the list, you can start
playing the first track of the folder.
37

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 37

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.7 10:44:28 AM

ENGLISH

Selecting playback modes
You can use following playback modes—Repeat or
Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat for an MP3 disc

1
2
3

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Track: Repeats current track
Disc:
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
All:

Randomly plays all tracks of the
current disc
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder, then tracks of next folders
folder
Disc: Randomly plays all tracks of the
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
current disc
All:
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller to operate the CD changer.

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 48

: Select disc.
: Select folder (MP3 only).
• Press: Select track.
• Hold: Reverse/forward search

38

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 38

07.12.7 10:44:29 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the DAB tuner
If no signal is received, “No DAB Signal” appears.

Preset no.

Band
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
DAB indicators */Standby
Reception indicators

☞ page 42
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

* While tuning in a service with DLS (Dynamic Label
Segment), the TEXT indicator lights up.

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [DAB]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [BAND].

!

Press [4] or [¢] to search for an ensemble—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.

⁄

Press [∞] or [5] to select a service (either primary or secondary) to listen to.

39

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 39

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.7 10:44:29 AM

ENGLISH

When surrounding sounds are
noisy

Manual presetting
1

Display the Preset List.

2

Tune in to a service you want to preset.

3

Select a preset number.

Some services provide Dynamic Range Control (DRC)
signals together with their regular programme signals.
DRC will reinforce the low level sounds to improve your
listening.
• The DRC indicator will light up while tuning in to a
service with the DRC signals.

1

2

3

The service selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 2.

• As the number increases, the effect becomes
stronger.

40

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 40

07.12.7 10:44:30 AM

Activating/deactivating
Announcement Standby
Reception

On the remote:

1

Announcement Standby Reception allows the
unit to switch temporarily to your favorite service
(announcement type).

2
[Hold]

On the unit:

1

Announcement Standby Reception

Indicator

To activate, display <AV Menu>
screen, then select <Mode>, press
[On] for <Announce Standby>. (☞
below)

ANN

ENGLISH

Selecting preset services

The unit will temporarily switch to your Lights up
favorite service from any source other
than FM/AM.

2

Not yet activated. Tune in to another
service providing the related signals.

Flashes

To deactivate, press [Off] for
<Announce Standby> (☞ below).

Goes off

To activate Announcement Standby
Reception

1
2
3

Activating/deactivating TA/PTY
Standby Reception

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

Operations are exactly the same as explained on page
14 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the DAB
tuner and for the FM tuner.
Announcement Standby Reception is now
activated for PTY code <Transport News>: the
initial setting.

Continued on the next page

41

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 41

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.7 10:44:30 AM

ENGLISH

Tracing the same programme—
Alternative Frequency Reception
(DAB AF)

You can easily activate and deactivate
Announcement Standby Reception by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 48
☞ page 14

• While receiving a DAB service:
When driving in an area where a service cannot be
received, this unit automatically tunes in to another
ensemble or FM RDS station broadcasting the same
programme.
• While receiving an FM RDS station:
When driving in an area where a DAB service is
broadcasting the same programme as the FM RDS
station, this unit automatically tunes in to the DAB
service.

To change the announcement type for
Announcement Standby Reception

1
2
3

Press [AV MENU].

4

Select your favorite announcement type.

Press [Mode].

When shipped from the factory, Alternative Frequency
Reception is activated.
To deactivate the Alternative Frequency
Reception, select <Off> for <DAB AF>. (☞ page
54)

Available announcement types:
Transport News, Warning, News, Weather, Event,
Special Event, Radio Info, Sports News, Financial
News
42

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 42

07.12.7 10:44:31 AM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod
Track no./Playing time

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

☞ page 44
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5]
Enter player’s menu
[∞]
Start playback/pause
• To resume, press again.

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

It is required to connect the Interface adapter for iPod (KS-PD100) to the CD changer jack on the rear.
Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 55)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod] (☞ page 9)
Playback starts automatically.
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

43

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 43

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.7 10:44:31 AM

ENGLISH

3

Selecting a track from the
player’s menu
1

Press [5] to enter the player’s menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about five seconds.

2

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.
Press: Select an item.
Hold: Skip ten items at a time if there are more
than ten items.

Repeat

One:
All:

Random

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs Ô
Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the beginning)

3
4

Select an appropriate option.

Functions the same as
“Repeat One.”
Functions the same as
“Repeat All.”

Album: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Albums.”
Song: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Songs.”

Press [∞] to confirm the selection.
• When the playback modes are selected, the
corresponding indicators light up alternately on
the screen.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [5].

To cancel, select <Off>.

Selecting playback modes
1

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 48

2

44

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 44

07.12.7 10:44:32 AM

ENGLISH

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN terminals.
Assigned title (☞ page 49)

Sound mode (☞ page 48)

You can easily access to <Aspect> setting
menu by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...
☞ page 48

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback picture).

~
Ÿ

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 20) while watching the playback picture

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• [KEY] does not work when the source is “AV-IN.”

Continued on the next page

45

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 45

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.7 10:44:32 AM

Navigation screen
ENGLISH

You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN terminal so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (☞ page 55)

To view the navigation screen (and listen to the navigation guidance*)
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (☞ page 9)
• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to
<Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (☞ page
52)

* If your Navigation System is equipped with the voice guidance function.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 20) while viewing the navigation screen
• The operation buttons displayed on the screen vary among the playback sources.

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• The above buttons except [KEY] also work when they are not shown on the screen (while viewing the navigation
screen).
When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (☞ page 55)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN terminals.
• Some status messages such as volume level will not appear on the screen.

46

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 46

07.12.7 10:44:33 AM

You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter—KS-U57
(not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (☞ page 49)

ENGLISH

EXT-INPUT

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

☞ page 48

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 55)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

47

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 47

EXTERNALDEVICES
DEVICES
EXTERNAL
07.12.7 10:44:33 AM

ENGLISH

Sound equalization
While playing back any source other
than “Bluetooth PHONE,” you can easily
access <Equalizer> menu by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

~

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

Ÿ

!

1

Repeat steps ~ and Ÿ, then in step !...

2

Adjust (1), then store (2).

Select a sound mode.

Move to other six sound modes
Ex.: When storing into <User2>.

48

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 48

07.12.7 10:44:33 AM

ENGLISH

Assigning titles to the sources

In the explanation, buttons on the
touch panel are indicated inside [ ].

!

You can assign titles to “AV-IN” and “EXT-IN.”

~
Ÿ

Assign a title.

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN] or
[EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Display <Title Entry> screen.
You can enter up to 16 characters (for available
characters, ☞ page 67).
• [Store]: Confirm the entry.
• [2/3]: Move the cursor.
• [BS]:
Erase the character before the
cursor.
• [Del]:
Erase the character on the cursor.
• [Cap]:
Change the letter case (upper/
lower).
• [Change]: Change the character set.
• [Space]: Enter a space.

⁄

49

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 49

Finish the procedure.

SETTINGS
07.12.7 10:44:34 AM

ENGLISH

Menu operations

!

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures. Some of the settings do not open the
sub-setting window, but just selecting an option will
change the setting.
• The display indications may change according to
change of the specifications.
Ex.: Changing the <AV Input> setting

~
Ÿ

Non-available items will be shaded.

50

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 50

07.12.7 10:44:34 AM

Display

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Demonstration

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it temporarily,
touch the screen.

Wall Paper

You can select the background picture of the screen.
Horizon, Metal, Art, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

Off: Cancels.
Once: Scrolls the disc information once.
Auto: Repeats scrolling (five-second intervals).
• Holding DISP on the monitor panel scrolls the information regardless
of this setting.

Dimmer

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Auto: Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.*1
Dimmer Time Set : Activates the Dimmer Time setting below.

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On/Off times.

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
1 (bright), 2 (middle), 3 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust brightness of the screen.
–15 (darkest) to +15 (brightest); Initial 00

Picture Adjust*2

You can adjust the following to make the screen clear and legible for
watching the playback picture. The setting will be stored—one for
“DISC” (common) and the other for “AV-IN.”
–15 to +15; Initial 0
Bright: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Contrast: Adjust the contrast.
Color: Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
• Press [5] or [∞] to adjust.
• You cannot adjust <Tint>. (fixed)

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Setup

Initial: Underlined
*1 The ILLUMINATION lead connection is required. (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
*2 Adjustable only when the source is “DISC” (the inserted disc must contain pictures or movies) or “AV-IN.”

51

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 51

SETTINGS
07.12.7 10:44:35 AM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined
Menu items
1

Aspect*

Selectable settings, [reference page]
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.
Aspect ratio of incoming signal
4:3

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures

Clock

Display

Full:
For 16:9 original pictures
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match to the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language*2

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands,
Svenska, Dansk, Руccĸий, Português
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change
according to the language selected, ☞ [67].

Time Set

Initial 0:00 ☞ [8]

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system.
12Hours, 24Hours ☞ [8]

OSD Clock

When <On> is selected, the clock time is displayed on the playback
picture.
Off, On

Clock Adjust

Select <Auto> to adjust the clock automatically using the clock time
(CT) data from an FM RDS station.
Off, Auto ☞ [8]

*1 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*2 After you change the indication language setting, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.

52

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 52

07.12.7 10:44:35 AM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
3

Menu Language*

Select the initial disc menu language; Initial English (☞ also page
66).

Audio Language*3

Select the initial audio language; Initial English (☞ also page 66).

Subtitle*3

Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off); Initial
English (☞ also page 66).

Monitor Type*3
16:9

4:3LB

4:3PS

OSD Position*3

Disc

Position 1

Position 2

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
16:9 : Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor is 16:9.
4:3 LB (Letterbox)/4:3 PS (Pan Scan): Select when the aspect ratio of
the external monitor is 4:3.
• Refer to the illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are
shown on the screen.
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [28]
1: Higher position
2: Lower position

File Type*3

Select playback file type when a disc contains different types of files.
Audio: Plays back audio files.
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
Audio&Video: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

DivX Regist. (Registration)*3

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a
file with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration
Code is overwritten for copyright protection.

D. Audio Output*3

Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (☞ also page 65)
PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio, or when
connecting to a recording device.
Dolby D : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital.
Stream : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.

*3 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
53

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 53

SETTINGS
07.12.7 10:44:36 AM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined
Menu items
1

Selectable settings, [reference page]
When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT terminals.
Dolby SR : Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio by
connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby Surround.
Stereo : Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic) Range
Compres. (Compression)*1

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing
Dolby Digital software.
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded software.
On: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

AF Regional

When the received signals from the current station become weak...
Off: Cancels—not selectable when <DAB AF> is set to <On>.
AF Reg. (Regional): Switches to another station broadcasting the same
programme. The REG indicator lights up.
AF: Switches to another station. The programme may differ from the
one currently received (the AF indicator lights up). ☞ [15]

TA Volume

00 to 30 or 50*2; Initial 15 ☞ [14]

Program Search

Off, On ☞ [15]

DAB AF*3

Off, On ☞ [42]

Tuner

Disc

Down Mix*

*1 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*2 Depends on the amplifier gain control. (☞ page 56)
*3 Appears only when DAB tuner is connected.

54

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 54

07.12.7 10:44:37 AM

Menu items

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN terminals. ☞ [45, 46]
Off: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is skipped while
selecting the source).
Audio&Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as a
VCR.
Audio: Select when connecting an audio component such as a portable
audio player.
Camera*5 : Select when connecting a rear view camera.
Navigation : Select when connecting a Navigation System.

External Input*6

For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the
rear.
Changer/iPod*7: CD changer or iPod. ☞ [37, 43]
External: Any other than the above. ☞ [47]
• For connecting the Bluetooth adapter and DAB tuner, this setting is
not required. They are automatically detected.

Beep

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting*8

Off: Cancels.
Muting1, Muting2: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the car phone system.

Power LED Flash

Off: Cancels.
On: When the ignition is turned off, the lamp on the
flashes.

Input
Others

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AV Input*

4

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

button

TouchPanel Sens.

Change the sensitivity of the touch panel. As the number decreases,
sensitivity becomes higher. 1/2/3

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold
[Enter] to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. ☞ [3]

*4 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*5 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the control panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.
*6 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*7 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.
*8 The TEL MUTING lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual.
55

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 55

SETTINGS
07.12.7 10:44:37 AM

Initial: Underlined

ENGLISH

Equalizer

Flat/Hard Rock/R&B/Pop/Jazz/Dance/Country/Reggae/Classic/User1/User2/User3 ☞ [48]

Sound
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Fader/Balance

Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front and rear speakers.
• Upmost—front only (F6)
• Downmost—rear only (R6)
When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the center (0).
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left and right speakers.
• Leftmost—left only (L6)
• Rightmost—right only (R6) Initial 0

Volume Adjust

Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing to
the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
–12 to +12; Initial 00
• You can make the adjustments separately for DVD and other discs.

Amplifier Gain

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Low: VOL 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speakers is less
than 50 W.)
High: VOL 00 to 50

56

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 56

07.12.7 10:44:38 AM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Mono

Only for FM. (Off, On) ☞ [10]

DX/Local

Only for FM. (Local, DX) ☞ [11]

SSM

Only for FM. Press and hold to start SSM. ☞ [11]

PTy Standby

Only for FM/DAB. (Off, On) ☞ [14]

PTy Code

Only for FM/DAB. (Initial News) ☞ [15]

Title Entry

Only for “AV-IN” and “EXT-IN.” ☞ [49]

Repeat

☞ [21, 38, 44]

Random

☞ [21, 38, 44]

D.(Dynamic) Range Control

Only for DAB. (Off, DRC1, DRC2, DRC3) ☞ [40]

Announce Standby

Only for DAB. (Off, On) ☞ [41]

Announce Code

Only for DAB. (Initial Transport News) ☞ [42]

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Mode*1

*1 Items listed under <Mode> vary among the playback sources.

List
For “DISC”: Folder List and Track List (☞ page 22)
For “CD-CH”: Disc List, Folder List, and Track List (☞ page 37)
• For the other playback sources, you can display a list by pressing DISP on the monitor panel. (☞ page 9)

57

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 57

SETTINGS
07.12.7 10:44:39 AM

ENGLISH

Bluetooth*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Dial Menu *

Select the method to make a call. ☞ [33]

Message*3

You can read a message from the following message histories.
Unread: Messages you have not read.
Read: Messages you have read.
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.
Sent: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Open

☞ [30]

Search

☞ [31]

Special Device

Only for “New Device.”
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which require some special procedure to
establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want to connect.
• After selecting the device, use <Open> or <Search> (☞ page 30 or 31)
for connection.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You can
connect the unit and the device by using <Connect> (☞ below) from the
next time.

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ pages 30 and
31), establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the device being connected.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Delete the registered devices.

2

*1 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO.” Select a device (or “New Device”) before operating the
menu.
*2 Only for the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*3 Selectable only when the source is “Bluetooth PHONE” and the connected cellular phone is compatible with SMS
(Short Message Service).

When operating the Bluetooth device, refer also to the instructions supplied with the device.

58

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 58

07.12.7 10:44:39 AM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
4

When the unit is turned on, the connection is established automatically
with...
Off: No Bluetooth device.
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found first.

Auto Answer *5

Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the calls
manually.
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.

Message Info *5

Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and
displaying “Receiving Message.” To read the message, ☞ page 33.
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.
01/02/03

Version *6

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

Settings

Auto Connect *

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Initial: Underlined
*4 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “New Device” is selected.
*6 If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc-victor.
co.jp/english/car/>

59

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 59

SETTINGS
SETTINGS
07.12.7 10:44:40 AM

ENGLISH

Maintenance
Moisture condensation

To keep discs clean

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.

How to handle discs

To play new discs
Center holder

When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder of
the case and lift the disc out, holding it
by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:
SingleCD—8 cm disc

Unusual shape

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)

Stick-on label

Transparent or semi-transparent on its
recording area

60

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 60

07.12.7 10:44:40 AM

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

General

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters for file/
folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

ENGLISH

More about this unit

Playing DVD-VR

Disc

• For details about DVD-VR format and Playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

General
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are
interchangeably used.
• This unit can only play back audio CD (CD-DA) files
if different type of audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV) are
recorded on the same disc.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.

File playback
Playing DivX files
• This unit can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx>, <.div>, or <.avi> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit supports the DivX files whose resolution is
720 x 576 pixels or less.
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or Dolby Digital.
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode
may not be played back correctly.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

Ejecting a disc
• If “No disc“ appears after removing a disc, insert a
disc or select another playback source.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust.

Continued on the next page

61

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 61

REFERENCES
07.12.7 10:44:41 AM

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO
format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional,
and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

ENGLISH

Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2
files recorded by JVC Everio camcorders.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Playing JPEG files

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
on the disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)

62

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 62

07.12.7 10:44:41 AM

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
p

• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

Current folder (highlighted bar)
Current folder number/total folder number
Folder list
Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not
displayed for JPEG)
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
in the current folder (total number of tracks on
the disc)
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)
Track list
Current track (highlighted)

ENGLISH

Bluetooth operations
General

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error: The device is registered but the
connection has failed. Use <Connect> to connect
the device again. (☞ page 31)
• Error: Try the operation again. If “Error” appears
again, check if the device supports the function you
have tried.
• Device Unfound: No available Bluetooth device is
detected by <Search>.
• Loading: The unit is updating the phone book and/
or SMS.
• Please Wait...: The unit is preparing to use
the Bluetooth function. If the message does not
disappear, turn off and turn on the unit, then connect
the device again (or reset the unit).
• Reset 08: Check the connection between the
adapter and this unit.

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline
JPEG), it will be displayed.

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.

63

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 63

:

Cellular phone

:

Household phone

:

Office

:

General

:

Other than above

REFERENCES
07.12.7 10:44:42 AM

ENGLISH

CD changer

Menu settings

• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (☞ page 37), you will hear a
beep. Select another folder including music files.

• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from
<High> to <Low> while the volume level is set
higher than “30,” the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio
Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the
power, and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc)
so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect
ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may
become <4:3LB> for some discs.

DAB tuner
• Only the primary DAB service can be preset even
when you store a secondary service.

iPod operations
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano *1
– iPod video (5th Generation) *2
*1 When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
*2 It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu while the iPod is connected to the
interface adapter.
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the adapter connected to this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the screen. This unit
can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>

64

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 64

07.12.7 10:44:42 AM

2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Through the DIGITAL OUT terminal

ENGLISH

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT)

Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted.
• To reproduce the multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set <D. Audio Output> correctly.
(☞ page 53)
Output signals

<D. Audio Output>
Playback disc
DVD

<Stream>

<Dolby D>

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital
with DTS
with MPEG Audio

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD, Video CD

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD with DTS

DTS bitstream

DivX/
with Dolby Digital
MPEG

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream

with MPEG Audio

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

MP3/WMA

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

WAV

44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the
discs are not copy-protected.

65

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 65

REFERENCES
07.12.7 10:44:43 AM

ENGLISH

Preset equalizing values
Frequency
Sound mode
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User1/2/3

60 Hz

150 Hz

400 Hz

1 kHz

2.5 kHz

6.3 kHz

15 kHz

00
+03
+03
00
+03
+04
+02
+03
+02
00

00
+03
+02
+02
+02
+02
+01
00
+03
00

00
+01
+02
00
+01
00
00
00
+01
00

00
00
00
00
+01
–02
00
+01
00
00

00
00
+01
+01
+01
–01
00
+02
00
00

00
+02
+01
+01
+03
+01
+01
+02
+02
00

00
+01
+03
+02
+02
+01
+02
+03
00
00

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)
Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU

Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque

Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian

Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali

Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

66

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 66

07.12.7 10:44:43 AM

• Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan
and other countries.
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®
6) with enhanced playback of DivX® media files
and the DivX® Media Format
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Victor Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
• iPod and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is
selected for <Language>. (☞ page 52)
Upper and lower cases

ENGLISH

Characters shown on the screen
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you
can use the following characters to assign titles.
(☞ page 49)
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>.
(☞ page 52)

Numbers and symbols

67

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 67

REFERENCES
07.12.7 10:44:45 AM

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied with the adapters used for the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
Symptoms
• No sound comes out of the speakers.

• The screen is not clear and legible.

FM/AM

General

• “Position Error Push Open Key” appears on
the screen.
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on the
screen, and the panel does not move.
• “No Signal” appears.

Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced through the analog
terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT).
Sunshine from the windscreen may cause this symptom.
Adjust <Bright>. (☞ page 51)
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press OPEN/TILT.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)

• The buttons on the monitor panel do not
work.
• The unit does not work at all.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected
to VIDEO IN terminal.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
When the monitor panel is open, only +/– (volume) and
OPEN/TILT work. The other buttons do not function.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Store stations manually. (☞ page 11)

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

68

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 68

07.12.7 10:44:45 AM

Disc in general

• Disc can be neither recognized nor played
back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot be
played back.
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable discs
cannot be skipped.
• Playback does not start.
•
•
•

•
•
•

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedies/Causes
Eject the disc forcibly. (☞ page 3)
Unlock the disc. (☞ page 22)
• Insert a finalized disc.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used
for recording.

ENGLISH

Symptoms

• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.
The playback picture is not clear and legible. Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 51)
Sound and pictures are sometimes
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
interrupted or distorted.
• Change the disc.
No playback picture is shown and “Parking
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
Brake” appears on the screen, even when the (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
parking brake is engaged.
No picture appears on the external monitor. • Connect the video cord correctly.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.
“Eject Error” or “Loading Error” appears on
Change the source by pressing SOURCE.
the screen.
“Region code error” appears on the screen
Region code is not correct. (☞ page 4)
when you insert a DVD Video.
Disc cannot be played back.
• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (☞ page 4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.
Noise is generated.
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Tracks are not played back as you have
Playback order may differ from that played back using
intended them to play.
other players.
Elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded.
“Not Support” appears on the screen and
The track is unplayable.
track skips.

Continued on the next page

69

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 69

REFERENCES
07.12.7 10:44:46 AM

Symptoms

ENGLISH

• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit.

• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.

Bluetooth

• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.

• Echo or noise occurs.
• Phone sound quality is poor.

• The sound is interrupted or skipped during
playback of a Bluetooth audio player.

• “New Device” cannot be selected for
“Bluetooth AUDIO.”
• The connected audio player cannot be
controlled.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

Remedies/Causes
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected device
and search again.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select <Open> on the unit to connect
the device. (☞ page 30)
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device. If the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its
instructions, try “0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then
try to connect again. (☞ pages 31, 58)
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
cellular phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal
reception.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
audio player.
• Disconnect the player connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player
again.
Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “New
Device,” disconnect it. (☞ page 31)
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

70

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 70

07.12.7 10:44:46 AM

DAB tuner

• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• “No DAB Signal” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The DAB tuner does not work at all.
• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the screen.
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work.

AV-IN

iPod

• Sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.
• Playback stops.
• “No Files” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• No picture appears on the screen.
• Playback picture is not clear and legible.

Remedies/Causes
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Current disc does not include playable files. Replace the disc
with one including playable files.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Move to an area with stronger signals.
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then reset
the unit. (☞ page 3)
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then reset
the unit. (☞ page 3)
Check the cords and connections.
• Check the connection.
• Charge the battery.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
Check the connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart
playback.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod. Then,
connect them again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 51)

71

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 71

ENGLISH

CD changer

Symptoms
• “No Disc” appears on the screen.
• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.
• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

REFERENCES
07.12.7 10:44:46 AM

ENGLISH

Specifications
Maximum Power Output:
Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:

Input:
Output:

50 W per channel
20 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
6.3 kHz, 15 kHz
±10 dB
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
PAL
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Aerial input
VIDEO OUT

Others:

CD changer, OE REMOTE, Reverse gear
signal, DIGITAL OUT (optical)

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM:

(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

65 dB

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation:

35 dB

MW Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/35 dB

LW Tuner

Sensitivity:

50 μV

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Frequency Response:

DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:

16 Hz to 22 000 Hz

VCD/CD:

16 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Frequency Range:

FM/AM TUNER

Frequencies:
Level:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Output Level
REAR OUT:
Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:

DVD/CD

Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:

FM Tuner

Dynamic Range:

93 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

95 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

72

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 72

07.12.7 10:44:47 AM

7 inch wide liquid crystal display

Number of Pixel:

336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)

Drive Method:

TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format

Color System:

NTSC/PAL

Aspect Ratio:

16:9 (wide)

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

ENGLISH

MONITOR
GENERAL

Screen Size:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System:

Negative ground

Allowable Storage Temperature:

–10°C to +60°C

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D):
• With trim plate and
sleeve attached

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 111 mm × 160 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 117 mm × 10 mm

Mass (approx.):

2.9 kg (including trims and sleeve)

100

Required space for the monitor ejection

160

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm

90.5

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

73

EN_KW-AVX710[E]4.indb 73

REFERENCES
07.12.7 10:44:47 AM

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil

Hebt u PROBLEMEN met de bediening?
Stel het apparaat terug
Zie de pagina met de paragraaf Het apparaat terugstellen
Dear Customer,
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited
is:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Company name changed in:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Germany

Cher(e) client(e),
Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes
européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité
électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.
Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,
Limited :
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Le nom de la compagnie a changé dans:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Allemagne

Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien
und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit
und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,
Limited ist:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Firmenname geändert in:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Deutschland

Geachte klant,
Dit apparaat voldoet aan de geldende Europese normen en
richtlijnen inzake elektromagnetische compatibiliteit en
elektrische veiligheid.
De Europese vertegenwoordiger van Victor Company of Japan,
Limited is:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Bedrijfsnaam gewijzigd in:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Duitsland

EN, GE, FR, NL
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

Rear_KW-AVX710[E]f.indd 2

1207MNMMDWJEIN

07.12.7 2:36:21 PM

KW-AVX710
LVT1779-006A
[E]

Installation/Connection Manual
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
Handleiding voor installatie/aansluiting

ENGLISH

1207MNMMDWJEIN

EN, GE, FR, NL
©2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

NEDERLANDS

FRANÇAIS

DEUTSCH

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC,
NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your
vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter
is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen
Anlagen mit 12 V Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung
ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über diese
Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der
bei JVC Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des
sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse
NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type
d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur
de tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un
revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

Dit apparaat mag worden gebruikt bij elektrische
systemen die werken op 12 V gelijkstroom met
negatieve aarding. Als uw auto niet is uitgerust
met een dergelijk systeem, is een spanningsomzetter
vereist. Dit instrument kan worden aangeschaft bij
JVC car audio dealers.

WARNINGS

WARNHINWEISE

AVERTISSEMENTS

WAARSCHUWING

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift
lever operations, as this may result in a traffic
accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags, as this may result in a fatal
accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating
the steering wheel, as this may result in a traffic
accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving. It may lead to carelessness and cause an
accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving,
be sure to look around carefully or you may be
involved in a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking
Brake” flashes on the monitor, and no playback
picture will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking
brake lead is connected to the parking brake
system built in the car.

• Installieren Sie keine Komponenten und
verdrahten Sie Kabel NICHT an den folgenden
Orten;
– an denen sie die Bewegungen des Lenkrads und
des Ganghebels behindern könnten. Anderenfalls
führt diese Behinderung möglicherweise zu
ernsten Verkehrsunfällen.
– an denen sie den Betrieb von Sicherheit
seinrichtungen, z.B. Airbags, behindern
könnten. Anderenfalls führt diese Behinderung
möglicherweise zu ernsten Verkehrsunfällen.
– an denen sie die Sicht behindern.
• Betätigen Sie beim Fahren KEINE Geräte.
Anderenfalls führt dies möglicherweise zu einem
ernste Verkehrsunfall.
• Der Fahrer darf während der Fahrt auf keinen Fall
auf den Monitor sehen. Dies könnte den Fahrer
ablenken und zu Unfällen führen.
• Wenn Sie das Gerät beim Fahren bedienen
müssen, dürfen Sie nicht den Blick von der Straße
nehmen, da sonst die Gefahr von Verkehrsunfällen
besteht.
• Ist die Feststellbremse nicht angezogen, erscheint
blinkend die Meldung “Parking Brake” auf dem
Monitor, und es erfolgt keine Bildwiedergabe.
– Diese Warnung wird nur angezeigt, wenn das
Feststellbremskabel an das in das Fahrzeug
eingebaute Feststellbremssystem angeschlossen
ist.

• N’INSTALLEZ aucun appareil ni aucun câble
dans un endroit où:
– où il peut gêner l’accès au volant ou au levier
de vitesse car cela peut entraîner un accident
de la circulation.
– où il peut gêner la manipulation de dispositifs
de sécurité tels que les airbags car cela peut
entraîner un accident fatal.
– où il peut gêner la visibilité.
• NE COMMANDEZ pas l’appareil lors de la
manipulation du volant car cela peut entraîner
un accident de la circulation.
• Le conducteur ne doit pas regarder le moniteur
lorsqu’il conduit. Cela peut lui faire perdre sa
concentration et causer un accident.
• Si vous souhaitez opérer l’appareil pendant
que vous conduisez, assurez-vous de bien
regarder autour de vous afin de ne pas causer
un accident de la circulation.
• Si le frein de stationnement n’est pas engagé,
“Parking Brake” clignote sur le moniteur et
aucune image de lecture n’apparaît.
– Cet avertissement apparaît uniquement
quand le fil du frein de stationnement
est connecté au système de frein de
stationnement intégré à la voiture.

• Installeer toestellen en aansluitkabels NIET op
plaatsen waar;
– dit een gevaar vormt voor het bedienen van
het stuur of de versnelling, aangezien elke
belemmering van de juiste werking van het
stuur en de versnelling tot een ongeluk kan
lijden.
– dit een gevaar vormt voor de airbag,
aangezien elke belemmering van de werking
van de airbag tot een dodelijk ongeluk kan
lijden.
– dit het uitzicht belemmert.
• Bedien GEEN enkele eenheid terwijl u uw handen
aan het stuur nodig hebt, aangezien dit anders
tot een ongeluk kan lijden.
• De bestuurder dient tijdens het rijden niet naar
de monitor te kijken. De aandacht wordt anders
afgeleid met mogelijk ongelukken als gevolg.
• Voorkom ongelukken en kijk derhalve uitermate
goed uit indien u het toestel tijdens het besturen
van de auto wilt bedienen.
• “Parking Brake” knippert op de monitor en er
wordt geen beeld getoond wanneer de handrem
niet is aangetrokken.
– Deze waarschuwing verschijnt uitsluitend
indien het handremdraad met het in de auto
ingebouwde handremsysteem is verbonden.

Parts list for installation and connection

Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß

The following parts are provided for this unit.
If anything is missing, contact your dealer
immediately.

Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem
Gerät geliefert. Falls etwas fehlt, wenden Sie sich
sofort an Ihren Fachhändler.

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et
raccordement

Lijst van onderdelen die u bij installatie
en aansluiting nodig hebt

Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet
appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, contactez
votre revendeur immédiatement.

De volgende onderdelen worden bij het apparaat
geleverd. Raadpleeg direct de plaats van aankoop
indien er iets ontbreekt.

*1 Fitted to the main unit when shipped

*1 Werkseitig am Hauptgerät angebracht

*1 Fixé à l’appareil lors de l’expédition.

*1 Bij het verlaten van de fabriek aan het
hoofdtoestel bevestigd.

Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating.
If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a
maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the
rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to
8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W,
change “Amplifier Gain” setting to prevent the
speakers from being damaged (see page 56 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Heat sink
Abstrahlblech
Dissipateur de
chaleur
Warmte-opnemer

Remarques sur les connexions électriques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur
précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter
votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
Hinweise zu elektrischen Anschlüssen:
• Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes
avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les
Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt die Sicherung
häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC
enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec
une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω).
Autoradiohändler.
Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à
• Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer
Maximalleistung von mehr als 50 W anzuschließen
50 W, changez “Amplifier Gain” pour éviter
d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 56 du
(sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit einer Impedanz
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes
Wenn die Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W
des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la
beträgt, stellen Sie „Amplifier Gain“ anders ein,
bande isolante.
um Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud
(siehe Seite 56 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le
• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die
toucher en retirant cet appareil.
Anschlußklemmen der NICHT VERWENDETEN
Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband umwickeln.
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr
heiß. Beim Ausbau des Geräts darauf achten, das
Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.

Sleeve*1
Halterung*1
Manchon*1
Huls*1

Main unit
Hauptgerät
Appareil principal
Hoofdtoestel

Remote controller
Fernbedienung
Télécommande
Afstandsbediening

Batteries
Batterien
Piles
Batterijen

Power cord
Stromkable
Cordon d’alimentation
Stroomkabel

Brackets*1
Konsolen*1
Supports*1
Beugels*1

Opmerkingen voor de elektrische
verbindinge:
• Vervang de zekering door een exemplaar met
het aangegeven vermogen. Als de zekering
vaak doorslaat, moet u uw JVC car audio dealer
raadplegen.
• Sluit bij voorkeur luidsprekers met een hoger
maximaal vermogen dan 50 W (zowel achter als
voor, met een impedantie van 4 Ω t/m 8 Ω) aan.
Indien het maximale vermogen lager dan
50 W is, moet u “Amplifier Gain” in de andere
stand stellen zodat de luidsprekers niet kunnen
worden beschadigd (zie bladzijde 56 van de
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING).
• Om kortsluiting te voorkomen, moet u de
aansluitklemmen van ONGEBRUIKTE gekleurde
draden met isolatieband bedekken.
• De warmte-opnemer kan na gebruik erg heet
worden. Raak de warmte-opnemer niet aan
wanneer u dit apparaat van zijn plaats haalt.

Trim plate
Frontrahmen
Plaque
d’assemblage
Sierplaat

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm)*1
Flachkopfschrauben (M5 x 8 mm)*1
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm)*1
Schroeven met platte kop (M5 x 8 mm)*1

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
Flachkopfschrauben (M5 x 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm)
Schroeven met platte kop (M5 x 8 mm)

Round head screws (M2.6 x 3 mm)*1
Rundkopfschrauben (M2,6 x 3 mm)*1
Vis à tête ronde (M2,6 x 3 mm)*1
Schroeven met ronde kop (M2,6 x 3 mm)*1

Round head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
Rundkopfschrauben (M5 x 8 mm)
Vis à tête ronde (M5 x 8 mm)
Schroeven met ronde kop (M5 x 8 mm)

Use these screws when installing the unit without the supplied sleeve.
Verwenden Sie diese Schrauben, wenn Sie das Gerät ohne die mitgelieferte Halterung einbauen.
Utilisez ces vis lors de l’installation de l’appareil sans le manchon fourni.
Gebruik deze schroeven wanneer u het toestel zonder de bijgeleverde huls installeert.

Crimp connector
Crimpanschlüsse
Raccord à sertir
Krimpaansluiting

1

KW-AVX710[E]instal_.indb 1

07.12.7 10:38:09 AM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH
MOUNTING)

EINBAU
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE INSTALLEREN (MONTEREN IN
TABLEAU DE BORD)
DASHBOARD)

The following illustration shows a typical
installation. However, you should make
adjustments corresponding to your specific car.
If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your
JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a
company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit
correctly, have it installed by a qualified
technician.

Die folgende Abbildung zeigt die typische
Installation. Sie müssen aber Justierungen
entsprechend des vorliegenden Fahrzeugs
vornehmen. Wenn Sie Fragen haben oder weitere
Informationen zu Einbausätzen benötigen,
wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler für JVC
Autoradiohändler oder einen Fachhändler für die
Einbausätze.
• Wenn bezüglich des richtigen Einbaus
dieses Geräts Zweifel bestehen, immer einen
qualifizierten Techniker um Rat fragen.

L’illustration suivante est un exemple
d’installation typique. Cependant, vous devez
faire les ajustements correspondant à votre
voiture. Si vous avez des questions ou avez
besoin d’information sur des kits d’installation,
consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou
une compagnie d’approvisionnement.
• Si vous n’êtes pas sûr de pouvoir installer
l’appareil correctement, faite-le installer par un
technicien qualifié.

Avant d’installer l’appareil

Before installing the unit
• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the
screws provided, as instructed. If other screws are
used, parts could become loose or damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to
pinch any connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to
maintain proper ventilation when installing the
unit.

1

2
3

4
5
6

Remove the audio system originally installed in
the car, together with its mounting brackets.
• Be sure to keep all the screws and parts
removed from your car for future use.
Install the sleeve in the dashboard of the car.
Attach the brackets to the main unit.
• Make sure to use the supplied flat head screws
(M5 x 8 mm). If longer screws are used, they
could damage the unit.
Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 and 4.
Install the main unit in the sleeve.
Attach the trim plate.

• Lors du montage de l’appareil, assurez-vous
d’utiliser les vis fournies, de la façon indiquée.
Si vous utilisez d’autres vis, certaines pièces
peuvent être perdues ou endommagées.
• Lorsque vous serrez des vis ou des boulons,
faites attention de ne pas pincer un cordon de
connexion.
• Assurez-vous de ne pas bloquer le ventilateur
sur le panneau arrière lors de l’installation afin
de permettre une ventilation correcte.

Vor dem Einbau des Geräts
• Bei der Montage dieses Gerätssollen immer
die mitgelieferten Schrauben wie beschrieben
verwendet werden. Wenn andere Schrauben
verwendet werden, besteht die Gefahr, dass sich
Teile lockern oder beschädigt werden könnten.
• Beim Festziehen von Schrauben oder
Steckschrauben immer darauf achten, keine Kabel
einzuklemmen.
• Sicherstellen, dass nicht das Gebläse an der
Rückseite verdeckt wird, um richtige Ventilation
beim Einbau zu gewährleisten.

1

2
3

4
5
6

1

Bauen Sie die ursprünglich im Fahrzeug
vorhandene Audioanlage zusammen mit ihren
Befestigungsteilen aus.
• Alle aus dem Fahrzeug ausgebauten
Schrauben und anderen Teile müssen zur
Wiederverwendung aufbewahrt werden.
Die Halterung im Armaturenbrett des Fahrzeugs
einbauen.
Die Konsolen am Hauptgerät anbringen.
• Stellen Sie sicher, nur die mitgelieferten
Flachkopfschrauben zu verwenden (M5 x 8
mm). Wenn längere Schrauben verwendet
werden, kann dann das Gerät dadurch
beschädigt werden.
Erfordert keine elektrischen Verbindungen.
• Siehe Seite 3 und 4.
Das Hauptgerät in der Halterung einbauen.
Den Frontrahmen anbringen.

2
3

4
5
6

1

De volgende afbeelding toont een
standaardinstallatie. Afhankelijk van uw auto
moet het toestel mogelijk wat anders worden
geïnstalleerd. Raadpleeg uw JVC car audio dealer of
een leverancier van installatiekits indien u vragen
heeft of informatie over installatiekits wilt.
• Raadpleeg een erkend technicus indien u twijfels
heeft over het juist installeren van dit toestel.

Alvorens het toestel te installeren
• Gebruik beslist de bijgeleverde schroeven als
aangegeven voor het bevestigen van dit toestel.
Door het gebruik van andere schroeven, kunnen
onderdelen worden beschadigd of wordt het
toestel mogelijk niet correct bevestigd.
• Let bij het vastdraaien van schroeven en bouten
goed op zodat er geen snoeren, etc. worden
vastgekneld.
• Let goed op dat bij het installeren de ventilator op
het achterpaneel niet wordt gebokkeerd zodat het
toestel goed geventileerd kan worden.

1
Retirez le système audio d’origine installé dans
la voiture en même temps que les supports de
montage.
• Assurez-vous de conserver toutes les vis et
pièces détachées de votre voiture pour une
utilisation dans le future.
Installez le manchon dans le tableau de bord
de la voiture.
Attachez les supports à l’appareil principal.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis à tête plate
fournis —(M5 × 8 mm). Vous risquez
d’endommager l’appareil si vous utilisez des
vis plus longues.
Réalisez les connexions électriques requises.
• Référez-vous aux pages 3 et 4.
Installez l’appareil principal dans le manchon.
Fixez la plaque d’assemblage

2
3

4
5
6

Verwijder het oorspronkelijk geplaatste
audiosysteem, met de daarbij behorende
bevestigingsbeugels, uit de auto.
• Bewaar alle uit de auto verwijderde schroeven
en onderdelen voor later gebruik.
Plaats de huls in het dashboard van de auto.
Bevestig de beugels aan het hoofdtoestel.
• Gebruik beslist de bijgeleverde schroeven met
platte kop (M5 x 8 mm). Langere schroeven
kunnen het toestel namelijk beschadigen.
Maak de vereiste elektrische verbindingen.
• Zie bladzijden 3 en 4.
Installeer het hoofdtoestel in de huls.
Bevestig de sierplaat.

4

2

5

Sleeve
Halterung
Manchon
Huls

Round head screws (M2.6 x 3 mm)
Rundkopfschrauben (M2,6 x 3 mm)
Vis à tête ronde (M2,6 x 3 mm)
Schroeven met ronde kop (M2,6 x 3 mm)
Brackets
Konsolen
Supports
Beugels

3

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
Flachkopfschrauben (M5 x 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm)
Schroeven met platte kop (M5 x 8 mm)

6
Trim plate
Frontrahmen
Plaque d’assemblage
Sierplaat

30˚

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject when in use.
Bauen Sie das Gerät ein einem Winkel von weniger als 30˚ ein, wobei Sie darauf achten, dass der Monitor bei Gebrauch ausfährt.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30°, en tenant compte du fait que le moniteur doit être déployé lors de son utilisation.
Installeer het toestel met een kleinere hoek dan 30˚, en controleer dat de monitor kan worden uitgeworpen voor gebruik.

2

KW-AVX710[E]instal_.indb 2

07.12.7 10:38:19 AM

100

Required space for the monitor ejection
Erforderlicher Platz für Monitorausschub
Espace requis pour le déploiement du moniteur
Vereiste vrije ruimte voor het uitwerpen van de monitor

90.5

160

Unit:
Einheit:
Unité:
Eenheid:

mm
mm
mm
mm

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

ELEKTRISCHE VERBINDINGEN

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you
disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make
all electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s
chassis again after installation.

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir,
daß Sie den negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen
und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse herstellen, bevor
das Gerät eingebaut wird.
• Sicherstellen erneut, daß das Gerät nach
dem Einbau Chassis des Fahrzeugs geerdet
wird.

Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous
recommandons de débrancher la borne
négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les
raccordements électriques avant d’installer
l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la
mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de
la voiture après l’installation.

Om kortsluiting te voorkomen adviseren wij u om de
minpool van de accu los te maken en alle elektrische
verbindingen tot stand te brengen voordat u het
apparaat in de auto installeert.
• Aard dit toestel beslist weer op het chassis
van de auto na het installeren.

VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim
Anschließen der Stromversorgung und
Lautsprecher:

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la
connexion des enceintes:

VOORZORGSMAATREGELEN bij
hetverbinden van de stroomkabeldraad
met de speakers:

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and
speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the
power cord to the car battery; otherwise,
the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the
power cord to the speakers, check the speaker
wiring in your car.

• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du
cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du
cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le
câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.

• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels
NICHT an der Autobatterie anschließen, da
sonst das Gerät schwer beschädigt wird.
• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen
des Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die
Lautsprecher, die Lautsprecherverdrahtung in
Ihrem Auto überprüfen.

• Verbind de speakerdraden van de
stroomkabel NIET met de accu van de auto;
als u dit wel doet, zal het apparaat ernstige
schade oplopen.
• VOORDAT u de speakerdraden van de stroomkabel
met de speakers verbindt, moet u de bedrading
van de speakers in uw auto controleren.

If your car is equipped with the ISO connector
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist
Si votre voiture est équippée d’un connecteur ISO
Indien uw auto een ISO-aansluiting heeft

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles
Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel- (Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen
Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel (Vauxhall)
Voor bepaalde VW/Audi en Opel (Vauxhall) auto’s

•
•
•
•

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.
U moet mogelijk de bedrading van het bijgeleverde spanningssnoer als afgebeeld veranderen.
• Raadpleeg een erkend autogarage alvorens deze receiver te installeren.

Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.
Verbind de ISO-stekkers zoals afgebeeld.
From the car body
Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie
De la carrosserie de la voiture
Van het chassis van de auto

ISO connector of the supplied power cord
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation fourni
ISO-stekker van het bijgeleverde spanningssnoer

Original wiring
Originalverdrahtung
Câblage original
Oorspronkelijke bedrading

Modified wiring 1
Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1
Câblage modifié 1
Veranderde bedrading 1

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.
Gebruik methode 2 voor het veranderen van de bedrading indien de receiver niet wordt ingeschakeld.

View from the lead side
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen
Vue à partir du côté des fils
Gezien vanaf de spanningstoevoerkant

Modified wiring 2
Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2
Câblage modifié 2
Veranderde bedrading 2

A

ISO connector
ISO-Steckverbinder
Connecteur ISO
ISO-aansluiting

Y: Yellow
Gelb
Jaune
Geel
R: Red
Rot
Rouge
Rood

Connecting the parking brake lead / Anschließen des Feststellbremsenkabels / Connexion du fil de frein de stationnement / Verbinden van het handremdraad

Connect the parking brake lead to the parking brake system built in the car.
Das Feststellbremsenkabel mit dem Feststellbremssystem des Fahrzeugs verbinden.
Connectez le fil de frein de stationnement au système de frein de
a
stationnement intégré à la voiture.
Verbind het handremdraad met het in de auto ingebouwde handremsysteem.

Parking brake
Feststellbremse
Frein de stationnement
Handremsysteem

Parking brake lead (light green)
Feststellbremsenkabel (hellgrün)
Fil du frein de stationnement (vert clair)
Handremdraad (lichtgroen)

Crimp connector
Crimpanschlüsse
Raccord à sertir
Krimpaansluiting

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Feststellbremsenschalter (Fahrzeuginneres)
Commutateur de frein de stationnement (intérieur de la voiture)
Handremsysteemschakelaar (in de auto)

To metallic body or chassis of the car
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum
Fahrwerk des Autos
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de
la voiture
Naar metalen ondergrond of chassis
van de auto

3

KW-AVX710[E]instal_.indb 3

07.12.7 10:38:23 AM

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

FRANÇAIS

NEDERLANDS

Connections without using the ISO connector / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung des ISO-Steckverbinders / Connexions sans utiliser le connecteur ISO / Verbinden zonder
gebruik van de ISO-aansluiting
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the
vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause
serious damage to this unit. The leads of the
power cord and those of the connector from the
car body may be different in color.

1
2
3
4

Cut the ISO connector.
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in
the order specified in the illustration below.
Connect the aerial cord.
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im
Fahrzeug sorgfältig überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse
können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät hervorrufen.
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des
Anschlusses im Fahrzeug können sich farblich
unterscheiden.

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez
attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une
connexion incorrecte peut endommager
sérieusement l’appareil. Le fil du cordon
d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis
de la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.

Alvorens de verbindingen tot stand te
brengen: Moet u de bedrading in de auto
zorgvuldig. Het apparaat kan door verkeerde
verbindingen ernstige schade oplopen. De draden
van het stroomsnoer verschillen mogelijk van kleur
metde aansluitingen op het chassis van de auto.

1
2

1
2

1
2

3
4
Power cord
Stromkable
Cordon d’alimentation
Stroomkabel

Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.
Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der
Reihenfolge anschließen, wie in der Abbildung
unten gezeigt.
Das Antennenkabel anschließen.
Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.

Knip de ISO-stekker af.
Verbind de gekleurde draden van het
stroomsnoer in de afbeelding hieronder
aangegeven volgorde.
Sluit de antenne aan.
Verbind de draadbundel daarna met het
apparaat.

3
4

Fan
Teil
Ventilateur
Ventilator

OE REMOTE Steering wheel remote
OE REMOTE Lenkrad-Fernbedienung
OE REMOTE Télécommande de volant
OE REMOTE stuur-afstandsbediening

15 A fuse
15 A Sicherung
Fusible 15 A
Zekering 15 A

Rear ground terminal
Hintere Erdungscan-schlußklemme
Borne arrière de masse
Massaklem aan de achterkant

ISO connector
ISO-Steckverbinder
Connecteur ISO
ISO-aansluiting

See each diagram on pages 5 and 6.
Sie jede Schemazeichnung auf Seite 5 und 6.
Référez-vous à chaque diagramme des pages 5 et 6.
Zie de afbeeldingen op bladzijden 5 en 6.

Black
Schwarz
Noir
Zwart

Yellow*3
Gelb*3
Jaune*3
Geel*3

*2
*2
*2
*2

3
4

Coupez le connecteur ISO.
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon
d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur
l’illustration ci-dessous.
Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à
l’appareil.

Not supplied
Nicht mitgeliefert
Non fourni
Niet bijgeleverd

Red
Rot
Rouge
Rood

*2
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Naar metalen ondergrond of chassis van de auto

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the
ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschließen
an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
Naar een onder spanning staande aansluitklem in het zekeringblok die is
aangesloten op de accu van de auto (u passeert de ontstekingsschakelaar)
(constant 12 V)

Fuse block
Sicherungsblock
Porte-fusible
Zekeringblok

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Naar een aansluitklem in het zekeringblok

*3

Before checking the operation of this unit
prior to installation, this lead must be
connected, otherwise power cannot be
turned on.
*3 Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit
des Geräts vor dem Einbau, muß diese
Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst die
Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden
kann.
*3 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet
appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être
raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être
mis sous tension.
*3 Voordat u controleert of het apparaat werkt
(alvorens het te installeren), moet deze draad
aangesloten zijn. Als dit niet het geval is, kan
de stroom niet worden ingeschakeld.

*2

Ignition switch
Zündschalter
Interrupteur d’allumage
Ontstekingsschakelaar

Blue with white stripe
Blau mit weißem Streifen
Bleu avec bande blanche
Blauw met witte streep

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max.
200 mA)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
(200 mA max.)
Naar afstandsdraad van andere apparatuur of antenne met circuit indien aanwezig
(200 mA max.)

Orange with white stripe
Orange mit weißem Streifen
Orange avec bande blanche
Oranje met witte streep

To car light control switch
Zum Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-Schalter
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
Naar schakelaar van autoverlichting

Brown
Braun
Marron
Bruin

To cellular phone system
Zur Mobiltelefon
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
Naar het mobiele-telefoonsysteem

Light green
Hellgrün
Vert clair
Lichtgroen

To parking brake (see diagram Å on page 3.)
An Feststellbremse (siehe Schaltplan Å auf Seite 3.)
Au frein de stationnement (voir le diagramme Å de
la page 3.)
Naar handremsysteem (zie schema Å op bladzijde 3.)
Crimp connector
Crimpanschlüsse
Raccord à sertir
Krimpaansluiting

White with black stripe
Weiß mit schwarzem
Streifen
Blanc avec bande noire
Wit met zwarte streep

White
Weiß
Blanc
Wit

Left speaker (front)
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Linkerspeaker (voorin)

Gray with black stripe
Grau mit schwarzem
Streifen
Gris avec bande noire
Grijs met zwarte streep

Gray
Grau
Gris
Grijs

Green with black stripe
Grün mit schwarzem
Streifen
Vert avec bande noire
Groen met zwarte streep

Green Purple with black stripe
Lila mit schwarzem
Grün
Streifen
Vert
Groen Violet avec bande noire
Paars met zwarte streep

Left speaker (rear)
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Linkerspeaker (achterin)

Right speaker (front)
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Rechterspeaker (voorin)

Purple
Lila
Violet
Paars

Right speaker (rear)
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
Rechterspeaker (achterin)

4

KW-AVX710[E]instal_.indb 4

07.12.7 10:38:27 AM

A Connections for external component playback / Anschlüsse für externe Komponente / Connexions pour un appareil de lecture extérieur /
Verbinden voor weergave van een extern component

AV amplifier or decoder
AV-Verstärker oder -Decoder
Amplificateur AV ou décodeur
AV-versterker of decoder

Extension lead (not supplied)
Rückwärtsgangsignal-skabel (nicht mitgeliefert)
Cordon prolongateur (non fourni)
Verlengsnoer (niet bijgeleverd)

External monitor
Externer Monitor
Moniteur extérieur
Externe monitor

Video cord (not supplied)
Videokabel (nicht mitgeliefert)
Cordon vidéo (non fourni)
Videosnoer (niet meegeleverd)
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
Digitales Optokabel (nicht mitgeliefert)
Câble optique numérique (non fourni)
Digitale optische kabel (niet bijgeleverd)

Crimp connector (not supplied)*5
Crimpanschlüsse (nicht mitgeliefert) *5
Raccord à sertir (non fourni)*5
Krimpaansluiting (niet bijgeleverd)*5
To reverse lamp
An Rückfahrleuchte
Aux feux de recul
Naar achteruitrijlamp

To car battery
Zur Autobatterie
À la batterie de la voiture
Naar auto-accu
Reverse lamp lead*4
Rückfahrleuchtenleitung*4
Fil des feux de recul*4
Draad van achteruitrijlamp*4

Rear view camera KV-CM1*6
Rückfahrkamera KV-CM1*6
Caméra de recul KV-CM1*6
Achteruitkijkcamera KV-CM1*6
Camcorder, Navigation System, etc.
Camcorder, Navigationssystem usw.
Caméscope, système de navigation, etc.
Camcorder, navigatiesysteem, etc.
*4 Required only when connecting a rear view
camera to VIDEO IN terminal.
*5 Refer to å in diagram Å on page 3.
*6 Set “AV Input” setting to “Camera” when
using (see page 55 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

Audio/video cord (not supplied)
Audio-/Videokabel (nicht mitgeliefert)
Cordon audio/vidéo (non fourni)
Audio- en videosnoeren (niet bijgeleverd)

*4 Nur erforderlich, wenn eine Rückfahrkamera am
Anschluss VIDEO IN angeschlossen wird.
*5 Siehe å in Schaltplan Å auf Seite 3.
*6 Stellen Sie die Einstellung “AV Input” auf
“Camera” bei der Verwendung (siehe Seite 55 in
der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).

Reverse lamp
Rückfahrleuchte
Feux de recul
Achteruitrijlamp
*4 Requis uniquement lors de la connexion d’une
caméra de recul à la prise VIDEO IN.
*5 Reportez vous à å du diagramme Å de la
page 3.
*6 Réglez “AV Input” sur “Camera” lors de l’utilisation
(voir page 55 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

*4 Alleen vereist wanneer een achteruitkijkcamera
met de VIDEO IN aansluiting wordt verbonden.
*5 Zie å in afbeelding Å op bladzijde 3.
*6 Stel voor gebruik “AV Input” op “Camera” (zie
bladzijde 55 van de GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING).

B Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Connexion de la télécommande de volant /
Verbinden met de stuurwiel-afstandsbediening
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel
remote controller, you can operate this unit
using the controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote
adapter (not supplied) which matches with
your car is required. Consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.

Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung
ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver
steuern. Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von
JVC (nicht mitgeliefert) erforderlich. Für weitere
Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC
Autoradiohändler.

Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande
de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio
en utilisant la télécommande. Pour le faire, un
adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC
(non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture est
nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio
JVC pour les détails.

OE REMOTE Steering wheel remote
OE REMOTE Lenkrad-Fernbedienung
OE REMOTE Télécommande de volant
OE REMOTE stuur-afstandsbediening

Indien uw auto een stuurwiel-afstandsbediening
heeft, kunt u deze receiver met die
afstandsbediening bedienen. Hiervoor heeft u
echter een JVC adapter (niet bijgeleverd) nodig die
geschikt is voor de stuurwiel-afstandsbediening
van uw auto. Raadpleeg uw JVC car audio dealer
voor details.

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)
Stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (in de auto)
OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht mitgeliefert)
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)
Adapter voor stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (niet bijgeleverd)

C Connecting an external amplifier / Anschließen eines externen Verstärkers / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur / Verbinden van een
externe versterker
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car
stereo system.
• You can supply the power to the amplifier by
connecting the remote leads (blue with white
stripe) of this unit to the amplifier. (To connect
other equipment using the remote leads, Yconnectors need to be separately purchased.)
• Disconnect the speakers from the unit, and
connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of the unit unused.
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and
send the audio signals only to the external
amplifier to get clear sound and to prevent
internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page
56 of the INSTRUCTIONS.

Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre
Autostereoanlage zu erweitern.
• Sie können den Verstärker mit Strom versorgen,
indem Sie die Fernsteuerleitungen (blau mit
weißem Streifen) dieses Geräts an den Verstärker
anschließen. (Zum Anschluss anderer Geräte
mittels der Fernsteuerleitungen müssen Y-Stecker
getrennt beschafft werden.)
• Trennen Sie die Lautsprecher vom Hauptgerät ab
und schließen sie am Verstärker an. Lassen Sie die
Lautsprecherkabel des Geräts unbenutzt.
• Sie können den eingebauten Verstärker abschalten
und die Audiosignale ausschließlich zum externen
Verstärker ausgeben, um einen klaren Klang zu
erhalten und Hitzestau im Gerät zu vermeiden.
Siehe Seite 56 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.

Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour
améliorer votre système stéréo.
• Vous pouvez alimenter l’amplificateur en
connectant les fils de télécommande (bleu à
bande blanche( de cet appareil à l’amplificateur.
(Pour connecter un autre appareil en utilisant
les fils de télécommande, vous devez acheter
des connecteurs Y séparément.)
• Déconnectez les enceintes de l’appareil
principal et connectez-les aux amplificateurs.
Laissez les fils d’enceintes de l’appareil inutilisés.
• Vous pouvez mettre hors service l’amplificateur
intégré et envoyer les signaux audio
uniquement vers un ou plusieurs amplificateurs
extérieurs pour obtenir des sons plus clairs et
éviter un échauffement interne de l’appareil.
Référez-vous à la page 56 du MANUEL
D’INSTRUCTIONS..

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)
Afstandbedieningsdraad (Blauw met witte streep)

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-Anschluß (für diesen Receiver nicht mitgeliefert)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Y-connector (niet bij deze receiver bijgeleverd)

Remote lead
Fernbedienungsleitung
Fil d’alimentation à distance
Afstandbedieningsdraad
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC Amplificateur
JVC Versterker

*7 Firmly attach the ground lead to the metallic
body or to the chassis of the car—to the place
uncoated with paint (if coated with paint,
remove the paint before attaching the lead).
Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

U kunt uw auto-stereosysteem met een versterker
uitbreiden.
• Voor stroomtoevoer naar de versterker moet
u de afstandsbedieningsdraden (blauw met
witte streep) van dit toestel met de versterker
verbinden. (Voor het verbinden van andere
apparatuur met gebruik van de afstandsbedie
ningsdraden, moet u los verkrijgbare Y-stekkers
gebruiken.)
• Ontkoppel de luidsprekers van het hoofdtoestel
en verbind de luidsprekers vervolgens
met de versterkers. Gebruik in dit geval de
luidsprekeraansluitingen van het toestel dus niet.
• U kunt de ingebouwde versterker uitschakelen
en uitsluitend de audiosignalen naar de externe
versterker sturen voor een helderder geluid en te
voorkomen dat dit toestel oververhit raakt. Zie
bladzijde 56 van de GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING.

*7
Front speakers
Vordere Lautsprecher
Enceintes avant
Voorspeakers
*7 Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der
Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die
Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die
Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack
der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den Leiter befestigen).
Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß
angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt
werden.

Rear speakers
Hintere
Lautsprecher
Enceintes arrière
Achterspeakers

To the remote lead of other equipment or power
aerial if any
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der
Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à
l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
Naar afstandsdraad van andere apparatuur of
antenne met circuit indien aanwezig

*7 Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse
au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un
endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture
(s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord
la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait
correctement.

*7 Bevestig de aardedraad goed met een metalen
onderdeel of het chassis van de auto—bevestig
op een niet-gelakt gedeelte (indien gelakt,
schuur dan af alvorens de draad te bevestigen).
Het toestel kan worden beschadigd indien de
aardedraad niet goed is aangesloten.

5

KW-AVX710[E]instal_.indb 5

07.12.7 10:38:31 AM

D Connections to the CD changer jack / Anschlüsse an der CD-Wechsler-Buchse / Connexions à la prise du changeur de CD / Verbinden met de
CD-wisselaaraansluiting
When connecting the external components, refer
also to the manuals supplied for the components
and adapter.

Beim Anschließen der externen Komponenten
siehe auch für die Komponenten und den Adapter
mitgelieferte Anleitungen.

Lors de la connexion des appareils extérieurs,
référez-vous aussi aux manuels fournis avec les
appareils et les adaptateurs.

Zie tevens de gebruiksaanwijzingen van de andere
componenten en adapter voor het verbinden van
externe componenten.

CAUTION:

ACHTUNG:

PRECAUTION:

WAARSCHUWING:

Before connecting the external components,
make sure that the unit is turned off.

Vor dem Anschließen der externen Komponenten
sicherstellen, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.

Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs,
assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.

Controleer alvorens de externe componenten
aan te sluiten dat dit toestel beslist is
uitgeschakeld.

You can connect the following JVC components
to the CD changer jack.
JVC component
Model name

Sie können die folgenden JVC-Komponenten an die
CD-Wechslerbuchse anschließen.
JVC-Komponente
Model name

CD changer (CD-CH)
JVC DAB tuner

Vous pouvez connecter les appareils JVC suivants
à la prise de changeur de CD.
Appareil JVC
Nom du modèle

CH-X1500, etc.

CD-Wechsler (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, usw.

Changeur de CD (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

KT-DB1000

DAB-Tuner von JVC

KT-DB1000

Tuner DAB JVC

KT-DB1000

You can also connect the following components
through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased
separately.
Component
Adapter
Model name
Bluetooth device
Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
iPod
Interface adapter
for iPod
KS-PD100
Portable audio player with Line input adapter
line output jacks
KS-U57
Portable audio player with AUX input adapter
3.5 mm stereo mini jack
KS-U58
When connecting more than one component
(maximum: three), it is recommended that you
connect the components in series as explained
below.

Sie können auch die folgenden externen
Komponenten über die verschiedenen JVC-Adapter
anschließen.
• Es kann erforderlich sein, Verbindungskabel
getrennt zu kaufen.
Komponente
Adapter
Modellname
Bluetooth-Gerät
Bluetooth-Adapter
KS-BTA200
iPod
Schnittstellenadapter
für iPodz
KS-PD100
Tragbarer Audio-Player
Linemit Line-Ausgangsbuchsen Eingangsadapter
KS-U57
AUXTragbarer Audio-Player
Eingangsadapter
mit 3,5-mm-StereoMinibuchse
KS-U58
Beim Anschließen von mehr als einer Komponente
(Maximum: drei) wird empfohlen, dass Sie die
Komponenten in Serie anschließen, wie unten
beschrieben.

When connecting two components in series
Beim Anschließen von zwei Komponenten in Serie
Lors de la connexion de deux appareils en série
Indien u twee componenten in-serie verbindt

CD changer jack
Buchse für CD-Wechsler
Prise du changeur de CD
Aansluiting voor CD-wisselaar

Vous pouvez aussi connecter les appareils
suivants en utilisant divers adaptateurs JVC.
• Vous pouvez avoir besoin d’acheter certains
cordons de connexion séparément.
Adaptateur
Appareil
Nom du modèle
Périphérique Bluetooth
Adaptateur
Bluetooth
KS-BTA200
iPod
Adaptateur
d’interface pour
iPod
KS-PD100
Adaptateur
Lecteur audio portable
d’entrée de ligne
avec prises de sortie de
ligne
KS-U57
Lecteur audio portable
Adaptateur
avec mini fiche stéréo de
d’entrée auxiliaire
3,5 mm
KS-U58
Lors de la connexion de plus d’un appareil
(maximum: trois), il est recommandé que vous
connectiez les appareils en série comme nous
l’expliquons ci-dessous.

CD changer jack
Buchse für CD-Wechsler
Prise du changeur de CD
Aansluiting voor CD-wisselaar

Hold the connector top tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).
Halten Sie die Steckverbinder-Oberseite fest ( 1 ) und ziehen Sie ihn heraus
( 2 ).
Tenez fermement le connecteur par-dessus ( 1 ) et tirez vers l’extérieur
( 2 ).
Druk stevig op de bovenkant van de stekker ( 1 ) en trek tegelijkertijd de
stekker ( 2 ) naar u toe.

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers
grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s
chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• Unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers
grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

CH-X1500, etc

JVC DAB tuner

KT-DB1000

U kunt tevens de volgende componenten via
diverse JVC adapter verbinden.
• U moet mogelijk aansluitsnoeren aanschaffen.
Component
Adapter
Modelnaam
Bluetooth apparatuur
Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
iPod
Interface-adapter
voor iPod
KS-PD100
Draagbare audiospeler met Lijningangsadapter
lijnuitgangsaansluitingen KS-U57
Draagbare audiospeler
AUXmet 3,5 mm stereo miniingangsadapter
aansluiting
KS-U58
Indien u meer dan een component aansluit
(maximaal: drie), dient u bij voorkeur de
componenten in-serie te verbinden zoals hieronder
wordt uitgelegd.

A KS-BTA200
B KT-DB1000
C*8 KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

*8 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 55 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
*8 Zur Verwendung dieser Komponenten stellen Sie die externe Eingangseinstellung richtig ein (siehe
Seite 55 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
*8 Pour utiliser ces appareils, réglez l’entrée extérieure correctement (voir page 55 du MANUEL
D’INSTRUCTIONS).
*8 Voor het gebruik van deze componenten moet de juiste externe ingangsinstelling zijn gekozen (zie
bladzijde 55 van de GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING).

To disconnect the connector / Zum Abtrennen des Steckverbinder / Pour déconnecter le connecteur /
Ontkoppelen van de stekker

TROUBLESHOOTING

CD-wisselaar (CD-CH)

When connecting three components in series
Beim Anschließen von drei Komponenten in Serie
Lors de la connexion de trois appareils en série
Indien u drie componenten in-serie verbindt

A KS-BTA200 / KT-DB1000
B*8 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

U kunt de volgende JVC componenten met de CDwisselaaraansluiting verbinden.
JVC component
Modelnaam

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Inc., eingetragen in den USA und anderen Ländern.
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
iPod is een handelsmerk van Apple Inc., geregistreerd in de V.S. en andere landen.

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

PROBLEMEN OPLOSSEN

• Die Sicherung brennt durch.
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig
angeschlossen?

FEHLERSUCHE

• Le fusible saute.
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés
correctement?

• De zekering slaat door.
* Zijn de rode en de zwarte draden op de juiste
manier aangesloten?

• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet
werden.
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous
tension.
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• De stroom kan niet worden ingeschakeld.
* Is de gele draad aangesloten?

• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.
• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen? * Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Ton verzerrt.
• Le son est déformé.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Sind die (–) Anschlußklemmen der linken und
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?
sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• Störgeräusche im Klang.
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren
und dickeren Kabeln an das Fahrzeugchassis
angeschlossen?

• Interférence avec les sons.
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle
connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un
cordon court et épais?

• Gerät wird heiß.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die (–) Anschlußklemmen der linken und
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?

• L’appareil devient chaud.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit
sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?

• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt
nicht.
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

• Er komt geen geluid uit de speakers.
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad kortgesloten?
• Het geluid wordt vervormd.
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad geaard?
* Zijn de “–” polen van de linker- en de
rechterspeakers gemeenschappelijk geaard?
• Geluid wordt door ruis gestoord.
* Is de aarde-aansluiting achter met gebruik van
kortere en dikkere snoeren met het chassis van de
auto verbonden?
• Het apparaat raakt verhit.
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad geaard?
* Zijn de “–” polen van de linker- en de
rechterspeakers gemeenschappelijk geaard?
• Receiver werkt helemaal niet.
* Heeft u de receiver teruggesteld?

6

KW-AVX710[E]instal_.indb 6

07.12.7 10:38:36 AM

ENGLISH
РУCCKИЙ

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR
DVD-ПРИЕМНИК С МОНИТОРОМ
ПРИЙМАЧ ТА ПРОГРАВАЧ DVD-ДИСКІВ ІЗ МОНІТОРОМ

УКРАЇНА

KW-AVX710

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 8.
Інформацію щодо відміни демонстрації функцій дисплею див. на стор. 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.
Вказівки по встановленню та виконанню підключень наведені у окремій інструкції.

INSTRUCTIONS
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
ІНСТРУКЦІЇ

LVT1779-005A
[EE]

Cover_KW-AVX710[EE].indd 2

07.11.28 7:28:33 PM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1.
2.
3.
4.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Cautions on the monitor:

WARNINGS:
To prevent accidents and damage

• The monitor built in this unit has been produced
with high precision, but it may have some
ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not
malfunction.
• Do not expose the monitor to direct sunlight.
• Do not operate the touch panel using a ball-point
pen or similar tool with the sharp tip.
Touch the buttons on the touch panel with your
finger directly (if you are wearing a glove, take it
off).
• When the temperature is very cold or very hot...
– Chemical changes occur inside, causing
malfunction.
– Pictures may not appear clearly or may move
slowly. Pictures may not be synchronized with
the sound or picture quality may decline in such
environments.

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and
gearshift lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

[European Union only]

2

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 2

07.12.6 2:18:57 PM

How to reset your unit

INTRODUCTION
Playable disc types .......................... 4
Basic operations—
Monitor panel/touch panel............ 5
Basic operations—
Remote controller (RM-RK252) ...... 6

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc
ENTER

NO EJECT?
EMERGENCY EJECT?

3

OPERATIONS
Before operating the unit ................ 8
Common operations ........................ 9
Listening to the radio ...................... 10
Disc operations ................................ 16

Exit

Back

2
1

at the same time

ENGLISH

Contents

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Bluetooth® operations—
Cellular phone/audio player .......... 30
Listening to the CD changer .............. 37
Listening to the DAB tuner ............... 39
Listening to the iPod........................ 43
Using other external components ..... 45

1

• If this does not work, reset the unit.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

SETTINGS
Sound equalization .......................... 48
Assigning titles to the sources .......... 49
Menu operations ............................. 50

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

REFERENCES
Maintenance ................................... 60
More about this unit ........................ 61
Troubleshooting .............................. 68
Specifications .................................. 72

3

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 3

INTRODUCTION
07.12.6 2:19:02 PM

ENGLISH

Playable disc types
Disc type

Recording format, file type, etc.

DVD

DVD Video (Region Code: 5)*1

Playable

DVD Audio
DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
DVD Video
(DVD-R/-RW*2, +R/+RW*3)
DVD-VR
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
• DVD-VR
JPEG
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/
MP3/WMA/WAV
WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level 1,
AAC
level 2, Romeo, Joliet
MPEG4
DVD+VR
DVD-RAM
Dual Disc
DVD side
Non-DVD side
CD/VCD
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)/DTS-CD
VCD (Video CD)
SVCD (Super Video CD)
CD-ROM
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
MP3/WMA/WAV
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo, JPEG
Joliet
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
AAC
MPEG4
*1 If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).
DVD-RW dual layer discs are not playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs.
+RW double layer discs are not playable.
Caution for DualDisc playback
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
4

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 4

07.12.6 2:19:02 PM

Display <AV Menu> screen. ☞ page 50
Display <Source Menu> screen. ☞ page 9
Display and erase the Short Cut windows.
Available functions vary among the sources. For details, see each source operation
section.

Adjust the volume.
Change the display information.
Change the sources. ☞ page 9
• Activate/deactivate TA
Standby Reception.
• Display <PTy Search> menu.
[Hold]
☞ page 12

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Monitor panel/touch panel

Remote sensor

• Display <Open/Tilt> menu.
• Eject the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
menu. [Hold]
• Close the monitor panel when <Open/Tilt>
menu is displayed.

• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power. [Hold]
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

<Open/Tilt> menu

Reset the unit.
• Use only when the internal system malfunctions.
•
•
•
•
•
•

• In the explanation, buttons on the touch panel
are indicated inside [ ].
• For details on the touch panel operations, see
each source operation section.
5

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 5

[OPEN]: Open the monitor panel.
[EJECT]: Eject the disc.
[CLOSE]: Close the monitor panel.
[TILT +/–]: Tilt the monitor panel.
[Exit]: Erase this screen.
Shaded icons cannot be used.

INTRODUCTION
07.12.6 2:19:03 PM

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Remote controller (RM-RK252)
Installing the battery

Main elements and features
R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace both batteries.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel
remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate
volume) for connection.

1

• Turns on the power.
• Attenuates the sound if the power is on.
• Turns off the power if pressed and held (while
the power is on).

2

• Reverse search
• Reverse slow motion (during pause)

3

Adjusts the volume level.
• Does not function as “2nd VOL.”

4

• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

5

• DVD/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.

6

Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “ .“

6

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 6

07.12.6 2:19:04 PM

Functions with other buttons (see i and o).

8

Changes the display information.

9

For disc operations:
• 5 / ∞:
DVD: Selects the title.
DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
Other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders.
• 4 / ¢:
– Press briefly: reverse skip/forward skip
– Press and hold: reverse search/forward
search
For FM/AM operations:
• 5 / ∞: Selects the preset stations.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for stations.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For DAB tuner operations:
• 5 / ∞: Select the services.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for
ensembles.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For Apple iPod operations:
• ∞: Starts playback/pauses
• 5: Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞
/ 4 / ¢ work as menu selecting
buttons).
In the main menu:
• 5: Returns to the previous menu.
• ∞: Confirms the selection.
• 4/¢
– Press briefly: Selects an item.
– Press and hold: Skips ten items at a time.
For Bluetooth operations:
• 4 / ¢: reverse skip/forward skip (for
audio player operation)

• Forward search
• Forward slow motion (during pause)

q

Selects the source.

w

For disc operations:
Starts playback/pauses.
For Bluetooth operations:
• Answers incoming calls.
• Starts playback/pauses. (for audio player
operation).

e

Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.

r

“TUNER”/”DAB”: Selects the bands.
“DISC”: Stops playback.
“Bluetooth PHONE”: Ends the call.
“Bluetooth AUDIO”: Starts playback/pauses.

t

VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

y

• DVD Video/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.

u

• Makes selection/settings.
• @ / #: Skips back or forward by five minutes
for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2.
• % / fi: Changes discs for “CD-CH.”

i*3 • Switches number entry mode for “DISC.”
• Erases the misentry after entering a wrong
number.
• Does not function as “SURROUND.”
o*3 Number buttons
• Enters numbers.
• “TUNER”/”DAB”: Selects the preset station/
service directly.
*1 Functions as a number button only (see o ).
*2 Not used for this unit.
*3 Functions when pressed with SHIFT.

7

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 7

p

ENGLISH

7

INTRODUCTION
07.12.6 2:19:05 PM

ENGLISH

Before operating the unit
@

You can cancel the demonstration on the screen and set
the clock.
• Non-available items will be shaded on the AV Menu
screens.

Set the clock settings.
Moves to the preceding menu page

Indication language:
In this manual, English indications are used
for purpose of explanation. You can select the
indication language. (☞ page 52)
Moves to the succeeding menu page

~

Turn on the power.

Ÿ

Display <AV Menu> screen.

!

Display <Setup> menu.

¤
⁄

Finish the procedure.

Cancel the demonstration.
Select <Off>.

Return to the previous screen.

8

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 8

07.12.6 2:19:05 PM

Selecting the playback source

ENGLISH

Common operations
Changing the display
information

• Available sources depend on the external
components you have connected, media you have
attached, and the <Input> settings you have made
(☞ page 55).

• Available display information varies among the
playback sources.

On the monitor panel only:

On the touch panel:

• Each time you press DISP, the display changes to
show the various information.
Ex. When the playback source is a DivX disc.
Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen
Exit

On the monitor panel:
Track list

Clock time in large numbers

TUNER = DAB = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD) =CD-CH,
iPod, or EXT-IN = Bluetooth PHONE =
Bluetooth AUDIO = AV-IN = (back to the
beginning)

Navigation screen
(When <Navigation> is
selected for <AV Input>)
(☞ page 55)

• You cannot select these sources if they are not ready.
Back to the beginning

9

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 9

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:06 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset no.

PS (station name) for FM Radio Data System. If no PS signal is
coming in, the tuned frequency appears.

Band

PTY code for FM Radio
Data System

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

☞ page 12
Tuner/Standby Reception
indicators

☞ page 9

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ
!

Press [BAND].

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In
the explanation,
they are
indicated inside
[ ].

Press [4] or [¢] to search for a station—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.
• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

3

When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
1

Press [AV MENU].

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• The MONO indicator lights up.
To restore stereo effect, select <Off>.

2

Press [Mode].

10

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 10

07.12.6 2:19:07 PM

Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number
4 of the FM1 band.

This function works only for FM bands. Once you have
activated this function (selected <Local>), it always
works when searching for FM stations.

1
2
3

1

Display the Preset List.

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

3

Select a preset number.

ENGLISH

Tuning in to stations with
sufficient signal strength

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be
detected.
• The DX indicator goes off, then the LO indicator
lights up.

FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)
This function works only for FM bands.
You can preset six stations for each band.

1
2
3

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

The station selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 4.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

11

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 11

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:07 PM

ENGLISH

Selecting a preset station

The following features are available only for FM
Radio Data System stations.

On the remote:

1

Searching for FM Radio Data
System programme—PTY
Search

2

You can search for your favorite programmes being
broadcast by selecting the PTY code for your favorite
programmes.

or
Hold

1

On the unit:

Display <PTy Search> menu.

• To select directly on the touch panel

• To select from the Preset List

1
You can also easily access <PTy Search> menu
by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel,
then...
☞ page 48
☞ page 14

2

12

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 12

07.12.6 2:19:08 PM

Storing your favorite programme types

Select a PTY code.
• In the example below, a PTY code is selected
from the Preset List.
If you enter <PTy Code> menu below, you can
select one from 29 PTY codes.

You can store your favorite PTY codes into the PTY
Preset List.
Ex.: Storing <Drama> into <Preset 1>

ENGLISH

2

PTY Search starts.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.

Available PTY codes:
News, Current Affairs, Information, Sport,
Education, Drama, Cultures, Science, Varied Speech,
Pop Music, Rock Music, Easy Listening, Light Classics
M, Serious Classics, Other Music, Weather & Metr,
Finance, Children’s Progs, Social Affairs, Religion,
Phone In, Travel & Touring, Leisure & Hobby, Jazz
Music, Country Music, National Music, Oldies Music,
Folk Music, Documentary

13

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 13

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:09 PM

ENGLISH

To activate PTY Standby Reception

Activating/deactivating TA/PTY
Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception

Indicator

Press
activate.

TP

on the monitor panel to

1
2
3

The unit will temporarily switch to
Lights up
Traffic Announcement (TA) if available,
from any source other than AM.
• The volume changes to the preset
TA volume level if the current level is
lower than the preset level (☞ page
54).
Not yet activated. Tune in to another
station providing the Radio Data
System signals.

Flashes

Press

Goes off

to deactivate.

PTY Standby Reception

Indicator

To activate, display <AV Menu>
screen, press [Mode], then press
[On] for <PTy Standby>. (☞ next
column)

PTY

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

PTY Standby Reception is now activated for PTY
code <News>: the initial setting.

You can easily activate or deactivate the PTY
Standby Reception by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...
☞ page 48
☞ page 12

The unit will temporarily switch to
Lights up
your favorite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
Not yet activated. Tune in to another
station providing the Radio Data
System signals.

Flashes

To deactivate, press [Off] for <PTy
Standby> in step 3 on the next
column.

Goes off

• When a DAB tuner is connected, TA Standby/PTY
Standby Reception also works for the DAB tuner and
searches for the services.

14

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 14

07.12.6 2:19:09 PM

Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception

1
2
3

When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM Radio Data System station of the same
network, possibly broadcasting the same programme
with stronger signals.

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

ENGLISH

To change the PTY code for PTY Standby
Reception

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency
areas (01 – 05)
A

4

Select your favorite PTY code.
Ex.: Selecting <Easy Listening>

When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking
Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see <AF Regional>. (☞ page 54)
• When the DAB tuner is connected, refer also to
“Tracing the same programme—Alternative
Frequency Reception (DAB AF).” (☞ page 42)

Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you select preset stations, the preset
station is tuned in.
If the signals from the FM Radio Data System preset
station are not sufficient for good reception, this
unit, using the AF data, tunes in to another station
broadcasting the same programme as the original
preset station is broadcasting. To activate this function,
select <On> for <Program Search>.(☞ page 54)
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.

15

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 15

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:10 PM

ENGLISH

Disc operations
The disc type is automatically detected, and playback starts automatically (for some discs: automatic start depends
on its internal program).
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks on it will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject
the disc.
If “ ” appears on the screen, the unit cannot accept the operation you have tried to do.
• In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted.

~

!

Open the monitor panel.

Insert a disc.

Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Ÿ

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [CLOSE].

Press [OPEN].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

When playing back a multi-channel encoded disc,
the multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• You can fully enjoy multi-channel sound by
connecting an amplifier or a decoder compatible
with these multi-channel sources. (☞ also page
65)

Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
16

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 16

07.12.6 2:19:10 PM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information. (☞ page 9)

DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter no./Playing time

Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal
channel no.

Disc type *1
Audio format
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
Playback mode

☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select chapter
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2
[5 ∞]
Select title/program/playlist

*1 DVD-VR also indicates either PRG (program) or PLAY (playlist) playback.
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback pictures
on the screen).

17

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 17

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:11 PM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information (☞ page 9).

For DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2: Folder no./Track no./Playing time
For JPEG: Folder no./File no.

Disc type
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total track no.
included on the
disc

☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 *1
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

Track no./Playing time

The PBC indicator
lights up when PBC is
in use.

Total track no.
included on the
disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total playing time

☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10
18

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 18

07.12.6 2:19:11 PM

ENGLISH

Track no./Playing time

Only for CD Text *3
Total track no.
included on the disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total playing time
☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

Audio format
(MP3/WMA/WAV)
Tag data appears
only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
Total track no. included on the disc

☞ page 22

[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

*3 “No Name” appears for conventional CDs.
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10
19

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 19

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:12 PM

ENGLISH

Operation buttons on the screen
You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• While the operation buttons are displayed, aspect ratio is fixed to <Full>. (☞ page 52)
• If no operation is done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is
displayed).

☞ pages 23 to 27 on how the operation buttons
particularly work for a variety of the discs

A
[SOURCE]
[AV MENU]
[SHORT CUT]
[3 / 8]
[7]
[4 ¢]

Display <Source Menu> screen
Display <AV Menu> screen
Display the Short Cut buttons
Start and pause playback
Stop playback
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Select folders
• The above buttons also work when they are not shown on
the screen (while watching the playback picture).
* While a disc menu is played back for DVD, [KEY] is
automatically displayed. On the disc menu, you can select a
menu item directly by touching it on the screen.

Touch the screen (center portion).

*

Touch [KEY].

B
For DVD/VCD/DivX menu operation playback
[2 3 5 ∞] Select the menu items
[ENT]
Confirm the selection
[TOP MENU] Display the disc menu
[MENU]
Display the disc menu
[RETURN]
Return to the previous menu or display the
menu (only for VCD with PBC)

Touch [KEY].

C
For entering the numbers
[DIRECT CLR] • Switch between chapter/track entry and
title/group/folder entry
• Erase the last entry when you enter a
wrong number
[0]–[9]=[ENT]
Enter numbers
Ex.: To enter “105,” press [1], [0], [5], then [ENT]

Touch [KEY].

To erase the operations, touch the screen again.
20

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 20

07.12.6 2:19:12 PM

Selecting playback modes
1

ENGLISH

You can use the following playback modes—Repeat or Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat

3

2
When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.
Disc type

Repeat

Random

Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Title: Repeats current title
Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Program: Repeats current program (not
available for Playlist playback)
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Repeats current folder

Folder: Repeats current folder

—
—
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks
—

Track:

Repeats current track (PBC not in
use)

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks (PBC not
in use)

Track:

Repeats current track*1

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

Track: Repeats current track*1
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder

Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

*1 You can also use [SHORT CUT] to turn on and off Track Repeat.

21

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 21

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:13 PM

ENGLISH

Selecting tracks on the list

Prohibiting disc ejection

If a disc includes folders, you can display the Folder/
Track (File) Lists, then start playback.

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

1

2

at the same time

3

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.

Select a folder (1), then a track (2).

Using Short Cut Icons
You can easily access the some frequently used
functions by using [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel.

1
Selected track starts playing. (* Press to move to
the previous/next pages of the list)
1 Current folder list number/total folder list
number
2 Current track list number/total track list
number of the current folder

2
• For video software:
Aspect ratio
(☞ page 52)

You can easily access the Track List by pressing DISP
on the monitor panel.

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

• For audio software:

Turn on or off Track Repeat
(Repeat play: ☞ page 21)

Selected track starts playing.
22

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 22

07.12.6 2:19:14 PM

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No sound can be heard.)

ENGLISH

Operations using the remote controller—RM-RK252

Select title (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select title (when not playing).

twice

Select title (during playback or pause).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

You can change the following items using the on-screen bar—audio language, audio stream, audio channel,
subtitle language, view angle, etc. (☞ pages 28 and 29)

23

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 23

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:14 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Forward slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3
Select program.
Select playlist (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select program (when not playing).

twice
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Select program/playlist (during playback or pause).
Using Original Program/Playlist screens ( ☞ page 28)
1

For Original Program
For Playlist

2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3

To erase the screen.

*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

24

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 24

07.12.6 2:19:15 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5 (No sound can be heard.)
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.
Select track (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

While playing...
Reverse/advance the scenes by five minutes.
Current playback position

2nd press

1st press

1st press

2nd press

3rd press

For DivX6: Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*4 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2 ] ¡3
*5 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2

25

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 25

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:16 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause. (Slide show: each file is shown for a few
seconds.)
Shows the current file until you change it if pressed during Slide show.
Select file.
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.

Select file (within the same folder).

twice

Select folder.

Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed while holding SHIFT.

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed
during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1
Forward slow motion during pause*2
(No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No
sound can be heard.)

During PBC playback...

Select aspect ratio.

2 Select the desired track.

Select an item on the menu.
To return to the previous menu, press
To cancel PBC playback
1

• To resume PBC, press
Select track.
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10
26

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 26

07.12.6 2:19:17 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5
Select track.

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5
Select folder.
Select track (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

*4 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*5 Search speed: x2 ] x10

27

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 27

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:17 PM

ENGLISH

Using the list screens

Operations using the on-screen
bar

You can use Original Program or Playlist
screen anytime while playing DVD-VR with its data
recorded.

1

2

These operations are possible on the screen using
the remote controller, while playing the following
discs—DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG.

Display the Original Program/Playlist screen.

1

Display the on-screen bar. (☞page 29)

2

Select an item.

3

Make a selection.
If a pop-up menu appears...

Select an item you want.

To erase the screen

Ex. For DVD-Video

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
the recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/playlist*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of playlist
8 Total number of chapters included in the playlist
9 Playback time

• For entering time/numbers...
:
Move the entry position

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

:
Select a number
To remove the on-screen bar

28

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 28

07.12.6 2:19:18 PM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Information
Operation

Above example is of DVD Video. Items shown on the bar vary due to the disc type.
1 Disc type
2 • DVD: Audio signal format
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD Video:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
T. RPT:
Title repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
F. RND: Folder random
A. RND: All (Disc) random
JPEG:
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
VCD:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter

5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
Remaining title time (for DVD)
Remaining disc time (for others)
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track *2
Remaining time of the current
chapter/track *2
6 Playback status
Play
Reverse/forward search
Reverse/forward slow-motion
Pause
Stop
7 Operation icons
Change time indication (see 5)
Time Search (Specify a certain
scene by entering time.)
Title Search (by its number)
Chapter Search (by its number)
Track Search (by its number)
Repeat play *1
Random play *1
Change the audio language, audio
stream, or audio channel
Change or erase the subtitle
language
Change the view angle

Current program/chapter
Current Playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file

*1 ☞ page 21
*2 Not applicable for DVD-VR

29

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 29

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 2:19:19 PM

ENGLISH

Bluetooth® operations — Cellular phone/audio player
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the
Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD changer jack
on the rear.
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the
countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.

To register using <Open>
Preparation:
Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth
function.

1

To use a Bluetooth device through the unit (“Bluetooth
PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“Bluetooth PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”).

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press
[5] or [∞] to select it.

2

3

Connecting a new Bluetooth
device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in <Bluetooth>
menu to register and establish the connection with a
device.
• Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as
the source to operate <Bluetooth> menu.
Open

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Search

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating this unit.

Go to other menu items

4

Enter a PIN (Personal Identification
Number)* code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number).
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.

30

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 30

07.12.6 2:19:20 PM

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Enter]: Confirms the entry.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the above
step) on the device to be connected.

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

To register using <Search>
• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press [5]
or [∞] to select it.

4
5

6

Press [AV MENU].

4
5

Select a device you want to connect.

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Special Device].
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
Use <Open> (or <Search>) to connect.

To connect/disconnect a registered
device

The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use <Connect> (or activate
<Auto Connect>) to connect the same device
from next time (☞ the following, and pages 58
and 59).

1
2
3

1
2
3

ENGLISH

5

To connect a special device <Special
Device>

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to connect/disconnect.

2
3
4

Press [AV MENU].

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Search].
The unit searches for available devices and displays
the list of them. (If no available device is detected,
“Device Unfound” appears.)

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Connect] or [Disconnect].
• Select <Connect> to connect the selected
device.
• Select <Disconnect> to disconnect the selected
device.

To delete a registered device

Select a device you want to connect.
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to
the unit.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Connecting...” is displayed on the
screen.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to delete.

2
3
4

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Delete Pairing].
Confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

31

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 31

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 2:19:21 PM

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

*1

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 34

Adjust the volume of the incoming calls.*2

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside
[ ].

[AV MENU] Hold: Activates <Voice Dialing> function
[5 ∞] Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can be registered.)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of the other sources.

~
Ÿ
!
⁄

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Bluetooth].
Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu).
☞ pages 58 and 59

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

When <Auto Answer> is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

To end the call
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(☞ page 59)

• You can adjust the microphone volume. (☞ page 59)

32

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 32

07.12.6 2:19:21 PM

3

When an SMS comes in...

ENGLISH

If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.
When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (☞ page 59)

4

Select a calling method, then call.

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (☞ page 58)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages. (☞ pages
58 and 59)

Cancel

Redial

Shows the list of the phone
numbers you have dialed.
Received Calls Shows the list of the received
calls.
Phonebook
Shows the phone book of the
connected cellular phone.
Missed Calls Shows the list of the missed
calls.
Phone
Shows the phone number
Number
entry screen = “Entering a
phone number” (☞ page 34).
Voice Dialing (Only when the connected
cellular phone has the voice
recognition system): = Speak
the name you want to call.

To make a call

1

2

33

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 33

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 2:19:22 PM

ENGLISH

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

To redial previously dialed numbers

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or +/–).

1

/ATT

Entering a phone number
• You cannot use the remote controller to enter phone
numbers.

2

You can enter [0] – [9], [*], [#] (up to 32 numbers)
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Preset]: Goes to Preset List. You can preset the
entered number by selecting a preset
number. (☞ page 35)
• [Dial]: Calls the entered number.

3

• You can easily access <Dial Menu> by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
When using the remote controller, you can
display <Redial> menu anytime .
You can also access <Dial Menu> by holding
SOURCE on the monitor panel.
[Hold]
• You can easily activate <Voice Dialing> by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

You can also activate <Voice Dialing> by
holding [AV MENU].

34

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 34

07.12.6 2:19:23 PM

To call a preset number

You can preset up to six phone numbers.

1

1

ENGLISH

Presetting the phone numbers
Select the phone number you want to preset
from <Phonebook>, <Redial>, <Received
Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
1 Press [AV MENU].
2 Press [Bluetooth].
3 Press [Dial Menu], then...

2
Ex.: Selecting <Received Calls>

2

Select a telephone number to store.

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth phone operations.

3

Select a preset number.

: • Display <Dial Menu> screen/Answer
the incoming call.
• Display the <Redial> menu if pressed
and held (regardless of the current
source).
: End the call.

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

: Adjust the volume.

:
[Hold] Make a call to the preset numbers.

35

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 35

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 2:19:24 PM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

*1

*2
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 48
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

[3 / 8] [7] Start and pause playback
[4 ¢] Reverse/forward skip
[5 ∞]
Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can
be registered.*3)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the operation status.
*3 You cannot select “New Device” when a Bluetooth audio player is connected.

~
Ÿ

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth audio operations.

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth
AUDIO]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Start and pause playback.

Start playback.

:
:

Reverse/forward skip
Adjust the volume.

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.
jvc-victor.co.jp/english/car/>
36

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 36

07.12.6 2:19:24 PM

MP3 indicator

Folder no./Track no./Playing time
Ex. while playing an MP3 disc

ENGLISH

Listening to the CD changer

Disc no.
Tag data appears only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total track no. included on the
disc
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folders (only for MP3)
Hold: Display Disc list

☞ page 38
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.

⁄

Preparation:
Make sure <Changer> is selected for <External
Input>. (☞ page 55)

~

Select a disc to start playing.

Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH]. (☞
page 9)

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

To go to the other list

• If you select an MP3 disc, the Track list of the
current folder appears. You can select a track
and start playing. (☞ also page 22)

!

Display the Disc List.

• If you select a folder on the list, you can start
playing the first track of the folder.
37

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 37

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 2:19:25 PM

ENGLISH

Selecting playback modes
You can use following playback modes—Repeat or
Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat for an MP3 disc

1
2
3

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Track: Repeats current track
Disc:
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
All:

Randomly plays all tracks of the
current disc
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder, then tracks of next folders
folder
Disc: Randomly plays all tracks of the
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
current disc
All:
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller to operate the CD changer.

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 48

: Select disc.
: Select folder (MP3 only).
• Press: Select track.
• Hold: Reverse/forward search

38

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 38

07.12.6 2:19:26 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the DAB tuner
If no signal is received, “No DAB Signal” appears.

Preset no.

Band
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
DAB indicators */Standby
Reception indicators

☞ page 42
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

* While tuning in a service with DLS (Dynamic Label
Segment), the TEXT indicator lights up.

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [DAB]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [BAND].

!

Press [4] or [¢] to search for an ensemble—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.

⁄

Press [∞] or [5] to select a service (either primary or secondary) to listen to.

39

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 39

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 2:19:26 PM

ENGLISH

When surrounding sounds are
noisy

Manual presetting
1

Display the Preset List.

2

Tune in to a service you want to preset.

3

Select a preset number.

Some services provide Dynamic Range Control (DRC)
signals together with their regular programme signals.
DRC will reinforce the low level sounds to improve your
listening.
• The DRC indicator will light up while tuning in to a
service with the DRC signals.

1

2

3

The service selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 2.

• As the number increases, the effect becomes
stronger.

40

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 40

07.12.6 2:19:27 PM

Activating/deactivating
Announcement Standby
Reception

On the remote:

1

Announcement Standby Reception allows the
unit to switch temporarily to your favorite service
(announcement type).

2
[Hold]

On the unit:

1

Announcement Standby Reception

Indicator

To activate, display <AV Menu>
screen, then select <Mode>, press
[On] for <Announce Standby>. (☞
below)

ANN

ENGLISH

Selecting preset services

The unit will temporarily switch to your Lights up
favorite service from any source other
than FM/AM.

2

Not yet activated. Tune in to another
service providing the related signals.

Flashes

To deactivate, press [Off] for
<Announce Standby> (☞ below).

Goes off

To activate Announcement Standby
Reception

1
2
3

Activating/deactivating TA/PTY
Standby Reception

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

Operations are exactly the same as explained on page
14 for FM Radio Data System stations.
• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the DAB
tuner and for the FM tuner.
Announcement Standby Reception is now
activated for PTY code <Transport News>: the
initial setting.

Continued on the next page

41

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 41

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 2:19:27 PM

ENGLISH

Tracing the same programme—
Alternative Frequency Reception
(DAB AF)

You can easily activate and deactivate
Announcement Standby Reception by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 48
☞ page 14

• While receiving a DAB service:
When driving in an area where a service cannot
be received, this unit automatically tunes in to
another ensemble or FM Radio Data System station
broadcasting the same programme.
• While receiving an FM Radio Data System
station:
When driving in an area where a DAB service is
broadcasting the same programme as the FM Radio
Data System station, this unit automatically tunes in
to the DAB service.

To change the announcement type for
Announcement Standby Reception

1
2
3

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

When shipped from the factory, Alternative Frequency
Reception is activated.
To deactivate the Alternative Frequency
Reception, select <Off> for <DAB AF>. (☞ page
54)

4

Select your favorite announcement type.

Available announcement types:
Transport News, Warning, News, Weather, Event,
Special Event, Radio Info, Sports News, Financial
News
42

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 42

07.12.6 2:19:28 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod
Track no./Playing time

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

☞ page 44
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5]
Enter player’s menu
[∞]
Start playback/pause
• To resume, press again.

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

It is required to connect the Interface adapter for iPod (KS-PD100) to the CD changer jack on the rear.
Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 55)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod] (☞ page 9)
Playback starts automatically.
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

43

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 43

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 2:19:28 PM

ENGLISH

3

Selecting a track from the
player’s menu
1

Press [5] to enter the player’s menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about five seconds.

2

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.
Press: Select an item.
Hold: Skip ten items at a time if there are more
than ten items.

Repeat

One:
All:

Random

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs Ô
Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the beginning)

3
4

Select an appropriate option.

Functions the same as
“Repeat One.”
Functions the same as
“Repeat All.”

Album: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Albums.”
Song: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Songs.”

Press [∞] to confirm the selection.
• When the playback modes are selected, the
corresponding indicators light up alternately on
the screen.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [5].

To cancel, select <Off>.

Selecting playback modes
1

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 48

2

44

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 44

07.12.6 2:19:29 PM

ENGLISH

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN terminals.
Assigned title (☞ page 49)

Sound mode (☞ page 48)

You can easily access to <Aspect> setting
menu by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...
☞ page 48

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback picture).

~
Ÿ

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 20) while watching the playback picture

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• [KEY] does not work when the source is “AV-IN.”

Continued on the next page

45

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 45

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 2:19:29 PM

Navigation screen
ENGLISH

You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN terminal so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (☞ page 55)

To view the navigation screen (and listen to the navigation guidance*)
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (☞ page 9)
• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to
<Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (☞ page
52)

* If your Navigation System is equipped with the voice guidance function.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 20) while viewing the navigation screen
• The operation buttons displayed on the screen vary among the playback sources.

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• The above buttons except [KEY] also work when they are not shown on the screen (while viewing the navigation
screen).
When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (☞ page 55)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN terminals.
• Some status messages such as volume level will not appear on the screen.

46

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 46

07.12.6 2:19:30 PM

You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter—KS-U57
(not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (☞ page 49)

ENGLISH

EXT-INPUT

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

☞ page 48

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 55)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

47

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 47

EXTERNALDEVICES
DEVICES
EXTERNAL
07.12.6 2:19:30 PM

ENGLISH

Sound equalization
While playing back any source other
than “Bluetooth PHONE,” you can easily
access <Equalizer> menu by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

~

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

Ÿ

!

1

Repeat steps ~ and Ÿ, then in step !...

2

Adjust (1), then store (2).

Select a sound mode.

Move to other six sound modes
Ex.: When storing into <User2>.

48

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 48

07.12.6 2:19:31 PM

ENGLISH

Assigning titles to the sources

In the explanation, buttons on the
touch panel are indicated inside [ ].

!

You can assign titles to “AV-IN” and “EXT-IN.”

~
Ÿ

Assign a title.

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN] or
[EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Display <Title Entry> screen.
You can enter up to 16 characters (for available
characters, ☞ page 67).
• [Store]: Confirm the entry.
• [2/3]: Move the cursor.
• [BS]:
Erase the character before the
cursor.
• [Del]:
Erase the character on the cursor.
• [Cap]:
Change the letter case (upper/
lower).
• [Change]: Change the character set.
• [Space]: Enter a space.

⁄

49

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 49

Finish the procedure.

SETTINGS
07.12.6 2:19:31 PM

ENGLISH

Menu operations

!

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures. Some of the settings do not open the
sub-setting window, but just selecting an option will
change the setting.
• The display indications may change according to
change of the specifications.
Ex.: Changing the <AV Input> setting

~
Ÿ

Non-available items will be shaded.

50

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 50

07.12.6 2:19:32 PM

Display

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Demonstration

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it temporarily,
touch the screen.

Wall Paper

You can select the background picture of the screen.
Horizon, Metal, Art, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

Off: Cancels.
Once: Scrolls the disc information once.
Auto: Repeats scrolling (five-second intervals).
• Holding DISP on the monitor panel scrolls the information regardless
of this setting.

Dimmer

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Auto: Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.*1
Dimmer Time Set : Activates the Dimmer Time setting below.

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On/Off times.

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
1 (bright), 2 (middle), 3 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust brightness of the screen.
–15 (darkest) to +15 (brightest); Initial 00

Picture Adjust*2

You can adjust the following to make the screen clear and legible for
watching the playback picture. The setting will be stored—one for
“DISC” (common) and the other for “AV-IN.”
–15 to +15; Initial 0
Bright: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Contrast: Adjust the contrast.
Color: Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
• Press [5] or [∞] to adjust.
• You cannot adjust <Tint>. (fixed)

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Setup

Initial: Underlined
*1 The ILLUMINATION lead connection is required. (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
*2 Adjustable only when the source is “DISC” (the inserted disc must contain pictures or movies) or “AV-IN.”

51

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 51

SETTINGS
07.12.6 2:19:32 PM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined
Menu items
1

Aspect*

Selectable settings, [reference page]
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.
Aspect ratio of incoming signal
4:3

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures

Clock

Display

Full:
For 16:9 original pictures
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match to the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language*2

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands,
Svenska, Dansk, Руccĸий, Português
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change
according to the language selected, ☞ [67].

Time Set

Initial 0:00 ☞ [8]

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system.
12Hours, 24Hours ☞ [8]

OSD Clock

When <On> is selected, the clock time is displayed on the playback
picture.
Off, On

Clock Adjust

Select <Auto> to adjust the clock automatically using the clock time
(CT) data from an FM Radio Data System station.
Off, Auto ☞ [8]

*1 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*2 After you change the indication language setting, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.

52

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 52

07.12.6 2:19:33 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
3

Menu Language*

Select the initial disc menu language; Initial Руccĸий (☞ also page
66).

Audio Language*3

Select the initial audio language; Initial Руccĸий (☞ also page 66).

Subtitle*3

Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off); Initial
Руccĸий (☞ also page 66).

Monitor Type*3
16:9

4:3LB

4:3PS

OSD Position*3

Disc

Position 1

Position 2

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
16:9 : Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor is 16:9.
4:3 LB (Letterbox)/4:3 PS (Pan Scan): Select when the aspect ratio of
the external monitor is 4:3.
• Refer to the illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are
shown on the screen.
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [28]
1: Higher position
2: Lower position

File Type*3

Select playback file type when a disc contains different types of files.
Audio: Plays back audio files.
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
Audio&Video: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

DivX Regist. (Registration)*3

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a
file with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration
Code is overwritten for copyright protection.

D. Audio Output*3

Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (☞ also page 65)
PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio, or when
connecting to a recording device.
Dolby D : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital.
Stream : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.

*3 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
53

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 53

SETTINGS
07.12.6 2:19:33 PM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined
Menu items
1

Selectable settings, [reference page]
When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT terminals.
Dolby SR : Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio by
connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby Surround.
Stereo : Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic) Range
Compres. (Compression)*1

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing
Dolby Digital software.
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded software.
On: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

AF Regional

When the received signals from the current station become weak...
Off: Cancels—not selectable when <DAB AF> is set to <On>.
AF Reg. (Regional): Switches to another station broadcasting the same
programme. The REG indicator lights up.
AF: Switches to another station. The programme may differ from the
one currently received (the AF indicator lights up). ☞ [15]

TA Volume

00 to 30 or 50*2; Initial 15 ☞ [14]

Program Search

Off, On ☞ [15]

DAB AF*3

Off, On ☞ [42]

Tuner

Disc

Down Mix*

*1 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*2 Depends on the amplifier gain control. (☞ page 56)
*3 Appears only when DAB tuner is connected.

54

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 54

07.12.6 2:19:34 PM

Menu items

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN terminals. ☞ [45, 46]
Off: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is skipped while
selecting the source).
Audio&Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as a
VCR.
Audio: Select when connecting an audio component such as a portable
audio player.
Camera*5 : Select when connecting a rear view camera.
Navigation : Select when connecting a Navigation System.

External Input*6

For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the
rear.
Changer/iPod*7: CD changer or iPod. ☞ [37, 43]
External: Any other than the above. ☞ [47]
• For connecting the Bluetooth adapter and DAB tuner, this setting is
not required. They are automatically detected.

Beep

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting*8

Off: Cancels.
Muting1, Muting2: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the car phone system.

Power LED Flash

Off: Cancels.
On: When the ignition is turned off, the lamp on the
flashes.

Input
Others

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AV Input*

4

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

button

TouchPanel Sens.

Change the sensitivity of the touch panel. As the number decreases,
sensitivity becomes higher. 1/2/3

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold
[Enter] to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. ☞ [3]

*4 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*5 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the control panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.
*6 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*7 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.
*8 The TEL MUTING lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual.
55

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 55

SETTINGS
07.12.6 2:19:34 PM

Initial: Underlined

ENGLISH

Equalizer

Flat/Hard Rock/R&B/Pop/Jazz/Dance/Country/Reggae/Classic/User1/User2/User3 ☞ [48]

Sound
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Fader/Balance

Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front and rear speakers.
• Upmost—front only (F6)
• Downmost—rear only (R6)
When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the center (0).
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left and right speakers.
• Leftmost—left only (L6)
• Rightmost—right only (R6) Initial 0

Volume Adjust

Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing to
the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
–12 to +12; Initial 00
• You can make the adjustments separately for DVD and other discs.

Amplifier Gain

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Low: VOL 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speakers is less
than 50 W.)
High: VOL 00 to 50

56

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 56

07.12.6 2:19:35 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Mono

Only for FM. (Off, On) ☞ [10]

DX/Local

Only for FM. (Local, DX) ☞ [11]

SSM

Only for FM. Press and hold to start SSM. ☞ [11]

PTy Standby

Only for FM/DAB. (Off, On) ☞ [14]

PTy Code

Only for FM/DAB. (Initial News) ☞ [15]

Title Entry

Only for “AV-IN” and “EXT-IN.” ☞ [49]

Repeat

☞ [21, 38, 44]

Random

☞ [21, 38, 44]

D.(Dynamic) Range Control

Only for DAB. (Off, DRC1, DRC2, DRC3) ☞ [40]

Announce Standby

Only for DAB. (Off, On) ☞ [41]

Announce Code

Only for DAB. (Initial Transport News) ☞ [42]

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Mode*1

*1 Items listed under <Mode> vary among the playback sources.

List
For “DISC”: Folder List and Track List (☞ page 22)
For “CD-CH”: Disc List, Folder List, and Track List (☞ page 37)
• For the other playback sources, you can display a list by pressing DISP on the monitor panel. (☞ page 9)

57

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 57

SETTINGS
07.12.6 2:19:36 PM

ENGLISH

Bluetooth*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Dial Menu *

Select the method to make a call. ☞ [33]

Message*3

You can read a message from the following message histories.
Unread: Messages you have not read.
Read: Messages you have read.
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.
Sent: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Open

☞ [30]

Search

☞ [31]

Special Device

Only for “New Device.”
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which require some special procedure to
establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want to connect.
• After selecting the device, use <Open> or <Search> (☞ page 30 or 31)
for connection.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You can
connect the unit and the device by using <Connect> (☞ below) from the
next time.

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ pages 30 and
31), establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the device being connected.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Delete the registered devices.

2

*1 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO.” Select a device (or “New Device”) before operating the
menu.
*2 Only for the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*3 Selectable only when the source is “Bluetooth PHONE” and the connected cellular phone is compatible with SMS
(Short Message Service).

When operating the Bluetooth device, refer also to the instructions supplied with the device.

58

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 58

07.12.6 2:19:36 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
4

When the unit is turned on, the connection is established automatically
with...
Off: No Bluetooth device.
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found first.

Auto Answer *5

Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the calls
manually.
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.

Message Info *5

Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and
displaying “Receiving Message.” To read the message, ☞ page 33.
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.
01/02/03

Version *6

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

Settings

Auto Connect *

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Initial: Underlined
*4 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “New Device” is selected.
*6 If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc-victor.
co.jp/english/car/>

59

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 59

SETTINGS
SETTINGS
07.12.6 2:19:37 PM

ENGLISH

Maintenance
Moisture condensation

To keep discs clean

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.

How to handle discs

To play new discs
Center holder

When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder of
the case and lift the disc out, holding it
by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:
SingleCD—8 cm disc

Unusual shape

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)

Stick-on label

Transparent or semi-transparent on its
recording area

60

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 60

07.12.6 2:19:37 PM

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

General

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters for file/
folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

ENGLISH

More about this unit

Playing DVD-VR

Disc

• For details about DVD-VR format and Playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

General
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are
interchangeably used.
• This unit can only play back audio CD (CD-DA) files
if different type of audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV) are
recorded on the same disc.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.

File playback
Playing DivX files
• This unit can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx>, <.div>, or <.avi> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit supports the DivX files whose resolution is
720 x 576 pixels or less.
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or Dolby Digital.
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode
may not be played back correctly.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

Ejecting a disc
• If “No disc“ appears after removing a disc, insert a
disc or select another playback source.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust.

Continued on the next page

61

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 61

REFERENCES
07.12.6 2:19:38 PM

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO
format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional,
and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

ENGLISH

Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2
files recorded by JVC Everio camcorders.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Playing JPEG files

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
on the disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)

62

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 62

07.12.6 2:19:38 PM

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
p

• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

Current folder (highlighted bar)
Current folder number/total folder number
Folder list
Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not
displayed for JPEG)
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
in the current folder (total number of tracks on
the disc)
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)
Track list
Current track (highlighted)

ENGLISH

Bluetooth operations
General

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error: The device is registered but the
connection has failed. Use <Connect> to connect
the device again. (☞ page 31)
• Error: Try the operation again. If “Error” appears
again, check if the device supports the function you
have tried.
• Device Unfound: No available Bluetooth device is
detected by <Search>.
• Loading: The unit is updating the phone book and/
or SMS.
• Please Wait...: The unit is preparing to use
the Bluetooth function. If the message does not
disappear, turn off and turn on the unit, then connect
the device again (or reset the unit).
• Reset 08: Check the connection between the
adapter and this unit.

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline
JPEG), it will be displayed.

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.

63

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 63

:

Cellular phone

:

Household phone

:

Office

:

General

:

Other than above

REFERENCES
07.12.6 2:19:39 PM

ENGLISH

CD changer

Menu settings

• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (☞ page 37), you will hear a
beep. Select another folder including music files.

• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from
<High> to <Low> while the volume level is set
higher than “30,” the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio
Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the
power, and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc)
so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect
ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may
become <4:3LB> for some discs.

DAB tuner
• Only the primary DAB service can be preset even
when you store a secondary service.

iPod operations
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano *1
– iPod video (5th Generation) *2
*1 When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
*2 It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu while the iPod is connected to the
interface adapter.
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the adapter connected to this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the screen. This unit
can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>

64

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 64

07.12.6 2:19:39 PM

2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Through the DIGITAL OUT terminal

ENGLISH

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT)

Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted.
• To reproduce the multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set <D. Audio Output> correctly.
(☞ page 53)
Output signals

<D. Audio Output>
Playback disc
DVD

<Stream>

<Dolby D>

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital
with DTS
with MPEG Audio

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD, Video CD

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD with DTS

DTS bitstream

DivX/
with Dolby Digital
MPEG

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream

with MPEG Audio

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

MP3/WMA

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

WAV

44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the
discs are not copy-protected.

65

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 65

REFERENCES
07.12.6 2:19:40 PM

ENGLISH

Preset equalizing values
Frequency
Sound mode
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User1/2/3

60 Hz

150 Hz

400 Hz

1 kHz

2.5 kHz

6.3 kHz

15 kHz

00
+03
+03
00
+03
+04
+02
+03
+02
00

00
+03
+02
+02
+02
+02
+01
00
+03
00

00
+01
+02
00
+01
00
00
00
+01
00

00
00
00
00
+01
–02
00
+01
00
00

00
00
+01
+01
+01
–01
00
+02
00
00

00
+02
+01
+01
+03
+01
+01
+02
+02
00

00
+01
+03
+02
+02
+01
+02
+03
00
00

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)
Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU

Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque

Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian

Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali

Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

66

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 66

07.12.6 2:19:40 PM

• Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan
and other countries.
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®
6) with enhanced playback of DivX® media files
and the DivX® Media Format
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Victor Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
• iPod and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is
selected for <Language>. (☞ page 52)
Upper and lower cases

ENGLISH

Characters shown on the screen
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you
can use the following characters to assign titles.
(☞ page 49)
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>.
(☞ page 52)

Numbers and symbols

67

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 67

REFERENCES
07.12.6 2:19:42 PM

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied with the adapters used for the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
Symptoms
• No sound comes out of the speakers.

• The screen is not clear and legible.

FM/AM

General

• “Position Error Push Open Key” appears on
the screen.
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on the
screen, and the panel does not move.
• “No Signal” appears.

Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced through the analog
terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT).
Sunshine from the windscreen may cause this symptom.
Adjust <Bright>. (☞ page 51)
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press OPEN/TILT.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)

• The buttons on the monitor panel do not
work.
• The unit does not work at all.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected
to VIDEO IN terminal.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
When the monitor panel is open, only +/– (volume) and
OPEN/TILT work. The other buttons do not function.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Store stations manually. (☞ page 11)

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

68

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 68

07.12.6 2:19:42 PM

Disc in general

• Disc can be neither recognized nor played
back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot be
played back.
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable discs
cannot be skipped.
• Playback does not start.
•
•
•

•
•
•

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedies/Causes
Eject the disc forcibly. (☞ page 3)
Unlock the disc. (☞ page 22)
• Insert a finalized disc.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used
for recording.

ENGLISH

Symptoms

• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.
The playback picture is not clear and legible. Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 51)
Sound and pictures are sometimes
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
interrupted or distorted.
• Change the disc.
No playback picture is shown and “Parking
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
Brake” appears on the screen, even when the (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
parking brake is engaged.
No picture appears on the external monitor. • Connect the video cord correctly.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.
“Eject Error” or “Loading Error” appears on
Change the source by pressing SOURCE.
the screen.
“Region code error” appears on the screen
Region code is not correct. (☞ page 4)
when you insert a DVD Video.
Disc cannot be played back.
• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (☞ page 4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.
Noise is generated.
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Tracks are not played back as you have
Playback order may differ from that played back using
intended them to play.
other players.
Elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded.
“Not Support” appears on the screen and
The track is unplayable.
track skips.

Continued on the next page

69

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 69

REFERENCES
07.12.6 2:19:43 PM

Symptoms

ENGLISH

• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit.

• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.

Bluetooth

• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.

• Echo or noise occurs.
• Phone sound quality is poor.

• The sound is interrupted or skipped during
playback of a Bluetooth audio player.

• “New Device” cannot be selected for
“Bluetooth AUDIO.”
• The connected audio player cannot be
controlled.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

Remedies/Causes
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected device
and search again.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select <Open> on the unit to connect
the device. (☞ page 30)
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device. If the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its
instructions, try “0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then
try to connect again. (☞ pages 31, 58)
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
cellular phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal
reception.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
audio player.
• Disconnect the player connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player
again.
Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “New
Device,” disconnect it. (☞ page 31)
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

70

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 70

07.12.6 2:19:43 PM

DAB tuner

• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• “No DAB Signal” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The DAB tuner does not work at all.
• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the screen.
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work.

AV-IN

iPod

• Sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.
• Playback stops.
• “No Files” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• No picture appears on the screen.
• Playback picture is not clear and legible.

Remedies/Causes
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Current disc does not include playable files. Replace the disc
with one including playable files.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Move to an area with stronger signals.
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then reset
the unit. (☞ page 3)
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then reset
the unit. (☞ page 3)
Check the cords and connections.
• Check the connection.
• Charge the battery.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
Check the connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart
playback.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod. Then,
connect them again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 51)

71

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 71

ENGLISH

CD changer

Symptoms
• “No Disc” appears on the screen.
• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.
• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

REFERENCES
07.12.6 2:19:43 PM

ENGLISH

Specifications
Maximum Power Output:
Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:

Input:
Output:

50 W per channel
20 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
6.3 kHz, 15 kHz
±10 dB
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
PAL
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Aerial input
VIDEO OUT

Others:

CD changer, OE REMOTE, Reverse gear
signal, DIGITAL OUT (optical)

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM:

(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

65 dB

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation:

35 dB

MW Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/35 dB

LW Tuner

Sensitivity:

50 μV

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Frequency Response:

DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:

16 Hz to 22 000 Hz

VCD/CD:

16 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Frequency Range:

FM/AM TUNER

Frequencies:
Level:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Output Level
REAR OUT:
Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:

DVD/CD

Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:

FM Tuner

Dynamic Range:

93 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

95 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

72

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 72

07.12.6 2:19:44 PM

7 inch wide liquid crystal display

Number of Pixel:

336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)

Drive Method:

TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format

Color System:

NTSC/PAL

Aspect Ratio:

16:9 (wide)

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

ENGLISH

MONITOR
GENERAL

Screen Size:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System:

Negative ground

Allowable Storage Temperature:

–10°C to +60°C

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D):
• With trim plate and
sleeve attached

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 111 mm × 160 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 117 mm × 10 mm

Mass (approx.):

2.9 kg (including trims and sleeve)

100

Required space for the monitor ejection

160

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm

90.5

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

73

EN_KW-AVX710[EE].indb 73

REFERENCES
07.12.6 2:19:44 PM

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Затруднения при эксплуатации?
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на
соответствующую страницу

Маєте ПРОБЛЕМУ з функціонуванням?
Повторно налаштуйте систему
Див. сторінку “Як повторно налаштувати пристрій”

Bіктор Компані оф Джепен Лімітед
12, 3-чоме, Морійя-чо, Канагава-ку, Йокогама, Канагава 221-8520, Японія

EN, RU, UK
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

Rear_KW-AVX710[EE].indd 2

1207MNMMDWJEIN

07.11.28 7:30:06 PM

KW-AVX710
Installation/Connection Manual
Руководство по установке/подключению
LVT1779-010A

Керівництво зі встановлення та з’єднання

1207MNMMDWJEIN
EN, RU, UK
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

[EE]

ENGLISH

РУCCKИЙ

УКРАЇНА

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В
постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш
автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор
напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

Цей пристрій призначений для роботи під напругою 12 В
постійного струму; з електричними системами, що мають
заземлення ВІД’ЄМНОГО полюсу. Якщо ваше авто не оснащене
такою системою, потрібно використовувати інвертор напруги,
який можна придбати у дилерів устаткування JVC для автомобілів.

WARNINGS

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ

ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations,
as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as
this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as
this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to
carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around
carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” flashes on the
monitor, and no playback picture will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake lead is
connected to the parking brake system built in the car.

• НЕ устанавливайте устройства и не прокладывайте провода в
местах, где:
– возникает препятствие для функционирования руля
и рычага переключения скоростей, так как это может
привести к аварии;
– возникает препятствие срабатыванию устройств
безопасности, например, пневмоподушки, что может
привести к несчастному случаю со смертельным исходом;
– может ухудшиться обзор.
• НЕ используйте устройство, когда управляете рулем; это
может привести к аварии.
• Водителю не следует смотреть на монитор во время
вождения. Это может быть опасно и может стать причиной
аварии.
• Если данное устройство используется во время поездки
на автомобиле, следует, не отвлекаясь, следить за
дорогой, иначе может произойти дорожно-транспортное
происшествие.
• Если стояночный тормоз не включен, на мониторе мигает
сообщение “Parking Brake”, и изображение воспроизведения
не отображается.
– Это предупреждение появляется только в том случае, если
провод стояночного тормоза подключен к стояночной
тормозной системе автомобиля.

• НЕ встановлюйте ніяких пристроїв і не приєднуйте жодних
кабелів у місцях, де:
– вони можуть перешкоджати вправлятися з кермом і важелем
перемикання передач, тому що це може призвести до аварії
на дорозі;
– вони можуть перешкоджати роботі таких пристроїв
безпеки, як подушки безпеки, тому що це може призвести до
смертельного випадку.
– затуляти огляд.
• НЕ виконуйте ніяких операцій з пристроєм під час керування,
тому що це може призвести до аварії на дорозі.
• Під час руху водій не повинен відволікатися й дивитись на
монітор. Це може призвести до необачності та аварії.
• Якщо вам потрібно скористатися пристроєм підчас руху,
уважно стежте за дорогою, щоб не потрапити в аварію.
• Якщо автомобіль не на ручному гальмі, на екрані монітора
мигтітиме напис “Parking Brake”, зображення виводитись не
буде.
– Це попередження з’являється тільки тоді, коли провід
ручного гальма з’єднаний з ручним гальмом автомобіля.

Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amplifier Gain”
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 56 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.

Примечания по электрическим подключениям:
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной
мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели
устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω).
Если максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт,
перейдите в режим “Amplifier Gain”, чтобы предотвратить их
повреждение (cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр.
56).
• Для предотвращения ороткого замыкания заклейте
НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.

Зауваження щодо електричних з’єднань:
• Заміняти запобіжник можна тільки запобіжником із вказаними
у специфікації номінальними характеристиками. Якщо
запобіжники часто виходять з ладу, проконсультуйтеся з
дилером устаткування JVC для автомобілів.
• Рекомендується підключати гучномовці з максимальною
потужністю, що перевищує 50 Вт (як для розташованих
спереду, так і для тих, що розміщуються позаду.
Рекомендований діапазон опору: від 4 до 8 Ом).
У разі, якщо потужність є меншою чим 50 Вт, змініть
налаштування “Amplifier Gain” (коефіцієнт підсилення)
задля запобігання пошкодженню гучномовців (див. стор. 56
ІНСТРУКЦІЇ).
• Для запобігання короткому замиканню, заізолюйте клеми
провідника, ЩО НЕ ВИКОРИСТОВУЄТЬСЯ, ізоляційною
стрічкою.
• По закінчені роботи радіатор стає надто гарячим. Будьте
обережні, не торкайтесь його при видалені цього пристрою.

Heat sink
Радиатор
Радіатор

Parts list for installation and connection

Список деталей для установки и подключения

Перелік деталей для встановлення та з’єднання

The following parts are provided for this unit. If anything is missing,
contact your dealer immediately.

Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством. Если
какой-либо из указанных элементов отсутствует, обратитесь к
агенту по продажам.

У комплекті з цим пристроєм надаються такі деталі. Якщо
бракує якої-небудь деталі, негайно звертайтесь до дилера у
вашому регіоні.

*1 Fitted to the main unit when shipped

*1 Закреплено на основном устройстве при поставке

*1 приєднаний до головного пристрою під час транспортування

Remote controller
Диcтaнциoннoго
yпpaвлeния
Пульт дистанційного
керування

Brackets*1
Декоративную панель*1
Кронштейны*1

Sleeve*1
Муфта*1
Екран*1

Main unit
Главное устройство
Головний пристрій

Power cord
Кабель питания
Шнур живлення

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm)*1
Болты с плоской головкой (M5 x 8 мм)*1
Гвинти з пласкими голівками (M5 × 8 мм)*1

Round head screws (M2.6 x 3 mm)*1
Болты с круглой головкой (M2,6 x 3 мм)*1
Гвинти з напівкруглими голівками
(M2,6 × 3 мм)*1

Batteries
Батареи
Батареї

Trim plate

Декоративную панель
Знімна пластина

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
Болты с плоской головкой (M5 x 8 мм)
Гвинти з пласкими голівками
(M5 × 8 мм)

Round head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
Болты с круглой головкой (M5 x 8 мм)
Гвинти з напівкруглими голівками
(M5 × 8 мм)
Use these screws when installing the unit without the supplied sleeve.
Используйте эти болты при установке устройства без поставляемой муфты.
Використовуйте ці гвинти для встановлення пристрою без монтажного
короба, що постачається в комплекті.

Crimp connector
Обжимные разъемы
Обтиснене рознімання

1
AVX710[EE]_install.indb 1

07.12.10 4:23:29 PM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH
MOUNTING)

УСТАНОВКА
(УСТАНОВКА В ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)

ВСТАНОВЛЕННЯ
(МОНТАЖ НА ПРИЛАДОВУ ПАНЕЛЬ)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you
should make adjustments corresponding to your specific car. If you
have any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company
supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed
by a qualified technician.

На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.
Однако необходимо выполнить настройки, соответствующие
конкретному автомобилю. Если у Вас есть какие-либо
вопросы, касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему дилеру
автомобильных систем JVC или в компанию, поставляющую
соответствующие принадлежности.
• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это
устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

Наведена нижче ілюстрація демонструє типовий процес
встановлення. Проте необхідно виконати регулювання у
відповідності до типу автомобіля. У разі будь яких запитань
або потреби у інформації щодо набору інструментів та
спорядження, проконсультуйтеся з дилером устаткування JVC
для автомобілів або з компанією, що постачає набір інструментів
та спорядження.
• Якщо ви не впевнені щодо правильності встановлення цього
пристрою, залучіть до його встановлення кваліфікованого
спеціаліста.

Before installing the unit
• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as
instructed. If other screws are used, parts could become loose or
damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any
connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper
ventilation when installing the unit.

1

2
3

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together
with its mounting brackets.
• Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from your car
for future use.

Предостережение во время установки
• При установке устройства используйте только прилагаемые
болты в соответствии с инструкцией. В случае использования
других болтов существует вероятность, что детали могут быть
ненадежно закреплены или повреждены.
• Аккуратно затягивайте болты,чтобы не пережать
соединительные кабели.
• При установке для обеспечения правильной вентиляции не
закрывайте вентилятор на задней панели.

1

Install the sleeve in the dashboard of the car.
Attach the brackets to the main unit.
• Make sure to use the supplied flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm). If
longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.

4

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 and 4.

5
6

Install the main unit in the sleeve.

Извлеките аудиосистему, изначально установленную в
автомобиле, вместе с монтажными кронштейнами.

• При встановленні пристрою, використовуйте тільки гвинти
з комплекту постачання, відповідно до інструкцій. Якщо
використовуються інші гвинти, кріплення окремих частин
пристрою може ослабнути або пошкодитись.
• При затягуванні гвинтів чи болтів будьте обережні, щоб не
затиснути жоден з’єднувальний шнур.
• При встановленні переконайтеся, що вентилятор задньої
панелі не заблокований для забезпечення належної вентиляції.

1

Вийміть аудіосистему, встановлену в автомобілі виробником,
разом з монтажними кронштейнами.
• Зберігайте усі гвинти та деталі, видалені з автомобіля, для
подальшого використання.

2
3

Встановіть екран у приладову панель автомобіля.

• Не теряйте винты и детали, извлеченные из автомобиля,
поскольку они будут использоваться в дальнейшем.

2
3

Вмонтируйте муфту в приборную панель автомобиля.
Прикрепите кронштейны к главному устройству.
• Используйте болты с плоской головкой (M5 x 8 мм),
которые входят в комплект поставки. При использовании
более длинных болтов можно повредить устройство.

Attach the trim plate.

Перед встановленням пристрою

4

Выполните необходимые электрические соединения.
• См. стр. 3 и 4.

5
6

Установите главное устройство в муфту.
Прикрепите декоративную панель.

1

4
5
6

Приєднайте кронштейни до головного пристрою.
• Використовуйте лише гвинти із пласкими голівками (M5
x 8 мм), що входять до комплекту поставки. Якщо гвинти
довші, вони можуть пошкодити пристрій.
Виконайте необхідні електричні з’єднання.
• Див. стор. 3 та 4.
Встановіть головний пристрій всередину екрану.
Приєднайте знімну пластину.

4

2

Sleeve

5

Муфта
Екран

Round head screws (M2.6 × 3 mm)
Болты с круглой головкой (M2,6 x 3 мм)
Гвинти з напівкруглими голівками (M2,6 × 3 мм)

3

Brackets
Декоративную
панель
Кронштейны

6

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Болты с плоской головкой (M5 x 8 мм)
Гвинти з пласкими голівками (M5 × 8 мм)

Trim plate

Декоративную панель
Знімна пластина

30˚

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject when in use.
Установите устройство под углом менее 30 °,принимая во внимание то,что при использовании монитор будет выдвигаться.
Встановіть пристрій під кутом, меншим ніж 30˚, зважаючи на те, що монітор під час його використання буде знаходитися у
висунутому стані.

2
AVX710[EE]_install.indb 2

07.12.10 4:23:40 PM

100

Required space for the monitor ejection
Необходимое пространство для извлечения монитора
Необхідна площа для висування монітору

Unit: mm
Единицы измерения:мм
Пристрій: мм

90.5

160

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ

ЕЛЕКТРИЧНІ З’ЄДНАННЯ

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections
before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.

Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем
Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и
осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.
• После установки обязательно заземлите данное
устройство на шасси автомобиля.

Для запобігання коротким замиканням рекомендується
перед встановленням пристрою відключити від’ємну клему
акумулятора та виконати усі електричні з’єднання.
• Переконайтеся у тому, що після закінчення встановлення
пристрою, виконано його заземлення на шасі авто.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker
connections:

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и подключению
громкоговорителей:

ЗАСТЕРЕЖЕННЯ щодо приєднання джерела
живлення та гучномовців:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord
to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously
damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет
повреждено.
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю
питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений
громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.

• НЕ з’єднуйте провідники живлення гучномовців з
акумулятором. Невиконання такої вимоги призведе до
тяжкого ушкодження пристрою.
• ПЕРЕД тим, як з’єднати провідники живлення з
гучномовцями, перевірте схему з’єднання гучномовців
вашого авто.

If your car is equipped with the ISO connector
Если автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO
Якщо ваше авто оснащене розніманням за стандартом ISO

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile
Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)
Для деяких авто марки VW/Audi або Opel (Vauxhall)

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.
• Приєднайте рознімання ISO, як рекомендовано на ілюстрації.

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.
Вам, можливо, прийдеться внести зміни до з’єднання провідників шнура живлення згідно з ілюстрацією.
• Перед тим, як встановлювати цей пристрій, зв’яжіться з уповноваженим дилером вашого авто.

From the car body
От корпуса автомобиля
Від корпусу авто

Original wiring

Исходная схема соединений
Початкова схема з’єднання
рознімань

ISO connector
Разъем ISO
Рознімання ISO

Modified wiring 1
ISO connector of the supplied power cord
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в
комплект поставки
Рознімання ISO шнура живлення, що входить до
комплекту постачання
View from the lead side
Вид со стороны выводов
Вид зі сторони електричних виводів

Преобразованная схема
соединений 1
Змінена схема з’єднання
рознімань 1

Y: Yellow
Желтый
Жовтий

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.

Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему соединений 2.
Якщо пристрій не включається, скористуйтеся зміненою схемою з’єднання рознімань 2.
Modified wiring 2

Преобразованная схема
соединений 2

R: Red
Красный
Червоний

Змінена схема з’єднання
рознімань 2

A

Connecting the parking brake lead / Подключение провода стояночного тормоза / З’єднання проводу ручного гальма

Connect the parking brake lead to the parking brake system
built in the car.
Подключить провод стояночного тормоза к проводке
стояночного тормоза автомобиля.
З’єднайте провід ручного гальма з системою ручного
гальма автомобілю.

Parking brake
Стояночный тормоз
Ручне гальмо

Parking brake lead (light green)
Провод стояночного тормоза
(зеленого цвета)
Провід ручного гальма (яснозеленого кольору)

a

Crimp connector
Обжимные разъемы
Обтиснене рознімання

To metallic body or chassis of the car
К металлическому корпусу или шасси
автомобиля
На металічний корпус або на шасі авто

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Переключатель стояночного тормоза
(внутри автомобиля)
Перемикач ручного гальма (всередині
автомобіля)

3
AVX710[EE]_install.indb 3

07.12.10 4:23:43 PM

ENGLISH

РУCCKИЙ

УКРАЇНА

Connections without using the ISO connector / Подключение без использования разъема ISO / З’єднання без допомоги з’єднувача ISO
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car
body may be different in color.

1
2

Cut the ISO connector.
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order
specified in the illustration below.

3
4

Connect the aerial cord.
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Power cord
Кабель питания
Шнур живлення

Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте
проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может
привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.
Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова
автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.

Перед тим, як з’єднати: Уважно перевірте електричну
схему з’єднання вашого авто. Неправильне з’єднання може
спричинити тяжке пошкодження вашого пристрою.
Контакти шнура живлення та рознімання, яке йде від корпуса
авто можуть мати різні кольори.

1
2

Обрежьте разъем ISO.

1
2

3
4

Подключите кабель антенны.

Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном
ниже порядке.
В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к
устройству.

3
4

Від’єднайте рознімання ISO.
З’єднайте кольорові провідники шнура живлення у
порядку, що наведений нижче на ілюстрації.
Приєднайте провід антени.
Виконайте кінцеве приєднання джгута провідників до
пристрою.

Fan
Вентилятор
Вентилятор

OE REMOTE Steering wheel remote

OE REMOTE Рулевой пульт
дистанционного управления
OE REMOTE Блок дистанційного
керування, установлений на кермі

15 A fuse
Предохранитель 15 A
Запобіжник 15 А

Rear ground terminal
Задний разъем заземления
Тильна клема заземлення
ISO Connector
Разъем ISO
Рознімання ISO

See each diagram on pages 5 and 6.
См. каждую схему на стр. 5 и 6
Зверніться до діаграм, що наведені на
сторінках 5 та 6.

*2

Black
Черный
Чорний

Yellow *3
Желтый *3
Жовтий *3

*2 Not supplied
*2 Не поставляются
*2 Не входить до комплекту
* Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
3

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
power cannot be turned on.
*3 Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите
этот провод, иначе питание не включится.
*3 Перед тим, як перевірити працездатність цього
виробу до його встановлення, цей контакт
необхідно приєднати, інакше живлення на прилад
подаватися не буде.

*2

To metallic body or chassis of the car
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
На металічний корпус або на шасі авто

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the
ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)
(постоянный 12 В)
На клему фази у блоці запобіжників для з’єднання з акумулятором авто
(обминаючи перемикач запалення) (постійний струм 12 В)

Red
Красный
Червоний

Ignition switch
Переключатель зажигания
Перемикач запалювання

Fuse block
Блок
предохранителя
Блок
запобіжників

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя
На допоміжну клему у блоці запобіжників

Blue with white stripe
Синий с белой полосой
Синій з білою смужкою

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)
На провідник зовнішнього пристрою іншого обладнання або на антену (якщо встановлена)
(максимальний струм 200 мА)

Orange with white stripe
Оранжевый с белой полосой
Помаранчевий із білою смужкою

To car light control switch
К контрольному переключателю освещения автомобиля
До реле управління освітленням автомобіля

Brown
Коричневый
Коричневий

To cellular phone system
К системе сотового телефона
На систему стільникового телефону

Light green
Зеленого цвета
Ясно-зелений

To parking brake (see diagram Å on page 3.)
К стояночному тормозу (см. схему Å на стр. 3.)
До ручного гальма (див. ілюстрацію Å на стор. 3.)
Crimp connector
Обжимные разъемы
Обтиснене рознімання

White with black
stripe
Белый с черной
полосой
Білий з чорною
смужкою

White
Белый
Білий

Left speaker (front)
Левый громкоговоритель (передний)
Лівий гучномовець (передній)

Gray with black
stripe
Серый с черной
полосой
Сірий з чорною
смужкою

Gray
Серый
Сірий

Green with black
stripe
Зеленый с
черной полосой
Зелений з чорною
смужкою

Right speaker (front)
Правый громкоговоритель (передний)
Правий гучномовець (передній)

Green
Зеленый

Зелений

Left speaker (rear)
Левый громкоговоритель (задний)
Лівий гучномовець (задній)

Purple with black
stripe
Пурпурный с
черной полосой
Пурпурний з
чорною смужкою

Purple
Пурпурный
Пурпурний

Right speaker (rear)
Правый громкоговоритель (задний)
Правий гучномовець (задній)

4
AVX710[EE]_install.indb 4

07.12.10 4:23:46 PM

A Connections for external component playback / Подключения для воспроизведения с внешнего устройства / З’єднання для зовнішніх
пристроїв відтворення

AV amplifier or decoder
Усилитель или декодер AV
Підсилювач AV або декодер

Video cord (not supplied)
Видеошнур (не поставляется)
Відеошнур (не входить до комплекту)

Extension lead (not supplied)
Удлинитель (не входит в комплект поставки)
Подовжувач (не постачається в комплекті)

External monitor
Внешний монитор
Зовнішній монітор

Digital optical cable (not supplied)
Цифровой оптический кабель (не
поставляются)
Цифровий оптичний кабель (не
постачається в комплекті)

Crimp connector (not supplied)*5
Обжимные разъемы (не входят в
комплект поставки)*5
Обтиснуте рознімання (не
постачається в комплекті)*5
To car battery
К аккумулятору
автомобиля
До акумулятору

To reverse lamp
К задней фаре
До ліхтаря задньої ходи

Reverse lamp lead*4
Провод задней фары*4
Провід ліхтаря задньої ходи*4

Rear view camera KV-CM1*6
Камера заднего вида KV-CM1*6
Камера заднього виду KV-CM1*6

Audio/video cord
(not supplied)
Аудио/видеокабели
(не поставляются)
Аудіо/відео шнури
(не входять до
комплекту)

Camcorder, Navigation System, etc.
Портативная видеокамера, система
навигации и т.д.
Відеокамера, система навігації та ін.

*4 Required only when connecting a rear view camera to VIDEO IN
terminal.

*5

Refer to å in diagram Å on page 3.
*6 Set “AV Input” setting to “Camera” when using (see page 55 of the

Reverse lamps
Задние фары
Ліхтарі задньої ходи

*4 Требуется только при подключении камеры заднего вида к

*4 Потрібен тільки в разі приєднання камери заднього виду до

разъему VIDEO IN.
*5 См. å на схеме Å на стр. 3.
6
* Установите для настройки “AV Input” значение “Camera” при
использовании камеры (см. стр. 55 ИНСТРУКЦИЙ).

*5 див. å у діаграмі Å на стор. 3.
*6 При використанні задайте параметр “Camera” (фотокамера) для

входу VIDEO IN.

налаштування “AV Input” (аудіовідеовхід) (див. стор. 55 розділу
ІНСТРУКЦІЇ).

INSTRUCTIONS).

B Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Подключение к рулевому пульту дистанционного управления /
З’єднання з блоком дистанційного керування, що встановлений на кермі
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,
you can operate this unit using the controller. To do it, a JVC’s
OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is
required. Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for
details.

Якщо авто оснащене блоком дистанційного керування,
який встановлюється на кермі, можна керувати пристроєм
за його допомогою. Щоб зробити це, потрібен адаптер OE
блоку дистанційного керування компанії JVC (не входить до
комплекту), що підходить до даного типу авто. За додатковою
інформацією зверніться до свого регіонального дилера JVC.

Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом
дистанционного управления, его можно использовать для
управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим
адаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления JVC
OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего автомобиля.
За более подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику
автомобильных аудиосистем компании JVC.

OE REMOTE Steering wheel remote

OE REMOTE Рулевой пульт
дистанционного управления

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления (устанавливаемый
в автомобиле)
Блок дистанційного керування, встановлений на кермі
(оснащення у авто)

OE REMOTE Блок дистанційного
керування, установлений на кермі

OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления OE (не поставляется)
Адаптер OE блоку дистанційного керування OE (не входить до комплекту)

C Connecting an external amplifier / Подключение внешнего усилителя / З’єднання з зовнішнім підсилювачем
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• You can supply the power to the amplifier by connecting the
remote leads (blue with white stripe) of this unit to the amplifier.
(To connect other equipment using the remote leads, Yconnectors need to be separately purchased.)
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio
signals only to the external amplifier to get clear sound and to
prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page 56 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.

Для обновления автомобильной стереосистемы можно
подключить усилитель.
• Для подачи питания на усилитель подключите провода
внешнего устройства (синие с белой полосой) к проводам
данного устройства и усилителя. (Для подключения другого
оборудования с помощью проводов внешнего устройства
необходимо приобрести Y-образные разъемы.)
• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного устройства,
подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте провода
громкоговорителей данного устройства неиспользованными.
• Для получения более чистого звука и предотвращения
внутреннего перегрева устройства можно отключить
встроенный усилитель и использовать для усиления
аудиосигнала только внешний усилитель. См. ИНСТРУКЦИИ
ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 56.

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)
Провідник зовнішнього пристрою (Синій з білою смужкою)

Для покращення характеристик стереосистеми до неї можна
підключити підсилювач.
• Можна подати живлення на підсилювач, приєднавши
до нього провід дистанційного вмикання (синій із білою
смужкою). (Для приєднання іншого обладнання за
допомогою проводів дистанційного вмикання необхідно
додатково придбати Y-рознімання).
• Відключіть гучномовці від цього пристрою, приєднайте їх до
підсилювача. Залиште провідники гучномовців такими, що не
використовуються.
• Можна вимкнути вбудований підсилювач і спрямувати
звуковий сигнал тільки на зовнішній підсилювач, щоб
отримати якісний звук і запобігти збільшенню температури
всередині пристрою. Див. ІНСТРУКЦІЇ на стор. 56.

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект)

Y-рознімання (двійник) (не входить до комплекту
постачання цього пристрою)

Remote lead
Провод внешнего
устройства
Провідник зовнішнього
пристрою
JVC Amplifier
JVC-усилитель
Підсилювач JVC

Rear speakers
Задние
громкоговорители
Задні гучномовці

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны
На провідник зовнішнього пристрою іншого обладнання або на
антену (якщо встановлена)

*7
Front speakers
Передние
громкоговорители
Передні гучномовці

*7 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis
of the car—to the place not coated with paint (if coated with paint,
remove the paint before attaching the lead). Failure to do so may
cause damage to the unit.

*7 Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому
кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом
краской (если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску
перед тем, как прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого
требования может привести к повреждению данного
устройства.

*7 Надійно прикрутіть провідник заземлення до металічного
корпусу або до шасі авто у місці, яке не має фарбового покриття
(якщо воно є, видаліть фарбу до підключення провідника).
Невиконання цієї вимоги може призвести до пошкодження
пристрою.

5
AVX710[EE]_install.indb 5

07.12.10 4:23:50 PM

D Connections to the CD changer jack / Соединения с устройством автоматической смены компакт-дисков / З’єднання із гніздом
пристрою для змінення компакт-дисків
When connecting the external components, refer also to the
manuals supplied for the components and adapter.

При подключении внешних устройств см. также руководства,
поставляемые для устройств и адаптера.

CAUTION:

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:

Before connecting the external components, make sure that the
unit is turned off.

Перед подключением внешних компонентов убедитесь в
том, что устройство выключено.

You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer
jack.

К разъему устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков
можно подключать указанные ниже устройства JVC.

JVC component

Model name

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

JVC DAB tuner

KT-DB1000

You can also connect the following components through the
various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
Component

Adapter
Model name
Bluetooth device
Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
iPod
Interface adapter for
iPod
KS-PD100
Portable audio player with line output
Line input adapter
jacks
KS-U57
Portable audio player with 3.5 mm stereo AUX input adapter
mini jack
KS-U58
When connecting more than one component (maximum: three),
it is recommended that you connect the components in series as
explained below.

Устройство JVC
Устройство автоматической смены
компакт-дисков (CD-CH)
Тюнер DAB JVC

Название модели
CH-X1500 и т. д.
KT-DB1000

Указанные ниже устройства можно также подключать с
помощью различных адаптеров JVC.
• Кабели подключения могут быть приобретены отдельно.
Компонентный

Адаптер
Название модели
Устройство Bluetooth
Адаптер Bluetooth
KS-BTA200
iPod
Интерфейсный
адаптер для
проигрывателя iPod
KS-PD100
Портативный аудиопроигрыватель с Адаптер линейного
разъемами линейного выхода
входа
KS-U57
Портативный аудиопроигрыватель со Адаптер входа AUX
стерео мини-разъемом 3,5 мм
KS-U58
При подключении нескольких устройств (максимум: трех)
рекомендуется подключить устройства последовательно, как
описано ниже.

У разі приєднання зовнішніх компонентів, також зверніться
до посібника, що входить до комплекту постачання вказаних
компонентів та адаптера.

УВАГА:
Перед тим як приєднати зовнішній компонент,
переконайтеся утому, що ваш пристрій вимкнений.
Наведені нижче компоненти виробництва компанії JVC можна
приєднати через гніздо пристрою для зміни компакт-дисків.
Компонент виробництва JVC

Назва моделі

Пристрій для зміни компакт-дисків
(CD-CH)

CH-X1500 та ін.

Тюнер цифрового радіомовлення JVC

KT-DB1000

За допомогою різних адаптерів виробництва JVC можна також
приєднувати такі компоненти.
• Можливо, з’єднувальні кабелі вам доведеться придбати
окремо.
Компонент
Пристрій Bluetooth
iPod

Портативний аудіопрогравач із
гніздами лінійних виходів
Портативний аудіопрогравач зі
стереофонічним мініатюрним
штекером 3,5 мм

Адаптер
Назва моделі
Адаптер Bluetooth
KS-BTA200
Інтерфейсний
адаптер для iPod
KS-PD100
Адаптер лінійного
входу
KS-U57
Адаптер вхідного
сигналу від
зовнішнього
пристрою
KS-U58

У разі приєднання більш ніж одного компонента (не більше
трьох) рекомендується приєднувати їх послідовно, згідно з
наведеними нижче поясненнями.

When connecting two components in series
Последовательное подключение двух устройств
У разі послідовного приєднання двох компонентів

CD changer jack

Разъем устройства автоматической
смены компакт-дисков

A KS-BTA200 / KT-DB1000
B*8 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

When connecting three components in series
При подключении трех устройств последовательно
У разі послідовного приєднання дрьох компонентів

CD changer jack

Разъем устройства автоматической
смены компакт-дисков

A KS-BTA200
B KT-DB1000
C*8 KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

Гніздо пристрою зміни CD-дисків

Гніздо пристрою зміни CD-дисків

*8 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 55 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
*8 Чтобы использовать данные устройства, необходима правильная настройка внешнего
входа (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 55).
*8 Для використання цих компонентів, в налаштуваннях зовнішнього входу встановіть “EXT IN”

To disconnect the connector / Отключение от разъема / Відключення з’єднувача
Hold the connector top tightly (1), then pull it out (2).
Крепко возьмитесь за верхнюю часть разъема (1), затем выдерните
его (2).
Візьміться за верхню частину (1) з’єднувача, потім витягніть його (2).

(зовнішній вхід) - (див. стор. 55 розділу ІНСТРУКЦІЇ).

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod является торговой маркой Apple Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других странах.
iPod є торговою маркою Apple Inc., зареєстрованою у Сполучених Штатах та інших країнах.

TROUBLESHOOTING

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ

НЕСПРАВНОСТІ

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• Сработал предохранитель.
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?

• Вийшов з ладу запобіжник.
* Чи правильно приєднані червоний та чорний провідники?

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

• Питание не включается.
* Подключен ли желтый провод?

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода
громкоговорителей?

•
*
•
*

• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
• Unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

• Звук искажен.
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?
• Шум мешает звучанию.
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?
• Устройство нагревается.
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?
• Приемник не работает.
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?

Не можна включити живлення.
Чи приєднаний жовтий провідник?
Звук з гучномовців відсутній.
Чи не замкнуто “на коротко” вихідні провідники гучномовця?

• Звук спотворений.
* Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?
* Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого
гучномовця?
• Звук чути з перешкодами.
* Чи приєднано тильну клему заземлення до шасі авто за
допомогою коротших та товстіших шнурів?
• Пристрій нагрівається.
* Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?
* Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого
гучномовця?
• Цей пристрій не працює взагалі.
* Чи ви переналаштовували пристрій?

6
AVX710[EE]_install.indb 6

07.12.10 4:23:55 PM

ENGLISH
ESPAÑOL

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR
RECEPTOR DVD CON MONITOR
RÉCEPTEUR DVD ET MONITEUR

FRANÇAIS

KW-AVX716
KW-AVX710

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
Para cancelar la demonstración en pantalla, consulte la página 8.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.

INSTRUCTIONS
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS

LVT1779-003A
[EU]

Cover_KW-AVX710[EU1].indd 2

07.12.18 6:58:00 PM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1.
2.
3.
4.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Cautions on the monitor:

WARNINGS:
To prevent accidents and damage

• The monitor built in this unit has been produced
with high precision, but it may have some
ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not
malfunction.
• Do not expose the monitor to direct sunlight.
• Do not operate the touch panel using a ball-point
pen or similar tool with the sharp tip.
Touch the buttons on the touch panel with your
finger directly (if you are wearing a glove, take it
off).
• When the temperature is very cold or very hot...
– Chemical changes occur inside, causing
malfunction.
– Pictures may not appear clearly or may move
slowly. Pictures may not be synchronized with
the sound or picture quality may decline in such
environments.

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and
gearshift lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

[European Union only]

2

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 2

07.12.17 5:46:02 PM

How to reset your unit

INTRODUCTION
Playable disc types .......................... 4
Basic operations—
Monitor panel/touch panel............ 5
Basic operations—
Remote controller (RM-RK252) ...... 6

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc
ENTER

NO EJECT?
EMERGENCY EJECT?

3

OPERATIONS
Before operating the unit ................ 8
Common operations ........................ 9
Listening to the radio ...................... 10
Disc operations ................................ 16

Exit

Back

2
1

at the same time

ENGLISH

Contents

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Bluetooth® operations—
Cellular phone/audio player .......... 30
Listening to the CD changer .............. 37
Listening to the DAB tuner ............... 39
Listening to the iPod........................ 43
Using other external components ..... 45

1

• If this does not work, reset the unit.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

SETTINGS
Sound equalization .......................... 48
Assigning titles to the sources .......... 49
Menu operations ............................. 50

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

REFERENCES
Maintenance ................................... 60
More about this unit ........................ 61
Troubleshooting .............................. 68
Specifications .................................. 72

3

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 3

INTRODUCTION
07.12.17 5:46:06 PM

ENGLISH

Playable disc types
Disc type

Recording format, file type, etc.

DVD

DVD Video (Region Code: 2)*1

Playable

DVD Audio
DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
DVD Video
(DVD-R/-RW*2, +R/+RW*3)
DVD-VR
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
• DVD-VR
JPEG
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/
MP3/WMA/WAV
WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level 1,
AAC
level 2, Romeo, Joliet
MPEG4
DVD+VR
DVD-RAM
Dual Disc
DVD side
Non-DVD side
CD/VCD
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)/DTS-CD
VCD (Video CD)
SVCD (Super Video CD)
CD-ROM
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
MP3/WMA/WAV
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo, JPEG
Joliet
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
AAC
MPEG4
*1 If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).
DVD-RW dual layer discs are not playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs.
+RW double layer discs are not playable.
Caution for DualDisc playback
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
4

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 4

07.12.17 5:46:06 PM

Display <AV Menu> screen. ☞ page 50
Display <Source Menu> screen. ☞ page 9
Display and erase the Short Cut windows.
Available functions vary among the sources. For details, see each source operation
section.

Adjust the volume.
Change the display information.
Change the sources. ☞ page 9
• Activate/deactivate TA
Standby Reception.
• Display <PTy Search> menu.
[Hold]
☞ page 12

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Monitor panel/touch panel

Remote sensor

• Display <Open/Tilt> menu.
• Eject the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
menu. [Hold]
• Close the monitor panel when <Open/Tilt>
menu is displayed.

• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power. [Hold]
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

<Open/Tilt> menu

Reset the unit.
• Use only when the internal system malfunctions.
•
•
•
•
•
•

• In the explanation, buttons on the touch panel
are indicated inside [ ].
• For details on the touch panel operations, see
each source operation section.
5

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 5

[OPEN]: Open the monitor panel.
[EJECT]: Eject the disc.
[CLOSE]: Close the monitor panel.
[TILT +/–]: Tilt the monitor panel.
[Exit]: Erase this screen.
Shaded icons cannot be used.

INTRODUCTION
07.12.17 5:46:07 PM

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Remote controller (RM-RK252)
Installing the battery

Main elements and features
R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace both batteries.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel
remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate
volume) for connection.

1

• Turns on the power.
• Attenuates the sound if the power is on.
• Turns off the power if pressed and held (while
the power is on).

2

• Reverse search
• Reverse slow motion (during pause)

3

Adjusts the volume level.
• Does not function as “2nd VOL.”

4

• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

5

• DVD/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.

6

Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “ .“

6

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 6

07.12.17 5:46:08 PM

Functions with other buttons (see i and o).

8

Changes the display information.

9

For disc operations:
• 5 / ∞:
DVD: Selects the title.
DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
Other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders.
• 4 / ¢:
– Press briefly: reverse skip/forward skip
– Press and hold: reverse search/forward
search
For FM/AM operations:
• 5 / ∞: Selects the preset stations.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for stations.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For DAB tuner operations:
• 5 / ∞: Select the services.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for
ensembles.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For Apple iPod operations:
• ∞: Starts playback/pauses
• 5: Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞
/ 4 / ¢ work as menu selecting
buttons).
In the main menu:
• 5: Returns to the previous menu.
• ∞: Confirms the selection.
• 4/¢
– Press briefly: Selects an item.
– Press and hold: Skips ten items at a time.
For Bluetooth operations:
• 4 / ¢: reverse skip/forward skip (for
audio player operation)

• Forward search
• Forward slow motion (during pause)

q

Selects the source.

w

For disc operations:
Starts playback/pauses.
For Bluetooth operations:
• Answers incoming calls.
• Starts playback/pauses. (for audio player
operation).

e

Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.

r

“TUNER”/”DAB”: Selects the bands.
“DISC”: Stops playback.
“Bluetooth PHONE”: Ends the call.
“Bluetooth AUDIO”: Starts playback/pauses.

t

VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

y

• DVD Video/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.

u

• Makes selection/settings.
• @ / #: Skips back or forward by five minutes
for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2.
• % / fi: Changes discs for “CD-CH.”

i*3 • Switches number entry mode for “DISC.”
• Erases the misentry after entering a wrong
number.
• Does not function as “SURROUND.”
o*3 Number buttons
• Enters numbers.
• “TUNER”/”DAB”: Selects the preset station/
service directly.
*1 Functions as a number button only (see o ).
*2 Not used for this unit.
*3 Functions when pressed with SHIFT.

7

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 7

p

ENGLISH

7

INTRODUCTION
07.12.17 5:46:08 PM

ENGLISH

Before operating the unit
@

You can cancel the demonstration on the screen and set
the clock.
• Non-available items will be shaded on the AV Menu
screens.

Set the clock settings.
Moves to the preceding menu page

Indication language:
In this manual, English indications are used
for purpose of explanation. You can select the
indication language. (☞ page 52)
Moves to the succeeding menu page

~

Turn on the power.

Ÿ

Display <AV Menu> screen.

!

Display <Setup> menu.

¤
⁄

Finish the procedure.

Cancel the demonstration.
Select <Off>.

Return to the previous screen.

8

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 8

07.12.17 5:46:09 PM

Selecting the playback source

ENGLISH

Common operations
Changing the display
information

• Available sources depend on the external
components you have connected, media you have
attached, and the <Input> settings you have made
(☞ page 55).

• Available display information varies among the
playback sources.

On the monitor panel only:

On the touch panel:

• Each time you press DISP, the display changes to
show the various information.
Ex. When the playback source is a DivX disc.
Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen
Exit

On the monitor panel:
Track list

Clock time in large numbers

TUNER = DAB = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD) =CD-CH,
iPod, or EXT-IN = Bluetooth PHONE =
Bluetooth AUDIO = AV-IN = (back to the
beginning)

Navigation screen
(When <Navigation> is
selected for <AV Input>)
(☞ page 55)

• You cannot select these sources if they are not ready.
Back to the beginning

9

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 9

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:09 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset no.

PS (station name) for FM RDS. If no PS signal is coming in, the
tuned frequency appears.

Band

PTY code for FM RDS

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
☞ page 12
Tuner/Standby Reception
indicators

☞ page 9

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ
!

Press [BAND].

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In
the explanation,
they are
indicated inside
[ ].

Press [4] or [¢] to search for a station—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.
• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

3

When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
1

Press [AV MENU].

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• The MONO indicator lights up.
To restore stereo effect, select <Off>.

2

Press [Mode].

10

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 10

07.12.17 5:46:10 PM

Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number
4 of the FM1 band.

This function works only for FM bands. Once you have
activated this function (selected <Local>), it always
works when searching for FM stations.

1
2
3

1

Display the Preset List.

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

3

Select a preset number.

ENGLISH

Tuning in to stations with
sufficient signal strength

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be
detected.
• The DX indicator goes off, then the LO indicator
lights up.

FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)
This function works only for FM bands.
You can preset six stations for each band.

1
2
3

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

The station selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 4.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

11

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 11

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:11 PM

ENGLISH

Selecting a preset station

The following features are available only for FM RDS
stations.

On the remote:

1

Searching for FM RDS
programme—PTY Search

2

You can search for your favorite programmes being
broadcast by selecting the PTY code for your favorite
programmes.

or
Hold

1

Display <PTy Search> menu.

On the unit:
• To select directly on the touch panel

• To select from the Preset List
You can also easily access <PTy Search> menu
by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel,
then...

1

☞ page 48
☞ page 14

2

12

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 12

07.12.17 5:46:11 PM

Storing your favorite programme types

Select a PTY code.
• In the example below, a PTY code is selected
from the Preset List.
If you enter <PTy Code> menu below, you can
select one from 29 PTY codes.

You can store your favorite PTY codes into the PTY
Preset List.
Ex.: Storing <Drama> into <Preset 1>

ENGLISH

2

PTY Search starts.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.

Available PTY codes:
News, Current Affairs, Information, Sport,
Education, Drama, Cultures, Science, Varied Speech,
Pop Music, Rock Music, Easy Listening, Light Classics
M, Serious Classics, Other Music, Weather & Metr,
Finance, Children’s Progs, Social Affairs, Religion,
Phone In, Travel & Touring, Leisure & Hobby, Jazz
Music, Country Music, National Music, Oldies Music,
Folk Music, Documentary

13

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 13

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:12 PM

ENGLISH

To activate PTY Standby Reception

Activating/deactivating TA/PTY
Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception

Indicator

Press
activate.

TP

on the monitor panel to

1
2
3

The unit will temporarily switch to
Lights up
Traffic Announcement (TA) if available,
from any source other than AM.
• The volume changes to the preset
TA volume level if the current level is
lower than the preset level (☞ page
54).
Not yet activated. Tune in to another
station providing the RDS signals.

Flashes

Press

Goes off

to deactivate.

PTY Standby Reception
To activate, display <AV Menu>
screen, press [Mode], then press
[On] for <PTy Standby>. (☞ next
column)

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

PTY Standby Reception is now activated for PTY
code <News>: the initial setting.

You can easily activate or deactivate the PTY
Standby Reception by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...

Indicator

☞ page 48
☞ page 12

PTY

The unit will temporarily switch to
Lights up
your favorite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
Not yet activated. Tune in to another
station providing the RDS signals.

Flashes

To deactivate, press [Off] for <PTy
Standby> in step 3 on the next
column.

Goes off

• When a DAB tuner is connected, TA Standby/PTY
Standby Reception also works for the DAB tuner and
searches for the services.

14

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 14

07.12.17 5:46:12 PM

Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception

1
2
3

When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly
broadcasting the same programme with stronger
signals.

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

ENGLISH

To change the PTY code for PTY Standby
Reception

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency
areas (01 – 05)
A

4

Select your favorite PTY code.
Ex.: Selecting <Easy Listening>

When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking
Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see <AF Regional>. (☞ page 54)
• When the DAB tuner is connected, refer also to
“Tracing the same programme—Alternative
Frequency Reception (DAB AF).” (☞ page 42)

Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you select preset stations, the preset
station is tuned in.
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF
data, tunes in to another station broadcasting the
same programme as the original preset station is
broadcasting. To activate this function, select <On> for
<Program Search>.(☞ page 54)
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.

15

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 15

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:13 PM

ENGLISH

Disc operations
The disc type is automatically detected, and playback starts automatically (for some discs: automatic start depends
on its internal program).
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks on it will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject
the disc.
If “ ” appears on the screen, the unit cannot accept the operation you have tried to do.
• In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted.

~

!

Open the monitor panel.

Insert a disc.

Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Ÿ

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [CLOSE].

Press [OPEN].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

When playing back a multi-channel encoded disc,
the multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• You can fully enjoy multi-channel sound by
connecting an amplifier or a decoder compatible
with these multi-channel sources. (☞ also page
65)

Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
16

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 16

07.12.17 5:46:13 PM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information. (☞ page 9)

DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter no./Playing time

Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal
channel no.

Disc type *1
Audio format
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
Playback mode

☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select chapter
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2
[5 ∞]
Select title/program/playlist

*1 DVD-VR also indicates either PRG (program) or PLAY (playlist) playback.
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback pictures
on the screen).

17

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 17

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:14 PM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information (☞ page 9).

For DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2: Folder no./Track no./Playing time
For JPEG: Folder no./File no.

Disc type
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total track no.
included on the
disc

☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 *1
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

Track no./Playing time

The PBC indicator
lights up when PBC is
in use.

Total track no.
included on the
disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total playing time

☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10
18

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 18

07.12.17 5:46:14 PM

ENGLISH

Track no./Playing time

Only for CD Text *3
Total track no.
included on the disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total playing time
☞ page 22
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

Audio format
(MP3/WMA/WAV)
Tag data appears
only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
Total track no. included on the disc

☞ page 22

[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

*3 “No Name” appears for conventional CDs.
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10
19

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 19

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:15 PM

ENGLISH

Operation buttons on the screen
You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• While the operation buttons are displayed, aspect ratio is fixed to <Full>. (☞ page 52)
• If no operation is done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is
displayed).

☞ pages 23 to 27 on how the operation buttons
particularly work for a variety of the discs

A
[SOURCE]
[AV MENU]
[SHORT CUT]
[3 / 8]
[7]
[4 ¢]

Display <Source Menu> screen
Display <AV Menu> screen
Display the Short Cut buttons
Start and pause playback
Stop playback
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Select folders
• The above buttons also work when they are not shown on
the screen (while watching the playback picture).
* While a disc menu is played back for DVD, [KEY] is
automatically displayed. On the disc menu, you can select a
menu item directly by touching it on the screen.

Touch the screen (center portion).

*

Touch [KEY].

B
For DVD/VCD/DivX menu operation playback
[2 3 5 ∞] Select the menu items
[ENT]
Confirm the selection
[TOP MENU] Display the disc menu
[MENU]
Display the disc menu
[RETURN]
Return to the previous menu or display the
menu (only for VCD with PBC)

Touch [KEY].

C
For entering the numbers
[DIRECT CLR] • Switch between chapter/track entry and
title/group/folder entry
• Erase the last entry when you enter a
wrong number
[0]–[9]=[ENT]
Enter numbers
Ex.: To enter “105,” press [1], [0], [5], then [ENT]

Touch [KEY].

To erase the operations, touch the screen again.
20

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 20

07.12.17 5:46:15 PM

Selecting playback modes
1

ENGLISH

You can use the following playback modes—Repeat or Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat

3

2
When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.
Disc type

Repeat

Random

Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Title: Repeats current title
Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Program: Repeats current program (not
available for Playlist playback)
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Repeats current folder

Folder: Repeats current folder

—
—
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks
—

Track:

Repeats current track (PBC not in
use)

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks (PBC not
in use)

Track:

Repeats current track*1

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

Track: Repeats current track*1
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder

Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

*1 You can also use [SHORT CUT] to turn on and off Track Repeat.

21

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 21

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:16 PM

ENGLISH

Selecting tracks on the list

Prohibiting disc ejection

If a disc includes folders, you can display the Folder/
Track (File) Lists, then start playback.

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

1

2

at the same time

3

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.

Select a folder (1), then a track (2).

Using Short Cut Icons
You can easily access the some frequently used
functions by using [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel.

1
Selected track starts playing. (* Press to move to
the previous/next pages of the list)
1 Current folder list number/total folder list
number
2 Current track list number/total track list
number of the current folder

2
• For video software:
Aspect ratio
(☞ page 52)

You can easily access the Track List by pressing DISP
on the monitor panel.

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

• For audio software:

Turn on or off Track Repeat
(Repeat play: ☞ page 21)

Selected track starts playing.
22

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 22

07.12.17 5:46:16 PM

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No sound can be heard.)

ENGLISH

Operations using the remote controller—RM-RK252

Select title (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select title (when not playing).

twice

Select title (during playback or pause).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

You can change the following items using the on-screen bar—audio language, audio stream, audio channel,
subtitle language, view angle, etc. (☞ pages 28 and 29)

23

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 23

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:17 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Forward slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3
Select program.
Select playlist (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select program (when not playing).

twice
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Select program/playlist (during playback or pause).
Using Original Program/Playlist screens ( ☞ page 28)
1

For Original Program
For Playlist

2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3

To erase the screen.

*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

24

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 24

07.12.17 5:46:18 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5 (No sound can be heard.)
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.
Select track (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

While playing...
Reverse/advance the scenes by five minutes.
Current playback position

2nd press

1st press

1st press

2nd press

3rd press

For DivX6: Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*4 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2 ] ¡3
*5 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2

25

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 25

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:19 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause. (Slide show: each file is shown for a few
seconds.)
Shows the current file until you change it if pressed during Slide show.
Select file.
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.

Select file (within the same folder).

twice

Select folder.

Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed while holding SHIFT.

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed
during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1
Forward slow motion during pause*2
(No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No
sound can be heard.)

During PBC playback...

Select aspect ratio.

2 Select the desired track.

Select an item on the menu.
To return to the previous menu, press
To cancel PBC playback
1

• To resume PBC, press
Select track.
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10
26

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 26

07.12.17 5:46:19 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5
Select track.

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5
Select folder.
Select track (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

*4 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*5 Search speed: x2 ] x10

27

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 27

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:20 PM

ENGLISH

Using the list screens

Operations using the on-screen
bar

You can use Original Program or Playlist
screen anytime while playing DVD-VR with its data
recorded.

1

2

These operations are possible on the screen using
the remote controller, while playing the following
discs—DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG.

Display the Original Program/Playlist screen.

1

Display the on-screen bar. (☞page 29)

2

Select an item.

3

Make a selection.
If a pop-up menu appears...

Select an item you want.

To erase the screen

Ex. For DVD-Video

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
the recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/playlist*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of playlist
8 Total number of chapters included in the playlist
9 Playback time

• For entering time/numbers...
:
Move the entry position

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

:
Select a number
To remove the on-screen bar

28

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 28

07.12.17 5:46:21 PM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Information
Operation

Above example is of DVD Video. Items shown on the bar vary due to the disc type.
1 Disc type
2 • DVD: Audio signal format
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD Video:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
T. RPT:
Title repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
F. RND: Folder random
A. RND: All (Disc) random
JPEG:
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
VCD:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter

5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
Remaining title time (for DVD)
Remaining disc time (for others)
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track *2
Remaining time of the current
chapter/track *2
6 Playback status
Play
Reverse/forward search
Reverse/forward slow-motion
Pause
Stop
7 Operation icons
Change time indication (see 5)
Time Search (Specify a certain
scene by entering time.)
Title Search (by its number)
Chapter Search (by its number)
Track Search (by its number)
Repeat play *1
Random play *1
Change the audio language, audio
stream, or audio channel
Change or erase the subtitle
language
Change the view angle

Current program/chapter
Current Playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file

*1 ☞ page 21
*2 Not applicable for DVD-VR

29

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 29

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:46:21 PM

ENGLISH

Bluetooth® operations — Cellular phone/audio player
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the
Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD changer jack
on the rear.
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the
countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.

To register using <Open>
Preparation:
Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth
function.

1

To use a Bluetooth device through the unit (“Bluetooth
PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“Bluetooth PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”).

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press
[5] or [∞] to select it.

2

3

Connecting a new Bluetooth
device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Use either of the following items in <Bluetooth>
menu to register and establish the connection with a
device.
• Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as
the source to operate <Bluetooth> menu.
Open

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Search

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating this unit.

Go to other menu items

4

Enter a PIN (Personal Identification
Number)* code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number).
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.

30

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 30

07.12.17 5:46:23 PM

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Enter]: Confirms the entry.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the above
step) on the device to be connected.

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

To register using <Search>
• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press [5]
or [∞] to select it.

4
5

6

Press [AV MENU].

4
5

Select a device you want to connect.

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Special Device].
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
Use <Open> (or <Search>) to connect.

To connect/disconnect a registered
device

The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use <Connect> (or activate
<Auto Connect>) to connect the same device
from next time (☞ the following, and pages 58
and 59).

1
2
3

1
2
3

ENGLISH

5

To connect a special device <Special
Device>

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to connect/disconnect.

2
3
4

Press [AV MENU].

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Search].
The unit searches for available devices and displays
the list of them. (If no available device is detected,
“Device Unfound” appears.)

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Connect] or [Disconnect].
• Select <Connect> to connect the selected
device.
• Select <Disconnect> to disconnect the selected
device.

To delete a registered device

Select a device you want to connect.
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to
the unit.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Connecting...” is displayed on the
screen.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to delete.

2
3
4

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Delete Pairing].
Confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

31

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 31

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:46:23 PM

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

*1

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 34

Adjust the volume of the incoming calls.*2

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside
[ ].

[AV MENU] Hold: Activates <Voice Dialing> function
[5 ∞] Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can be registered.)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of the other sources.

~
Ÿ
!
⁄

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Bluetooth].
Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu).
☞ pages 58 and 59

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

When <Auto Answer> is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

To end the call
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(☞ page 59)

• You can adjust the microphone volume. (☞ page 59)

32

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 32

07.12.17 5:46:24 PM

3

When an SMS comes in...

ENGLISH

If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.
When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (☞ page 59)

4

Select a calling method, then call.

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (☞ page 58)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages. (☞ pages
58 and 59)

Cancel

Redial

Shows the list of the phone
numbers you have dialed.
Received Calls Shows the list of the received
calls.
Phonebook
Shows the phone book of the
connected cellular phone.
Missed Calls Shows the list of the missed
calls.
Phone
Shows the phone number
Number
entry screen = “Entering a
phone number” (☞ page 34).
Voice Dialing (Only when the connected
cellular phone has the voice
recognition system): = Speak
the name you want to call.

To make a call

1

2

33

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 33

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:46:25 PM

ENGLISH

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

To redial previously dialed numbers

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or +/–).

1

/ATT

Entering a phone number
• You cannot use the remote controller to enter phone
numbers.

2

You can enter [0] – [9], [*], [#] (up to 32 numbers)
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Preset]: Goes to Preset List. You can preset the
entered number by selecting a preset
number. (☞ page 35)
• [Dial]: Calls the entered number.

3

• You can easily access <Dial Menu> by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
When using the remote controller, you can
display <Redial> menu anytime .
You can also access <Dial Menu> by holding
SOURCE on the monitor panel.
[Hold]
• You can easily activate <Voice Dialing> by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

You can also activate <Voice Dialing> by
holding [AV MENU].

34

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 34

07.12.17 5:46:25 PM

To call a preset number

You can preset up to six phone numbers.

1

1

ENGLISH

Presetting the phone numbers
Select the phone number you want to preset
from <Phonebook>, <Redial>, <Received
Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
1 Press [AV MENU].
2 Press [Bluetooth].
3 Press [Dial Menu], then...

2
Ex.: Selecting <Received Calls>

2

Select a telephone number to store.

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth phone operations.

3

Select a preset number.

: • Display <Dial Menu> screen/Answer
the incoming call.
• Display the <Redial> menu if pressed
and held (regardless of the current
source).
: End the call.

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

: Adjust the volume.

:
[Hold] Make a call to the preset numbers.

35

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 35

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:46:26 PM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

*1

*2
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 48
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

[3 / 8] [7] Start and pause playback
[4 ¢] Reverse/forward skip
[5 ∞]
Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can
be registered.*3)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the operation status.
*3 You cannot select “New Device” when a Bluetooth audio player is connected.

~
Ÿ

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth audio operations.

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth
AUDIO]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Start and pause playback.

Start playback.

:
:

Reverse/forward skip
Adjust the volume.

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.
jvc-victor.co.jp/english/car/>
36

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 36

07.12.17 5:46:26 PM

MP3 indicator

Folder no./Track no./Playing time
Ex. while playing an MP3 disc

ENGLISH

Listening to the CD changer

Disc no.
Tag data appears only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

Total track no. included on the
disc
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folders (only for MP3)
Hold: Display Disc list

☞ page 38
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.

⁄

Preparation:
Make sure <Changer> is selected for <External
Input>. (☞ page 55)

~

Select a disc to start playing.

Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH]. (☞
page 9)

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

To go to the other list

• If you select an MP3 disc, the Track list of the
current folder appears. You can select a track
and start playing. (☞ also page 22)

!

Display the Disc List.

• If you select a folder on the list, you can start
playing the first track of the folder.
37

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 37

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:46:27 PM

ENGLISH

Selecting playback modes
You can use following playback modes—Repeat or
Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat for an MP3 disc

1
2
3

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Track: Repeats current track
Disc:
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
All:

Randomly plays all tracks of the
current disc
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder, then tracks of next folders
folder
Disc: Randomly plays all tracks of the
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
current disc
All:
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller to operate the CD changer.

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 48

: Select disc.
: Select folder (MP3 only).
• Press: Select track.
• Hold: Reverse/forward search

38

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 38

07.12.17 5:46:28 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the DAB tuner
If no signal is received, “No DAB Signal” appears.

Preset no.

Band
Sound mode
(☞ page 48)
DAB indicators */Standby
Reception indicators

☞ page 42
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

* While tuning in a service with DLS (Dynamic Label
Segment), the TEXT indicator lights up.

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [DAB]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [BAND].

!

Press [4] or [¢] to search for an ensemble—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.

⁄

Press [∞] or [5] to select a service (either primary or secondary) to listen to.

39

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 39

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:46:28 PM

ENGLISH

When surrounding sounds are
noisy

Manual presetting
1

Display the Preset List.

2

Tune in to a service you want to preset.

3

Select a preset number.

Some services provide Dynamic Range Control (DRC)
signals together with their regular programme signals.
DRC will reinforce the low level sounds to improve your
listening.
• The DRC indicator will light up while tuning in to a
service with the DRC signals.

1

2

3

The service selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 2.

• As the number increases, the effect becomes
stronger.

40

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 40

07.12.17 5:46:29 PM

Activating/deactivating
Announcement Standby
Reception

On the remote:

1

Announcement Standby Reception allows the
unit to switch temporarily to your favorite service
(announcement type).

2
[Hold]

On the unit:

1

Announcement Standby Reception

Indicator

To activate, display <AV Menu>
screen, then select <Mode>, press
[On] for <Announce Standby>. (☞
below)

ANN

ENGLISH

Selecting preset services

The unit will temporarily switch to your Lights up
favorite service from any source other
than FM/AM.

2

Not yet activated. Tune in to another
service providing the related signals.

Flashes

To deactivate, press [Off] for
<Announce Standby> (☞ below).

Goes off

To activate Announcement Standby
Reception

1
2
3

Activating/deactivating TA/PTY
Standby Reception

Press [AV MENU].
Press [Mode].

Operations are exactly the same as explained on page
14 for FM RDS stations.
• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the DAB
tuner and for the FM tuner.
Announcement Standby Reception is now
activated for PTY code <Transport News>: the
initial setting.

Continued on the next page

41

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 41

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:46:29 PM

ENGLISH

Tracing the same programme—
Alternative Frequency Reception
(DAB AF)

You can easily activate and deactivate
Announcement Standby Reception by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 48
☞ page 14

• While receiving a DAB service:
When driving in an area where a service cannot be
received, this unit automatically tunes in to another
ensemble or FM RDS station broadcasting the same
programme.
• While receiving an FM RDS station:
When driving in an area where a DAB service is
broadcasting the same programme as the FM RDS
station, this unit automatically tunes in to the DAB
service.

To change the announcement type for
Announcement Standby Reception

1
2
3

Press [AV MENU].

4

Select your favorite announcement type.

Press [Mode].

When shipped from the factory, Alternative Frequency
Reception is activated.
To deactivate the Alternative Frequency
Reception, select <Off> for <DAB AF>. (☞ page
54)

Available announcement types:
Transport News, Warning, News, Weather, Event,
Special Event, Radio Info, Sports News, Financial
News
42

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 42

07.12.17 5:46:30 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod
Track no./Playing time

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

☞ page 44
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5]
Enter player’s menu
[∞]
Start playback/pause
• To resume, press again.

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

It is required to connect the Interface adapter for iPod (KS-PD100) to the CD changer jack on the rear.
Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 55)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod] (☞ page 9)
Playback starts automatically.
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

43

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 43

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:46:30 PM

ENGLISH

3

Selecting a track from the
player’s menu
1

Press [5] to enter the player’s menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about five seconds.

2

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.
Press: Select an item.
Hold: Skip ten items at a time if there are more
than ten items.

Repeat

One:
All:

Random

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs Ô
Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the beginning)

3
4

Select an appropriate option.

Functions the same as
“Repeat One.”
Functions the same as
“Repeat All.”

Album: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Albums.”
Song: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Songs.”

Press [∞] to confirm the selection.
• When the playback modes are selected, the
corresponding indicators light up alternately on
the screen.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [5].

To cancel, select <Off>.

Selecting playback modes
1

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 48

2

44

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 44

07.12.17 5:46:31 PM

ENGLISH

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN terminals.
Assigned title (☞ page 49)

Sound mode (☞ page 48)

You can easily access to <Aspect> setting
menu by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...
☞ page 48

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback picture).

~
Ÿ

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 20) while watching the playback picture

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• [KEY] does not work when the source is “AV-IN.”

Continued on the next page

45

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 45

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:46:31 PM

Navigation screen
ENGLISH

You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN terminal so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (☞ page 55)

To view the navigation screen (and listen to the navigation guidance*)
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (☞ page 9)
• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to
<Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (☞ page
52)

* If your Navigation System is equipped with the voice guidance function.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 20) while viewing the navigation screen
• The operation buttons displayed on the screen vary among the playback sources.

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• The above buttons except [KEY] also work when they are not shown on the screen (while viewing the navigation
screen).
When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (☞ page 55)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN terminals.
• Some status messages such as volume level will not appear on the screen.

46

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 46

07.12.17 5:46:31 PM

You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter—KS-U57
(not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (☞ page 49)

ENGLISH

EXT-INPUT

Sound mode
(☞ page 48)

☞ page 48

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 55)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

47

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 47

EXTERNALDEVICES
DEVICES
EXTERNAL
07.12.17 5:46:32 PM

ENGLISH

Sound equalization
While playing back any source other
than “Bluetooth PHONE,” you can easily
access <Equalizer> menu by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

~

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

Ÿ

!

1

Repeat steps ~ and Ÿ, then in step !...

2

Adjust (1), then store (2).

Select a sound mode.

Move to other six sound modes
Ex.: When storing into <User2>.

48

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 48

07.12.17 5:46:32 PM

ENGLISH

Assigning titles to the sources

In the explanation, buttons on the
touch panel are indicated inside [ ].

!

You can assign titles to “AV-IN” and “EXT-IN.”

~
Ÿ

Assign a title.

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN] or
[EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Display <Title Entry> screen.
You can enter up to 16 characters (for available
characters, ☞ page 67).
• [Store]: Confirm the entry.
• [2/3]: Move the cursor.
• [BS]:
Erase the character before the
cursor.
• [Del]:
Erase the character on the cursor.
• [Cap]:
Change the letter case (upper/
lower).
• [Change]: Change the character set.
• [Space]: Enter a space.

⁄

49

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 49

Finish the procedure.

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:46:33 PM

ENGLISH

Menu operations

!

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures. Some of the settings do not open the
sub-setting window, but just selecting an option will
change the setting.
• The display indications may change according to
change of the specifications.
Ex.: Changing the <AV Input> setting

~
Ÿ

Non-available items will be shaded.

50

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 50

07.12.17 5:46:33 PM

Display

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Demonstration

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it temporarily,
touch the screen.

Wall Paper

You can select the background picture of the screen.
Horizon, Metal, Art, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

Off: Cancels.
Once: Scrolls the disc information once.
Auto: Repeats scrolling (five-second intervals).
• Holding DISP on the monitor panel scrolls the information regardless
of this setting.

Dimmer

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Auto: Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.*1
Dimmer Time Set : Activates the Dimmer Time setting below.

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On/Off times.

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
1 (bright), 2 (middle), 3 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust brightness of the screen.
–15 (darkest) to +15 (brightest); Initial 00

Picture Adjust*2

You can adjust the following to make the screen clear and legible for
watching the playback picture. The setting will be stored—one for
“DISC” (common) and the other for “AV-IN.”
–15 to +15; Initial 0
Bright: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Contrast: Adjust the contrast.
Color: Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
• Press [5] or [∞] to adjust.
• You cannot adjust <Tint>. (fixed)

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Setup

Initial: Underlined
*1 The ILLUMINATION lead connection is required. (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
*2 Adjustable only when the source is “DISC” (the inserted disc must contain pictures or movies) or “AV-IN.”

51

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 51

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:46:34 PM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined
Menu items
1

Aspect*

Selectable settings, [reference page]
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.
Aspect ratio of incoming signal
4:3

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures

Clock

Display

Full:
For 16:9 original pictures
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match to the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language*2

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands,
Svenska, Dansk, Руccĸий, Português
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change
according to the language selected, ☞ [67].

Time Set

Initial 0:00 ☞ [8]

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system.
12Hours, 24Hours ☞ [8]

OSD Clock

When <On> is selected, the clock time is displayed on the playback
picture.
Off, On

Clock Adjust

Select <Auto> to adjust the clock automatically using the clock time
(CT) data from an FM RDS station.
Off, Auto ☞ [8]

*1 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*2 After you change the indication language setting, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.

52

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 52

07.12.17 5:46:34 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
3

Menu Language*

Select the initial disc menu language; Initial English (☞ also page
66).

Audio Language*3

Select the initial audio language; Initial English (☞ also page 66).

Subtitle*3

Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off); Initial
English (☞ also page 66).

Monitor Type*3
16:9

4:3LB

4:3PS

OSD Position*3

Disc

Position 1

Position 2

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
16:9 : Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor is 16:9.
4:3 LB (Letterbox)/4:3 PS (Pan Scan): Select when the aspect ratio of
the external monitor is 4:3.
• Refer to the illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are
shown on the screen.
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [28]
1: Higher position
2: Lower position

File Type*3

Select playback file type when a disc contains different types of files.
Audio: Plays back audio files.
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
Audio&Video: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

DivX Regist. (Registration)*3

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a
file with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration
Code is overwritten for copyright protection.

D. Audio Output*3

Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (☞ also page 65)
PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio, or when
connecting to a recording device.
Dolby D : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital.
Stream : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.

*3 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
53

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 53

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:46:35 PM

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined
Menu items
1

Selectable settings, [reference page]
When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT terminals.
Dolby SR : Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio by
connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby Surround.
Stereo : Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic) Range
Compres. (Compression)*1

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing
Dolby Digital software.
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded software.
On: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

AF Regional

When the received signals from the current station become weak...
Off: Cancels—not selectable when <DAB AF> is set to <On>.
AF Reg. (Regional): Switches to another station broadcasting the same
programme. The REG indicator lights up.
AF: Switches to another station. The programme may differ from the
one currently received (the AF indicator lights up). ☞ [15]

TA Volume

00 to 30 or 50*2; Initial 15 ☞ [14]

Program Search

Off, On ☞ [15]

DAB AF*3

Off, On ☞ [42]

Tuner

Disc

Down Mix*

*1 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
*2 Depends on the amplifier gain control. (☞ page 56)
*3 Appears only when DAB tuner is connected.

54

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 54

07.12.17 5:46:35 PM

Menu items

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN terminals. ☞ [45, 46]
Off: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is skipped while
selecting the source).
Audio&Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as a
VCR.
Audio: Select when connecting an audio component such as a portable
audio player.
Camera*5 : Select when connecting a rear view camera.
Navigation : Select when connecting a Navigation System.

External Input*6

For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the
rear.
Changer/iPod*7: CD changer or iPod. ☞ [37, 43]
External: Any other than the above. ☞ [47]
• For connecting the Bluetooth adapter and DAB tuner, this setting is
not required. They are automatically detected.

Beep

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting*8

Off: Cancels.
Muting1, Muting2: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the car phone system.

Power LED Flash

Off: Cancels.
On: When the ignition is turned off, the lamp on the
flashes.

Input
Others

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AV Input*

4

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

button

TouchPanel Sens.

Change the sensitivity of the touch panel. As the number decreases,
sensitivity becomes higher. 1/2/3

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold
[Enter] to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. ☞ [3]

*4 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*5 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the control panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.
*6 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*7 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.
*8 The TEL MUTING lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual.
55

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 55

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:46:36 PM

Initial: Underlined

ENGLISH

Equalizer

Flat/Hard Rock/R&B/Pop/Jazz/Dance/Country/Reggae/Classic/User1/User2/User3 ☞ [48]

Sound
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Fader/Balance

Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front and rear speakers.
• Upmost—front only (F6)
• Downmost—rear only (R6)
When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the center (0).
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left and right speakers.
• Leftmost—left only (L6)
• Rightmost—right only (R6) Initial 0

Volume Adjust

Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing to
the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
–12 to +12; Initial 00
• You can make the adjustments separately for DVD and other discs.

Amplifier Gain

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Low: VOL 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speakers is less
than 50 W.)
High: VOL 00 to 50

56

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 56

07.12.17 5:46:37 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Mono

Only for FM. (Off, On) ☞ [10]

DX/Local

Only for FM. (Local, DX) ☞ [11]

SSM

Only for FM. Press and hold to start SSM. ☞ [11]

PTy Standby

Only for FM/DAB. (Off, On) ☞ [14]

PTy Code

Only for FM/DAB. (Initial News) ☞ [15]

Title Entry

Only for “AV-IN” and “EXT-IN.” ☞ [49]

Repeat

☞ [21, 38, 44]

Random

☞ [21, 38, 44]

D.(Dynamic) Range Control

Only for DAB. (Off, DRC1, DRC2, DRC3) ☞ [40]

Announce Standby

Only for DAB. (Off, On) ☞ [41]

Announce Code

Only for DAB. (Initial Transport News) ☞ [42]

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Mode*1

*1 Items listed under <Mode> vary among the playback sources.

List
For “DISC”: Folder List and Track List (☞ page 22)
For “CD-CH”: Disc List, Folder List, and Track List (☞ page 37)
• For the other playback sources, you can display a list by pressing DISP on the monitor panel. (☞ page 9)

57

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 57

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:46:37 PM

ENGLISH

Bluetooth*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Dial Menu *

Select the method to make a call. ☞ [33]

Message*3

You can read a message from the following message histories.
Unread: Messages you have not read.
Read: Messages you have read.
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.
Sent: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Open

☞ [30]

Search

☞ [31]

Special Device

Only for “New Device.”
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which require some special procedure to
establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want to connect.
• After selecting the device, use <Open> or <Search> (☞ page 30 or 31)
for connection.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You can
connect the unit and the device by using <Connect> (☞ below) from the
next time.

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ pages 30 and
31), establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the device being connected.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Delete the registered devices.

2

*1 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO.” Select a device (or “New Device”) before operating the
menu.
*2 Only for the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*3 Selectable only when the source is “Bluetooth PHONE” and the connected cellular phone is compatible with SMS
(Short Message Service).

When operating the Bluetooth device, refer also to the instructions supplied with the device.

58

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 58

07.12.17 5:46:38 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
4

When the unit is turned on, the connection is established automatically
with...
Off: No Bluetooth device.
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found first.

Auto Answer *5

Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the calls
manually.
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.

Message Info *5

Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and
displaying “Receiving Message.” To read the message, ☞ page 33.
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.
01/02/03

Version *6

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

Settings

Auto Connect *

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 50.

Initial: Underlined
*4 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “New Device” is selected.
*6 If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc-victor.
co.jp/english/car/>

59

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 59

SETTINGS
SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:46:38 PM

ENGLISH

Maintenance
Moisture condensation

To keep discs clean

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.

How to handle discs

To play new discs
Center holder

When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder of
the case and lift the disc out, holding it
by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:
SingleCD—8 cm disc

Unusual shape

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)

Stick-on label

Transparent or semi-transparent on its
recording area

60

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 60

07.12.17 5:46:39 PM

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

General

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters for file/
folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

ENGLISH

More about this unit

Playing DVD-VR

Disc

• For details about DVD-VR format and Playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

General
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are
interchangeably used.
• This unit can only play back audio CD (CD-DA) files
if different type of audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV) are
recorded on the same disc.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.

File playback
Playing DivX files
• This unit can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx>, <.div>, or <.avi> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit supports the DivX files whose resolution is
720 x 576 pixels or less.
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or Dolby Digital.
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode
may not be played back correctly.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

Ejecting a disc
• If “No disc“ appears after removing a disc, insert a
disc or select another playback source.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust.

Continued on the next page

61

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 61

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:46:39 PM

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO
format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional,
and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

ENGLISH

Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2
files recorded by JVC Everio camcorders.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Playing JPEG files

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
on the disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)

62

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 62

07.12.17 5:46:40 PM

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
p

• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

Current folder (highlighted bar)
Current folder number/total folder number
Folder list
Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not
displayed for JPEG)
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
in the current folder (total number of tracks on
the disc)
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)
Track list
Current track (highlighted)

ENGLISH

Bluetooth operations
General

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error: The device is registered but the
connection has failed. Use <Connect> to connect
the device again. (☞ page 31)
• Error: Try the operation again. If “Error” appears
again, check if the device supports the function you
have tried.
• Device Unfound: No available Bluetooth device is
detected by <Search>.
• Loading: The unit is updating the phone book and/
or SMS.
• Please Wait...: The unit is preparing to use
the Bluetooth function. If the message does not
disappear, turn off and turn on the unit, then connect
the device again (or reset the unit).
• Reset 08: Check the connection between the
adapter and this unit.

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline
JPEG), it will be displayed.

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.

63

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 63

:

Cellular phone

:

Household phone

:

Office

:

General

:

Other than above

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:46:40 PM

ENGLISH

CD changer

Menu settings

• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (☞ page 37), you will hear a
beep. Select another folder including music files.

• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from
<High> to <Low> while the volume level is set
higher than “30,” the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio
Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the
power, and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc)
so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect
ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may
become <4:3LB> for some discs.

DAB tuner
• Only the primary DAB service can be preset even
when you store a secondary service.

iPod operations
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano *1
– iPod video (5th Generation) *2
*1 When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
*2 It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu while the iPod is connected to the
interface adapter.
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the adapter connected to this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the screen. This unit
can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>

64

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 64

07.12.17 5:46:41 PM

2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Through the DIGITAL OUT terminal

ENGLISH

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT)

Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted.
• To reproduce the multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set <D. Audio Output> correctly.
(☞ page 53)
Output signals

<D. Audio Output>
Playback disc
DVD

<Stream>

<Dolby D>

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital
with DTS
with MPEG Audio

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD, Video CD

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD with DTS

DTS bitstream

DivX/
with Dolby Digital
MPEG

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream

with MPEG Audio

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

MP3/WMA

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

WAV

44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the
discs are not copy-protected.

65

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 65

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:46:41 PM

ENGLISH

Preset equalizing values
Frequency
Sound mode
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User1/2/3

60 Hz

150 Hz

400 Hz

1 kHz

2.5 kHz

6.3 kHz

15 kHz

00
+03
+03
00
+03
+04
+02
+03
+02
00

00
+03
+02
+02
+02
+02
+01
00
+03
00

00
+01
+02
00
+01
00
00
00
+01
00

00
00
00
00
+01
–02
00
+01
00
00

00
00
+01
+01
+01
–01
00
+02
00
00

00
+02
+01
+01
+03
+01
+01
+02
+02
00

00
+01
+03
+02
+02
+01
+02
+03
00
00

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)
Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU

Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque

Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian

Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali

Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

66

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 66

07.12.17 5:46:42 PM

• Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan
and other countries.
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®
6) with enhanced playback of DivX® media files
and the DivX® Media Format
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Victor Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
• iPod and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is
selected for <Language>. (☞ page 52)
Upper and lower cases

ENGLISH

Characters shown on the screen
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you
can use the following characters to assign titles.
(☞ page 49)
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>.
(☞ page 52)

Numbers and symbols

67

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 67

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:46:43 PM

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied with the adapters used for the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
Symptoms
• No sound comes out of the speakers.

• The screen is not clear and legible.

FM/AM

General

• “Position Error Push Open Key” appears on
the screen.
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on the
screen, and the panel does not move.
• “No Signal” appears.

Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced through the analog
terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT).
Sunshine from the windscreen may cause this symptom.
Adjust <Bright>. (☞ page 51)
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press OPEN/TILT.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)

• The buttons on the monitor panel do not
work.
• The unit does not work at all.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected
to VIDEO IN terminal.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
When the monitor panel is open, only +/– (volume) and
OPEN/TILT work. The other buttons do not function.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Store stations manually. (☞ page 11)

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

68

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 68

07.12.17 5:46:44 PM

Disc in general

• Disc can be neither recognized nor played
back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot be
played back.
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable discs
cannot be skipped.
• Playback does not start.
•
•
•

•
•
•

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedies/Causes
Eject the disc forcibly. (☞ page 3)
Unlock the disc. (☞ page 22)
• Insert a finalized disc.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used
for recording.

ENGLISH

Symptoms

• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.
The playback picture is not clear and legible. Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 51)
Sound and pictures are sometimes
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
interrupted or distorted.
• Change the disc.
No playback picture is shown and “Parking
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
Brake” appears on the screen, even when the (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
parking brake is engaged.
No picture appears on the external monitor. • Connect the video cord correctly.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.
“Eject Error” or “Loading Error” appears on
Change the source by pressing SOURCE.
the screen.
“Region code error” appears on the screen
Region code is not correct. (☞ page 4)
when you insert a DVD Video.
Disc cannot be played back.
• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (☞ page 4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.
Noise is generated.
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Tracks are not played back as you have
Playback order may differ from that played back using
intended them to play.
other players.
Elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded.
“Not Support” appears on the screen and
The track is unplayable.
track skips.

Continued on the next page

69

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 69

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:46:44 PM

Symptoms

ENGLISH

• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit.

• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.

Bluetooth

• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.

• Echo or noise occurs.
• Phone sound quality is poor.

• The sound is interrupted or skipped during
playback of a Bluetooth audio player.

• “New Device” cannot be selected for
“Bluetooth AUDIO.”
• The connected audio player cannot be
controlled.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

Remedies/Causes
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected device
and search again.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select <Open> on the unit to connect
the device. (☞ page 30)
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device. If the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its
instructions, try “0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then
try to connect again. (☞ pages 31, 58)
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
cellular phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal
reception.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
audio player.
• Disconnect the player connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player
again.
Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “New
Device,” disconnect it. (☞ page 31)
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

70

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 70

07.12.17 5:46:44 PM

DAB tuner

• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• “No DAB Signal” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The DAB tuner does not work at all.
• “Antenna Power NG” appears on the screen.
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work.

AV-IN

iPod

• Sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.
• Playback stops.
• “No Files” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• No picture appears on the screen.
• Playback picture is not clear and legible.

Remedies/Causes
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Current disc does not include playable files. Replace the disc
with one including playable files.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Move to an area with stronger signals.
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then reset
the unit. (☞ page 3)
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly, then reset
the unit. (☞ page 3)
Check the cords and connections.
• Check the connection.
• Charge the battery.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
Check the connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart
playback.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod. Then,
connect them again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 51)

71

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 71

ENGLISH

CD changer

Symptoms
• “No Disc” appears on the screen.
• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.
• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:46:45 PM

ENGLISH

Specifications
Maximum Power Output:
Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:

Input:
Output:

50 W per channel
20 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
6.3 kHz, 15 kHz
±10 dB
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
PAL
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Aerial input
VIDEO OUT

Others:

CD changer, OE REMOTE, Reverse gear
signal, DIGITAL OUT (optical)

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM:

(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

65 dB

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation:

35 dB

MW Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/35 dB

LW Tuner

Sensitivity:

50 μV

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Frequency Response:

DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:

16 Hz to 22 000 Hz

VCD/CD:

16 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Frequency Range:

FM/AM TUNER

Frequencies:
Level:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Output Level
REAR OUT:
Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:

DVD/CD

Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:

FM Tuner

Dynamic Range:

93 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

95 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

72

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 72

07.12.17 5:46:45 PM

7 inch wide liquid crystal display

Number of Pixel:

336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)

Drive Method:

TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format

Color System:

NTSC/PAL

Aspect Ratio:

16:9 (wide)

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

ENGLISH

MONITOR
GENERAL

Screen Size:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System:

Negative ground

Allowable Storage Temperature:

–10°C to +60°C

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D):
• With trim plate and
sleeve attached

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 111 mm × 160 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 117 mm × 10 mm

Mass (approx.):

2.9 kg (including trims and sleeve)

100

Required space for the monitor ejection

160

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm

90.5

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

73

EN_KW-AVX710[EU].indb 73

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:46:46 PM

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

¿Tiene PROBLEMAS con la operación?
Por favor reinicialice su unidad
Consulte la página de Cómo reposicionar su unidad

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil

EN, SP, FR
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

Rear_KW-AVX710[EU1].indd 2

1207MNMMDWJEIN

07.12.19 2:21:14 PM

KW-AVX716/KW-AVX710
LVT1779-008A

Installation/Connection Manual
Manual de instalación/conexión
Manuel d’installation/raccordement

1207MNMMDWJEIN
EN, SP, FR
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

[EU]

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con
sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee
este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser
adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para
automóviles.

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant
continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas
ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que
vous pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC..

WARNINGS

ADVERTENCIAS

AVERTISSEMENTS

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations,
as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as
this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as
this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to
carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around
carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” flashes on the
monitor, and no playback picture will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake lead is
connected to the parking brake system built in the car.

• NO instale ningún receptor o tienda ningún cable en una ubicación
donde;
– donde pueda obstruir la maniobra del volante de dirección y del
cambio de engranajes, con el consiguiente riesgo de accidentes de
tráfico.
– donde pueda obstruir el funcionamiento de dispositivos de
seguridad tales como bolsas de aire, pues podría resultar en un
accidente fatal.
– donde pueda obstruir la visibilidad.
• NO OPERE la unidad mientras está maniobrando el volante de
dirección, pues podría producirse un accidente de tráfico.
• El conductor no debe mirar el monitor mientras conduce. Podría
producirse un descuido, y causar un accidente.
• Si necesita operar la unidad mientras conduce, asegúrese de mirar
atentamente a su alrededor pues de lo contrario, se podría producir
un accidente de tráfico.
• Si el freno de estacionamiento no está aplicado, parpadeará “Parking
Brake” en el monitor, y no se visualizará la imagen reproducida.
– Esta advertencia aparece únicamente cuando el cable del freno de
estacionamiento se encuentra conectado al sistema del freno de
estacionamiento incorporado al automóvil.

• N’INSTALLEZ aucun appareil ni aucun câble dans un endroit où:
– où il peut gêner l’accès au volant ou au levier de vitesse car cela
peut entraîner un accident de la circulation.
– où il peut gêner la manipulation de dispositifs de sécurité tels
que les airbags car cela peut entraîner un accident fatal.
– où il peut gêner la visibilité.
• NE COMMANDEZ pas l’appareil lors de la manipulation du volant
car cela peut entraîner un accident de la circulation.
• Le conducteur ne doit pas regarder le moniteur lorsqu’il conduit.
Cela peut lui faire perdre sa concentration et causer un accident.
• Si vous souhaitez opérer l’appareil pendant que vous conduisez,
assurez-vous de bien regarder autour de vous afin de ne pas
causer un accident de la circulation.
• Si le frein de stationnement n’est pas engagé, “Parking Brake”
clignote sur le moniteur et aucune image de lecture n’apparaît.
– Cet avertissement apparaît uniquement quand le fil du
frein de stationnement est connecté au système de frein de
stationnement intégré à la voiture.

Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amplifier Gain”
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 56 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.

Notas sobre las conexiones eléctricas:
• Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el fusible
se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario de JVC de
equipos de audio para automóviles.
• Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima de más
de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia de 4 Ω a
8 Ω).
Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie “Amplifier
Gain” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 56 del
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con
cinta aislante.
• El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese
de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.

Remarques sur les connexions électriques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible
saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une
puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes
avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω).
Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à 50 W, changez
“Amplifier Gain” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir
page 56 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont
PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire
attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.

Heat sink
Sumidero térmico
Dissipateur de chaleur

Parts list for installation and connection

Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement

The following parts are provided for this unit. If anything is missing,
contact your dealer immediately.

Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún
elemento faltante, póngase inmediatamente en contacto con su
concesionario.

Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque
chose manquait, contactez votre revendeur immédiatement.

*1 Fitted to the main unit when shipped

*1 Fijado a la unidad principal cuando se expide de fábrica

*1 Fixé à l’appareil lors de l’expédition.

Remote controller
Control remoto
Télécommande

Brackets*1
Ménsulas*1
Supports*1

Sleeve*1
Cubierta*1
Manchon*1

Main unit
Unidad principal
Appareil principal

Power cord
Cordón de alimentación
Cordon d’alimentation

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm)*1
Tornillos de cabeza plana (M5 x 8 mm)*1
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm)*1

Round head screws (M2.6 x 3 mm)*1
Tornillos de cabeza esférica (M2,6 x 3 mm)*1
Vis à tête ronde (M2,6 x 3 mm)*1

Batteries
Pilas
Piles

Trim plate
Placa de guarnición
Plaque d’assemblage

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
Tornillos de cabeza plana (M5 x 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm)

Round head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
Tornillos de cabeza esférica (M5 x 8 mm)
Vis à tête ronde (M5 x 8 mm)
Use these screws when installing the unit without the supplied sleeve.
Utilice estos tornillos cuando instale la unidad sin la funda suministrada.
Utilisez ces vis lors de l’installation de l’appareil sans le manchon fourni.

Crimp connector
Conector de sujeción
Raccord à sertir

1
AVX710[EU1]_install.indb 1

07.12.24 10:34:36 AM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH
MOUNTING)

INSTALACIÓN (MONTAJE EN EL TABLERO DE
INSTRUMENTOS)

INSTALLATION
(MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you
should make adjustments corresponding to your specific car. If you
have any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company
supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed
by a qualified technician.

La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Sin embargo
usted deberá efectuar los ajustes correspondientes a su automóvil.
Si tiene alguna pregunta o necesita información acerca de las
herramientas para instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de
equipos de audio para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra
tales herramientas.
• Si no está seguro de poder instalar la unidad correctamente, déjela en
manos de un técnico cualificado.

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique.
Cependant, vous devez faire les ajustements correspondant à votre
voiture. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information
sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios
JVC ou une compagnie d’approvisionnement.
• Si vous n’êtes pas sûr de pouvoir installer l’appareil correctement,
faite-le installer par un technicien qualifié.

Avant d’installer l’appareil

Before installing the unit
• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as
instructed. If other screws are used, parts could become loose or
damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any
connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper
ventilation when installing the unit.

1

2
3

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together
with its mounting brackets.
• Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from your car
for future use.

• Al instalar la unidad, asegúrese de usar los tornillos suministrados,
de acuerdo con las instrucciones. El uso de otros tornillos podrá
provocar flojedad de o daños a las piezas.
• Al apretar los tornillos o los pernos, asegúrese de que ningún cable de
conexión quede pillado.
• Al efectuar la instalación, asegúrese de no bloquear el ventilador del
panel trasero a fin de mantener una ventilación correcta.

• Lors du montage de l’appareil, assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis
fournies, de la façon indiquée. Si vous utilisez d’autres vis,
certaines pièces peuvent être perdues ou endommagées.
• Lorsque vous serrez des vis ou des boulons, faites attention de ne
pas pincer un cordon de connexion.
• Assurez-vous de ne pas bloquer le ventilateur sur le panneau
arrière lors de l’installation afin de permettre une ventilation
correcte.

1

1

Antes de instalar la unidad

• Asegúrese de guardar todos los tornillos y piezas quitados de su
vehículo para poderlos usar en el futuro.

Install the sleeve in the dashboard of the car.
Attach the brackets to the main unit.
• Make sure to use the supplied flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm). If
longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.

4

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 and 4.

5
6

Install the main unit in the sleeve.

Desmonte el sistema de audio instalado originalmente en el coche,
junto con los ménsulas de montaje.

2
3

Instale la cubierta en el cubretablero del automóvil.

4

Realice todas las conexiones eléctricas necesarias.
• Consulte las páginas 3 y 4.

5
6

Coloque la unidad principal en la cubierta.

Attach the trim plate.

Fije los ménsulas a la unidad principal.
• Asegúrese de usar los tornillos de cabeza plana suministrados
(M5 × 8 mm). El uso de tornillos más largos producir daños a la
unidad.

2
3

4
5
6

Retirez le système audio d’origine installé dans la voiture en
même temps que les supports de montage.
• Assurez-vous de conserver toutes les vis et pièces détachées
de votre voiture pour une utilisation dans le future.
Installez le manchon dans le tableau de bord de la voiture.
Attachez les supports à l’appareil principal.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser les vis à tête plate fournis —(M5 × 8
mm). Vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil si vous utilisez des
vis plus longues.
Réalisez les connexions électriques requises.
• Référez-vous aux pages 3 et 4.
Installez l’appareil principal dans le manchon.
Fixez la plaque d’assemblage

Fije la placa de guarnición.

1

4

2

Sleeve
Cubierta
Manchon

5

Round head screws (M2.6 × 3 mm)
Tornillos de cabeza esférica (M2,6 x 3 mm)
Vis à tête ronde (M2,6 x 3 mm)
Brackets
Ménsulas
Supports

3

6

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Tornillos de cabeza plana (M5 x 8 mm)
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm)

Trim plate

Placa de guarnición
Plaque d’assemblage

30˚

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject when in use.
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚, teniendo en cuenta que el monitor debe extraerse para su uso.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30°, en tenant compte du fait que le moniteur doit être déployé lors de son utilisation.

2
AVX710[EU1]_install.indb 2

07.12.24 10:34:45 AM

100

Required space for the monitor ejection
Espacio requerido para la expulsión del monitor
Espace requis pour le déploiement du moniteur

Unit:
mm
Unidad: mm
Unité:
mm

90.5

160

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections
before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.

Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal
negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas antes
de instalar la unidad.
• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis
del automóvil después de la instalación.

Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de
débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les
raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de
cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker
connections:

PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la fuente de
alimentación y de los altavoces:

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des
enceintes:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord
to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously
damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

• NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de
alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían
producirse graves daños en la unidad.
• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su
automóvil.

• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon
d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait
sérieusement endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon
d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes
de votre voiture.

If your car is equipped with the ISO connector
Si su automóvil está equipado con el conector ISO
Si votre voiture est équippée d’un connecteur ISO

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile
Para algunos automóviles VW/Audi u Opel (Vauxhall)
Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel (Vauxhall)

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
• Conecte los conectores ISO tal como se indica en la ilustración.
• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Podría ser necesario modificar el conexionado del cable de alimentación suministrado, tal como se indica en la ilustración.
• Antes de instalar esta unidad, consulte a su concesionario de automóviles autorizado.
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.

From the car body
Desde la carrocería del vehículo
De la carrosserie de la voiture

ISO connector of the supplied power cord
Conector ISO del cable de alimentación suministrado
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation
fourni

Original wiring

Conexionado original
Câblage original

ISO connector
Conector ISO
Connecteur ISO

Modified wiring 1
Conexionado modificado 1
Câblage modifié 1

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
Si la unidad no se enciende, utilice el conexionado modificado 2.
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension

View from the lead side
Vista desde el lado del conductor
Vue à partir du côté des fils

Modified wiring 2
Conexionado modificado 2
Câblage modifié 2

A

Y: Yellow
Amarillo
Jaune

R: Red
Rojo
Rouge

Connecting the parking brake lead / Conexión del cable del freno de estacionamiento / Connexion du fil de frein de stationnement

Connect the parking brake lead to the parking brake system built in
the car.
Conecte el cable del freno de estacionamiento al sistema del freno de
estacionamiento instalado en el coche.
Connectez le fil de frein de stationnement au système de frein de
stationnement intégré à la voiture.

Parking brake
Freno de estacionamiento
Frein de stationnement

Parking brake lead (light green)
Cable del freno de estacionamiento
(verde claro)
Fil du frein de stationnement
(vert clair)

a

Crimp connector
Conector de sujeción
Raccord à sertir
To metallic body or chassis of the car
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del
automóvil
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la
voiture

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Interruptor del freno de estacionamiento
(dentro del automóvil)
Commutateur de frein de stationnement
(intérieur de la voiture)
3
AVX710[EU1]_install.indb 3

07.12.24 10:34:48 AM

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

Connections without using the ISO connector / Conexión sin usar el conector ISO / Connexions sans utiliser le connecteur ISO
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car
body may be different in color.

Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del
vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la
unidad.
Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector procedentes de
la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes en color.

1
2

Cut the ISO connector.

1
2

3
4

Connect the aerial cord.

Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order
specified in the illustration below.
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Power cord
Cordón de alimentación
Cordon d’alimentation

3
4

Corte el connector ISO.
Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el
orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.
Conecte el cable de antena.
Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement
le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut
endommager sérieusement l’appareil. Le fil du cordon
d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture
peuvent être différents en couleur.

1
2
3
4

Coupez le connecteur ISO.
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans
l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

Fan
Ventilador
Ventilateur

OE REMOTE Steering wheel remote
ENTRADA REMOTA OE Entrada
remota del volante de dirección
OE REMOTE Télécommande de volant

15 A fuse
Fusible de 15 A
Fusible 15 A

Rear ground terminal
Terminal de tierra posterior
Borne arrière de masse
ISO Connector
Conector ISO
Connecteur ISO

See each diagram on pages 5 and 6.
Vea cada uno de los diagramas en las
páginas 5 y 6.
Référez-vous à chaque diagramme des
pages 5 et 6.

Black
Negro
Noir

Yellow *3
Amarillo *3
Jaune*3

*2 Not supplied
*2 No suministrados
*2 Non fourni
* Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
3

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
power cannot be turned on.

*3 Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta
unidad previa a de la instalación, es necesario
conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se podrá
conectar la alimentación.
*3 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil
avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon
l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.

*2
*2

To metallic body or chassis of the car
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del
automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)

Red
Rojo
Rouge

Ignition switch
Interruptor de encendido
Interrupteur d’allumage

Fuse block
Bloque de fusibles
Porte-fusible

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible

Blue with white stripe
Azul con rayas blancas
Bleu avec bande blanche

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
(200 mA max.)

Orange with white stripe
Naranja con rayas blancas
Orange avec bande blanche

To car light control switch
Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture

Brown
Marrón
Marron

To cellular phone system
Al sistema de teléfono celular
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
To parking brake (see diagram Å on page 3.)
Al freno de estacionamiento (véase el diagrama Å
de la página 3.)
Au frein de stationnement (voir le diagramme Å
de la page 3.)

Light green
Verde claro
Vert clair

Crimp connector
Conector de sujeción
Raccord à sertir

White with black
stripe
Blanco con rayas
negras
Blanc avec bande
noire

White
Blanco
Blanc

Left speaker (front)
Altavoz izquierdo (delantero)
Enceinte gauche (avant)

Gray with black
stripe
Gris con rayas
negras
Gris avec bande
noire

Gray
Gris
Gris

Green with black
stripe
Verde con rayas
negras
Vert avec bande
noire

Green
Verde
Vert

Left speaker (rear)
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)

Right speaker (front)
Altavoz derecho (delantero)
Enceinte droit (avant)

Purple with black
stripe
Púrpura con rayas
negras
Violet avec bande
noire

Purple
Púrpura
Violet

Right speaker (rear)
Altavoz derecho (trasero)
Enceinte droit (arrière)

4
AVX710[EU1]_install.indb 4

07.12.24 10:34:51 AM

A Connections for external component playback / Conexiones para la reproducción del componente externo / Connexions pour un appareil de
lecture extérieur

AV amplifier or decoder
Amplificador o decodificador AV
Amplificateur AV ou décodeur

Video cord (not supplied)
Cables de video (no suministrados)
Cordon vidéo (non fourni)

Extension lead (not supplied)
Cable prolongador (no suministrado)
Cordon prolongateur (non fourni)

External monitor
Monitor externo
Moniteur extérieur

Digital optical cable (not supplied)
Cable óptico digital (no suministrado)
Câble optique numérique (non
fourni)

Crimp connector (not supplied)*5
Conector de sujeción (no
suministrado)*5
Raccord à sertir (non fourni)*5
To car battery
A la batería del automóvil
À la batterie de la voiture

To reverse lamp
A la luz de marcha atrás
Aux feux de recul

Reverse lamp lead*4
Conductor de la luz de marcha
atrás*4
Fil des feux de recul*4

Rear view camera KV-CM1*6
Cámara de reprovisión KV-CM1*6
Caméra de recul KV-CM1*6

Audio/video cord (not supplied)
Cables de audio/vídeo (no suministrados)
Cordon audio/vidéo (non fourni)

Camcorder, Navigation System, etc.
Videocámara, sistema de navegación, etc.
Caméscope, système de navigation, etc.

Reverse lamps
Luces de marcha atrás
Feux de recul

*4 Se requiere solamente cuando se conecta una cámara de retrovisión
al terminal VIDEO IN.
*5 Consulte å en el diagrama Å de la página 3.
*6 Para usar, ajuste “AV Input” a “Camera” (consulte la página 55 del
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).

*4 Required only when connecting a rear view camera to VIDEO
IN terminal.
*5 Refer to å in diagram Å on page 3.
*6 Set “AV Input” setting to “Camera” when using (see page 55 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).

*4 Requis uniquement lors de la connexion d’une caméra de
recul à la prise VIDEO IN.
*5 Reportez vous à å du diagramme Å de la page 3.
*6 Réglez “AV Input” sur “Camera” lors de l’utilisation (voir page
55 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

B Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller /Conexión al control remoto del volante de dirección / Connexion de
la télécommande de volant
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,
you can operate this unit using the controller. To do it, a JVC’s
OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is
required. Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for
details.

Si su vehículo está equipado con control remoto en el volante de
dirección, podrá hacer funcionar este receptor utilizando dicho control.
Para ello, se requiere un adaptador para control remoto OE de JVC
(no suministrado) que corresponda con su vehículo. Para mayor
información, consulte con su concesionario car audio de JVC.

OE REMOTE Steering wheel remote
ENTRADA REMOTA OE Entrada remota
OE REMOTE Télécommande de volant

Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous
pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant la télécommande.
Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant
JVC (non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture est nécessaire.
Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Control remoto del volante de dirección (equipado en el vehículo)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)
OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Adaptador para control remoto OE (no suministrado)
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)

C Connecting an external amplifier / Conexión de un amplificador externo / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• You can supply the power to the amplifier by connecting the
remote leads (blue with white stripe) of this unit to the amplifier.
(To connect other equipment using the remote leads, Yconnectors need to be separately purchased.)
• Disconnect the speakers from the unit, and connect them to the
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of the unit unused.
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio
signals only to the external amplifier to get clear sound and to
prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page 56 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.

Puede conectar un amplificador para mejorar su sistema car estéreo.
• Puede suministrar alimentación al amplificador conectando los
conductores remotos (azul con rayas blancas) de esta unidad al
amplificador. (Para conectar otro equipo usando los conductores
remotos, se deben adquirir separadamente conectores en Y).
• Desconecte los altavoces de la unidad y conéctelos al amplificador.
Los conductores de los altavoces de la unidad quedan sin usar.
• Puede desconectar el amplificador incorporado y enviar las señales
de audio sólo al(los) amplificador(es) externo(s) para obtener sonidos
nítidos y evitar la generación de calor dentro de la unidad. Consulte
la página 56 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Cable remoto (azul con rayas blancas)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)

Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre
système stéréo.
• Vous pouvez alimenter l’amplificateur en connectant les fils
de télécommande (bleu à bande blanche( de cet appareil à
l’amplificateur. (Pour connecter un autre appareil en utilisant les
fils de télécommande, vous devez acheter des connecteurs Y
séparément.)
• Déconnectez les enceintes de l’appareil principal et connectezles aux amplificateurs. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de l’appareil
inutilisés.
• Vous pouvez mettre hors service l’amplificateur intégré et
envoyer les signaux audio uniquement vers un ou plusieurs
amplificateurs extérieurs pour obtenir des sons plus clairs et
éviter un échauffement interne de l’appareil. Référez-vous à la
page 56 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS..

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Remote lead
Cable remoto
Fil d’alimentation à
distance
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur

Rear speakers
Altavoces traseros
Enceintes arrière

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática,
si hubiere
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne
automatique s’il y en a une

*7
Front speakers
Altavoces delanteros
Enceintes avant

*7 Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a un cuerpo metálico o chasis del
*7 Firmly attach the ground lead to the metallic body or to the
chassis of the car—to the place not coated with paint (if coated
automóvil—a un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con
with paint, remove the paint before attaching the lead). Failure to
pintura, quítela antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían
do so may cause damage to the unit.
producir daños en la unidad.

*7 Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis
métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert
de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord
la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être
endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.

5
AVX710[EU1]_install.indb 5

07.12.24 10:34:55 AM

D Connections to the CD changer jack / Conexión al jack del cambiador de CD / Connexions à la prise du changeur de CD
When connecting the external components, refer also to the
manuals supplied for the components and adapter.

Cuando conecte componentes externos, consulte, también, los manuales Lors de la connexion des appareils extérieurs, référez-vous aussi
suministrados con los componentes y el adaptador.
aux manuels fournis avec les appareils et les adaptateurs.

CAUTION:

PRECAUCIÓN:

PRECAUTION:

Before connecting the external components, make sure that the
unit is turned off.

Antes de conectar los componentes externos, asegúrese de que la
unidad esté apagada.

Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs, assurez-vous que
l’appareil est hors tension.

You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer
jack.
JVC component

Model name

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

JVC DAB tuner

KT-DB1000

You can also connect the following components through the
various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
Component

Adapter
Model name
Bluetooth device
Bluetooth adapter
KS-BTA200
iPod
Interface adapter for
iPod
KS-PD100
Portable audio player with line output
Line input adapter
jacks
KS-U57
Portable audio player with 3.5 mm stereo AUX input adapter
mini jack
KS-U58
When connecting more than one component (maximum: three),
it is recommended that you connect the components in series as
explained below.

Puede conectar los siguientes componentes JVC al jack del cambiador
de CD.
Componente JVC
Cambiador de CD (CD-CH)
Sintonizador DAB de JVC

También puede conectar los siguientes componentes mediante los
diversos adaptadores JVC.
• Puede ser necesario comprar los cables de conexión por separado.
Componente

Adaptador
Nombre del modelo
Dispositivo Bluetooth
Adaptador Bluetooth
KS-BTA200
iPod
Adaptador de interfaz
para iPod
KS-PD100
Reproductor de audio portátil con jacks de Adaptador de entrada
salida de línea
por línea
KS-U57
Reproductor de audio portátil con jack
Adaptador de entrada
mini estéreo de 3,5 mm
AUX
KS-U58
Cuando conecte más de un componente (máximo: tres), se recomienda
que conecte los componentes en serie, como se explica a continuación.

When connecting two components in series
Cuando conecta dos componentes en serie
Lors de la connexion de deux appareils en série

CD changer jack
Jack para el cambiador de CD
Prise du changeur de CD

Nombre del modelo
CH-X1500, etc.
KT-DB1000

Appareil JVC

Nom du modèle

Changeur de CD (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

Tuner DAB JVC

KT-DB1000

Vous pouvez aussi connecter les appareils suivants en utilisant
divers adaptateurs JVC.
• Vous pouvez avoir besoin d’acheter certains cordons de
connexion séparément.

Appareil
Périphérique Bluetooth
iPod

Lecteur audio portable avec prises de
sortie de ligne
Lecteur audio portable avec mini fiche
stéréo de 3,5 mm

Adaptateur
Nom du modèle
Adaptateur Bluetooth
KS-BTA200
Adaptateur
d’interface pour iPod
KS-PD100
Adaptateur d’entrée
de ligne
KS-U57
Adaptateur d’entrée
auxiliaire
KS-U58

Lors de la connexion de plus d’un appareil (maximum: trois), il est
recommandé que vous connectiez les appareils en série comme
nous l’expliquons ci-dessous.

When connecting three components in series
Cuando conecta tres componentes en serie
Lors de la connexion de trois appareils en série

A KS-BTA200 / KT-DB1000
B*8 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

CD changer jack
Jack para el cambiador de CD
Prise du changeur de CD

A KS-BTA200
B KT-DB1000
C*8 KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

*8 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 55 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
*8 Para utilizar estos componentes, configure el ajuste de entrada externa correctamente (consulte la
página 55 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
*8 Pour utiliser ces appareils, réglez l’entrée extérieure correctement (voir page 55 du MANUEL
D’INSTRUCTIONS).

To disconnect the connector / Para desconectar el conector / Pour déconnecter le connecteur
Hold the connector top tightly (1), then pull it out (2).
Sujete firmemente la parte superior del conector ( 1 ) y seguidamente,
extráigalo ( 2 ).
Tenez fermement le connecteur par-dessus ( 1 ) et tirez vers l’extérieur
( 2 ).

TROUBLESHOOTING

Vous pouvez connecter les appareils JVC suivants à la prise de
changeur de CD.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y otros países.
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.

LOCALIZACIÓN DE AVERIAS

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• El fusible se quema.
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?

• Le fusible saute.
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

•
*
•
*

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
• Unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

No es posible conectar la alimentación.
¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?
No sale sonido de los altavoces.
¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?

• El sonido presenta distorsión.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?
• Perturbación de ruido.
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?
• La unidad se calienta.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?
• Este receptor no funciona en absoluto.
* ¿Reinicializó el receptor?

• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Le son est déformé.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises
ensemble à la masse?
• Interférence avec les sons.
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de
la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• L’appareil devient chaud.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises
ensemble à la masse?
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

6
AVX710[EU1]_install.indb 6

07.12.24 10:35:00 AM

KW-AVX716
KW-AVX710

ENGLISH

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

KW-AVX716
KW-AVX710

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS
LVT1780-005A
[UT]

Cover_KW-AVX710UT_1.indd 2

08.2.12 10:36:27 AM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1.
2.
3.
4.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Cautions on the monitor:

WARNINGS:
To prevent accidents and damage

• The monitor built in this unit has been produced
with high precision, but it may have some
ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not
malfunction.
• Do not expose the monitor to direct sunlight.
• Do not operate the touch panel using a ball-point
pen or similar tool with the sharp tip.
Touch the buttons on the touch panel with your
finger directly (if you are wearing a glove, take it
off).
• When the temperature is very cold or very hot...
– Chemical changes occur inside, causing
malfunction.
– Pictures may not appear clearly or may move
slowly. Pictures may not be synchronized with
the sound or picture quality may decline in
such environments.

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and
gearshift lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

[European Union only]

2

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 2

07.12.6 3:31:14 PM

How to reset your unit

INTRODUCTION
Playable disc types .......................... 4
Basic operations—
Monitor panel/touch panel............ 5
Basic operations—
Remote controller (RM-RK252) ...... 6

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc
ENTER

NO EJECT?
EMERGENCY EJECT?

3

OPERATIONS
Before operating the unit ................ 8
Common operations ........................ 9
Listening to the radio ...................... 10
Disc operations ................................ 13

Exit

Back

2
1

at the same time

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Bluetooth® operations—
Cellular phone/audio player .......... 27
Listening to the CD changer .............. 34
Listening to the iPod........................ 36
Using other external components ..... 38

1

• If this does not work, reset the unit.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

SETTINGS
Sound equalization .......................... 41
Assigning titles to the sources .......... 42
Menu operations ............................. 43

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

REFERENCES
Maintenance ................................... 52
More about this unit ........................ 53
Troubleshooting .............................. 60
Specifications .................................. 64

3

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 3

ENGLISH

Contents

INTRODUCTION
07.12.6 3:31:18 PM

ENGLISH

Playable disc types
Disc type

Recording format, file type, etc.

DVD

DVD Video (Region Code: 3)*1

Playable

DVD Audio
DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
DVD Video
(DVD-R/-RW*2, +R/+RW*3)
DVD-VR
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
• DVD-VR
JPEG
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/
MP3/WMA/WAV
WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level 1,
AAC
level 2, Romeo, Joliet
MPEG4
DVD+VR
DVD-RAM
Dual Disc
DVD side
Non-DVD side
CD/VCD
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)/DTS-CD
VCD (Video CD)
SVCD (Super Video CD)
CD-ROM
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
MP3/WMA/WAV
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo, JPEG
Joliet
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
AAC
MPEG4
*1 If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).
DVD-RW dual layer discs are not playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs.
+RW double layer discs are not playable.
Caution for DualDisc playback
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
4

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 4

07.12.6 3:31:19 PM

Display <AV Menu> screen. ☞ page 43
Display <Source Menu> screen. ☞ page 9
Display and erase the Short Cut windows.
Available functions vary among the sources. For details, see each source operation
section.

Adjust the volume.
Change the display information.
Change the sources. ☞ page 9
Display <AV Menu> screen.
☞ page 43

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Monitor panel/touch panel

Remote sensor

• Display <Open/Tilt> menu.
• Eject the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
menu. [Hold]
• Close the monitor panel when <Open/Tilt>
menu is displayed.

• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power. [Hold]
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

<Open/Tilt> menu

Reset the unit.
• Use only when the internal system malfunctions.
•
•
•
•
•
•

• In the explanation, buttons on the touch panel
are indicated inside [ ].
• For details on the touch panel operations, see
each source operation section.
5

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 5

[OPEN]: Open the monitor panel.
[EJECT]: Eject the disc.
[CLOSE]: Close the monitor panel.
[TILT +/–]: Tilt the monitor panel.
[Exit]: Erase this screen.
Shaded icons cannot be used.

INTRODUCTION
07.12.6 3:31:20 PM

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Remote controller (RM-RK252)
Installing the battery

Main elements and features
R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace both batteries.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

1

• Turns on the power.
• Attenuates the sound if the power is on.
• Turns off the power if pressed and held (while
the power is on).

2

• Reverse search
• Reverse slow motion (during pause)

3

Adjusts the volume level.
• Does not function as “2nd VOL.”

4

• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

5

• DVD/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.

6

Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “ .“

6

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 6

07.12.6 3:31:20 PM

Functions with other buttons (see i and o).

8

Changes the display information.

9

For disc operations:
• 5 / ∞:
DVD: Selects the title.
DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
Other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders.
• 4 / ¢:
– Press briefly: reverse skip/forward skip
– Press and hold: reverse search/forward
search
For FM/AM operations:
• 5 / ∞: Selects the preset stations.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for stations.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For Apple iPod operations:
• ∞: Starts playback/pauses
• 5: Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞
/ 4 / ¢ work as menu selecting
buttons).
In the main menu:
• 5: Returns to the previous menu.
• ∞: Confirms the selection.
• 4/¢
– Press briefly: Selects an item.
– Press and hold: Skips ten items at a time.
For Bluetooth operations:
• 4 / ¢: reverse skip/forward skip (for
audio player operation)

p

• Forward search
• Forward slow motion (during pause)

q

Selects the source.

w

For disc operations:
Starts playback/pauses.
For Bluetooth operations:
• Answers incoming calls.
• Starts playback/pauses. (for audio player
operation).

e

Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.

r

“TUNER”: Selects the bands.
“DISC”: Stops playback.
“Bluetooth PHONE”: Ends the call.
“Bluetooth AUDIO”: Starts playback/pauses.

t

VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

y

• DVD Video/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.

u

• Makes selection/settings.
• @ / #: Skips back or forward by five minutes
for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2.
• % / fi: Changes discs for “CD-CH.”

ENGLISH

7

i*3 • Switches number entry mode for “DISC.”
• Erases the misentry after entering a wrong
number.
• Does not function as “SURROUND.”
o*3 Number buttons
• Enters numbers.
• “TUNER”: Selects the preset station directly.
*1 Functions as a number button only (see o ).
*2 Not used for this unit.
*3 Functions when pressed with SHIFT.

7

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 7

INTRODUCTION
07.12.6 3:31:21 PM

ENGLISH

Before operating the unit
@

You can cancel the demonstration on the screen and set
the clock.
• Non-available items will be shaded on the AV Menu
screens.

Set the clock settings.
Moves to the preceding menu page

Indication language:
In this manual, English indications are used
for purpose of explanation. You can select the
indication language. (☞ page 45)
Moves to the succeeding menu page

~

Turn on the power.

Ÿ

Display <AV Menu> screen.

!

Display <Setup> menu.

¤
⁄

Finish the procedure.

Cancel the demonstration.
Select <Off>.

Return to the previous screen.

8

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 8

07.12.6 3:31:21 PM

Selecting the playback source

ENGLISH

Common operations
Changing the display
information

• Available sources depend on the external
components you have connected, media you have
attached, and the <Input> settings you have made
(☞ page 47).

• Available display information varies among the
playback sources.

On the monitor panel only:

On the touch panel:

• Each time you press DISP, the display changes to
show the various information.
Ex. When the playback source is a DivX disc.
Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen
Exit

On the monitor panel:
Track list

Clock time in large numbers

TUNER = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD) =CD-CH, iPod, or
EXT-IN = Bluetooth PHONE = Bluetooth AUDIO
= AV-IN = (back to the beginning)
Navigation screen
(When <Navigation> is
selected for <AV Input>)
(☞ page 47)

• You cannot select these sources if they are not ready.

Back to the beginning

9

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 9

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:22 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset no.

Assigned station name (☞ page 42). If no name is assigned,
the frequency of the station is displayed instead.

Band
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
☞ page 11,
Tuner indicators

☞ page 9

~
Ÿ
!

Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In
the explanation,
they are
indicated inside
[ ].

Press [BAND].
Press [4] or [¢] to search for a station—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.
• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

3

When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
1

Press [AV MENU].

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• The MONO indicator lights up.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

Press [Mode].

To restore stereo effect, select <Off>.

10

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 10

07.12.6 3:31:23 PM

FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)

This function works only for FM bands. Once you have
activated this function (selected <Local>), it always
works when searching for FM stations.

1

This function works only for FM bands.
You can preset six stations for each band.

Press [AV MENU].

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

ENGLISH

Tuning in to stations with
sufficient signal strength

Press [AV MENU].

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Mode].

2

3

Press [Mode].

3

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be
detected.
• The DX indicator goes off, then the LO indicator
lights up.
• You can also change <IF Band Width> setting
(for details, ☞ page 47).
<IF Band Width> menu can be accessed by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then..
☞ page 41

11

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 11

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:23 PM

ENGLISH

Manual presetting

Selecting a preset station

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number
4 of the FM1 band.

On the remote:

1

1

Display the Preset List.

2
or
Hold

On the unit:
• To select directly on the touch panel

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

• To select from the Preset List

1
3

Select a preset number.

2
[Hold]

The station selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 4.

12

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 12

07.12.6 3:31:24 PM

The disc type is automatically detected, and playback starts automatically (for some discs: automatic start depends
on its internal program).
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks on it will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject
the disc.

ENGLISH

Disc operations

If “ ” appears on the screen, the unit cannot accept the operation you have tried to do.
• In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted.

~

!

Open the monitor panel.

Insert a disc.

Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Ÿ

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [CLOSE].

Press [OPEN].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

When playing back a multi-channel encoded disc,
the multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• You can fully enjoy multi-channel sound by
connecting an amplifier or a decoder compatible
with these multi-channel sources. (☞ also page
57)

Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
13

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 13

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:24 PM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information. (☞ page 9)

DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter no./Playing time

Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal
channel no.

Disc type *1
Audio format
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
Playback mode

☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select chapter
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2
[5 ∞]
Select title/program/playlist

*1 DVD-VR also indicates either PRG (program) or PLAY (playlist) playback.
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback pictures
on the screen).

14

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 14

07.12.6 3:31:25 PM

For DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2: Folder no./Track no./Playing time
For JPEG: Folder no./File no.

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information (☞ page 9).

Disc type
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total track no.
included on the
disc

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 *1
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

Track no./Playing time

The PBC indicator
lights up when PBC is
in use.

Total track no.
included on the
disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total playing time

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10
15

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 15

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:25 PM

ENGLISH

Track no./Playing time

Only for CD Text *3
Total track no.
included on the disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total playing time
☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

Audio format
(MP3/WMA/WAV)
Tag data appears
only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
Total track no. included on the disc

☞ page 19

[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

*3 “No Name” appears for conventional CDs.
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10
16

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 16

07.12.6 3:31:26 PM

You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• While the operation buttons are displayed, aspect ratio is fixed to <Full>. (☞ page 45)
• If no operation is done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is
displayed).

ENGLISH

Operation buttons on the screen

☞ pages 20 to 24 on how the operation buttons
particularly work for a variety of the discs

A
[SOURCE]
[AV MENU]
[SHORT CUT]
[3 / 8]
[7]
[4 ¢]

Display <Source Menu> screen
Display <AV Menu> screen
Display the Short Cut buttons
Start and pause playback
Stop playback
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Select folders
• The above buttons also work when they are not shown on
the screen (while watching the playback picture).
* While a disc menu is played back for DVD, [KEY] is
automatically displayed. On the disc menu, you can select a
menu item directly by touching it on the screen.

Touch the screen (center portion).

*

Touch [KEY].

B
For DVD/VCD/DivX menu operation playback
[2 3 5 ∞] Select the menu items
[ENT]
Confirm the selection
[TOP MENU] Display the disc menu
[MENU]
Display the disc menu
[RETURN]
Return to the previous menu or display the
menu (only for VCD with PBC)

Touch [KEY].

C
For entering the numbers
[DIRECT CLR] • Switch between chapter/track entry and
title/group/folder entry
• Erase the last entry when you enter a
wrong number
[0]–[9]=[ENT]
Enter numbers
Ex.: To enter “105,” press [1], [0], [5], then [ENT]

Touch [KEY].

To erase the operations, touch the screen again.
17

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 17

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:27 PM

ENGLISH

Selecting playback modes
You can use the following playback modes—Repeat or Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat

1

3

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Title: Repeats current title
Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Program: Repeats current program (not
available for Playlist playback)
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Repeats current folder

Folder: Repeats current folder

—
—
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks
—

Track:

Repeats current track (PBC not in
use)

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks (PBC not
in use)

Track:

Repeats current track*1

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

Track: Repeats current track*1
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder

Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

*1 You can also use [SHORT CUT] to turn on and off Track Repeat.

18

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 18

07.12.6 3:31:28 PM

Prohibiting disc ejection

If a disc includes folders, you can display the Folder/
Track (File) Lists, then start playback.

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

ENGLISH

Selecting tracks on the list
1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
at the same time

3

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.

Select a folder (1), then a track (2).

Using Short Cut Icons
You can easily access the some frequently used
functions by using [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel.

1
Selected track starts playing. (* Press to move to
the previous/next pages of the list)
1 Current folder list number/total folder list
number
2 Current track list number/total track list
number of the current folder
You can easily access the Track List by pressing DISP
on the monitor panel.

2
• For video software:
Aspect ratio
(☞ page 45)
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

• For audio software:

Turn on or off Track Repeat
(Repeat play: ☞ page 18)

Selected track starts playing.
19

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 19

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:28 PM

ENGLISH

Operations using the remote controller—RM-RK252
Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No sound can be heard.)
Select title (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select title (when not playing).

twice

Select title (during playback or pause).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

You can change the following items using the on-screen bar—audio language, audio stream, audio channel,
subtitle language, view angle, etc. (☞ pages 25 and 26)

20

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 20

07.12.6 3:31:29 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4 (No sound can be heard.)
Forward slow motion during pause*5 (No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*6
Select program.
Select playlist (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.
Select chapter.
Select program (when not playing).
Select program/playlist (during playback or pause).
twice

Using Original Program/Playlist screens ( ☞ page 25)
1

For Original Program
For Playlist

2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3

To erase the screen.

*4 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*5 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*6 Search speed: x2 ] x10

21

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 21

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:31 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.

Select track (within the same folder).
twice

Select folder.
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

While playing...
Reverse/advance the scenes by five minutes.
Current playback position

2nd press

1st press

1st press

2nd press

3rd press

For DivX6: Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2 ] ¡3
*2 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2

22

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 22

07.12.6 3:31:31 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause. (Slide show: each file is shown for a few seconds.)
Shows the current file until you change it if pressed during Slide show.
Select file.
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.
Select file (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed
during playback).
Reverse/forward search*3
Forward slow motion during pause*4
(No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5 (No
sound can be heard.)

During PBC playback...

Select aspect ratio.

2 Select the desired track.

Select an item on the menu.
To return to the previous menu, press
To cancel PBC playback
1

• To resume PBC, press
Select track.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*5 Search speed: x2 ] x10

23

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 23

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:32 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

Select track.
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Reverse/forward search*3
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
Select folder.

Select track (within the same folder).

twice

Select folder.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10

24

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 24

07.12.6 3:31:33 PM

Operations using the on-screen
bar

You can use Original Program or Playlist
screen anytime while playing DVD-VR with its data
recorded.

1

2

These operations are possible on the screen using
the remote controller, while playing the following
discs—DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG.

Display the Original Program/Playlist screen.

1

Display the on-screen bar. (☞page 26)

2

Select an item.

3

Make a selection.
If a pop-up menu appears...

ENGLISH

Using the list screens

Select an item you want.

To erase the screen

Ex. For DVD-Video

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
the recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/playlist*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of playlist
8 Total number of chapters included in the playlist
9 Playback time

• For entering time/numbers...
:
Move the entry position

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

:
Select a number
To remove the on-screen bar

25

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 25

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:34 PM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Information
Operation

Above example is of DVD Video. Items shown on the bar vary due to the disc type.
1 Disc type
2 • DVD: Audio signal format
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD Video:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
T. RPT:
Title repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
F. RND: Folder random
A. RND: All (Disc) random
JPEG:
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
VCD:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter

5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
Remaining title time (for DVD)
Remaining disc time (for others)
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track *2
Remaining time of the current
chapter/track *2
6 Playback status
Play
Reverse/forward search
Reverse/forward slow-motion
Pause
Stop
7 Operation icons
Change time indication (see 5)
Time Search (Specify a certain
scene by entering time.)
Title Search (by its number)
Chapter Search (by its number)
Track Search (by its number)
Repeat play *1
Random play *1
Change the audio language, audio
stream, or audio channel
Change or erase the subtitle
language
Change the view angle

Current program/chapter
Current Playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file

*1 ☞ page 18
*2 Not applicable for DVD-VR

26

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 26

07.12.6 3:31:35 PM

For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the
Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD changer jack
on the rear.
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the
countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.

1

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press
[5] or [∞] to select it.

ENGLISH

Bluetooth® operations — Cellular phone/audio player

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

To use a Bluetooth device through the unit (“Bluetooth
PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“Bluetooth PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”).

3

Connecting a new Bluetooth
device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Go to other menu items

Use either of the following items in <Bluetooth>
menu to register and establish the connection with a
device.
• Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as
the source to operate <Bluetooth> menu.
Open

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Search

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating this unit.

4

Enter a PIN (Personal Identification
Number)* code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number).
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.

To register using <Open>
Preparation:
Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth
function.
Continued on the next page

27

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 27

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:37 PM

ENGLISH

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Enter]: Confirms the entry.

5

To connect a special device <Special
Device>

1

Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the above
step) on the device to be connected.

2
3
4
5

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use <Connect> (or activate
<Auto Connect>) to connect the same device
from next time (☞ the following, and pages 50
and 51).

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press [5]
or [∞] to select it.
Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Bluetooth].

4
5

6

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Special Device].
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
Select a device you want to connect.
Use <Open> (or <Search>) to connect.

To connect/disconnect a registered
device

To register using <Search>

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to connect/disconnect.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

3
4

Press [Search].
The unit searches for available devices and displays
the list of them. (If no available device is detected,
“Device Unfound” appears.)

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Connect] or [Disconnect].
• Select <Connect> to connect the selected
device.
• Select <Disconnect> to disconnect the selected
device.

To delete a registered device

Select a device you want to connect.
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to
the unit.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Connecting...” is displayed on the
screen.

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to delete.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

3
4

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Delete Pairing].
Confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

28

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 28

07.12.6 3:31:38 PM

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

*1

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 31

Adjust the volume of the incoming calls.*2

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside
[ ].

[AV MENU] Hold: Activates <Voice Dialing> function
[5 ∞] Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can be registered.)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of the other sources.

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ

Press [AV MENU].

!
⁄

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.
• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Bluetooth].
Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu).
☞ pages 50 and 51

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

When <Auto Answer> is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

To end the call
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(☞ page 51)

• You can adjust the microphone volume. (☞ page 51)

29

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 29

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:38 PM

3

ENGLISH

When an SMS comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.
When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (☞ page 51)

4

Select a calling method, then call.

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (☞ page 50)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages. (☞ pages
50 and 51)

Cancel

Redial

Shows the list of the phone
numbers you have dialed.
Received Calls Shows the list of the received
calls.
Phonebook
Shows the phone book of the
connected cellular phone.
Missed Calls Shows the list of the missed
calls.
Phone
Shows the phone number entry
Number
screen = “Entering a phone
number” (☞ page 31).
Voice Dialling (Only when the connected
cellular phone has the voice
recognition system): = Speak
the name you want to call.

To make a call

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

30

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 30

07.12.6 3:31:40 PM

To redial previously dialed numbers

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or +/–).

1

/ATT

ENGLISH

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

Entering a phone number
• You cannot use the remote controller to enter phone
numbers.

2

You can enter [0] – [9], [*], [#] (up to 32 numbers)
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Preset]: Goes to Preset List. You can preset the
entered number by selecting a preset
number. (☞ page 32)
• [Dial]: Calls the entered number.

3

• You can easily access <Dial Menu> by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
When using the remote controller, you can
display <Redial> menu anytime .
You can also access <Dial Menu> by holding
SOURCE on the monitor panel.
[Hold]
• You can easily activate <Voice Dialing> by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

You can also activate <Voice Dialing> by
holding [AV MENU].

31

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 31

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:41 PM

ENGLISH

Presetting the phone numbers

To call a preset number

You can preset up to six phone numbers.

1

1

Select the phone number you want to preset
from <Phonebook>, <Redial>, <Received
Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
1 Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.
2 Press [Bluetooth].
3 Press [Dial Menu], then...

2
Ex.: Selecting <Received Calls>

2

Select a telephone number to store.

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth phone operations.
[Hold]

3

: • Display <Dial Menu> screen/Answer
the incoming call.
• Display the <Redial> menu if pressed
and held (regardless of the current
source).

Select a preset number.

: End the call.
: Adjust the volume.

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

:
[Hold] Make a call to the preset numbers.

32

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 32

07.12.6 3:31:42 PM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

*1

*2
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 41
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

[3 / 8] [7] Start and pause playback
[4 ¢] Reverse/forward skip
[5 ∞]
Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can
be registered.*3)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the operation status.
*3 You cannot select “New Device” when a Bluetooth audio player is connected.

~
Ÿ

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth audio operations.

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth
AUDIO]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Start and pause playback.

Start playback.

:
:

Reverse/forward skip
Adjust the volume.

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.
jvc-victor.co.jp/english/car/>
33

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 33

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:43 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the CD changer
MP3 indicator

Folder no./Track no./Playing time
Ex. while playing an MP3 disc

Disc no.
Tag data appears only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total track no. included on the
disc
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[ 5 ∞]
Press: Select folders (only for MP3)
Hold: Display Disc list

☞ page 35
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.

⁄

Preparation:
Make sure <Changer> is selected for <External
Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Select a disc to start playing.

Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH]. (☞
page 9)

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

To go to the other list

• If you select an MP3 disc, the Track list of the
current folder appears. You can select a track
and start playing. (☞ also page 19)

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor
panel.

!

Display the Disc List.

• If you select a folder on the list, you can start
playing the first track of the folder.
34

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 34

07.12.6 3:31:43 PM

Selecting playback modes

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Mode].

ENGLISH

You can use following playback modes—Repeat or
Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat for an MP3 disc

When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Track: Repeats current track
Disc:
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
All:

Randomly plays all tracks of the
current disc
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder, then tracks of next folders
folder
Disc: Randomly plays all tracks of the
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
current disc
All:
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller to operate the CD changer.

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

: Select disc.
: Select folder (MP3 only).
• Press: Select track.
• Hold: Reverse/forward search

35

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 35

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:44 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod
Track no./Playing time

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

☞ page 37
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5]
Enter player’s menu
[∞]
Start playback/pause
• To resume, press again.

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

It is required to connect the Interface adapter for iPod (KS-PD100) to the CD changer jack on the rear.
Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod] (☞ page 9)
Playback starts automatically.
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

36

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 36

07.12.6 3:31:44 PM

3

1

Press [5] to enter the player’s menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about five seconds.

2

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.
Press: Select an item.
Hold: Skip ten items at a time if there are more
than ten items.

Repeat

One:
All:

Random

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs Ô
Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the beginning)

3
4

Select an appropriate option.

ENGLISH

Selecting a track from the
player’s menu

Functions the same as
“Repeat One.”
Functions the same as
“Repeat All.”

Album: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Albums.”
Song: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Songs.”

Press [∞] to confirm the selection.
• When the playback modes are selected, the
corresponding indicators light up alternately on
the screen.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [5].

To cancel, select <Off>.

Selecting playback modes
1

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

37

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 37

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:45 PM

ENGLISH

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN terminals.
Assigned title (☞ page 42)

Sound mode (☞ page 41)

You can easily access to <Aspect> setting
menu by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback picture).

~
Ÿ

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while watching the playback picture

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• [KEY] does not work when the source is “AV-IN.”

38

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 38

07.12.6 3:31:45 PM

Navigation screen
ENGLISH

You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN terminal so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (☞ page 47)

To view the navigation screen (and listen to the navigation guidance*)
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (☞ page 9)
• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to
<Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (☞ page
45)

* If your Navigation System is equipped with the voice guidance function.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while viewing the navigation screen
• The operation buttons displayed on the screen vary among the playback sources.

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• The above buttons except [KEY] also work when they are not shown on the screen (while viewing the navigation
screen).
When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (☞ page 47)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN terminals.
• Some status messages such as volume level will not appear on the screen.

39

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 39

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:46 PM

ENGLISH

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter—KS-U57
(not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (☞ page 42)

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

☞ page 41

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

40

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 40

07.12.6 3:31:46 PM

ENGLISH

Sound equalization

While playing back any source other
than “Bluetooth PHONE,” you can easily
access <Equalizer> menu by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

~

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

1

Repeat steps ~ and Ÿ, then in step !...

2

Adjust (1), then store (2).

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Ÿ

!

Select a sound mode.

Ex.: When storing into <User2>.
Move to other six sound modes

• For preset values of each sound mode, ☞ page 58.

41

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 41

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:47 PM

ENGLISH

Assigning titles to the sources

In the explanation, buttons on the
touch panel are indicated inside [ ].

!

You can assign titles as follows.
FM/AM stations

Up to 16 characters—up to 30
stations.

AV-IN
EXT-IN

Up to 16 characters

~
Ÿ

Assign a title.

Select the source. (☞ page 9)
• For FM/AM stations: Select the band, then
tune into a station.

You can enter up to 16 characters (for available
characters, ☞ page 59).
• [Store]: Confirm the entry.
• [2/3]: Move the cursor.
• [BS]:
Erase the character before the
cursor.
• [Del]:
Erase the character on the cursor.
• [Cap]:
Change the letter case (upper/
lower).
• [Change]: Change the character set.
• [Space]: Enter a space.

Display <Title Entry> screen.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

42

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 42

07.12.6 3:31:47 PM

ENGLISH

Menu operations

!

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures. Some of the settings do not open the
sub-setting window, but just selecting an option will
change the setting.
• The display indications may change according to
change of the specifications.
Ex.: Changing the <AV Input> setting

~

Ÿ

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Non-available items will be shaded.

43

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 43

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:48 PM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Demonstration

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it temporarily,
touch the screen.

Wall Paper

You can select the background picture of the screen.
Horizon, Metal, Art, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

Off: Cancels.
Once: Scrolls the disc information once.
Auto: Repeats scrolling (five-second intervals).
• Holding DISP on the monitor panel scrolls the information regardless
of this setting.

Dimmer

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Auto: Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.*1
Dimmer Time Set : Activates the Dimmer Time setting below.

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On/Off times.

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
1 (bright), 2 (middle), 3 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust brightness of the screen.
–15 (darkest) to +15 (brightest); Initial 00

Picture Adjust*2

You can adjust the following to make the screen clear and legible for
watching the playback picture. The setting will be stored—one for
“DISC” (common) and the other for “AV-IN.”
–15 to +15; Initial 0
Bright: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Contrast: Adjust the contrast.
Color: Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
Tint: Adjust the tint if the human skin color is unnatural. (only when
color system setting is <NTSC>, ☞ next page)
• Press [5] or [∞] to adjust.

Display

ENGLISH

Setup

*1 The ILLUMINATION lead connection is required. (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
*2 Adjustable only when the source is “DISC” (the inserted disc must contain pictures or movies) or “AV-IN.”

44

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 44

07.12.6 3:31:48 PM

Menu items
3

Aspect*

Selectable settings, [reference page]
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.
Aspect ratio of incoming signal
4:3

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures

Clock

Display

Full:
For 16:9 original pictures
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match to the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language*4

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands,
Svenska, Dansk, Руccĸий, Português
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change
according to the language selected. ☞ [59]

NTSC/PAL

Select the color system of the external monitor connected—NTSC, PAL.
• Turn off the power and turn it on again to make the new setting
effective.

Time Set

Initial 1:00AM ☞ [8]

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system.
12Hours, 24Hours ☞ [8]

OSD Clock

When <On> is selected, the clock time is displayed on the playback
picture. ☞ [8]
Off, On

*3 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*4 After you change the indication language setting, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.

45

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 45

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:49 PM

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
1

Menu Language*

Select the initial disc menu language; Initial English (☞ also page
58).

Audio Language*1

Select the initial audio language; Initial English (☞ also page 58).

Subtitle*1

Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off); Initial
English (☞ also page 58).

Monitor Type*1
16:9

4:3LB

4:3PS

OSD Position*1

Disc

Position 1

Position 2

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
16:9 : Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor is 16:9.
4:3 LB (Letterbox)/4:3 PS (Pan Scan): Select when the aspect ratio of
the external monitor is 4:3.
• Refer to the illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are
shown on the screen.
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [25]
1: Higher position
2: Lower position

File Type*1

Select playback file type when a disc contains different types of files.
Audio: Plays back audio files.
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
Audio&Video: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

DivX Regist. (Registration)*1

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a
file with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration
Code is overwritten for copyright protection.

D. Audio Output*1

Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (☞ also page 57)
PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio, or when
connecting to a recording device.
Dolby D : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital.
Stream : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.

*1 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
46

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 46

07.12.6 3:31:50 PM

Menu items
1

Selectable settings, [reference page]
When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT terminals.
Dolby SR : Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio by
connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby Surround.
Stereo : Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic) Range
Compres. (Compression)*1

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing
Dolby Digital software.
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded software.
On: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

AV Input*2

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN terminals. ☞ [38, 39]
Off: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is skipped while
selecting the source).
Audio&Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as a
VCR.
Audio: Select when connecting an audio component such as a portable
audio player.
Camera*3 : Select when connecting a rear view camera.
Navigation : Select when connecting a Navigation System.

External Input*4

For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the
rear.
Changer/iPod*5: CD changer or iPod. ☞ [34, 36]
External: Any other than the above. ☞ [40]
• For connecting the Bluetooth adapter, this setting is not required. It is
automatically detected.

Input

Tuner

Disc

Down Mix*

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

*2 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*3 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the control panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.
*4 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*5 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.

47

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 47

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:50 PM

Others

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Beep

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting

Off: Cancels.
Muting1, Muting2: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Power LED Flash

Off: Cancels.
On: When the ignition is turned off, the lamp on the
flashes.

button

TouchPanel Sens.

Change the sensitivity of the touch panel. As the number decreases,
sensitivity becomes higher. 1/2/3

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold
[Enter] to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. ☞ [3]

Equalizer
Flat/Hard Rock/R&B/Pop/Jazz/Dance/Country/Reggae/Classic/User1/User2/User3 ☞ [41]

48

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 48

07.12.6 3:31:51 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Fader/Balance

Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front and rear speakers.
• Upmost—front only (F6)
• Downmost—rear only (R6)
When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the center (0).
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left and right speakers.
• Leftmost—left only (L6)
• Rightmost—right only (R6) Initial 0

Volume Adjust

Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing to
the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
–12 to +12; Initial 00
• You can make the adjustments separately for DVD and other discs.

Amplifier Gain

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Low: VOL 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speakers is less
than 50 W.)
High: VOL 00 to 50

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Sound

Mode*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Mono

Only for FM. (Off, On) ☞ [10]

DX/Local

Only for FM. (Local, DX) ☞ [11]

SSM

Only for FM. Press and hold to start SSM. ☞ [11]

Title Entry

Only for FM/AM stations, “AV-IN,” and “EXT-IN.” ☞ [42]

Repeat

☞ [18, 35, 37]

Random

☞ [18, 35, 37]

*1 Items listed under <Mode> vary among the playback sources.

List
For “DISC”: Folder List and Track List (☞ page 19)
For “CD-CH”: Disc List, Folder List, and Track List (☞ page 34)
• For the other playback sources, you can display a list by pressing DISP on the monitor panel. (☞ page 9)
49

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 49

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:52 PM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

ENGLISH

Bluetooth*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Dial Menu *

Select the method to make a call. ☞ [30]

Message*3

You can read a message from the following message histories.
Unread: Messages you have not read.
Read: Messages you have read.
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.
Sent: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Open

☞ [27]

Search

☞ [28]

Special Device

Only for “New Device.”
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which require some special procedure to
establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want to connect.
• After selecting the device, use <Open> or <Search> (☞ page 27 or 28)
for connection.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You can
connect the unit and the device by using <Connect> (☞ below) from the
next time.

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ pages 27 and
28), establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the device being connected.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Delete the registered devices.

2

*1 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO.” Select a device (or “New Device”) before operating the
menu.
*2 Only for the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*3 Selectable only when the source is “Bluetooth PHONE” and the connected cellular phone is compatible with SMS
(Short Message Service).

When operating the Bluetooth device, refer also to the instructions supplied with the device.

50

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 50

07.12.6 3:31:53 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
4

When the unit is turned on, the connection is established automatically
with...
Off: No Bluetooth device.
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found first.

Auto Answer *5

Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the calls
manually.
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.

Message Info *5

Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and
displaying “Receiving Message.” To read the message, ☞ page 30.
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.
01/02/03

Version *6

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

Settings

Auto Connect *

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

*4 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “New Device” is selected.
*6 If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc-victor.
co.jp/english/car/>

51

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 51

SETTINGS
SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:54 PM

ENGLISH

Maintenance
Moisture condensation

To keep discs clean

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.

How to handle discs

To play new discs
Center holder

When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder of
the case and lift the disc out, holding it
by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:
SingleCD—8 cm disc

Unusual shape

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)

Stick-on label

Transparent or semi-transparent on its
recording area

52

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 52

07.12.6 3:31:54 PM

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

General

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters for file/
folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

ENGLISH

More about this unit

Playing DVD-VR

Disc

• For details about DVD-VR format and Playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

General
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are
interchangeably used.
• This unit can only play back audio CD (CD-DA) files
if different type of audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV) are
recorded on the same disc.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.

File playback
Playing DivX files
• This unit can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx>, <.div>, or <.avi> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit supports the DivX files whose resolution is
720 x 576 pixels or less.
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or Dolby Digital.
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode
may not be played back correctly.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

Ejecting a disc
• If “No disc“ appears after removing a disc, insert a
disc or select another playback source.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust.

Continued on the next page

53

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 53

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:31:55 PM

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO
format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional,
and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

ENGLISH

Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2
files recorded by JVC Everio camcorders.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Playing JPEG files

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
on the disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)

54

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 54

07.12.6 3:31:55 PM

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
p

• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

Current folder (highlighted bar)
Current folder number/total folder number
Folder list
Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not
displayed for JPEG)
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
in the current folder (total number of tracks on
the disc)
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)
Track list
Current track (highlighted)

ENGLISH

Bluetooth operations
General

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error: The device is registered but the
connection has failed. Use <Connect> to connect
the device again. (☞ page 28)
• Error: Try the operation again. If “Error” appears
again, check if the device supports the function you
have tried.
• Device Unfound: No available Bluetooth device is
detected by <Search>.
• Loading: The unit is updating the phone book and/
or SMS.
• Please Wait...: The unit is preparing to use
the Bluetooth function. If the message does not
disappear, turn off and turn on the unit, then connect
the device again (or reset the unit).
• Reset 08: Check the connection between the
adapter and this unit.

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline
JPEG), it will be displayed.

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.

55

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 55

:

Cellular phone

:

Household phone

:

Office

:

General

:

Other than above

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:31:56 PM

ENGLISH

CD changer

Menu settings

• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (☞ page 34), you will hear a
beep. Select another folder including music files.

• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from
<High> to <Low> while the volume level is set
higher than “30,” the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio
Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the
power, and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc)
so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect
ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may
become <4:3LB> for some discs.

iPod operations
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano *1
– iPod video (5th Generation) *2
*1 When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
*2 It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu while the iPod is connected to the
interface adapter.
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the adapter connected to this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the screen. This unit
can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>

56

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 56

07.12.6 3:31:57 PM

2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Through the DIGITAL OUT terminal

ENGLISH

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT)

Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted.
• To reproduce the multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set <D. Audio Output> correctly.
(☞ page 46)
Output signals

<D. Audio Output>
Playback disc
DVD

<Stream>

<Dolby D>

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital bitstream

with DTS
with MPEG Audio

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

DTS bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD, Video CD

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD with DTS

DTS bitstream

DivX/ with Dolby Digital
MPEG
with MPEG Audio

Dolby Digital bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

MP3/WMA

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

WAV

44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the
discs are not copy-protected.

57

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 57

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:31:57 PM

ENGLISH

Preset equalizing values
Frequency
Sound mode
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User1/2/3

60 Hz

150 Hz

400 Hz

1 kHz

2.5 kHz

6.3 kHz

15 kHz

00
+03
+03
00
+03
+04
+02
+03
+02
00

00
+03
+02
+02
+02
+02
+01
00
+03
00

00
+01
+02
00
+01
00
00
00
+01
00

00
00
00
00
+01
–02
00
+01
00
00

00
00
+01
+01
+01
–01
00
+02
00
00

00
+02
+01
+01
+03
+01
+01
+02
+02
00

00
+01
+03
+02
+02
+01
+02
+03
00
00

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)
Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU

Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque

Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian

Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali

Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

58

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 58

07.12.6 3:31:58 PM

• Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan
and other countries.
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®
6) with enhanced playback of DivX® media files
and the DivX® Media Format
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Victor Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
• iPod and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is
selected for <Language>. (☞ page 45)
Upper and lower cases

ENGLISH

Characters shown on the screen
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you
can use the following characters to assign titles.
(☞ page 42)
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>.
(☞ page 45)

Numbers and symbols

59

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 59

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:31:59 PM

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied with the adapters used for the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
Symptoms
• No sound comes out of the speakers.

• The screen is not clear and legible.

FM/AM

General

• “Position Error Push Open Key” appears on
the screen.
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on the
screen, and the panel does not move.
• “No Signal” appears.

Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced through the analog
terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT).
Sunshine from the windshield may cause this symptom.
Adjust <Bright>. (☞ page 44)
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press OPEN/TILT.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)

• The buttons on the monitor panel do not
work.
• The unit does not work at all.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected
to VIDEO IN terminal.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
When the monitor panel is open, only +/– (volume) and
OPEN/TILT work. The other buttons do not function.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Store stations manually. (☞ page 12)

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

60

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 60

07.12.6 3:32:00 PM

Disc in general

• Disc can be neither recognized nor played
back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot be
played back.
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable discs
cannot be skipped.
• Playback does not start.
•
•
•

•
•
•

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedies/Causes
Eject the disc forcibly. (☞ page 3)
Unlock the disc. (☞ page 19)
• Insert a finalized disc.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used
for recording.

ENGLISH

Symptoms

• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.
The playback picture is not clear and legible. Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 44)
Sound and pictures are sometimes
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
interrupted or distorted.
• Change the disc.
No playback picture is shown and “Parking
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
Brake” appears on the screen, even when the (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
parking brake is engaged.
No picture appears on the external monitor. • Connect the video cord correctly.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.
“Eject Error” or “Loading Error” appears on
Change the source by pressing SOURCE.
the screen.
“Region code error” appears on the screen
Region code is not correct. (☞ page 4)
when you insert a DVD Video.
Disc cannot be played back.
• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (☞ page 4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.
Noise is generated.
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Tracks are not played back as you have
Playback order may differ from that played back using
intended them to play.
other players.
Elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded.
“Not Support” appears on the screen and
The track is unplayable.
track skips.

61

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 61

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:32:00 PM

Symptoms

ENGLISH

• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit.

• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.

Bluetooth

• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.

• Echo or noise occurs.
• Phone sound quality is poor.

• The sound is interrupted or skipped during
playback of a Bluetooth audio player.

• “New Device” cannot be selected for
“Bluetooth AUDIO.”
• The connected audio player cannot be
controlled.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

Remedies/Causes
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected device
and search again.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select <Open> on the unit to connect
the device. (☞ page 27)
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device. If the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its
instructions, try “0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then
try to connect again. (☞ pages 28, 50)
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
cellular phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal
reception.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
audio player.
• Disconnect the player connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player
again.
Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “New
Device,” disconnect it. (☞ page 28)
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

62

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 62

07.12.6 3:32:00 PM

• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work.

AV-IN

iPod

• Sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.
• Playback stops.
• “No Files” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• No picture appears on the screen.
• Playback picture is not clear and legible.

Remedies/Causes
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Current disc does not include playable files. Replace the disc
with one including playable files.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
• Check the connection.
• Charge the battery.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
Check the connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart
playback.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod. Then,
connect them again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 44)

63

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 63

ENGLISH

CD changer

Symptoms
• “No Disc” appears on the screen.
• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.
• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:32:01 PM

ENGLISH

Specifications
Maximum Power Output:
Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Frequency Range:

FM/AM TUNER

Frequencies:
Level:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Output Level
REAR OUT:
Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:

DVD/CD

Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:

FM Tuner

Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:

Input:
Output:

50 W per channel
20 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
6.3 kHz, 15 kHz
±10 dB
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
NTSC/PAL
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Antenna input
VIDEO OUT

Others:

CD changer, Reverse gear signal, DIGITAL
OUT (optical)

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM:

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

65 dB

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation:

35 dB

AM Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/35 dB

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Frequency Response:

DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:

16 Hz to 22 000 Hz

VCD/CD:

16 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

93 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

95 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

64

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 64

07.12.6 3:32:01 PM

7 inch wide liquid crystal display

Number of Pixel:

336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)

Drive Method:

TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format

Color System:

NTSC/PAL

Aspect Ratio:

16:9 (wide)

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

ENGLISH

MONITOR
GENERAL

Screen Size:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System:

Negative ground

Allowable Storage Temperature:

–10°C to +60°C

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

178 mm × 100 mm × 160 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

171 mm × 97 mm × 21 mm

Mass (approx.):

2.6 kg

100

Required space for the monitor ejection

160

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm

90.5

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

65

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 65

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:32:02 PM

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

EN, CT
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

Rear_KW-AVX710UT_1.indd 2

0208MNMMDWJEIN

08.2.12 10:38:55 AM

KW-AVX716/KW-AVX710
LVT1780-008A
[U/UT]

Installation/Connection Manual
ϰ༬௥ો˿̱
1207MNMMDWJEIN
EN, CT, TH
©2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß/§ŸË¡◊Õ°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß
ˁ̂

ENGLISH
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio
dealers.

‰∑¬

ʹጅ෮̈́՟·‫ޠڈ‬12 V é࠸๩ોϚ‫ྑڅ‬ກԧ஁éϨ‫س‬઱‫ڄ‬Ծቩ
ԅЉ௠ɾྐ຀Ԧ஀ç۱ᄔ࠱ɾࡴྐᏫ᜵ಗ዇ç̣̈́ϚJVCԆԾ
ࡖᛏ˜ኀੋளකռé

™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ȉ¥È√—∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æ◊ËÕ„™Èß“π°—∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øøÈ“ “¬¥‘π¢—È«≈∫°√–
· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑Ï À“°√∂¬πµÏ¢Õߧÿ≥‰¡Ë‰¥È„™È√–∫∫π’È µÈÕß„™È‡§√◊ËÕß·ª≈ß°√–
· ‰ø™Ë«¬ ´÷Ëß “¡“√∂À“´◊ÈÕ‰¥È®“°√È“π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC

WARNINGS

ᙲѿ

§”‡µ◊Õπ

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations,
as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as
this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as
this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to
carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around
carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” flashes on the
monitor, and no playback picture will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake wire is
connected to the parking brake system built in the car.

• ˝ˡϚ̣ʓт໯ϯ༫ʹጅ‫׻‬௤૊ྐង;
– ̈́঻๡Ҟᗉዬѕ̄ώᇟ֜᜵௥૛ᐑଁ‫ڄ‬т໯Ѵ۱̈́঻˺ചΟ
௢Ֆ‫ݭ‬é
– ̈́঻๡Ҟᗉዬѕϯη༫໯çϨϯηमெമ‫ڄ‬т໯çѴ۱̈́঻
˺ചࠓ֡‫ڄ‬Ο௢Ֆ‫ݭ‬é
– ̈́঻๡Ҟᗉඁ௴‫ڄ‬т໯é
• ˝ˡϚዬѕ̄ώᇟ‫ཫڄ‬ദˀዬѕʹጅçѴ۱̈́঻˺ചΟ௢Ֆ‫ݭ‬é
• ኢአइçኢአ࢜˝ˡႌԠ᜼Ε዇é௠̈́঻๡዗ࠓ୚‫׬‬Փ˺ചՖ
‫ݭ‬é
• Ϛኢአཫദˀࠜᄔ࠱ዬѕʹጅç˝৩࠱ં˝ٌำ‫̄ۮ‬çѴ۱̈́
঻˺ചΟ௢Ֆ‫ݭ‬é
• ࠜ˾۫ԾͶ⽂ϐç“Parking Brake” ϪᆟϚ᜼Ε዇ʕਕᖼç̝೷
ٗᆑ‫؞‬࿌̕é
– ෮ະ˾۫Ծ዗ለႩԆԾ˖໯‫۫˾ڄ‬ԾԦ஀ߟ௤૊इЏᙱѾ‫ۑ‬
 ࣥʼ๡̳୏é

•

Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amplifier Gain”
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 49 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.

඲нྑཕ௥ોईٍิ:
• ӕۘᎳീӦಗ޴ᖃ‫࠷׆‬மࡩ‫ۘڄ‬ᎳീéϨ‫ۘس‬Ꮃീ໩ગጛᖢç
ቁώJVC ԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋ༿੕é
• ݈໯֜‫ۮ‬໯ಙᑵ዇‫ڄ‬ఛʨ᎔ʈ̷୊ᏻʨ‫ؠ‬50 Wçմ‫ۇ‬ӏ޴
4 Ωü8 ΩéϨ‫س‬ఛʨ̷୊ʮ‫ ؠ‬50 Wçቁቆओ“Amplifier Gain”
௎‫ࡩ׆‬ç̣Վ̊ಙᑵ዇๑ᖢé(੉ኌ՟·ი‫ا‬ए‫୶ڄ‬49ࡗ)é
• ޴Վ̊ྐ຀ഠཔçቁ·ഽሇઘ̸у͵՟·ྐለ‫ڄ‬ၷʪé
• ʹጅ՟·݈çಞᇊ̕๡݃ᇊéϕЏçϚ୰̳ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ࠱
᙮ညಞᇊ̕é

•
•
•
•

լ˓µ‘¥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕ߇≈ËπÀ√◊Õ‡¥‘𠓬‰ø„πµ”·ÀπËß∑’;Ë
– Õ“®°’¥¢«“ß°“√∑”ß“π¢Õßæ«ß¡“≈—¬·≈–§—π‡°’¬√Ï ‡æ√“–Õ“®°ËÕ„Àȇ°‘¥Õÿ∫—µ‡Àµÿ¢÷È
– Õ“®°’¥¢«“ß°“√∑”ß“π¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥ϪÈÕß°—𧫓ª≈Õ¥¿—¬ ‡™Ëπ ·Õ√Ï·∫§ ‡æ√“–
Õ“®°ËÕ„Àȇ°‘¥Õ—πµ√“¬√È“¬·√ß∂÷ß™’«‘µ¢÷Èπ‰¥È
– Õ“®°’¥¢«“ß “¬µ“
լ˓„™Èß“π¢≥–¢—∫¢’Ë ‡æ√“–Õ“®°ËÕ„Àȇ°‘¥Õÿ∫—µ‘‡Àµÿ¢÷Èπ‰¥È
ºŸÈ¢—∫µÈÕ߉¡Ë¡Õß∑’ˮաÕ𑇵Õ√Ï¢≥–¢—∫¢’Ë ‡æ√“–Õ“®π”‰ª ŸË§«“¡ª√–¡“∑‡≈‘π‡≈ËÕ·≈–
°ËÕ„Àȇ°‘¥Õÿ∫—µ‘‡Àµÿ‰¥È
À“°µÈÕß°“√„™Èß“π‡§√◊ËÕߢ≥–¢—∫¢’Ë µÈÕß·πË„®«Ë“‰¥È„™È§«“¡√–¡—¥√–«—ßլ˓ߥ’
‡æ◊ËÕÀ≈’°‡≈’ˬ߰“√‡°‘¥Õÿ∫—µ‘‡Àµÿ
À“°‰¡Ë‰¥È„ Ë‡∫√°¡◊Õ ¢ÈÕ§«“¡ “Parking Brake” ®–°–æ√‘∫∑’ËÀπÈ“®Õ ·≈–®–
‰¡Ë¡’¿“æ· ¥ß¢÷Èπ¡“
– §”‡µ◊Õππ’È®–ª√“°Ø¢÷Èπ‡©æ“–‡¡◊ËÕµËÕ “¬‡∫√°°—∫√–∫∫‡∫√°„π√∂¬πµÏ‰«È‡∑Ë“π—Èπ

¡ÈÕπŸ≈„π°“√•ËÕ√–∫∫‰ø:
„™Èæ‘°—¥®”‡æ“–·∑πøî« À“°øî«Ï¢“¥∫ËÕ¬ „ÀȪ√÷°…“√È“ π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC
¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȵËÕ≈”‚æß ∑’Ë¡’°”≈—ߢ—∫ß ÿ¥‡°‘π°«Ë“ 50 W (∑—ÈߥȓπÀπÈ“·≈–¥È“πÀ≈—ß
¡’§Ë“§«“¡µÈ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂÷ß 8 Ω) ∂È“°”≈—ߢ—∫µË”°«Ë“ 50 W „Àȇª≈’ˬπ§Ë“
“Amplifier Gain” ‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π‰¡Ë„ÀÈ≈”‚æß™”√ÿ¥ (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 49 §”·π–π”)
• °“√ªÈÕß°—π°“√≈—¥«ß®√ ®–µÈÕßæ—π¢—È« “¬µ–°—Ë« ∑’ˉ¡Ë„™È·≈È«¥È«¬‡∑ ªæ—𠓬‰ø
• ·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ®–√ÈÕπ¡“°À≈—ß®“°„™È √–¡—¥√–«—ßլ˓‰ª  —¡º— ‡¡◊ËÕ∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È

•
•

Heat sink
ಞᇊ̕

·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ

Parts list for installation and connection

Έ‫ء‬ϰ༬֝௥ો‫ྒྷڅ‬έଢశ

√“¬°“√Ë«πª√–°Õ∫”À√—∫µ‘¥µ—Èß·≈–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—π

The following parts are provided for this unit.
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.

ʹጅ਎క̣ʓྒάé
ࠜച୏থ˲έщɾάྒάçቁѮոᑷു઱‫˜ڄ‬ኀੋé

 Ë«πª√–°Õ∫µËÕ‰ªπ’È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È À“°¡’ ‘Ëß„¥‰¡Ë§√∫ °√ÿ≥“µ‘¥µËÕµ—
«·∑π®”ÀπË“¬‚¥¬∑—π∑’

Main unit
̟ጅ

Power cord
ྐཔ௤૊·‫ڄ‬਎ለӧ

Remote controller
ჲ૆዇

Batteries
ྐЖ

µí«‡§√◊ËÕß

“¬‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ß

√’‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈

·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
ͦᏃᒘീ (M5 x 8 mm)
 °√ŸÀ—«·∫π (M5 x 8 ¡¡)

Round head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
ฐᏃᒘീ (M5 x 8 mm)

Crimp connector
қʪ૊Ꮓ

Plate for use with a Nissan car
·‫୕̅ؠ‬ԆԾ‫ڄ‬ख

 °√ŸÀ—«°≈¡ (M5 x 8 ¡¡)

¢—È«µËÕ ”À√—∫Àπ’∫

·ºËπ ”À√—∫„™È°—∫√∂π‘  —π

1

THCT1-3_AVX710-008A.indd 1

12/6/07 3:37:44 PM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

ϰ༬(༬௏é֤‫ׇ‬ϛᄮ‫)˗ؼڸ‬

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you
should make adjustments corresponding to your specific car. If you
have any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed
by a qualified technician.

ʓࡒ‫ڄ‬࿌༱‫ڷ‬Εʄյ‫ڄܓ‬ϯ༫ദҺéѓ‫ݵ‬Ϛ࿧ᄑϯ༫इç઱ᏻ ¿“æµ—«Õ¬Ë“ßµËÕ‰ªπ’È· ¥ß∂÷ß°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß·∫∫∑—Ë«‰ª À“°§ÿ≥¡’ªô ≠À“À√◊ÕµÈÕß°“√¢ÈÕ¡Ÿ≈‡
༳घየ઱‫ڄ‬ԆԾѕቱະ‫ڄ‬ቆዱéϨ‫س‬઱Љ੕ᖅç‫׻‬ᄔ࠱Љᘕ਎ °’ˬ«°—∫™ÿ¥µ‘¥µ—Èß °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“°—∫ºŸÈ¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC ¢Õß∑Ë“πÀ√◊Õ∫√‘…—
ࢭ˔ά‫ڄ‬ཊऄçቁώ JVC ԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋ‫׻‬਎ࢭ˔άաᏻ˙͌ • À“°§ÿ≥‰¡Ë¡—Ëπ„®„π«‘∏’°“√µ‘¥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕ߇’¬ßլ˓ß∂Ÿ°«‘∏’ ‚ª√¥„Àș˓ߺŸÈ™”π“≠∑”°“√µ‘¥
༿੕é
µ—È߇∑Ë“π—¡
• Ϩ‫س‬઱ʿ঻ᇧ‫׆‬Ϩщ͸ᇧϙϯ༫ʹጅçᏻቁϐत‫ڄ‬ӑிʆ࢜գ
ϯ༫é

Before installing the unit

ϰ༬͵ጆ˄‫ۯ‬

°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπÈ“ªí∑¡Ï‡¢È“)

°ËÕπ°“√µ‘¥µ—Èßµ—«‡§√◊ËÕß
• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as
instructed. If other screws are used, parts could become loose or
damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any
connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper
ventilation when installing the unit.

1

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together
with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from
your car for future use.

•
• ະ༫ʕʹጅइͫෝ‫ݝ‬ຖ‫ݣ‬Ε՟·਎క‫ڄ‬ᒘീਐéϨ‫س‬՟·մ͟
‫ڄ‬ᒘീਐçߟᘕྒά̈́঻๡ᖑ஘‫׻‬๑ᖢé
•
• ະᕬႌᒘീਐ‫׻‬ᒘनइç˝৩ʿ࠱Ꮻᐅռέщ௤૊ྐለé
•
• ະϯ༫ʕ݈ç˝৩ʿ࠱‫ۇ‬ዥռ݈ࡒ‫̣࣮ࡘڄػ‬႕‫ݠ‬ቱະ‫ڄ‬௢
ࡘé

1

‫؛‬ֈࢍʹϯ༫ϚԆԾ˖‫ࡖڄ‬ᛏԦ஀ç̣˪մ༫਎‫ށ‬é
ఖٍ:

અ(નԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ )ڄ‬༫਎‫ށ‬ϯʕʹጅ(੉ኌʓ࿌)é

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 to 6.

4

՟·ϚӴᝢ1 ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬ᒘീϯ༫ʹጅé

Install this unit using the screws removed in step 1.

̣ʓ̣ᕙΉ(Toyota) ԆԾϯ༫޴բéቁᑷു઱‫ڄ‬JVC ԆԾࡖᛏ
˜ኀੋЉᘕӦϠஅ໢é

Attach the mounting brackets (removed from the car), to this
unit (see below).

3
4

The following example is for installation in a Toyota car. For more
details, consult your JVC car audio dealer.

1 ∂Õ¥√–∫∫‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß∑’˵‘¥µ—Èß„π√∂‰«Èµ—Èß·µË·√° æ√ÈÕ¡∑—Èß·∑Ëπ√Õß

ቁੀͫۘॡ‫׿‬Љન઱ԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬ᒘീ֜ྒάਭ݈̅՟
·é

2
3

2

‡¡◊ËÕ®–∑”°“√µ‘¥µ—Èßµ—«‡§√◊ËÕß ‚ª√¥„™È °√Ÿ∑’Ë·π∫¡“µ“¡§”·π–π” À“°¬÷¥‡§√◊ËÕߥȫ¬
 °√Ÿ·∫∫Õ◊Ëπ Õ“®∑”„ÀÈ™‘Èπ Ë«πÀ≈«¡À√◊Õ‡°‘¥§«“¡‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥È
‡¡◊ËÕ®–¢—π·πËπ°√ŸÀ√◊Õ≈—°‡°≈’¬« µÈÕß√–«—߉¡Ë„ÀÈÀπ’∫“¬‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ
°√ÿ≥“µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“¡‘‰¥Èªî¥°—Èπæ—¥≈¡µ√ß·ºßÀπÈ“°“°¥È“πÀ≈—ß
‡æ◊ËÕ„ÀÈ°“√√–∫“¬Õ“°“»‡ªìπ‰ªÕ¬Ë“߇À¡“– ¡‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—Èß

੭мͫ࠱‫ྐڄ‬པ௤૊é
• ੉ኌ୶3 в6ࡗé

À¡“¬‡Àµÿ: ¥Ÿ„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“‡°Á∫ °√Ÿ·≈–
™‘Èπ Ë«π∑âÈßÀ¡¥∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ¢Õß∑Ë“π‰«È„™ÈµËÕ‰ª

2 µ‘¥·∑Ëπ√Õß (∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ) ‡¢È“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È (¥Ÿ∑’˥ȓπ≈Ë“ß)
3 ¥”‡π‘π°“√µËÕ√–∫∫‰øøÈ“∑’Ë®”‡ªìπ
•

¥ŸÀπÈ“ 3 ∂÷ß 6

4 µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È‚¥¬„™È °√Ÿ∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°„π¢—ÈπµÕπ∑ 1
µ—«Õ¬Ë“ßµËÕ‰ªπ’ȇªìπ°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß„π√∂¬πµÏ‚µ‚¬µÈ“  ”À√—∫√“¬≈–‡Õ’¬¥‡æ‘Ë¡‡µ‘¡
°√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“µ—«·∑π®”ÀπË“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC

Supplied screws
਎కᒘീ

Mounting bracket removed from the car
નԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬༫਎‫ށ‬

 °√Ÿ∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß

·∑Ëπ√Õß∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ

Mounting bracket removed from the car
નԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬༫਎‫ށ‬

·∑Ëπ√Õß∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ
If necessary, restore the protruding tabs.
ࠜЉͫ࠱çቁࡌ๘༫ʕ̴ሇé

À“°®”‡ªìπ „ÀÈßÕ·ºËπ¬÷¥
Supplied screws
਎కᒘീ

Screws removed from the car in step 1
ϚӴᝢ1 નԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬ᒘീ

 °√Ÿ∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß

 °√Ÿ∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ„π¢—ÈπµÕπ∑’Ë 1
Select the appropriate type fitting to your
audio system space.
᎚ዪቱϐ઱‫ࡖڄ‬ᛏԦ஀ϯ༫‫༙ܓڄ෇ڏ‬é

Note:
ఖٍ:

When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the supplied screws (M5 x 8 mm). If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
ϯ༫ʹጅන༫਎‫ށ‬इçቁੀͫ՟·਎క‫ڄ‬ᒘീ(M5 x 8 mm)éࠜ՟·̍ཛ‫ڄۂ‬ᒘീçЉᘕᒘീ̈́঻๡๑ᖢʹጅé

À¡“¬‡Àµÿ:

¢≥–µ‘¥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕß∫π·∑Ëπ√Õß ¢Õ„ÀÈ¥Ÿ„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“„™È °√Ÿ∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß (M5 x 8 ¡¡) À“°„™È °√Ÿ¬“«°«Ë“∑’Ë√–∫ÿÕ“®∑”„Àȇ§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬‰¥È

‡≈◊Õ°·∫∫∑’ˇÀ¡“– ¡°—∫æ◊Èπ∑’Ë√–∫∫‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß

When installing the unit in a Nissan car
ັϰ༬͵ጆ‫ୖ̆ء‬ԇԿई

‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕß„π√∂π‘  —π
Plate for use with a Nissan car
·‫୕̅ؠ‬ԆԾ‫ڄ‬ख

·ºËπ ”À√—∫„™È°—∫√∂π‘  —π

Required space for the monitor ejection
‫؜‬։ܴ࿳‫؀‬ᄕ˄‫෈ڐ‬

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject when in use.
અʹጅϯ༫Ϛ˲‫ؠ‬30˚ ‫ڄ‬Դܾç઱ͫෝШᅱռܳ࿲̣̈́Ϛ՟·इᅫ̳é

æ◊Èπ∑’Ë«Ë“ßÀ’˵ÈÕß°“√ ”À√—∫¥—π®Õ¿“æÕÕ°

100

µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑’Ë¡ÿ¡µË”°«Ë“ 30˚ ‚¥¬§”π÷ß∂÷߇«≈“®Õ¡Õ𑇵Õ√Ï¥’¥ÕÕ°„π√–À«Ë“ß°“√„™È

30˚

160

90.5

Unit: mm
వт: mm (ଔТ)
ÀπË«¬: ¡¡

2

THCT1-3_AVX710-008A.indd 2

12/6/07 3:38:11 PM

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

ྑཕ௥ો

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.

޴Վ̊ഠཔçܿᙯϚϯ༫ʹጅ˃‫ۮ‬ç؋ළྐЖ‫࠷ڄ‬๨çՓӕ‫׿‬Љ ‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π°“√‡°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√ ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȪ≈¥¢—È«·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë≈∫ÕÕ°
ྐཔ௲௤૊Ϧé
·≈È«®÷ßµËÕ “¬‰ø°ËÕ𵑥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕß
• ϰ༬ҭ୙݉ੁͬઆ͵ጆ‫څ‬Ϛሉࡍ๙ોгԿԾê
• µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“‰¥È‡¥‘𠓬¥‘πµËÕ√–À«Ë“߇§√◊ËÕß°—∫µ—«∂—ß

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car
body may be different in color.

°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡‚¥¬„™È‰øøÈ“

√∂¬πµÏ„À¡Ë·≈È«À≈—ß®“°µ‘¥µ—Èß

ોሉ‫ۯ‬: ̥அᐓ‫ފ‬ԆԾ˖‫ڄ‬ለཔéʿ͸ᇧ‫ڄ‬૊ለ๡዗ࠓʹጅᘷࡌ
๑ᖢé
ྐʍለ‫˺ڄ‬ለ֜ԾԽ‫ڄ‬௤૊዇˺ለϚᖄиʕ̈́঻Љ‫׿‬ʿψé

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified 1 ՜ຖʓ࿌‫׿‬Ε˃ЎҺ௤૊ྐ຀ለ‫ڄ‬ᖄи዗ለé
in the illustration below.
2 અ˭ለ‫ྐڄ‬ለ௤૊৹գé
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 ఛ݈çӕ਎ለӧ‫ڄ‬಍Ꮓ಍Ϛʹጅʕé
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

°ËÕ•∑”°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥‘•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÏլ˓ߕ–¡—¥•–«—լ˓„ÀȺ‘¥æ•
“¥„•°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ™ÿ¥ª•–°Õ•™ÿ¥•’ °“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕº‘¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„Àȇ°‘¥§«“¡‡ ’¬À“
¬•È“¬·•ß°—•™ÿ¥ª•–
°Õ••’ȉ¥È“•µ–°—Ë«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕÿª°••ÏµËÕ‡™•ËÕ¡®“°µ—«• ß••Õ“®¡’ ∑’Ë ‰¡Ë‡À¡•Õ•°—•

1 µËÕ “¬‰øﵓ¡≈”¥—∫∑’Ë√–∫ÿ„π√Ÿª¥È“π≈Ë“ß
2 ‡™◊ÕË ¡µËÕ°—∫“¬Õ“°“»
3  ÿ¥∑È“¬ µËÕ Ë«π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥‘𠓬‰ø‡¢È“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π’È

Rear ground terminal
ʹጅ݈ࠌ૊ϙၷʪ

®ÿ¥‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ “¬¥‘π¥È“πÀ≈—ß
REVERSE
GEAR
SIGNAL

Fan
ࡘ࣮

æ—¥≈¡
See each diagram on page 4 to 6.
੉ኌ୶ 4 в 6 ࡗʕ‫ڄ‬࿌‫ڷ‬é
¥Ÿ·ºπº—ߵ˓ßÊ „πÀπÈ“ 4 ∂÷ß 6

15 A fuse
15 A ۘᎳീ
øî« Ï¢π“¥ 15 A

*1 Not included for this unit
*1 ʿᎲʹጅಏա
*1 ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È

3
Black
෨и

*

1

*1

To metallic body or chassis of the car
૊в‫ہ‬ᚙᝂ‫׻‬ԆԾ‫נ‬ᇟ

 ’¥”

Ignition switch
ᓭ̑ළᘕ

«‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥

µËÕ°—∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√◊Õ‡™´ ‘¢Õß√∂¬πµú

2
Yellow *2
෦и *2
 ’’‡À≈◊Õß *2

1

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖‫ۈڄ‬ᚙၷʪçۘᎳീవ˔‫ؠ‬Ծ༫ྐЖߟ௤૊
(·‫ؠ‬अཔᓭ̑ළᘕ)(‫ ׆ݔ‬12 V)
µµËÕ°—∫¢—È«∑’Ë¡’°√–·‰øøÈ“„π·ºßøî«Ï ´÷ËßµËÕ°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµ ( ‚¥¬‰¡ËµÈÕß„™È« ‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥)
12 ‚«≈∑ϧß∑’)Ë

Fuse block
ۘᎳീవ˔

·ºßøî« 

Red
߹и

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖‫ۈڄ‬ᚙၷʪ

 ’·¥ß

µËÕ°—∫¢—È« Ë«πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßøî« 
Blue
ᕇи
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
૊вбੂ˭ለ(ࠜЉ༫௎)(ఛʨ250 mA)
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øøÈ“Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘ À“°¡’ (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 250 mA)

 ’øÈ“
(POWER ANTENNA)

Blue with white stripe
ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ

 ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
power cannot be turned on.

(REMOTE OUT)

*2 ʹጅ͵ϯ༫इçනмʳѕ‫ٶ‬ٜᐓ‫ۮ˃ފ‬ç
 ͫෝӕ௠዗ለ૊ʕçѴ۱ʿ঻ළ૧ྐ຀é

Orange with white stripe
ዻиઘЉΎи଍ঙ

*2

 ’ È¡·∂∫¢“«

°ËÕπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È°ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µ‘¥µ—Èß
µÈÕßµËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«π’È°ËÕπ ¡‘©–π—Èπ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ªî¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥È

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
௤૊в͏ɾ‫ࡖށ‬ᛏ௎క‫ڄ‬ჲ૆዗ለ(ఛʨ 200 mA)
µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫Õª°√≥ÏÕË◊π (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 200 mA)

To car light control switch
௤૊вԆԾԾጜ૆վළᘕ

Brown
ሶи

(ILLUMINATION)

 «‘µ´Ï§«∫§ÿ¡‰ø¢Õß√∂¬πµ√Ï
To cellular phone system
௤૊в‫༼ྐੂޟ‬Ԧ஀

 ’πÈ”µ“≈
(TEL MUTING)

µËÕ°—∫‚∑√»—æ∑χ§≈◊ËÕπ∑

Light green
ଠႋи

To parking brake (see diagram Å on page 4.)
૊в˾۫Ծ዗ለ (੉ኌ୶ 4 ࡗʕ‫ڄ‬࿌‫ ڷ‬Åé)
µËÕ°—∫‡∫√°¡◊Õ (¥Ÿ·ºπº—ß Å „πÀπÈ“ 4)
Crimp connector
қʪ૊Ꮓ

 ’‡¢’¬«ÕËÕπ
(PARKING BRAKE)

¢—È«µËÕ ”À√—∫Àπ’∫

White with black stripe
ΎиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

 ’¢“«·∂∫¥”

White
Ύи

Gray with black stripe
НиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

 ’¢“«

Left speaker (front)
ͣಙᑵ዇(‫ۮ‬໯)
≈”‚æß´È“¬ (ÀπÈ“)

 ’‡∑“·∂∫¥”

Gray
Ни

Green with black stripe
ႋиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

 ’‡¢’¬«·∂∫¥”

 ’‡∑“

Right speaker (front)
͆ಙᑵ዇(‫ۮ‬໯)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (ÀπÈ“)

Green
ႋи

Purple with black stripe
ാиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

 ’‡¢’¬«

Left speaker (rear)
ͣಙᑵ዇(݈໯)
≈”‚æß´È“¬ (À≈—ß)

 ’¡Ë«ß·∂∫¥”

Purple
ാи

 ’¡Ë«ß

Right speaker (rear)
͆ಙᑵ዇(݈໯)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈—ß)

3

THCT1-3_AVX710-008A.indd 3

12/6/07 3:38:19 PM

ENGLISH

ˁ̂

‰∑¬

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

ྑກ֝ಚᑶወોሉٍิ՗ො:
• ˞ˢӖಚᑶወዘሉોᏄોгྑЗèѵ۲͵ጆઆ๢ᘸࡍ๒ᖣê
• Ϛӕಙᑵ዇዗ለ૊Ꮓ૊вಙᑵ዇˃‫ۮ‬çᐓ‫ފ‬઱ԆԾʕ‫ڄ‬ಙᑵ዇
ለཔé

•

A Connecting the parking brake lead

௥ોг˿۬Կዘሉ

µËÕ “¬‡∫√°¡◊Õ

અ˾۫Ծ዗ለ௤૊вԾ˖‫۫˾ڄ‬ԾԦ஀é

µËÕ “¬‡∫√°¡◊Õ°—∫√–∫∫‡∫√°¡◊Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµ

Connect the parking brake lead to the parking brake system
built in the car.

¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß  ”À√—∫°“√µËÕ·À≈Ë߮˓¬°”≈—ß·≈–≈”‚æß:
լ˓µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢È“°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµÏ ¡‘©–π—Èπ
™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥È√—∫§«“¡‡ ’¬À“¬¡“°
• °ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µËÕ“¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°—∫≈”‚æß
„Àȵ√«®Õ∫°“√‡¥‘𓬉ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧÿ≥„Àȇ√’¬∫√ÈÕ¬‡’¬°ËÕπ

a
Parking brake lead (light green)
˾۫Ծ዗ለ(ଠႋи)
 “¬‡∫√°¡◊Õ ( ’‡¢’¬«ÕËÕπ)

Crimp connector
қʪ૊Ꮓ

Parking brake
˾۫Ծ

¢—È«µËÕ ”À√—∫Àπ’∫

‡∫√°¡◊Õ
To metallic body or chassis of the car
૊в‫ہ‬ᚙᝂ‫׻‬ԆԾ‫נ‬ᇟ

µËÕ°—∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√◊Õ‡™´ ‘¢Õß√∂¬πµú

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
˾۫Ծළᘕ(тʝԾ˖)
 «‘µ™Ï‡∫√°¡◊Õ (¿“¬„π√∂)

A Connecting an external amplifier / ௥ો͚௱̸ୋ‫؟‬ʩወ / °“√µËÕ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï¿“¬πÕ°
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• You can supply the power to the amplifier by connecting the
remote leads (blue with white stripe) of this unit to the amplifier.
(To connect other equipment using the remote leads, Yconnectors need to be separately purchased.)
• Disconnect the speakers from the unit, and connect them to the
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of the unit unused.
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio
signals only to the external amplifier to get clear sound and to
prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page 49 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.

઱̣̈́௤૊̷୊‫؞‬ʨ዇գ˥ঠ઱‫ڄ‬ԆԾࡖᛏԦ஀é
• ઱̣̈́અʹጅ‫ڄ‬ჲ૆዗ለ(ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ) ௤૊ռ̷୊‫؞‬ʨ
዇çᕉЏ޴մաྐé
(࠱՟·ჲ૆዗ለ௤૊մ̧௎కçᄔవጤᒯ໯ Y ‫ܓ‬௤૊዗ለé)
• અಙᑵ዇֜ʹጅ؋ළçι௤૊ʕ̷୊‫؞‬ʨ዇éઅʹጅ‫ڄ‬ಙᑵ዇
዗ለ‫؞‬໯ʿ·é
• ઱̣̈́ᘕ௻˖̷ܿ୊‫؞‬ʨ዇çઅࡖᏁ‫༙ۑ‬෮෭৿ռ͙૊̷୊‫؞‬
ʨ዇çનЩદռଡಣ‫ࡖڄ‬቙çՓՎ̊ʹጅ˖௰ጻ႞ᇊඹé੉ኌ
՟·ი‫ا‬ए‫ ୶ڄ‬49 ࡗé

‡æ◊ËÕ§ÿ≥¿“懠’¬ß∑’Ë¥’¢÷Èπ ∑Ë“π “¡“√∂µËÕ·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√χ¢È“°—∫
√–∫∫‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ‰¥È
• ∑Ë“π “¡“√∂®Ë“¬‰ø„ÀÈ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ω¥È¥È«¬°“√µËÕ “¬√’‚¡∑ ( ’øÈ“·∂∫¢“«)
¢Õ߇§√◊ËÕß°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï (À“°µÈÕß°“√µËÕ°—∫Õÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊Ëπ¥È«¬°“√„™È “¬√’‚¡∑
µÈÕß´◊ÈÕ¢—È«µËÕ√Ÿªµ—« Y ·¬°µË“ßÀ“°)
• ∂Õ¥ “¬≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°‡§√◊ËÕß·≈È«µËÕ°—∫·Õ¡ª≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï ª≈ËÕ¬ “¬≈”‚æß∑‘È߉«È
‰¡ËµÈÕß„™È
•  “¡“√∂ªî¥ «‘µ™Ï·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï„πµ—« ·≈È« Ëß —≠≠“≥‡ ’¬ß‰ª¬—ß·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï
¿“¬πÕ°‚¥¬‡©æ“– ‡æ◊ËÕ„Àȉ¥È‡ ’¬ß∑’˧¡™—¥·≈–ªÈÕß°—π‰¡Ë„Àȇ°‘¥§«“¡√ÈÕπ
 – ¡¢÷Èπ¿“¬„π™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ ¥Ÿ∑’ËÀπÈ“ 49 ¢Õߧ”·π–π”„π°“√„™È

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-‫ܓ‬௤૊዗ለ(ʿᎲʹጅಏա)
¢ÈÕµËÕ√Ÿªµ—« Y ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
ჲ૆዗ለ(ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ)
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°• ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«)
Remote lead
ჲ૆዗ለ

“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°•

To the remote lead of other equipment
௤૊в͏ɾ‫ࡖށ‬ᛏ௎క‫ڄ‬ჲ૆዗ለ
JVC Amplifier
JVC ̸ୋ‫؟‬ʩወ
‡§√◊ËÕß∫¬“¬‡ ◊¬ß JVC

µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫Õª°√≥ÏÕË◊π
Rear speakers
݈໯ಙᑵ዇

≈”‚æßÀ≈—ß

Front speakers
‫ۮ‬໯ಙᑵ዇

≈”‚æßÀπÈ“

*3 Firmly attach the ground lead to the metallic body or to the
chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated
with paint, remove the paint before attaching the lead). Failure
to do so may cause damage to the unit.

*3 અϙለႩ‫ہ‬ᚙԾᝂ‫ږ׻‬ԆԾ‫נ‬ᇟႌં௤૊ç௤૊ளᏻ༳ԅЉூ *3 µËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π„ÀÈ·πËπ‡¢“°—∫µ—«∂—߇À≈Á° À√◊Õµ—«∂—ß√∂˙µ√ß Ë«π ∑’ˉ¡Ë¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫
ٛွᕒႵ(Ϩ‫س‬ʵดʕٛွçϚ௤૊ྐለ‫ۮ‬çઅٛွս̓)é
(À“°¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫Õ¬ŸË „ÀÈ¢Ÿ§¥’ÕÕ°°ËÕπ °ËÕπµËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π) À“°‰¡ËªØ‘∫—
Ϩ‫س‬ʿ௠ᆟਭç̈́঻๡๑ᖢʹጅé

µ‘µ“¡§”·π–π”π’È ‡§√◊ËÕßÕ“®™”√ÿ¥À√◊Õ‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥

4

THCT4-6_AVX710-008A.indd 4

12/6/07 3:38:52 PM

B Connections for external component playback / ௥ોս͚ો௱έ / °“√‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ ”À√—∫°“√‡≈ËπÕÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°

Reverse lamp
࡬݈ጜ

‰ø∂Õ¬À≈—ß
Extension lead (not supplied)
‫ۂע‬ለ (ԅЉ਎క)

AV amplifier or decoder
AV ̷୊‫؞‬ʨ዇‫׻‬ᙲᇫ዇

 “¬‰øµËÕæË«ß ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)

Crimp connector (not supplied)*5
қʪ૊Ꮓ (ԅЉ਎క)*5

¢—È«µËÕ ”À√—∫Àπ’∫ ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)*5

To reverse lamp
௤૊в࡬Ծ‫༙ۑ‬ጜ

·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï AV À√◊Õµ—«∂Õ¥√À— 
To car battery
௤૊вԆԾྐЖ

§ËÕ°í∫·∫•‡•Õ√’Ë√∂¬π•Ï
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
ᆚтγង (ԅЉ਎క)

µËÕ°—∫‰ø —≠≠“≥‡«≈“∂Õ¬À≈—ß
Reverse lamp lead*4
࡬Ծ‫༙ۑ‬ጜ዗ለ*4

 “¬‰ø∑’Ë ‰ø —≠≠“≥‡«≈“∂Õ¬À≈—ß*4

 “¬„¬·°È«π”· ß·∫∫¥‘®‘µÕ≈
( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)

Video cord (not supplied)
ඁᏁྐង(ԅЉ਎క)

«’¥’‚Õ ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)

Audio/video cord (not supplied)
ࡖᏁ/ඁᏁྐង(ԅЉ਎క)

 “¬ÕÕ¥‘‚Õ/ «’¥’‚Õ ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)
External monitor
͙૊᜼Ε዇

¡Õ𑇵Õ√Ï¿“¬πÕ°
Camcorder, Navigation System, etc.
᚝Ꭸߟጅè዗ৃԦ஀çമ

°≈ÈÕß«‘¥’‚Õ √–∫∫π”∑“ß œ≈œ

Rear view camera KV-CM1*6
݈ඁຖྰጅ KV-CM1*6
°≈ÈÕß¡ÕßÀ≈—ß KV-CM1*6

*4 Required only when connecting a rear view camera to
VIDEO IN terminal.
*5 Refer to a in diagram A on page 4.
*6 Set “AV Input” setting to “Camera” when using (see page 47 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).

*4 ෮࿬ᏻ௤૊݈ඁຖྰጅв VIDEO IN ಍Ꮓइé
*4
*5 ੉ኌ a Ϛ࿌ A ‫ ୶ڄ‬4 ࡗé
*5
*6 ՟·इçઅ “Camera” ௎‫“ ޴׆‬AV Input” (੉ኌ՟·ი‫ا‬ए‫* ୶ڄ‬6
47 ࡗ)é

„™È‡©æ“–‡¡◊ËÕµËÕ°≈ÈÕß¡ÕßÀ≈—ß°—∫™ËÕß VIDEO IN
¥Ÿ a „π·ºπº—ß A „πÀπÈ“ 4
µ—Èß “AV Input” ‡¢È“°—∫ “Camera” ‡¡◊ËÕµÈÕß°“√„™Èß“π
(¥ŸÀπÈ“ 47 §”·π–π”)

5

THCT4-6_AVX710-008A.indd 5

12/6/07 3:39:18 PM

C Connections to the CD changer jack / ௥ોսCDಘၫጆಎ˲ / °“√‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫À—«µËÕ´’¥’‡™π‡®Õ√Ï
When connecting the external components, refer also to the
manuals supplied for the components and adapter.

௤૊͙૊௰άइç͏ቁ੉ኌ௰ά˪ᕢಗ዇˃՟·˾̰é

‡¡◊ËÕ‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕÕÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° „ÀÈ¥Ÿ¢ÈÕ¡Ÿ≈‡°’ˬ«°—∫Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°·≈–Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï
®“°§ŸË¡◊Õ∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“¥È«¬

ʯ˼:
௥ો͚ો௱έ˄‫ۯ‬èቂᇨۙᘖ௼͵ጆê

CAUTION:
Before connecting the external components, make sure that
the unit is turned off.
You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer
jack.
JVC component

Model name

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

Portable audio player with
line output jacks
Portable audio player with
3.5 mm stereo mini jack

Adapter
Bluetooth adapter
Interface adapter
for iPod
Line input adapter
AUX input adapter

°ËÕπ®–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° °√ÿ≥“µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË „®«Ë“ªî¥‡§√◊ËÕßÕ¬ŸË

઱̣̈́અ̣ʓ JVC ௰ά௤૊ռ CD ಗၪ዇಍˱é
JVC ௱έ

‫ܔ‬༚ϐၴ

CD ಗၪ዇ (CD-CH)

CH-X1500çമ

∑Ë“π “¡“√∂‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ JVC µËÕ‰ªπ’ȇ¢È“°—∫™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫´’¥’‡™π‡®Õ√Ï
 Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ JVC
™◊ËÕ√ÿËπ
´’¥’‡™π‡®Õ√Ï (CD-CH)
CH-X1500 œ≈œ

઱ʛ̈́௫ཫύၲ JVC ᕢಗ዇௤૊̣ʓ௰άé
• ௤૊ለ̈́঻ᄔ࠱వጤᒯ໯é

You can also connect the following components through the various
JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
Component
Bluetooth device
iPod

¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß:

Model name
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57

௱έ
ᕇ̖༫໯
iPod
ઘለཔ᎔̳಍˱‫̈́ڄ‬᚞Ϸ
ࡖᏁᆑ‫؞‬዇
ઘ 3.5 ଔТਁіࡖᛏ಍˱
‫̈́ڄ‬᚞ϷࡖᏁᆑ‫؞‬዇

ᕣಘወ
ᕇ̖ᕢಗ዇
iPod ˒ࡒᕢಗ዇
ለཔ᎔ʈᕢಗ዇

‫ܔ‬༚ϐၴ
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57

AUX ᎔ʈᕢಗ዇

KS-U58

‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫µËÕ‰ªπ’Ⱥ˓πÕ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï·∫∫µË“ßÊ ¢Õß JVC ‰¥È‡™Ëπ°—π
Õ“®µÈÕß´◊ÈÕ “¬‡™◊ËÕ¡µËյ˓ßÀ“°

•

 Ë«πª√–°Õ∫

Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï

™◊ËÕ√ÿËπ

Õÿª°√≥Ï∫≈Ÿ∑Ÿ∏

Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï∫≈Ÿ∑Ÿ∏
Õ‘π‡∑Õ√χø 
Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï ”À√—∫√ÿËπ

KS-BTA200

iPod

KS-PD100

iPod
ະ௤૊Ϡࡴ௰άइ (ఛϠð2)çܿᙯ઱՜ʓ̄‫׿‬Εрᑷ௰άé

KS-U58

When connecting more than one component (maximum: two),
it is recommended that you connect the components in series as
explained below.

‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ‡æ≈ß·∫∫æ°æ“
æ√ÈÕ¡¢—È«µËÕ Line Output
‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ‡æ≈ß·∫∫æ°æ“
æ√ÈÕ¡™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫·∫∫ 3.5 ¡¡.

Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï

KS-U57

Line Input

Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï

KS-U58

AUX Input

Stereo Mini

‡¡◊ËÕ‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫¡“°°«Ë“Àπ÷Ëß™‘Èπ ( Ÿß ÿ¥ Õß™‘Èπ) ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀÈ∑Ë“π‡™◊ËÕ¡
µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫·∫∫Õπÿ°√¡µ“¡§”Õ∏‘∫“¬¢È“ß≈Ë“ß

When connecting two components in series
ັсᑸճࡵ௱έई

‡¡◊ËÕ‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ Õß™‘Èπ·∫∫Õπÿ°√¡
To disconnect the connector / ‫؛‬ළ௤૊዇ / ª≈¥¢—È«µËÕ

Hold the connector top tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).
ӟႌ௤૊዇ʕ௰ ( 1 )ç೸݈અ˃‫ (̳؁‬2 )é
®—∫¥È“π∫π¢Õߢ—È«µËÕ„ÀÈ·πËπ ( 1 ) ®“°π—Èπ®÷ߥ—ßÕÕ° ( 2 )

CD changer jack
CDಗၪ዇಍˱

™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õ߇§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ´’¥ CD
A KS-BTA200
B*7 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.

iPod ‫ݵ‬Apple Inc. (ᙧ‫ )͌˙س‬Ϛࠀ੢˪մ̧੢ࣁٌ̰‫ੋڄ‬ᆤé

iPod ‡ªìπ‡§√◊ËÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§È“¢Õß Apple Inc. ´÷Ëß®¥∑–‡∫’¬π°“√§È“„πª√–‡∑»
 À√—∞Õ‡¡√‘°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»Õ◊ËπÊ

*7 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly
(see page 47 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

*7 ࠱՟·௠՗௰άçቁ͸ᇧ௎‫͙׆‬௰᎔ʈ(੉ኌ՟·ი‫ا‬ए‫ڄ‬
୶ 47 ࡗ)é

*7 „π°“√„™È Ë«πª√–°Õ∫‡À≈Ë“π’È „Àȵ—Èߧ˓°“√√—∫ —≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°„ÀÈ∂Ÿ°µÈÕß
(¥ŸÀπÈ“ 47 §”·π–π”)

TROUBLESHOOTING

‫ݮ‬ᄑ૜ਜ

°“√µ√«®Õ∫ª—≠À“¢—¥¢ÈÕß

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• ۙᎴുጜᔄê
* ᐓ‫߹ފ‬и዗ለ૊Ꮓ֜෨и዗ለ૊Ꮓ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊᙮͸ᇧî

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

• ྑກˀ়ો௣ê
* ᐓ‫ފ‬෦и዗ለ૊Ꮓ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊ʕî

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• ಚᑶወԆЊᑶࡗê
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇᎔̳዗ለ૊Ꮓ‫ݵ‬Ѵഠཔî

• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• ᑶࡗ͜ॳê
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊ϙî
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇‫( ͣڄ‬L) ç͆ (R) ၷʪ‫࠷ڄ‬๨ī–Ĭ‫ݵ‬Ѵθψ૊
ϙî

• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
• Unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

•
*
•
*
•
*
•
*
*

• ዇ࡗʹᓿࡗᛐê
* ݈૊ϙၷʪႩԾԽ‫ݵ‬Ѵ՟·ཛഠ֜ཛ۹‫ྐڄ‬ለ௤૊î

•
*

• ͵ጆഛᇋê
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊ϙî
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇‫( ͣڄ‬L) ç͆ (R) ၷʪ‫࠷ڄ‬๨ī–Ĭ‫ݵ‬Ѵθψ૊
ϙî

•
*
*

• ͵ጆҭθˀ়͹ᇨይіê
* ઱ЉԅЉࡌ௎ʹጅî

•
*

øî« ú¢“¥
¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’¥”·≈– ’·¥ßլ˓ß∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡ò
‰¡Ë “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥È
¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’‡À≈◊ÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡ò
‰¡Ë¡’‡ ’¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß
 “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
‡ ’¬ß‡æ’Ȭπ
 “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
 “¬¢—È«≈∫¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬ (L) ·≈–¢«“ (R) µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
‡ ’¬ß√∫°«π
¡’°“√„™ È“¬ —ÈπÊ À√◊ÕÀπ“Ê µËÕ®“°‡§√◊ËÕß ò«π∑’˵‘¥µ—Èß ‰«È∫πæ◊Èπ¥È“πÀ≈—ß
°—∫µ—«∂—ß√∂¬πµÏÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√ÈÕπ¢÷Èπ
 “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
 “¬¢—È«≈∫¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬ (L) ·≈–¢«“ (R) µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
‡§√◊ËÕ߉¡Ë∑”ß“π‡≈¬
‰¥È∑”°“√√’‡´Áµ‡§√◊ËÕßÀ√◊Õ¬—ß

6

THCT4-6_AVX710-008A.indd 6

12/6/07 3:39:23 PM

KW-AVX716
KW-AVX710

ENGLISH

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

KW-AVX716
KW-AVX710
KW-AVX716
KW-AVX710

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS
LVT1780-002A
[U]

Cover002A_KW-AVX710U_1.indd 2

07.11.13 1:42:03 PM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1.
2.
3.
4.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Cautions on the monitor:

WARNINGS:
To prevent accidents and damage

• The monitor built in this unit has been produced
with high precision, but it may have some
ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not
malfunction.
• Do not expose the monitor to direct sunlight.
• Do not operate the touch panel using a ball-point
pen or similar tool with the sharp tip.
Touch the buttons on the touch panel with your
finger directly (if you are wearing a glove, take it
off).
• When the temperature is very cold or very hot...
– Chemical changes occur inside, causing
malfunction.
– Pictures may not appear clearly or may move
slowly. Pictures may not be synchronized with
the sound or picture quality may decline in
such environments.

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and
gearshift lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

[European Union only]

2

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 2

07.12.6 3:31:14 PM

How to reset your unit

INTRODUCTION
Playable disc types .......................... 4
Basic operations—
Monitor panel/touch panel............ 5
Basic operations—
Remote controller (RM-RK252) ...... 6

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc
ENTER

NO EJECT?
EMERGENCY EJECT?

3

OPERATIONS
Before operating the unit ................ 8
Common operations ........................ 9
Listening to the radio ...................... 10
Disc operations ................................ 13

Exit

Back

2
1

at the same time

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Bluetooth® operations—
Cellular phone/audio player .......... 27
Listening to the CD changer .............. 34
Listening to the iPod........................ 36
Using other external components ..... 38

1

• If this does not work, reset the unit.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

SETTINGS
Sound equalization .......................... 41
Assigning titles to the sources .......... 42
Menu operations ............................. 43

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

REFERENCES
Maintenance ................................... 52
More about this unit ........................ 53
Troubleshooting .............................. 60
Specifications .................................. 64

3

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 3

ENGLISH

Contents

INTRODUCTION
07.12.6 3:31:18 PM

ENGLISH

Playable disc types
Disc type

Recording format, file type, etc.

DVD

DVD Video (Region Code: 3)*1

Playable

DVD Audio
DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
DVD Video
(DVD-R/-RW*2, +R/+RW*3)
DVD-VR
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
• DVD-VR
JPEG
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/
MP3/WMA/WAV
WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level 1,
AAC
level 2, Romeo, Joliet
MPEG4
DVD+VR
DVD-RAM
Dual Disc
DVD side
Non-DVD side
CD/VCD
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)/DTS-CD
VCD (Video CD)
SVCD (Super Video CD)
CD-ROM
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
MP3/WMA/WAV
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo, JPEG
Joliet
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
AAC
MPEG4
*1 If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).
DVD-RW dual layer discs are not playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs.
+RW double layer discs are not playable.
Caution for DualDisc playback
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
4

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 4

07.12.6 3:31:19 PM

Display <AV Menu> screen. ☞ page 43
Display <Source Menu> screen. ☞ page 9
Display and erase the Short Cut windows.
Available functions vary among the sources. For details, see each source operation
section.

Adjust the volume.
Change the display information.
Change the sources. ☞ page 9
Display <AV Menu> screen.
☞ page 43

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Monitor panel/touch panel

Remote sensor

• Display <Open/Tilt> menu.
• Eject the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
menu. [Hold]
• Close the monitor panel when <Open/Tilt>
menu is displayed.

• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power. [Hold]
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

<Open/Tilt> menu

Reset the unit.
• Use only when the internal system malfunctions.
•
•
•
•
•
•

• In the explanation, buttons on the touch panel
are indicated inside [ ].
• For details on the touch panel operations, see
each source operation section.
5

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 5

[OPEN]: Open the monitor panel.
[EJECT]: Eject the disc.
[CLOSE]: Close the monitor panel.
[TILT +/–]: Tilt the monitor panel.
[Exit]: Erase this screen.
Shaded icons cannot be used.

INTRODUCTION
07.12.6 3:31:20 PM

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Remote controller (RM-RK252)
Installing the battery

Main elements and features
R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace both batteries.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

1

• Turns on the power.
• Attenuates the sound if the power is on.
• Turns off the power if pressed and held (while
the power is on).

2

• Reverse search
• Reverse slow motion (during pause)

3

Adjusts the volume level.
• Does not function as “2nd VOL.”

4

• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

5

• DVD/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.

6

Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “ .“

6

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 6

07.12.6 3:31:20 PM

Functions with other buttons (see i and o).

8

Changes the display information.

9

For disc operations:
• 5 / ∞:
DVD: Selects the title.
DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
Other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders.
• 4 / ¢:
– Press briefly: reverse skip/forward skip
– Press and hold: reverse search/forward
search
For FM/AM operations:
• 5 / ∞: Selects the preset stations.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for stations.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For Apple iPod operations:
• ∞: Starts playback/pauses
• 5: Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞
/ 4 / ¢ work as menu selecting
buttons).
In the main menu:
• 5: Returns to the previous menu.
• ∞: Confirms the selection.
• 4/¢
– Press briefly: Selects an item.
– Press and hold: Skips ten items at a time.
For Bluetooth operations:
• 4 / ¢: reverse skip/forward skip (for
audio player operation)

p

• Forward search
• Forward slow motion (during pause)

q

Selects the source.

w

For disc operations:
Starts playback/pauses.
For Bluetooth operations:
• Answers incoming calls.
• Starts playback/pauses. (for audio player
operation).

e

Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.

r

“TUNER”: Selects the bands.
“DISC”: Stops playback.
“Bluetooth PHONE”: Ends the call.
“Bluetooth AUDIO”: Starts playback/pauses.

t

VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

y

• DVD Video/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.

u

• Makes selection/settings.
• @ / #: Skips back or forward by five minutes
for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2.
• % / fi: Changes discs for “CD-CH.”

ENGLISH

7

i*3 • Switches number entry mode for “DISC.”
• Erases the misentry after entering a wrong
number.
• Does not function as “SURROUND.”
o*3 Number buttons
• Enters numbers.
• “TUNER”: Selects the preset station directly.
*1 Functions as a number button only (see o ).
*2 Not used for this unit.
*3 Functions when pressed with SHIFT.

7

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 7

INTRODUCTION
07.12.6 3:31:21 PM

ENGLISH

Before operating the unit
@

You can cancel the demonstration on the screen and set
the clock.
• Non-available items will be shaded on the AV Menu
screens.

Set the clock settings.
Moves to the preceding menu page

Indication language:
In this manual, English indications are used
for purpose of explanation. You can select the
indication language. (☞ page 45)
Moves to the succeeding menu page

~

Turn on the power.

Ÿ

Display <AV Menu> screen.

!

Display <Setup> menu.

¤
⁄

Finish the procedure.

Cancel the demonstration.
Select <Off>.

Return to the previous screen.

8

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 8

07.12.6 3:31:21 PM

Selecting the playback source

ENGLISH

Common operations
Changing the display
information

• Available sources depend on the external
components you have connected, media you have
attached, and the <Input> settings you have made
(☞ page 47).

• Available display information varies among the
playback sources.

On the monitor panel only:

On the touch panel:

• Each time you press DISP, the display changes to
show the various information.
Ex. When the playback source is a DivX disc.
Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen
Exit

On the monitor panel:
Track list

Clock time in large numbers

TUNER = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD) =CD-CH, iPod, or
EXT-IN = Bluetooth PHONE = Bluetooth AUDIO
= AV-IN = (back to the beginning)
Navigation screen
(When <Navigation> is
selected for <AV Input>)
(☞ page 47)

• You cannot select these sources if they are not ready.

Back to the beginning

9

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 9

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:22 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset no.

Assigned station name (☞ page 42). If no name is assigned,
the frequency of the station is displayed instead.

Band
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
☞ page 11,
Tuner indicators

☞ page 9

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ
!

Press [BAND].

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In
the explanation,
they are
indicated inside
[ ].

Press [4] or [¢] to search for a station—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.
• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

3

When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
1

Press [AV MENU].

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• The MONO indicator lights up.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

Press [Mode].

To restore stereo effect, select <Off>.

10

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 10

07.12.6 3:31:23 PM

FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)

This function works only for FM bands. Once you have
activated this function (selected <Local>), it always
works when searching for FM stations.

1

This function works only for FM bands.
You can preset six stations for each band.

Press [AV MENU].

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

ENGLISH

Tuning in to stations with
sufficient signal strength

Press [AV MENU].

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Mode].

2

3

Press [Mode].

3

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be
detected.
• The DX indicator goes off, then the LO indicator
lights up.
• You can also change <IF Band Width> setting
(for details, ☞ page 47).
<IF Band Width> menu can be accessed by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then..
☞ page 41

11

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 11

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:23 PM

ENGLISH

Manual presetting

Selecting a preset station

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number
4 of the FM1 band.

On the remote:

1

1

Display the Preset List.

2
or
Hold

On the unit:
• To select directly on the touch panel

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

• To select from the Preset List

1
3

Select a preset number.

2
[Hold]

The station selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 4.

12

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 12

07.12.6 3:31:24 PM

The disc type is automatically detected, and playback starts automatically (for some discs: automatic start depends
on its internal program).
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks on it will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject
the disc.

ENGLISH

Disc operations

If “ ” appears on the screen, the unit cannot accept the operation you have tried to do.
• In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted.

~

!

Open the monitor panel.

Insert a disc.

Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Ÿ

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [CLOSE].

Press [OPEN].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

When playing back a multi-channel encoded disc,
the multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• You can fully enjoy multi-channel sound by
connecting an amplifier or a decoder compatible
with these multi-channel sources. (☞ also page
57)

Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
13

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 13

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:24 PM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information. (☞ page 9)

DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter no./Playing time

Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal
channel no.

Disc type *1
Audio format
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
Playback mode

☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select chapter
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2
[5 ∞]
Select title/program/playlist

*1 DVD-VR also indicates either PRG (program) or PLAY (playlist) playback.
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback pictures
on the screen).

14

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 14

07.12.6 3:31:25 PM

For DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2: Folder no./Track no./Playing time
For JPEG: Folder no./File no.

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information (☞ page 9).

Disc type
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total track no.
included on the
disc

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 *1
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

Track no./Playing time

The PBC indicator
lights up when PBC is
in use.

Total track no.
included on the
disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total playing time

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10
15

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 15

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:25 PM

ENGLISH

Track no./Playing time

Only for CD Text *3
Total track no.
included on the disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total playing time
☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

Audio format
(MP3/WMA/WAV)
Tag data appears
only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
Total track no. included on the disc

☞ page 19

[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

*3 “No Name” appears for conventional CDs.
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10
16

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 16

07.12.6 3:31:26 PM

You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• While the operation buttons are displayed, aspect ratio is fixed to <Full>. (☞ page 45)
• If no operation is done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is
displayed).

ENGLISH

Operation buttons on the screen

☞ pages 20 to 24 on how the operation buttons
particularly work for a variety of the discs

A
[SOURCE]
[AV MENU]
[SHORT CUT]
[3 / 8]
[7]
[4 ¢]

Display <Source Menu> screen
Display <AV Menu> screen
Display the Short Cut buttons
Start and pause playback
Stop playback
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Select folders
• The above buttons also work when they are not shown on
the screen (while watching the playback picture).
* While a disc menu is played back for DVD, [KEY] is
automatically displayed. On the disc menu, you can select a
menu item directly by touching it on the screen.

Touch the screen (center portion).

*

Touch [KEY].

B
For DVD/VCD/DivX menu operation playback
[2 3 5 ∞] Select the menu items
[ENT]
Confirm the selection
[TOP MENU] Display the disc menu
[MENU]
Display the disc menu
[RETURN]
Return to the previous menu or display the
menu (only for VCD with PBC)

Touch [KEY].

C
For entering the numbers
[DIRECT CLR] • Switch between chapter/track entry and
title/group/folder entry
• Erase the last entry when you enter a
wrong number
[0]–[9]=[ENT]
Enter numbers
Ex.: To enter “105,” press [1], [0], [5], then [ENT]

Touch [KEY].

To erase the operations, touch the screen again.
17

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 17

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:27 PM

ENGLISH

Selecting playback modes
You can use the following playback modes—Repeat or Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat

1

3

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Title: Repeats current title
Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Program: Repeats current program (not
available for Playlist playback)
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Repeats current folder

Folder: Repeats current folder

—
—
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks
—

Track:

Repeats current track (PBC not in
use)

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks (PBC not
in use)

Track:

Repeats current track*1

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

Track: Repeats current track*1
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder

Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

*1 You can also use [SHORT CUT] to turn on and off Track Repeat.

18

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 18

07.12.6 3:31:28 PM

Prohibiting disc ejection

If a disc includes folders, you can display the Folder/
Track (File) Lists, then start playback.

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

ENGLISH

Selecting tracks on the list
1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
at the same time

3

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.

Select a folder (1), then a track (2).

Using Short Cut Icons
You can easily access the some frequently used
functions by using [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel.

1
Selected track starts playing. (* Press to move to
the previous/next pages of the list)
1 Current folder list number/total folder list
number
2 Current track list number/total track list
number of the current folder
You can easily access the Track List by pressing DISP
on the monitor panel.

2
• For video software:
Aspect ratio
(☞ page 45)
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

• For audio software:

Turn on or off Track Repeat
(Repeat play: ☞ page 18)

Selected track starts playing.
19

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 19

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:28 PM

ENGLISH

Operations using the remote controller—RM-RK252
Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No sound can be heard.)
Select title (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select title (when not playing).

twice

Select title (during playback or pause).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

You can change the following items using the on-screen bar—audio language, audio stream, audio channel,
subtitle language, view angle, etc. (☞ pages 25 and 26)

20

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 20

07.12.6 3:31:29 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4 (No sound can be heard.)
Forward slow motion during pause*5 (No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*6
Select program.
Select playlist (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.
Select chapter.
Select program (when not playing).
Select program/playlist (during playback or pause).
twice

Using Original Program/Playlist screens ( ☞ page 25)
1

For Original Program
For Playlist

2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3

To erase the screen.

*4 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*5 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*6 Search speed: x2 ] x10

21

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 21

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:31 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.

Select track (within the same folder).
twice

Select folder.
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

While playing...
Reverse/advance the scenes by five minutes.
Current playback position

2nd press

1st press

1st press

2nd press

3rd press

For DivX6: Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2 ] ¡3
*2 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2

22

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 22

07.12.6 3:31:31 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause. (Slide show: each file is shown for a few seconds.)
Shows the current file until you change it if pressed during Slide show.
Select file.
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.
Select file (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed
during playback).
Reverse/forward search*3
Forward slow motion during pause*4
(No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5 (No
sound can be heard.)

During PBC playback...

Select aspect ratio.

2 Select the desired track.

Select an item on the menu.
To return to the previous menu, press
To cancel PBC playback
1

• To resume PBC, press
Select track.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*5 Search speed: x2 ] x10

23

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 23

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:32 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

Select track.
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Reverse/forward search*3
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
Select folder.

Select track (within the same folder).

twice

Select folder.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10

24

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 24

07.12.6 3:31:33 PM

Operations using the on-screen
bar

You can use Original Program or Playlist
screen anytime while playing DVD-VR with its data
recorded.

1

2

These operations are possible on the screen using
the remote controller, while playing the following
discs—DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG.

Display the Original Program/Playlist screen.

1

Display the on-screen bar. (☞page 26)

2

Select an item.

3

Make a selection.
If a pop-up menu appears...

ENGLISH

Using the list screens

Select an item you want.

To erase the screen

Ex. For DVD-Video

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
the recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/playlist*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of playlist
8 Total number of chapters included in the playlist
9 Playback time

• For entering time/numbers...
:
Move the entry position

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

:
Select a number
To remove the on-screen bar

25

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 25

OPERATIONS
07.12.6 3:31:34 PM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Information
Operation

Above example is of DVD Video. Items shown on the bar vary due to the disc type.
1 Disc type
2 • DVD: Audio signal format
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD Video:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
T. RPT:
Title repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
F. RND: Folder random
A. RND: All (Disc) random
JPEG:
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
VCD:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter

5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
Remaining title time (for DVD)
Remaining disc time (for others)
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track *2
Remaining time of the current
chapter/track *2
6 Playback status
Play
Reverse/forward search
Reverse/forward slow-motion
Pause
Stop
7 Operation icons
Change time indication (see 5)
Time Search (Specify a certain
scene by entering time.)
Title Search (by its number)
Chapter Search (by its number)
Track Search (by its number)
Repeat play *1
Random play *1
Change the audio language, audio
stream, or audio channel
Change or erase the subtitle
language
Change the view angle

Current program/chapter
Current Playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file

*1 ☞ page 18
*2 Not applicable for DVD-VR

26

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 26

07.12.6 3:31:35 PM

For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the
Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD changer jack
on the rear.
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the
countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.

1

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press
[5] or [∞] to select it.

ENGLISH

Bluetooth® operations — Cellular phone/audio player

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

To use a Bluetooth device through the unit (“Bluetooth
PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“Bluetooth PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”).

3

Connecting a new Bluetooth
device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Go to other menu items

Use either of the following items in <Bluetooth>
menu to register and establish the connection with a
device.
• Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as
the source to operate <Bluetooth> menu.
Open

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Search

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating this unit.

4

Enter a PIN (Personal Identification
Number)* code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number).
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.

To register using <Open>
Preparation:
Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth
function.
Continued on the next page

27

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 27

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:37 PM

ENGLISH

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Enter]: Confirms the entry.

5

To connect a special device <Special
Device>

1

Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the above
step) on the device to be connected.

2
3
4
5

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use <Connect> (or activate
<Auto Connect>) to connect the same device
from next time (☞ the following, and pages 50
and 51).

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press [5]
or [∞] to select it.
Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Bluetooth].

4
5

6

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Special Device].
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
Select a device you want to connect.
Use <Open> (or <Search>) to connect.

To connect/disconnect a registered
device

To register using <Search>

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to connect/disconnect.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

3
4

Press [Search].
The unit searches for available devices and displays
the list of them. (If no available device is detected,
“Device Unfound” appears.)

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Connect] or [Disconnect].
• Select <Connect> to connect the selected
device.
• Select <Disconnect> to disconnect the selected
device.

To delete a registered device

Select a device you want to connect.
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to
the unit.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Connecting...” is displayed on the
screen.

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to delete.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

3
4

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Delete Pairing].
Confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

28

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 28

07.12.6 3:31:38 PM

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

*1

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 31

Adjust the volume of the incoming calls.*2

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside
[ ].

[AV MENU] Hold: Activates <Voice Dialing> function
[5 ∞] Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can be registered.)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of the other sources.

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ

Press [AV MENU].

!
⁄

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.
• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Bluetooth].
Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu).
☞ pages 50 and 51

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

When <Auto Answer> is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

To end the call
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(☞ page 51)

• You can adjust the microphone volume. (☞ page 51)

29

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 29

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:38 PM

3

ENGLISH

When an SMS comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.
When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (☞ page 51)

4

Select a calling method, then call.

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (☞ page 50)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages. (☞ pages
50 and 51)

Cancel

Redial

Shows the list of the phone
numbers you have dialed.
Received Calls Shows the list of the received
calls.
Phonebook
Shows the phone book of the
connected cellular phone.
Missed Calls Shows the list of the missed
calls.
Phone
Shows the phone number entry
Number
screen = “Entering a phone
number” (☞ page 31).
Voice Dialling (Only when the connected
cellular phone has the voice
recognition system): = Speak
the name you want to call.

To make a call

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

30

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 30

07.12.6 3:31:40 PM

To redial previously dialed numbers

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or +/–).

1

/ATT

ENGLISH

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

Entering a phone number
• You cannot use the remote controller to enter phone
numbers.

2

You can enter [0] – [9], [*], [#] (up to 32 numbers)
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Preset]: Goes to Preset List. You can preset the
entered number by selecting a preset
number. (☞ page 32)
• [Dial]: Calls the entered number.

3

• You can easily access <Dial Menu> by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
When using the remote controller, you can
display <Redial> menu anytime .
You can also access <Dial Menu> by holding
SOURCE on the monitor panel.
[Hold]
• You can easily activate <Voice Dialing> by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

You can also activate <Voice Dialing> by
holding [AV MENU].

31

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 31

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:41 PM

ENGLISH

Presetting the phone numbers

To call a preset number

You can preset up to six phone numbers.

1

1

Select the phone number you want to preset
from <Phonebook>, <Redial>, <Received
Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
1 Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.
2 Press [Bluetooth].
3 Press [Dial Menu], then...

2
Ex.: Selecting <Received Calls>

2

Select a telephone number to store.

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth phone operations.
[Hold]

3

: • Display <Dial Menu> screen/Answer
the incoming call.
• Display the <Redial> menu if pressed
and held (regardless of the current
source).

Select a preset number.

: End the call.
: Adjust the volume.

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

:
[Hold] Make a call to the preset numbers.

32

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 32

07.12.6 3:31:42 PM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

*1

*2
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 41
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

[3 / 8] [7] Start and pause playback
[4 ¢] Reverse/forward skip
[5 ∞]
Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can
be registered.*3)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the operation status.
*3 You cannot select “New Device” when a Bluetooth audio player is connected.

~
Ÿ

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth audio operations.

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth
AUDIO]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Start and pause playback.

Start playback.

:
:

Reverse/forward skip
Adjust the volume.

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.
jvc-victor.co.jp/english/car/>
33

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 33

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:43 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the CD changer
MP3 indicator

Folder no./Track no./Playing time
Ex. while playing an MP3 disc

Disc no.
Tag data appears only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total track no. included on the
disc
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[ 5 ∞]
Press: Select folders (only for MP3)
Hold: Display Disc list

☞ page 35
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.

⁄

Preparation:
Make sure <Changer> is selected for <External
Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Select a disc to start playing.

Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH]. (☞
page 9)

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

To go to the other list

• If you select an MP3 disc, the Track list of the
current folder appears. You can select a track
and start playing. (☞ also page 19)

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor
panel.

!

Display the Disc List.

• If you select a folder on the list, you can start
playing the first track of the folder.
34

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 34

07.12.6 3:31:43 PM

Selecting playback modes

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Mode].

ENGLISH

You can use following playback modes—Repeat or
Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat for an MP3 disc

When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Track: Repeats current track
Disc:
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
All:

Randomly plays all tracks of the
current disc
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder, then tracks of next folders
folder
Disc: Randomly plays all tracks of the
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
current disc
All:
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller to operate the CD changer.

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

: Select disc.
: Select folder (MP3 only).
• Press: Select track.
• Hold: Reverse/forward search

35

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 35

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:44 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod
Track no./Playing time

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

☞ page 37
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5]
Enter player’s menu
[∞]
Start playback/pause
• To resume, press again.

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

It is required to connect the Interface adapter for iPod (KS-PD100) to the CD changer jack on the rear.
Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod] (☞ page 9)
Playback starts automatically.
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

36

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 36

07.12.6 3:31:44 PM

3

1

Press [5] to enter the player’s menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about five seconds.

2

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.
Press: Select an item.
Hold: Skip ten items at a time if there are more
than ten items.

Repeat

One:
All:

Random

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs Ô
Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the beginning)

3
4

Select an appropriate option.

ENGLISH

Selecting a track from the
player’s menu

Functions the same as
“Repeat One.”
Functions the same as
“Repeat All.”

Album: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Albums.”
Song: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Songs.”

Press [∞] to confirm the selection.
• When the playback modes are selected, the
corresponding indicators light up alternately on
the screen.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [5].

To cancel, select <Off>.

Selecting playback modes
1

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

37

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 37

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:45 PM

ENGLISH

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN terminals.
Assigned title (☞ page 42)

Sound mode (☞ page 41)

You can easily access to <Aspect> setting
menu by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback picture).

~
Ÿ

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while watching the playback picture

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• [KEY] does not work when the source is “AV-IN.”

38

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 38

07.12.6 3:31:45 PM

Navigation screen
ENGLISH

You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN terminal so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (☞ page 47)

To view the navigation screen (and listen to the navigation guidance*)
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (☞ page 9)
• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to
<Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (☞ page
45)

* If your Navigation System is equipped with the voice guidance function.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while viewing the navigation screen
• The operation buttons displayed on the screen vary among the playback sources.

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• The above buttons except [KEY] also work when they are not shown on the screen (while viewing the navigation
screen).
When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (☞ page 47)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN terminals.
• Some status messages such as volume level will not appear on the screen.

39

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 39

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.6 3:31:46 PM

ENGLISH

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter—KS-U57
(not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (☞ page 42)

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

☞ page 41

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

40

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 40

07.12.6 3:31:46 PM

ENGLISH

Sound equalization

While playing back any source other
than “Bluetooth PHONE,” you can easily
access <Equalizer> menu by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

~

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

1

Repeat steps ~ and Ÿ, then in step !...

2

Adjust (1), then store (2).

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Ÿ

!

Select a sound mode.

Ex.: When storing into <User2>.
Move to other six sound modes

• For preset values of each sound mode, ☞ page 58.

41

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 41

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:47 PM

ENGLISH

Assigning titles to the sources

In the explanation, buttons on the
touch panel are indicated inside [ ].

!

You can assign titles as follows.
FM/AM stations

Up to 16 characters—up to 30
stations.

AV-IN
EXT-IN

Up to 16 characters

~
Ÿ

Assign a title.

Select the source. (☞ page 9)
• For FM/AM stations: Select the band, then
tune into a station.

You can enter up to 16 characters (for available
characters, ☞ page 59).
• [Store]: Confirm the entry.
• [2/3]: Move the cursor.
• [BS]:
Erase the character before the
cursor.
• [Del]:
Erase the character on the cursor.
• [Cap]:
Change the letter case (upper/
lower).
• [Change]: Change the character set.
• [Space]: Enter a space.

Display <Title Entry> screen.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

42

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 42

07.12.6 3:31:47 PM

ENGLISH

Menu operations

!

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures. Some of the settings do not open the
sub-setting window, but just selecting an option will
change the setting.
• The display indications may change according to
change of the specifications.
Ex.: Changing the <AV Input> setting

~

Ÿ

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Non-available items will be shaded.

43

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 43

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:48 PM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Demonstration

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it temporarily,
touch the screen.

Wall Paper

You can select the background picture of the screen.
Horizon, Metal, Art, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

Off: Cancels.
Once: Scrolls the disc information once.
Auto: Repeats scrolling (five-second intervals).
• Holding DISP on the monitor panel scrolls the information regardless
of this setting.

Dimmer

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Auto: Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.*1
Dimmer Time Set : Activates the Dimmer Time setting below.

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On/Off times.

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
1 (bright), 2 (middle), 3 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust brightness of the screen.
–15 (darkest) to +15 (brightest); Initial 00

Picture Adjust*2

You can adjust the following to make the screen clear and legible for
watching the playback picture. The setting will be stored—one for
“DISC” (common) and the other for “AV-IN.”
–15 to +15; Initial 0
Bright: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Contrast: Adjust the contrast.
Color: Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
Tint: Adjust the tint if the human skin color is unnatural. (only when
color system setting is <NTSC>, ☞ next page)
• Press [5] or [∞] to adjust.

Display

ENGLISH

Setup

*1 The ILLUMINATION lead connection is required. (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
*2 Adjustable only when the source is “DISC” (the inserted disc must contain pictures or movies) or “AV-IN.”

44

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 44

07.12.6 3:31:48 PM

Menu items
3

Aspect*

Selectable settings, [reference page]
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.
Aspect ratio of incoming signal
4:3

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures

Clock

Display

Full:
For 16:9 original pictures
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match to the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language*4

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands,
Svenska, Dansk, Руccĸий, Português
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change
according to the language selected. ☞ [59]

NTSC/PAL

Select the color system of the external monitor connected—NTSC, PAL.
• Turn off the power and turn it on again to make the new setting
effective.

Time Set

Initial 1:00AM ☞ [8]

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system.
12Hours, 24Hours ☞ [8]

OSD Clock

When <On> is selected, the clock time is displayed on the playback
picture. ☞ [8]
Off, On

*3 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*4 After you change the indication language setting, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.

45

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 45

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:49 PM

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
1

Menu Language*

Select the initial disc menu language; Initial English (☞ also page
58).

Audio Language*1

Select the initial audio language; Initial English (☞ also page 58).

Subtitle*1

Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off); Initial
English (☞ also page 58).

Monitor Type*1
16:9

4:3LB

4:3PS

OSD Position*1

Disc

Position 1

Position 2

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
16:9 : Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor is 16:9.
4:3 LB (Letterbox)/4:3 PS (Pan Scan): Select when the aspect ratio of
the external monitor is 4:3.
• Refer to the illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are
shown on the screen.
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [25]
1: Higher position
2: Lower position

File Type*1

Select playback file type when a disc contains different types of files.
Audio: Plays back audio files.
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
Audio&Video: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

DivX Regist. (Registration)*1

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a
file with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration
Code is overwritten for copyright protection.

D. Audio Output*1

Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (☞ also page 57)
PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio, or when
connecting to a recording device.
Dolby D : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital.
Stream : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.

*1 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
46

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 46

07.12.6 3:31:50 PM

Menu items
1

Selectable settings, [reference page]
When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT terminals.
Dolby SR : Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio by
connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby Surround.
Stereo : Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic) Range
Compres. (Compression)*1

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing
Dolby Digital software.
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded software.
On: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

AV Input*2

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN terminals. ☞ [38, 39]
Off: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is skipped while
selecting the source).
Audio&Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as a
VCR.
Audio: Select when connecting an audio component such as a portable
audio player.
Camera*3 : Select when connecting a rear view camera.
Navigation : Select when connecting a Navigation System.

External Input*4

For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the
rear.
Changer/iPod*5: CD changer or iPod. ☞ [34, 36]
External: Any other than the above. ☞ [40]
• For connecting the Bluetooth adapter, this setting is not required. It is
automatically detected.

Input

Tuner

Disc

Down Mix*

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

*2 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*3 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the control panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.
*4 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*5 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.

47

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 47

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:50 PM

Others

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Beep

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting

Off: Cancels.
Muting1, Muting2: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Power LED Flash

Off: Cancels.
On: When the ignition is turned off, the lamp on the
flashes.

button

TouchPanel Sens.

Change the sensitivity of the touch panel. As the number decreases,
sensitivity becomes higher. 1/2/3

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold
[Enter] to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. ☞ [3]

Equalizer
Flat/Hard Rock/R&B/Pop/Jazz/Dance/Country/Reggae/Classic/User1/User2/User3 ☞ [41]

48

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 48

07.12.6 3:31:51 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Fader/Balance

Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front and rear speakers.
• Upmost—front only (F6)
• Downmost—rear only (R6)
When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the center (0).
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left and right speakers.
• Leftmost—left only (L6)
• Rightmost—right only (R6) Initial 0

Volume Adjust

Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing to
the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
–12 to +12; Initial 00
• You can make the adjustments separately for DVD and other discs.

Amplifier Gain

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Low: VOL 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speakers is less
than 50 W.)
High: VOL 00 to 50

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Sound

Mode*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Mono

Only for FM. (Off, On) ☞ [10]

DX/Local

Only for FM. (Local, DX) ☞ [11]

SSM

Only for FM. Press and hold to start SSM. ☞ [11]

Title Entry

Only for FM/AM stations, “AV-IN,” and “EXT-IN.” ☞ [42]

Repeat

☞ [18, 35, 37]

Random

☞ [18, 35, 37]

*1 Items listed under <Mode> vary among the playback sources.

List
For “DISC”: Folder List and Track List (☞ page 19)
For “CD-CH”: Disc List, Folder List, and Track List (☞ page 34)
• For the other playback sources, you can display a list by pressing DISP on the monitor panel. (☞ page 9)
49

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 49

SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:52 PM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

ENGLISH

Bluetooth*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Dial Menu *

Select the method to make a call. ☞ [30]

Message*3

You can read a message from the following message histories.
Unread: Messages you have not read.
Read: Messages you have read.
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.
Sent: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Open

☞ [27]

Search

☞ [28]

Special Device

Only for “New Device.”
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which require some special procedure to
establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want to connect.
• After selecting the device, use <Open> or <Search> (☞ page 27 or 28)
for connection.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You can
connect the unit and the device by using <Connect> (☞ below) from the
next time.

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ pages 27 and
28), establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the device being connected.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Delete the registered devices.

2

*1 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO.” Select a device (or “New Device”) before operating the
menu.
*2 Only for the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*3 Selectable only when the source is “Bluetooth PHONE” and the connected cellular phone is compatible with SMS
(Short Message Service).

When operating the Bluetooth device, refer also to the instructions supplied with the device.

50

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 50

07.12.6 3:31:53 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
4

When the unit is turned on, the connection is established automatically
with...
Off: No Bluetooth device.
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found first.

Auto Answer *5

Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the calls
manually.
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.

Message Info *5

Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and
displaying “Receiving Message.” To read the message, ☞ page 30.
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.
01/02/03

Version *6

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

Settings

Auto Connect *

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

*4 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “New Device” is selected.
*6 If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc-victor.
co.jp/english/car/>

51

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 51

SETTINGS
SETTINGS
07.12.6 3:31:54 PM

ENGLISH

Maintenance
Moisture condensation

To keep discs clean

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.

How to handle discs

To play new discs
Center holder

When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder of
the case and lift the disc out, holding it
by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:
SingleCD—8 cm disc

Unusual shape

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)

Stick-on label

Transparent or semi-transparent on its
recording area

52

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 52

07.12.6 3:31:54 PM

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

General

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters for file/
folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

ENGLISH

More about this unit

Playing DVD-VR

Disc

• For details about DVD-VR format and Playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

General
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are
interchangeably used.
• This unit can only play back audio CD (CD-DA) files
if different type of audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV) are
recorded on the same disc.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.

File playback
Playing DivX files
• This unit can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx>, <.div>, or <.avi> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit supports the DivX files whose resolution is
720 x 576 pixels or less.
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or Dolby Digital.
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode
may not be played back correctly.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

Ejecting a disc
• If “No disc“ appears after removing a disc, insert a
disc or select another playback source.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust.

Continued on the next page

53

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 53

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:31:55 PM

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO
format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional,
and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

ENGLISH

Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2
files recorded by JVC Everio camcorders.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Playing JPEG files

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
on the disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)

54

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 54

07.12.6 3:31:55 PM

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
p

• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

Current folder (highlighted bar)
Current folder number/total folder number
Folder list
Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not
displayed for JPEG)
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
in the current folder (total number of tracks on
the disc)
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)
Track list
Current track (highlighted)

ENGLISH

Bluetooth operations
General

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error: The device is registered but the
connection has failed. Use <Connect> to connect
the device again. (☞ page 28)
• Error: Try the operation again. If “Error” appears
again, check if the device supports the function you
have tried.
• Device Unfound: No available Bluetooth device is
detected by <Search>.
• Loading: The unit is updating the phone book and/
or SMS.
• Please Wait...: The unit is preparing to use
the Bluetooth function. If the message does not
disappear, turn off and turn on the unit, then connect
the device again (or reset the unit).
• Reset 08: Check the connection between the
adapter and this unit.

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline
JPEG), it will be displayed.

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.

55

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 55

:

Cellular phone

:

Household phone

:

Office

:

General

:

Other than above

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:31:56 PM

ENGLISH

CD changer

Menu settings

• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (☞ page 34), you will hear a
beep. Select another folder including music files.

• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from
<High> to <Low> while the volume level is set
higher than “30,” the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio
Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the
power, and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc)
so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect
ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may
become <4:3LB> for some discs.

iPod operations
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano *1
– iPod video (5th Generation) *2
*1 When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
*2 It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu while the iPod is connected to the
interface adapter.
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the adapter connected to this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the screen. This unit
can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>

56

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 56

07.12.6 3:31:57 PM

2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Through the DIGITAL OUT terminal

ENGLISH

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT)

Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted.
• To reproduce the multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set <D. Audio Output> correctly.
(☞ page 46)
Output signals

<D. Audio Output>
Playback disc
DVD

<Stream>

<Dolby D>

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital bitstream

with DTS
with MPEG Audio

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

DTS bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD, Video CD

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD with DTS

DTS bitstream

DivX/ with Dolby Digital
MPEG
with MPEG Audio

Dolby Digital bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

MP3/WMA

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

WAV

44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the
discs are not copy-protected.

57

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 57

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:31:57 PM

ENGLISH

Preset equalizing values
Frequency
Sound mode
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User1/2/3

60 Hz

150 Hz

400 Hz

1 kHz

2.5 kHz

6.3 kHz

15 kHz

00
+03
+03
00
+03
+04
+02
+03
+02
00

00
+03
+02
+02
+02
+02
+01
00
+03
00

00
+01
+02
00
+01
00
00
00
+01
00

00
00
00
00
+01
–02
00
+01
00
00

00
00
+01
+01
+01
–01
00
+02
00
00

00
+02
+01
+01
+03
+01
+01
+02
+02
00

00
+01
+03
+02
+02
+01
+02
+03
00
00

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)
Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU

Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque

Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian

Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali

Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

58

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 58

07.12.6 3:31:58 PM

• Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan
and other countries.
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®
6) with enhanced playback of DivX® media files
and the DivX® Media Format
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Victor Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
• iPod and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is
selected for <Language>. (☞ page 45)
Upper and lower cases

ENGLISH

Characters shown on the screen
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you
can use the following characters to assign titles.
(☞ page 42)
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>.
(☞ page 45)

Numbers and symbols

59

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 59

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:31:59 PM

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied with the adapters used for the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
Symptoms
• No sound comes out of the speakers.

• The screen is not clear and legible.

FM/AM

General

• “Position Error Push Open Key” appears on
the screen.
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on the
screen, and the panel does not move.
• “No Signal” appears.

Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced through the analog
terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT).
Sunshine from the windshield may cause this symptom.
Adjust <Bright>. (☞ page 44)
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press OPEN/TILT.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)

• The buttons on the monitor panel do not
work.
• The unit does not work at all.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected
to VIDEO IN terminal.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
When the monitor panel is open, only +/– (volume) and
OPEN/TILT work. The other buttons do not function.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Store stations manually. (☞ page 12)

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

60

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 60

07.12.6 3:32:00 PM

Disc in general

• Disc can be neither recognized nor played
back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot be
played back.
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable discs
cannot be skipped.
• Playback does not start.
•
•
•

•
•
•

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedies/Causes
Eject the disc forcibly. (☞ page 3)
Unlock the disc. (☞ page 19)
• Insert a finalized disc.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used
for recording.

ENGLISH

Symptoms

• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.
The playback picture is not clear and legible. Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 44)
Sound and pictures are sometimes
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
interrupted or distorted.
• Change the disc.
No playback picture is shown and “Parking
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
Brake” appears on the screen, even when the (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
parking brake is engaged.
No picture appears on the external monitor. • Connect the video cord correctly.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.
“Eject Error” or “Loading Error” appears on
Change the source by pressing SOURCE.
the screen.
“Region code error” appears on the screen
Region code is not correct. (☞ page 4)
when you insert a DVD Video.
Disc cannot be played back.
• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (☞ page 4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.
Noise is generated.
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Tracks are not played back as you have
Playback order may differ from that played back using
intended them to play.
other players.
Elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded.
“Not Support” appears on the screen and
The track is unplayable.
track skips.

61

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 61

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:32:00 PM

Symptoms

ENGLISH

• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit.

• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.

Bluetooth

• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.

• Echo or noise occurs.
• Phone sound quality is poor.

• The sound is interrupted or skipped during
playback of a Bluetooth audio player.

• “New Device” cannot be selected for
“Bluetooth AUDIO.”
• The connected audio player cannot be
controlled.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

Remedies/Causes
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected device
and search again.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select <Open> on the unit to connect
the device. (☞ page 27)
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device. If the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its
instructions, try “0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then
try to connect again. (☞ pages 28, 50)
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
cellular phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal
reception.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
audio player.
• Disconnect the player connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player
again.
Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “New
Device,” disconnect it. (☞ page 28)
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

62

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 62

07.12.6 3:32:00 PM

• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work.

AV-IN

iPod

• Sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.
• Playback stops.
• “No Files” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• No picture appears on the screen.
• Playback picture is not clear and legible.

Remedies/Causes
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Current disc does not include playable files. Replace the disc
with one including playable files.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
• Check the connection.
• Charge the battery.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
Check the connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart
playback.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod. Then,
connect them again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 44)

63

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 63

ENGLISH

CD changer

Symptoms
• “No Disc” appears on the screen.
• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.
• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:32:01 PM

ENGLISH

Specifications
Maximum Power Output:
Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Frequency Range:

FM/AM TUNER

Frequencies:
Level:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Output Level
REAR OUT:
Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:

DVD/CD

Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:

FM Tuner

Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:

Input:
Output:

50 W per channel
20 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
6.3 kHz, 15 kHz
±10 dB
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
NTSC/PAL
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Antenna input
VIDEO OUT

Others:

CD changer, Reverse gear signal, DIGITAL
OUT (optical)

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM:

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

65 dB

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation:

35 dB

AM Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/35 dB

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Frequency Response:

DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:

16 Hz to 22 000 Hz

VCD/CD:

16 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

93 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

95 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

64

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 64

07.12.6 3:32:01 PM

7 inch wide liquid crystal display

Number of Pixel:

336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)

Drive Method:

TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format

Color System:

NTSC/PAL

Aspect Ratio:

16:9 (wide)

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

ENGLISH

MONITOR
GENERAL

Screen Size:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System:

Negative ground

Allowable Storage Temperature:

–10°C to +60°C

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

178 mm × 100 mm × 160 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

171 mm × 97 mm × 21 mm

Mass (approx.):

2.6 kg

100

Required space for the monitor ejection

160

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm

90.5

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

65

EN_KW-AVX710[U].indb 65

REFERENCES
07.12.6 3:32:02 PM

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

EN, CT, TH
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

Rear002A_KW-AVX710U_1.indd 2

1207MNMMDWJEIN

07.11.13 1:42:47 PM

KW-AVX716/KW-AVX710
LVT1780-008A
[U/UT]

Installation/Connection Manual
ϰ༬௥ો˿̱
1207MNMMDWJEIN
EN, CT, TH
©2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß/§ŸË¡◊Õ°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß
ˁ̂

ENGLISH
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio
dealers.

‰∑¬

ʹጅ෮̈́՟·‫ޠڈ‬12 V é࠸๩ોϚ‫ྑڅ‬ກԧ஁éϨ‫س‬઱‫ڄ‬Ծቩ
ԅЉ௠ɾྐ຀Ԧ஀ç۱ᄔ࠱ɾࡴྐᏫ᜵ಗ዇ç̣̈́ϚJVCԆԾ
ࡖᛏ˜ኀੋளකռé

™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ȉ¥È√—∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æ◊ËÕ„™Èß“π°—∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øøÈ“ “¬¥‘π¢—È«≈∫°√–
· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑Ï À“°√∂¬πµÏ¢Õߧÿ≥‰¡Ë‰¥È„™È√–∫∫π’È µÈÕß„™È‡§√◊ËÕß·ª≈ß°√–
· ‰ø™Ë«¬ ´÷Ëß “¡“√∂À“´◊ÈÕ‰¥È®“°√È“π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC

WARNINGS

ᙲѿ

§”‡µ◊Õπ

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations,
as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as
this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as
this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to
carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around
carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” flashes on the
monitor, and no playback picture will be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake wire is
connected to the parking brake system built in the car.

• ˝ˡϚ̣ʓт໯ϯ༫ʹጅ‫׻‬௤૊ྐង;
– ̈́঻๡Ҟᗉዬѕ̄ώᇟ֜᜵௥૛ᐑଁ‫ڄ‬т໯Ѵ۱̈́঻˺ചΟ
௢Ֆ‫ݭ‬é
– ̈́঻๡Ҟᗉዬѕϯη༫໯çϨϯηमெമ‫ڄ‬т໯çѴ۱̈́঻
˺ചࠓ֡‫ڄ‬Ο௢Ֆ‫ݭ‬é
– ̈́঻๡Ҟᗉඁ௴‫ڄ‬т໯é
• ˝ˡϚዬѕ̄ώᇟ‫ཫڄ‬ദˀዬѕʹጅçѴ۱̈́঻˺ചΟ௢Ֆ‫ݭ‬é
• ኢአइçኢአ࢜˝ˡႌԠ᜼Ε዇é௠̈́঻๡዗ࠓ୚‫׬‬Փ˺ചՖ
‫ݭ‬é
• Ϛኢአཫദˀࠜᄔ࠱ዬѕʹጅç˝৩࠱ં˝ٌำ‫̄ۮ‬çѴ۱̈́
঻˺ചΟ௢Ֆ‫ݭ‬é
• ࠜ˾۫ԾͶ⽂ϐç“Parking Brake” ϪᆟϚ᜼Ε዇ʕਕᖼç̝೷
ٗᆑ‫؞‬࿌̕é
– ෮ະ˾۫Ծ዗ለႩԆԾ˖໯‫۫˾ڄ‬ԾԦ஀ߟ௤૊इЏᙱѾ‫ۑ‬
 ࣥʼ๡̳୏é

•

Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amplifier Gain”
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 49 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.

඲нྑཕ௥ોईٍิ:
• ӕۘᎳീӦಗ޴ᖃ‫࠷׆‬மࡩ‫ۘڄ‬ᎳീéϨ‫ۘس‬Ꮃീ໩ગጛᖢç
ቁώJVC ԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋ༿੕é
• ݈໯֜‫ۮ‬໯ಙᑵ዇‫ڄ‬ఛʨ᎔ʈ̷୊ᏻʨ‫ؠ‬50 Wçմ‫ۇ‬ӏ޴
4 Ωü8 ΩéϨ‫س‬ఛʨ̷୊ʮ‫ ؠ‬50 Wçቁቆओ“Amplifier Gain”
௎‫ࡩ׆‬ç̣Վ̊ಙᑵ዇๑ᖢé(੉ኌ՟·ი‫ا‬ए‫୶ڄ‬49ࡗ)é
• ޴Վ̊ྐ຀ഠཔçቁ·ഽሇઘ̸у͵՟·ྐለ‫ڄ‬ၷʪé
• ʹጅ՟·݈çಞᇊ̕๡݃ᇊéϕЏçϚ୰̳ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ࠱
᙮ညಞᇊ̕é

•
•
•
•

լ˓µ‘¥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕ߇≈ËπÀ√◊Õ‡¥‘𠓬‰ø„πµ”·ÀπËß∑’;Ë
– Õ“®°’¥¢«“ß°“√∑”ß“π¢Õßæ«ß¡“≈—¬·≈–§—π‡°’¬√Ï ‡æ√“–Õ“®°ËÕ„Àȇ°‘¥Õÿ∫—µ‡Àµÿ¢÷È
– Õ“®°’¥¢«“ß°“√∑”ß“π¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥ϪÈÕß°—𧫓ª≈Õ¥¿—¬ ‡™Ëπ ·Õ√Ï·∫§ ‡æ√“–
Õ“®°ËÕ„Àȇ°‘¥Õ—πµ√“¬√È“¬·√ß∂÷ß™’«‘µ¢÷Èπ‰¥È
– Õ“®°’¥¢«“ß “¬µ“
լ˓„™Èß“π¢≥–¢—∫¢’Ë ‡æ√“–Õ“®°ËÕ„Àȇ°‘¥Õÿ∫—µ‘‡Àµÿ¢÷Èπ‰¥È
ºŸÈ¢—∫µÈÕ߉¡Ë¡Õß∑’ˮաÕ𑇵Õ√Ï¢≥–¢—∫¢’Ë ‡æ√“–Õ“®π”‰ª ŸË§«“¡ª√–¡“∑‡≈‘π‡≈ËÕ·≈–
°ËÕ„Àȇ°‘¥Õÿ∫—µ‘‡Àµÿ‰¥È
À“°µÈÕß°“√„™Èß“π‡§√◊ËÕߢ≥–¢—∫¢’Ë µÈÕß·πË„®«Ë“‰¥È„™È§«“¡√–¡—¥√–«—ßլ˓ߥ’
‡æ◊ËÕÀ≈’°‡≈’ˬ߰“√‡°‘¥Õÿ∫—µ‘‡Àµÿ
À“°‰¡Ë‰¥È„ Ë‡∫√°¡◊Õ ¢ÈÕ§«“¡ “Parking Brake” ®–°–æ√‘∫∑’ËÀπÈ“®Õ ·≈–®–
‰¡Ë¡’¿“æ· ¥ß¢÷Èπ¡“
– §”‡µ◊Õππ’È®–ª√“°Ø¢÷Èπ‡©æ“–‡¡◊ËÕµËÕ “¬‡∫√°°—∫√–∫∫‡∫√°„π√∂¬πµÏ‰«È‡∑Ë“π—Èπ

¡ÈÕπŸ≈„π°“√•ËÕ√–∫∫‰ø:
„™Èæ‘°—¥®”‡æ“–·∑πøî« À“°øî«Ï¢“¥∫ËÕ¬ „ÀȪ√÷°…“√È“ π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC
¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȵËÕ≈”‚æß ∑’Ë¡’°”≈—ߢ—∫ß ÿ¥‡°‘π°«Ë“ 50 W (∑—ÈߥȓπÀπÈ“·≈–¥È“πÀ≈—ß
¡’§Ë“§«“¡µÈ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂÷ß 8 Ω) ∂È“°”≈—ߢ—∫µË”°«Ë“ 50 W „Àȇª≈’ˬπ§Ë“
“Amplifier Gain” ‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π‰¡Ë„ÀÈ≈”‚æß™”√ÿ¥ (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 49 §”·π–π”)
• °“√ªÈÕß°—π°“√≈—¥«ß®√ ®–µÈÕßæ—π¢—È« “¬µ–°—Ë« ∑’ˉ¡Ë„™È·≈È«¥È«¬‡∑ ªæ—𠓬‰ø
• ·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ®–√ÈÕπ¡“°À≈—ß®“°„™È √–¡—¥√–«—ßլ˓‰ª  —¡º— ‡¡◊ËÕ∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È

•
•

Heat sink
ಞᇊ̕

·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ

Parts list for installation and connection

Έ‫ء‬ϰ༬֝௥ો‫ྒྷڅ‬έଢశ

√“¬°“√Ë«πª√–°Õ∫”À√—∫µ‘¥µ—Èß·≈–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—π

The following parts are provided for this unit.
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.

ʹጅ਎క̣ʓྒάé
ࠜച୏থ˲έщɾάྒάçቁѮոᑷു઱‫˜ڄ‬ኀੋé

 Ë«πª√–°Õ∫µËÕ‰ªπ’È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È À“°¡’ ‘Ëß„¥‰¡Ë§√∫ °√ÿ≥“µ‘¥µËÕµ—
«·∑π®”ÀπË“¬‚¥¬∑—π∑’

Main unit
̟ጅ

Power cord
ྐཔ௤૊·‫ڄ‬਎ለӧ

Remote controller
ჲ૆዇

Batteries
ྐЖ

µí«‡§√◊ËÕß

“¬‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ß

√’‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈

·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë

Flat head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
ͦᏃᒘീ (M5 x 8 mm)
 °√ŸÀ—«·∫π (M5 x 8 ¡¡)

Round head screws (M5 x 8 mm)
ฐᏃᒘീ (M5 x 8 mm)

Crimp connector
қʪ૊Ꮓ

Plate for use with a Nissan car
·‫୕̅ؠ‬ԆԾ‫ڄ‬ख

 °√ŸÀ—«°≈¡ (M5 x 8 ¡¡)

¢—È«µËÕ ”À√—∫Àπ’∫

·ºËπ ”À√—∫„™È°—∫√∂π‘  —π

1

THCT1-3_AVX710-008A.indd 1

12/6/07 3:37:44 PM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

ϰ༬(༬௏é֤‫ׇ‬ϛᄮ‫)˗ؼڸ‬

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you
should make adjustments corresponding to your specific car. If you
have any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed
by a qualified technician.

ʓࡒ‫ڄ‬࿌༱‫ڷ‬Εʄյ‫ڄܓ‬ϯ༫ദҺéѓ‫ݵ‬Ϛ࿧ᄑϯ༫इç઱ᏻ ¿“æµ—«Õ¬Ë“ßµËÕ‰ªπ’È· ¥ß∂÷ß°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß·∫∫∑—Ë«‰ª À“°§ÿ≥¡’ªô ≠À“À√◊ÕµÈÕß°“√¢ÈÕ¡Ÿ≈‡
༳घየ઱‫ڄ‬ԆԾѕቱະ‫ڄ‬ቆዱéϨ‫س‬઱Љ੕ᖅç‫׻‬ᄔ࠱Љᘕ਎ °’ˬ«°—∫™ÿ¥µ‘¥µ—Èß °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“°—∫ºŸÈ¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC ¢Õß∑Ë“πÀ√◊Õ∫√‘…—
ࢭ˔ά‫ڄ‬ཊऄçቁώ JVC ԆԾࡖᛏ˜ኀੋ‫׻‬਎ࢭ˔άաᏻ˙͌ • À“°§ÿ≥‰¡Ë¡—Ëπ„®„π«‘∏’°“√µ‘¥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕ߇’¬ßլ˓ß∂Ÿ°«‘∏’ ‚ª√¥„Àș˓ߺŸÈ™”π“≠∑”°“√µ‘¥
༿੕é
µ—È߇∑Ë“π—¡
• Ϩ‫س‬઱ʿ঻ᇧ‫׆‬Ϩщ͸ᇧϙϯ༫ʹጅçᏻቁϐत‫ڄ‬ӑிʆ࢜գ
ϯ༫é

Before installing the unit

ϰ༬͵ጆ˄‫ۯ‬

°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπÈ“ªí∑¡Ï‡¢È“)

°ËÕπ°“√µ‘¥µ—Èßµ—«‡§√◊ËÕß
• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as
instructed. If other screws are used, parts could become loose or
damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any
connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper
ventilation when installing the unit.

1

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together
with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from
your car for future use.

•
• ະ༫ʕʹጅइͫෝ‫ݝ‬ຖ‫ݣ‬Ε՟·਎క‫ڄ‬ᒘീਐéϨ‫س‬՟·մ͟
‫ڄ‬ᒘീਐçߟᘕྒά̈́঻๡ᖑ஘‫׻‬๑ᖢé
•
• ະᕬႌᒘീਐ‫׻‬ᒘनइç˝৩ʿ࠱Ꮻᐅռέщ௤૊ྐለé
•
• ະϯ༫ʕ݈ç˝৩ʿ࠱‫ۇ‬ዥռ݈ࡒ‫̣࣮ࡘڄػ‬႕‫ݠ‬ቱະ‫ڄ‬௢
ࡘé

1

‫؛‬ֈࢍʹϯ༫ϚԆԾ˖‫ࡖڄ‬ᛏԦ஀ç̣˪մ༫਎‫ށ‬é
ఖٍ:

અ(નԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ )ڄ‬༫਎‫ށ‬ϯʕʹጅ(੉ኌʓ࿌)é

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 to 6.

4

՟·ϚӴᝢ1 ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬ᒘീϯ༫ʹጅé

Install this unit using the screws removed in step 1.

̣ʓ̣ᕙΉ(Toyota) ԆԾϯ༫޴բéቁᑷു઱‫ڄ‬JVC ԆԾࡖᛏ
˜ኀੋЉᘕӦϠஅ໢é

Attach the mounting brackets (removed from the car), to this
unit (see below).

3
4

The following example is for installation in a Toyota car. For more
details, consult your JVC car audio dealer.

1 ∂Õ¥√–∫∫‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß∑’˵‘¥µ—Èß„π√∂‰«Èµ—Èß·µË·√° æ√ÈÕ¡∑—Èß·∑Ëπ√Õß

ቁੀͫۘॡ‫׿‬Љન઱ԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬ᒘീ֜ྒάਭ݈̅՟
·é

2
3

2

‡¡◊ËÕ®–∑”°“√µ‘¥µ—Èßµ—«‡§√◊ËÕß ‚ª√¥„™È °√Ÿ∑’Ë·π∫¡“µ“¡§”·π–π” À“°¬÷¥‡§√◊ËÕߥȫ¬
 °√Ÿ·∫∫Õ◊Ëπ Õ“®∑”„ÀÈ™‘Èπ Ë«πÀ≈«¡À√◊Õ‡°‘¥§«“¡‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥È
‡¡◊ËÕ®–¢—π·πËπ°√ŸÀ√◊Õ≈—°‡°≈’¬« µÈÕß√–«—߉¡Ë„ÀÈÀπ’∫“¬‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ
°√ÿ≥“µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“¡‘‰¥Èªî¥°—Èπæ—¥≈¡µ√ß·ºßÀπÈ“°“°¥È“πÀ≈—ß
‡æ◊ËÕ„ÀÈ°“√√–∫“¬Õ“°“»‡ªìπ‰ªÕ¬Ë“߇À¡“– ¡‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—Èß

੭мͫ࠱‫ྐڄ‬པ௤૊é
• ੉ኌ୶3 в6ࡗé

À¡“¬‡Àµÿ: ¥Ÿ„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“‡°Á∫ °√Ÿ·≈–
™‘Èπ Ë«π∑âÈßÀ¡¥∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ¢Õß∑Ë“π‰«È„™ÈµËÕ‰ª

2 µ‘¥·∑Ëπ√Õß (∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ) ‡¢È“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È (¥Ÿ∑’˥ȓπ≈Ë“ß)
3 ¥”‡π‘π°“√µËÕ√–∫∫‰øøÈ“∑’Ë®”‡ªìπ
•

¥ŸÀπÈ“ 3 ∂÷ß 6

4 µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È‚¥¬„™È °√Ÿ∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°„π¢—ÈπµÕπ∑ 1
µ—«Õ¬Ë“ßµËÕ‰ªπ’ȇªìπ°“√µ‘¥µ—Èß„π√∂¬πµÏ‚µ‚¬µÈ“  ”À√—∫√“¬≈–‡Õ’¬¥‡æ‘Ë¡‡µ‘¡
°√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“µ—«·∑π®”ÀπË“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ JVC

Supplied screws
਎కᒘീ

Mounting bracket removed from the car
નԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬༫਎‫ށ‬

 °√Ÿ∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß

·∑Ëπ√Õß∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ

Mounting bracket removed from the car
નԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬༫਎‫ށ‬

·∑Ëπ√Õß∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ
If necessary, restore the protruding tabs.
ࠜЉͫ࠱çቁࡌ๘༫ʕ̴ሇé

À“°®”‡ªìπ „ÀÈßÕ·ºËπ¬÷¥
Supplied screws
਎కᒘീ

Screws removed from the car in step 1
ϚӴᝢ1 નԆԾ‫؛‬ֈ‫ڄ‬ᒘീ

 °√Ÿ∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß

 °√Ÿ∑’Ë∂Õ¥ÕÕ°®“°√∂¬πµÏ„π¢—ÈπµÕπ∑’Ë 1
Select the appropriate type fitting to your
audio system space.
᎚ዪቱϐ઱‫ࡖڄ‬ᛏԦ஀ϯ༫‫༙ܓڄ෇ڏ‬é

Note:
ఖٍ:

When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the supplied screws (M5 x 8 mm). If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
ϯ༫ʹጅන༫਎‫ށ‬इçቁੀͫ՟·਎క‫ڄ‬ᒘീ(M5 x 8 mm)éࠜ՟·̍ཛ‫ڄۂ‬ᒘീçЉᘕᒘീ̈́঻๡๑ᖢʹጅé

À¡“¬‡Àµÿ:

¢≥–µ‘¥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕß∫π·∑Ëπ√Õß ¢Õ„ÀÈ¥Ÿ„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“„™È °√Ÿ∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß (M5 x 8 ¡¡) À“°„™È °√Ÿ¬“«°«Ë“∑’Ë√–∫ÿÕ“®∑”„Àȇ§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬‰¥È

‡≈◊Õ°·∫∫∑’ˇÀ¡“– ¡°—∫æ◊Èπ∑’Ë√–∫∫‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß

When installing the unit in a Nissan car
ັϰ༬͵ጆ‫ୖ̆ء‬ԇԿई

‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕß„π√∂π‘  —π
Plate for use with a Nissan car
·‫୕̅ؠ‬ԆԾ‫ڄ‬ख

·ºËπ ”À√—∫„™È°—∫√∂π‘  —π

Required space for the monitor ejection
‫؜‬։ܴ࿳‫؀‬ᄕ˄‫෈ڐ‬

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject when in use.
અʹጅϯ༫Ϛ˲‫ؠ‬30˚ ‫ڄ‬Դܾç઱ͫෝШᅱռܳ࿲̣̈́Ϛ՟·इᅫ̳é

æ◊Èπ∑’Ë«Ë“ßÀ’˵ÈÕß°“√ ”À√—∫¥—π®Õ¿“æÕÕ°

100

µ‘¥µ—Èß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑’Ë¡ÿ¡µË”°«Ë“ 30˚ ‚¥¬§”π÷ß∂÷߇«≈“®Õ¡Õ𑇵Õ√Ï¥’¥ÕÕ°„π√–À«Ë“ß°“√„™È

30˚

160

90.5

Unit: mm
వт: mm (ଔТ)
ÀπË«¬: ¡¡

2

THCT1-3_AVX710-008A.indd 2

12/6/07 3:38:11 PM

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

ྑཕ௥ો

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.

޴Վ̊ഠཔçܿᙯϚϯ༫ʹጅ˃‫ۮ‬ç؋ළྐЖ‫࠷ڄ‬๨çՓӕ‫׿‬Љ ‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π°“√‡°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√ ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȪ≈¥¢—È«·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë≈∫ÕÕ°
ྐཔ௲௤૊Ϧé
·≈È«®÷ßµËÕ “¬‰ø°ËÕ𵑥µ—È߇§√◊ËÕß
• ϰ༬ҭ୙݉ੁͬઆ͵ጆ‫څ‬Ϛሉࡍ๙ોгԿԾê
• µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“‰¥È‡¥‘𠓬¥‘πµËÕ√–À«Ë“߇§√◊ËÕß°—∫µ—«∂—ß

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car
body may be different in color.

°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡‚¥¬„™È‰øøÈ“

√∂¬πµÏ„À¡Ë·≈È«À≈—ß®“°µ‘¥µ—Èß

ોሉ‫ۯ‬: ̥அᐓ‫ފ‬ԆԾ˖‫ڄ‬ለཔéʿ͸ᇧ‫ڄ‬૊ለ๡዗ࠓʹጅᘷࡌ
๑ᖢé
ྐʍለ‫˺ڄ‬ለ֜ԾԽ‫ڄ‬௤૊዇˺ለϚᖄиʕ̈́঻Љ‫׿‬ʿψé

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified 1 ՜ຖʓ࿌‫׿‬Ε˃ЎҺ௤૊ྐ຀ለ‫ڄ‬ᖄи዗ለé
in the illustration below.
2 અ˭ለ‫ྐڄ‬ለ௤૊৹գé
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 ఛ݈çӕ਎ለӧ‫ڄ‬಍Ꮓ಍Ϛʹጅʕé
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

°ËÕ•∑”°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥‘•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÏլ˓ߕ–¡—¥•–«—լ˓„ÀȺ‘¥æ•
“¥„•°“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕ™ÿ¥ª•–°Õ•™ÿ¥•’ °“•‡™•ËÕ¡µËÕº‘¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„Àȇ°‘¥§«“¡‡ ’¬À“
¬•È“¬·•ß°—•™ÿ¥ª•–
°Õ••’ȉ¥È“•µ–°—Ë«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕÿª°••ÏµËÕ‡™•ËÕ¡®“°µ—«• ß••Õ“®¡’ ∑’Ë ‰¡Ë‡À¡•Õ•°—•

1 µËÕ “¬‰øﵓ¡≈”¥—∫∑’Ë√–∫ÿ„π√Ÿª¥È“π≈Ë“ß
2 ‡™◊ÕË ¡µËÕ°—∫“¬Õ“°“»
3  ÿ¥∑È“¬ µËÕ Ë«π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥‘𠓬‰ø‡¢È“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π’È

Rear ground terminal
ʹጅ݈ࠌ૊ϙၷʪ

®ÿ¥‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ “¬¥‘π¥È“πÀ≈—ß
REVERSE
GEAR
SIGNAL

Fan
ࡘ࣮

æ—¥≈¡
See each diagram on page 4 to 6.
੉ኌ୶ 4 в 6 ࡗʕ‫ڄ‬࿌‫ڷ‬é
¥Ÿ·ºπº—ߵ˓ßÊ „πÀπÈ“ 4 ∂÷ß 6

15 A fuse
15 A ۘᎳീ
øî« Ï¢π“¥ 15 A

*1 Not included for this unit
*1 ʿᎲʹጅಏա
*1 ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È

3
Black
෨и

*

1

*1

To metallic body or chassis of the car
૊в‫ہ‬ᚙᝂ‫׻‬ԆԾ‫נ‬ᇟ

 ’¥”

Ignition switch
ᓭ̑ළᘕ

«‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥

µËÕ°—∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√◊Õ‡™´ ‘¢Õß√∂¬πµú

2
Yellow *2
෦и *2
 ’’‡À≈◊Õß *2

1

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖‫ۈڄ‬ᚙၷʪçۘᎳീవ˔‫ؠ‬Ծ༫ྐЖߟ௤૊
(·‫ؠ‬अཔᓭ̑ළᘕ)(‫ ׆ݔ‬12 V)
µµËÕ°—∫¢—È«∑’Ë¡’°√–·‰øøÈ“„π·ºßøî«Ï ´÷ËßµËÕ°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµ ( ‚¥¬‰¡ËµÈÕß„™È« ‘∑™Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥)
12 ‚«≈∑ϧß∑’)Ë

Fuse block
ۘᎳീవ˔

·ºßøî« 

Red
߹и

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖‫ۈڄ‬ᚙၷʪ

 ’·¥ß

µËÕ°—∫¢—È« Ë«πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßøî« 
Blue
ᕇи
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
૊вбੂ˭ለ(ࠜЉ༫௎)(ఛʨ250 mA)
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øøÈ“Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘ À“°¡’ (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 250 mA)

 ’øÈ“
(POWER ANTENNA)

Blue with white stripe
ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ

 ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
power cannot be turned on.

(REMOTE OUT)

*2 ʹጅ͵ϯ༫इçනмʳѕ‫ٶ‬ٜᐓ‫ۮ˃ފ‬ç
 ͫෝӕ௠዗ለ૊ʕçѴ۱ʿ঻ළ૧ྐ຀é

Orange with white stripe
ዻиઘЉΎи଍ঙ

*2

 ’ È¡·∂∫¢“«

°ËÕπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È°ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µ‘¥µ—Èß
µÈÕßµËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«π’È°ËÕπ ¡‘©–π—Èπ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ªî¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥È

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
௤૊в͏ɾ‫ࡖށ‬ᛏ௎క‫ڄ‬ჲ૆዗ለ(ఛʨ 200 mA)
µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫Õª°√≥ÏÕË◊π (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 200 mA)

To car light control switch
௤૊вԆԾԾጜ૆վළᘕ

Brown
ሶи

(ILLUMINATION)

 «‘µ´Ï§«∫§ÿ¡‰ø¢Õß√∂¬πµ√Ï
To cellular phone system
௤૊в‫༼ྐੂޟ‬Ԧ஀

 ’πÈ”µ“≈
(TEL MUTING)

µËÕ°—∫‚∑√»—æ∑χ§≈◊ËÕπ∑

Light green
ଠႋи

To parking brake (see diagram Å on page 4.)
૊в˾۫Ծ዗ለ (੉ኌ୶ 4 ࡗʕ‫ڄ‬࿌‫ ڷ‬Åé)
µËÕ°—∫‡∫√°¡◊Õ (¥Ÿ·ºπº—ß Å „πÀπÈ“ 4)
Crimp connector
қʪ૊Ꮓ

 ’‡¢’¬«ÕËÕπ
(PARKING BRAKE)

¢—È«µËÕ ”À√—∫Àπ’∫

White with black stripe
ΎиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

 ’¢“«·∂∫¥”

White
Ύи

Gray with black stripe
НиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

 ’¢“«

Left speaker (front)
ͣಙᑵ዇(‫ۮ‬໯)
≈”‚æß´È“¬ (ÀπÈ“)

 ’‡∑“·∂∫¥”

Gray
Ни

Green with black stripe
ႋиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

 ’‡¢’¬«·∂∫¥”

 ’‡∑“

Right speaker (front)
͆ಙᑵ዇(‫ۮ‬໯)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (ÀπÈ“)

Green
ႋи

Purple with black stripe
ാиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

 ’‡¢’¬«

Left speaker (rear)
ͣಙᑵ዇(݈໯)
≈”‚æß´È“¬ (À≈—ß)

 ’¡Ë«ß·∂∫¥”

Purple
ാи

 ’¡Ë«ß

Right speaker (rear)
͆ಙᑵ዇(݈໯)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈—ß)

3

THCT1-3_AVX710-008A.indd 3

12/6/07 3:38:19 PM

ENGLISH

ˁ̂

‰∑¬

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

ྑກ֝ಚᑶወોሉٍิ՗ො:
• ˞ˢӖಚᑶወዘሉોᏄોгྑЗèѵ۲͵ጆઆ๢ᘸࡍ๒ᖣê
• Ϛӕಙᑵ዇዗ለ૊Ꮓ૊вಙᑵ዇˃‫ۮ‬çᐓ‫ފ‬઱ԆԾʕ‫ڄ‬ಙᑵ዇
ለཔé

•

A Connecting the parking brake lead

௥ોг˿۬Կዘሉ

µËÕ “¬‡∫√°¡◊Õ

અ˾۫Ծ዗ለ௤૊вԾ˖‫۫˾ڄ‬ԾԦ஀é

µËÕ “¬‡∫√°¡◊Õ°—∫√–∫∫‡∫√°¡◊Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµ

Connect the parking brake lead to the parking brake system
built in the car.

¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß  ”À√—∫°“√µËÕ·À≈Ë߮˓¬°”≈—ß·≈–≈”‚æß:
լ˓µËÕ “¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢È“°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’Ë√∂¬πµÏ ¡‘©–π—Èπ
™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥È√—∫§«“¡‡ ’¬À“¬¡“°
• °ËÕπ∑’Ë®–µËÕ“¬µ–°—Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°—∫≈”‚æß
„Àȵ√«®Õ∫°“√‡¥‘𓬉ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧÿ≥„Àȇ√’¬∫√ÈÕ¬‡’¬°ËÕπ

a
Parking brake lead (light green)
˾۫Ծ዗ለ(ଠႋи)
 “¬‡∫√°¡◊Õ ( ’‡¢’¬«ÕËÕπ)

Crimp connector
қʪ૊Ꮓ

Parking brake
˾۫Ծ

¢—È«µËÕ ”À√—∫Àπ’∫

‡∫√°¡◊Õ
To metallic body or chassis of the car
૊в‫ہ‬ᚙᝂ‫׻‬ԆԾ‫נ‬ᇟ

µËÕ°—∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√◊Õ‡™´ ‘¢Õß√∂¬πµú

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
˾۫Ծළᘕ(тʝԾ˖)
 «‘µ™Ï‡∫√°¡◊Õ (¿“¬„π√∂)

A Connecting an external amplifier / ௥ો͚௱̸ୋ‫؟‬ʩወ / °“√µËÕ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï¿“¬πÕ°
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• You can supply the power to the amplifier by connecting the
remote leads (blue with white stripe) of this unit to the amplifier.
(To connect other equipment using the remote leads, Yconnectors need to be separately purchased.)
• Disconnect the speakers from the unit, and connect them to the
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of the unit unused.
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio
signals only to the external amplifier to get clear sound and to
prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page 49 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.

઱̣̈́௤૊̷୊‫؞‬ʨ዇գ˥ঠ઱‫ڄ‬ԆԾࡖᛏԦ஀é
• ઱̣̈́અʹጅ‫ڄ‬ჲ૆዗ለ(ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ) ௤૊ռ̷୊‫؞‬ʨ
዇çᕉЏ޴մաྐé
(࠱՟·ჲ૆዗ለ௤૊մ̧௎కçᄔవጤᒯ໯ Y ‫ܓ‬௤૊዗ለé)
• અಙᑵ዇֜ʹጅ؋ළçι௤૊ʕ̷୊‫؞‬ʨ዇éઅʹጅ‫ڄ‬ಙᑵ዇
዗ለ‫؞‬໯ʿ·é
• ઱̣̈́ᘕ௻˖̷ܿ୊‫؞‬ʨ዇çઅࡖᏁ‫༙ۑ‬෮෭৿ռ͙૊̷୊‫؞‬
ʨ዇çનЩદռଡಣ‫ࡖڄ‬቙çՓՎ̊ʹጅ˖௰ጻ႞ᇊඹé੉ኌ
՟·ი‫ا‬ए‫ ୶ڄ‬49 ࡗé

‡æ◊ËÕ§ÿ≥¿“懠’¬ß∑’Ë¥’¢÷Èπ ∑Ë“π “¡“√∂µËÕ·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√χ¢È“°—∫
√–∫∫‡§√◊ËÕ߇ ’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ‰¥È
• ∑Ë“π “¡“√∂®Ë“¬‰ø„ÀÈ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ω¥È¥È«¬°“√µËÕ “¬√’‚¡∑ ( ’øÈ“·∂∫¢“«)
¢Õ߇§√◊ËÕß°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï (À“°µÈÕß°“√µËÕ°—∫Õÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊Ëπ¥È«¬°“√„™È “¬√’‚¡∑
µÈÕß´◊ÈÕ¢—È«µËÕ√Ÿªµ—« Y ·¬°µË“ßÀ“°)
• ∂Õ¥ “¬≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°‡§√◊ËÕß·≈È«µËÕ°—∫·Õ¡ª≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï ª≈ËÕ¬ “¬≈”‚æß∑‘È߉«È
‰¡ËµÈÕß„™È
•  “¡“√∂ªî¥ «‘µ™Ï·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï„πµ—« ·≈È« Ëß —≠≠“≥‡ ’¬ß‰ª¬—ß·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï
¿“¬πÕ°‚¥¬‡©æ“– ‡æ◊ËÕ„Àȉ¥È‡ ’¬ß∑’˧¡™—¥·≈–ªÈÕß°—π‰¡Ë„Àȇ°‘¥§«“¡√ÈÕπ
 – ¡¢÷Èπ¿“¬„π™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ ¥Ÿ∑’ËÀπÈ“ 49 ¢Õߧ”·π–π”„π°“√„™È

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-‫ܓ‬௤૊዗ለ(ʿᎲʹጅಏա)
¢ÈÕµËÕ√Ÿªµ—« Y ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’È)

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
ჲ૆዗ለ(ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ)
“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°• ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«)
Remote lead
ჲ૆዗ለ

“¬µ–°—Ë«•–¬–‰°•

To the remote lead of other equipment
௤૊в͏ɾ‫ࡖށ‬ᛏ௎క‫ڄ‬ჲ૆዗ለ
JVC Amplifier
JVC ̸ୋ‫؟‬ʩወ
‡§√◊ËÕß∫¬“¬‡ ◊¬ß JVC

µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫Õª°√≥ÏÕË◊π
Rear speakers
݈໯ಙᑵ዇

≈”‚æßÀ≈—ß

Front speakers
‫ۮ‬໯ಙᑵ዇

≈”‚æßÀπÈ“

*3 Firmly attach the ground lead to the metallic body or to the
chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated
with paint, remove the paint before attaching the lead). Failure
to do so may cause damage to the unit.

*3 અϙለႩ‫ہ‬ᚙԾᝂ‫ږ׻‬ԆԾ‫נ‬ᇟႌં௤૊ç௤૊ளᏻ༳ԅЉூ *3 µËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π„ÀÈ·πËπ‡¢“°—∫µ—«∂—߇À≈Á° À√◊Õµ—«∂—ß√∂˙µ√ß Ë«π ∑’ˉ¡Ë¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫
ٛွᕒႵ(Ϩ‫س‬ʵดʕٛွçϚ௤૊ྐለ‫ۮ‬çઅٛွս̓)é
(À“°¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫Õ¬ŸË „ÀÈ¢Ÿ§¥’ÕÕ°°ËÕπ °ËÕπµËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π) À“°‰¡ËªØ‘∫—
Ϩ‫س‬ʿ௠ᆟਭç̈́঻๡๑ᖢʹጅé

µ‘µ“¡§”·π–π”π’È ‡§√◊ËÕßÕ“®™”√ÿ¥À√◊Õ‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥

4

THCT4-6_AVX710-008A.indd 4

12/6/07 3:38:52 PM

B Connections for external component playback / ௥ોս͚ો௱έ / °“√‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ ”À√—∫°“√‡≈ËπÕÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°

Reverse lamp
࡬݈ጜ

‰ø∂Õ¬À≈—ß
Extension lead (not supplied)
‫ۂע‬ለ (ԅЉ਎క)

AV amplifier or decoder
AV ̷୊‫؞‬ʨ዇‫׻‬ᙲᇫ዇

 “¬‰øµËÕæË«ß ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)

Crimp connector (not supplied)*5
қʪ૊Ꮓ (ԅЉ਎క)*5

¢—È«µËÕ ”À√—∫Àπ’∫ ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)*5

To reverse lamp
௤૊в࡬Ծ‫༙ۑ‬ጜ

·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï AV À√◊Õµ—«∂Õ¥√À— 
To car battery
௤૊вԆԾྐЖ

§ËÕ°í∫·∫•‡•Õ√’Ë√∂¬π•Ï
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
ᆚтγង (ԅЉ਎క)

µËÕ°—∫‰ø —≠≠“≥‡«≈“∂Õ¬À≈—ß
Reverse lamp lead*4
࡬Ծ‫༙ۑ‬ጜ዗ለ*4

 “¬‰ø∑’Ë ‰ø —≠≠“≥‡«≈“∂Õ¬À≈—ß*4

 “¬„¬·°È«π”· ß·∫∫¥‘®‘µÕ≈
( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)

Video cord (not supplied)
ඁᏁྐង(ԅЉ਎క)

«’¥’‚Õ ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)

Audio/video cord (not supplied)
ࡖᏁ/ඁᏁྐង(ԅЉ਎క)

 “¬ÕÕ¥‘‚Õ/ «’¥’‚Õ ( ‰¡Ë ‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“æ√ÈÕ¡‡§√◊ËÕß)
External monitor
͙૊᜼Ε዇

¡Õ𑇵Õ√Ï¿“¬πÕ°
Camcorder, Navigation System, etc.
᚝Ꭸߟጅè዗ৃԦ஀çമ

°≈ÈÕß«‘¥’‚Õ √–∫∫π”∑“ß œ≈œ

Rear view camera KV-CM1*6
݈ඁຖྰጅ KV-CM1*6
°≈ÈÕß¡ÕßÀ≈—ß KV-CM1*6

*4 Required only when connecting a rear view camera to
VIDEO IN terminal.
*5 Refer to a in diagram A on page 4.
*6 Set “AV Input” setting to “Camera” when using (see page 47 of
the INSTRUCTIONS).

*4 ෮࿬ᏻ௤૊݈ඁຖྰጅв VIDEO IN ಍Ꮓइé
*4
*5 ੉ኌ a Ϛ࿌ A ‫ ୶ڄ‬4 ࡗé
*5
*6 ՟·इçઅ “Camera” ௎‫“ ޴׆‬AV Input” (੉ኌ՟·ი‫ا‬ए‫* ୶ڄ‬6
47 ࡗ)é

„™È‡©æ“–‡¡◊ËÕµËÕ°≈ÈÕß¡ÕßÀ≈—ß°—∫™ËÕß VIDEO IN
¥Ÿ a „π·ºπº—ß A „πÀπÈ“ 4
µ—Èß “AV Input” ‡¢È“°—∫ “Camera” ‡¡◊ËÕµÈÕß°“√„™Èß“π
(¥ŸÀπÈ“ 47 §”·π–π”)

5

THCT4-6_AVX710-008A.indd 5

12/6/07 3:39:18 PM

C Connections to the CD changer jack / ௥ોսCDಘၫጆಎ˲ / °“√‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫À—«µËÕ´’¥’‡™π‡®Õ√Ï
When connecting the external components, refer also to the
manuals supplied for the components and adapter.

௤૊͙૊௰άइç͏ቁ੉ኌ௰ά˪ᕢಗ዇˃՟·˾̰é

‡¡◊ËÕ‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕÕÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° „ÀÈ¥Ÿ¢ÈÕ¡Ÿ≈‡°’ˬ«°—∫Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°·≈–Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï
®“°§ŸË¡◊Õ∑’Ë„ÀÈ¡“¥È«¬

ʯ˼:
௥ો͚ો௱έ˄‫ۯ‬èቂᇨۙᘖ௼͵ጆê

CAUTION:
Before connecting the external components, make sure that
the unit is turned off.
You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer
jack.
JVC component

Model name

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

Portable audio player with
line output jacks
Portable audio player with
3.5 mm stereo mini jack

Adapter
Bluetooth adapter
Interface adapter
for iPod
Line input adapter
AUX input adapter

°ËÕπ®–‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ° °√ÿ≥“µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË „®«Ë“ªî¥‡§√◊ËÕßÕ¬ŸË

઱̣̈́અ̣ʓ JVC ௰ά௤૊ռ CD ಗၪ዇಍˱é
JVC ௱έ

‫ܔ‬༚ϐၴ

CD ಗၪ዇ (CD-CH)

CH-X1500çമ

∑Ë“π “¡“√∂‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ JVC µËÕ‰ªπ’ȇ¢È“°—∫™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫´’¥’‡™π‡®Õ√Ï
 Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ JVC
™◊ËÕ√ÿËπ
´’¥’‡™π‡®Õ√Ï (CD-CH)
CH-X1500 œ≈œ

઱ʛ̈́௫ཫύၲ JVC ᕢಗ዇௤૊̣ʓ௰άé
• ௤૊ለ̈́঻ᄔ࠱వጤᒯ໯é

You can also connect the following components through the various
JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
Component
Bluetooth device
iPod

¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß:

Model name
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57

௱έ
ᕇ̖༫໯
iPod
ઘለཔ᎔̳಍˱‫̈́ڄ‬᚞Ϸ
ࡖᏁᆑ‫؞‬዇
ઘ 3.5 ଔТਁіࡖᛏ಍˱
‫̈́ڄ‬᚞ϷࡖᏁᆑ‫؞‬዇

ᕣಘወ
ᕇ̖ᕢಗ዇
iPod ˒ࡒᕢಗ዇
ለཔ᎔ʈᕢಗ዇

‫ܔ‬༚ϐၴ
KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57

AUX ᎔ʈᕢಗ዇

KS-U58

‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫µËÕ‰ªπ’Ⱥ˓πÕ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï·∫∫µË“ßÊ ¢Õß JVC ‰¥È‡™Ëπ°—π
Õ“®µÈÕß´◊ÈÕ “¬‡™◊ËÕ¡µËյ˓ßÀ“°

•

 Ë«πª√–°Õ∫

Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï

™◊ËÕ√ÿËπ

Õÿª°√≥Ï∫≈Ÿ∑Ÿ∏

Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï∫≈Ÿ∑Ÿ∏
Õ‘π‡∑Õ√χø 
Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï ”À√—∫√ÿËπ

KS-BTA200

iPod

KS-PD100

iPod
ະ௤૊Ϡࡴ௰άइ (ఛϠð2)çܿᙯ઱՜ʓ̄‫׿‬Εрᑷ௰άé

KS-U58

When connecting more than one component (maximum: two),
it is recommended that you connect the components in series as
explained below.

‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ‡æ≈ß·∫∫æ°æ“
æ√ÈÕ¡¢—È«µËÕ Line Output
‡§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ‡æ≈ß·∫∫æ°æ“
æ√ÈÕ¡™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫·∫∫ 3.5 ¡¡.

Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï

KS-U57

Line Input

Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√Ï

KS-U58

AUX Input

Stereo Mini

‡¡◊ËÕ‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫¡“°°«Ë“Àπ÷Ëß™‘Èπ ( Ÿß ÿ¥ Õß™‘Èπ) ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀÈ∑Ë“π‡™◊ËÕ¡
µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫·∫∫Õπÿ°√¡µ“¡§”Õ∏‘∫“¬¢È“ß≈Ë“ß

When connecting two components in series
ັсᑸճࡵ௱έई

‡¡◊ËÕ‡™◊ËÕ¡µËÕ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ Õß™‘Èπ·∫∫Õπÿ°√¡
To disconnect the connector / ‫؛‬ළ௤૊዇ / ª≈¥¢—È«µËÕ

Hold the connector top tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).
ӟႌ௤૊዇ʕ௰ ( 1 )ç೸݈અ˃‫ (̳؁‬2 )é
®—∫¥È“π∫π¢Õߢ—È«µËÕ„ÀÈ·πËπ ( 1 ) ®“°π—Èπ®÷ߥ—ßÕÕ° ( 2 )

CD changer jack
CDಗၪ዇಍˱

™ËÕ߇ ’¬∫µËÕ¢Õ߇§√◊ËÕ߇≈Ëπ´’¥ CD
A KS-BTA200
B*7 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.

iPod ‫ݵ‬Apple Inc. (ᙧ‫ )͌˙س‬Ϛࠀ੢˪մ̧੢ࣁٌ̰‫ੋڄ‬ᆤé

iPod ‡ªìπ‡§√◊ËÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§È“¢Õß Apple Inc. ´÷Ëß®¥∑–‡∫’¬π°“√§È“„πª√–‡∑»
 À√—∞Õ‡¡√‘°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»Õ◊ËπÊ

*7 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly
(see page 47 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

*7 ࠱՟·௠՗௰άçቁ͸ᇧ௎‫͙׆‬௰᎔ʈ(੉ኌ՟·ი‫ا‬ए‫ڄ‬
୶ 47 ࡗ)é

*7 „π°“√„™È Ë«πª√–°Õ∫‡À≈Ë“π’È „Àȵ—Èߧ˓°“√√—∫ —≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥Ï¿“¬πÕ°„ÀÈ∂Ÿ°µÈÕß
(¥ŸÀπÈ“ 47 §”·π–π”)

TROUBLESHOOTING

‫ݮ‬ᄑ૜ਜ

°“√µ√«®Õ∫ª—≠À“¢—¥¢ÈÕß

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• ۙᎴുጜᔄê
* ᐓ‫߹ފ‬и዗ለ૊Ꮓ֜෨и዗ለ૊Ꮓ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊᙮͸ᇧî

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

• ྑກˀ়ો௣ê
* ᐓ‫ފ‬෦и዗ለ૊Ꮓ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊ʕî

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• ಚᑶወԆЊᑶࡗê
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇᎔̳዗ለ૊Ꮓ‫ݵ‬Ѵഠཔî

• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• ᑶࡗ͜ॳê
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊ϙî
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇‫( ͣڄ‬L) ç͆ (R) ၷʪ‫࠷ڄ‬๨ī–Ĭ‫ݵ‬Ѵθψ૊
ϙî

• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
• Unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

•
*
•
*
•
*
•
*
*

• ዇ࡗʹᓿࡗᛐê
* ݈૊ϙၷʪႩԾԽ‫ݵ‬Ѵ՟·ཛഠ֜ཛ۹‫ྐڄ‬ለ௤૊î

•
*

• ͵ጆഛᇋê
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ‫ݵ‬Ѵ૊ϙî
* ᐓ‫ފ‬ಙᑵ዇‫( ͣڄ‬L) ç͆ (R) ၷʪ‫࠷ڄ‬๨ī–Ĭ‫ݵ‬Ѵθψ૊
ϙî

•
*
*

• ͵ጆҭθˀ়͹ᇨይіê
* ઱ЉԅЉࡌ௎ʹጅî

•
*

øî« ú¢“¥
¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’¥”·≈– ’·¥ßլ˓ß∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡ò
‰¡Ë “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥È
¡’°“√‡™◊ËÕ¡ “¬µ–°—Ë« ’‡À≈◊ÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡ò
‰¡Ë¡’‡ ’¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß
 “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
‡ ’¬ß‡æ’Ȭπ
 “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
 “¬¢—È«≈∫¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬ (L) ·≈–¢«“ (R) µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
‡ ’¬ß√∫°«π
¡’°“√„™ È“¬ —ÈπÊ À√◊ÕÀπ“Ê µËÕ®“°‡§√◊ËÕß ò«π∑’˵‘¥µ—Èß ‰«È∫πæ◊Èπ¥È“πÀ≈—ß
°—∫µ—«∂—ß√∂¬πµÏÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√ÈÕπ¢÷Èπ
 “¬µ–°—Ë« Ë«π∑’ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë
 “¬¢—È«≈∫¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬ (L) ·≈–¢«“ (R) µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë
‡§√◊ËÕ߉¡Ë∑”ß“π‡≈¬
‰¥È∑”°“√√’‡´Áµ‡§√◊ËÕßÀ√◊Õ¬—ß

6

THCT4-6_AVX710-008A.indd 6

12/6/07 3:39:23 PM

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

KW-AVX716
KW-AVX710

ENGLISH

ALAT PENERIMA DVD
DENGAN MONITOR

KW-AVX716
KW-AVX710

INDONESIA

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.

INSTRUCTIONS
BUKU PETUNJUK
LVT1780-004A
[UN]

Cover_KW-AVX710UN.indd 2

07.12.17 5:19:29 PM

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1.
2.
3.
4.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Cautions on the monitor:

WARNINGS:
To prevent accidents and damage

• The monitor built in this unit has been produced
with high precision, but it may have some
ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not
malfunction.
• Do not expose the monitor to direct sunlight.
• Do not operate the touch panel using a ball-point
pen or similar tool with the sharp tip.
Touch the buttons on the touch panel with your
finger directly (if you are wearing a glove, take it
off).
• When the temperature is very cold or very hot...
– Chemical changes occur inside, causing
malfunction.
– Pictures may not appear clearly or may move
slowly. Pictures may not be synchronized with
the sound or picture quality may decline in
such environments.

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and
gearshift lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

[European Union only]

2

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 2

07.12.17 5:02:31 PM

How to reset your unit

INTRODUCTION
Playable disc types .......................... 4
Basic operations—
Monitor panel/touch panel............ 5
Basic operations—
Remote controller (RM-RK252) ...... 6

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc
ENTER

NO EJECT?
EMERGENCY EJECT?

3

OPERATIONS
Before operating the unit ................ 8
Common operations ........................ 9
Listening to the radio ...................... 10
Disc operations ................................ 13

Exit

Back

2
1

at the same time

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Bluetooth® operations—
Cellular phone/audio player .......... 27
Listening to the CD changer .............. 34
Listening to the iPod........................ 36
Using other external components ..... 38

1

• If this does not work, reset the unit.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

SETTINGS
Sound equalization .......................... 41
Assigning titles to the sources .......... 42
Menu operations ............................. 43

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

REFERENCES
Maintenance ................................... 52
More about this unit ........................ 53
Troubleshooting .............................. 60
Specifications .................................. 64

3

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 3

ENGLISH

Contents

INTRODUCTION
07.12.17 5:02:35 PM

ENGLISH

Playable disc types
Disc type

Recording format, file type, etc.

DVD

DVD Video (Region Code: 3)*1

Playable

DVD Audio
DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
DVD Video
(DVD-R/-RW*2, +R/+RW*3)
DVD-VR
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
• DVD-VR
JPEG
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/
MP3/WMA/WAV
WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level 1,
AAC
level 2, Romeo, Joliet
MPEG4
DVD+VR
DVD-RAM
Dual Disc
DVD side
Non-DVD side
CD/VCD
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)/DTS-CD
VCD (Video CD)
SVCD (Super Video CD)
CD-ROM
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
MP3/WMA/WAV
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo, JPEG
Joliet
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
AAC
MPEG4
*1 If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).
DVD-RW dual layer discs are not playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs.
+RW double layer discs are not playable.
Caution for DualDisc playback
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
4

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 4

07.12.17 5:02:36 PM

Display <AV Menu> screen. ☞ page 43
Display <Source Menu> screen. ☞ page 9
Display and erase the Short Cut windows.
Available functions vary among the sources. For details, see each source operation
section.

Adjust the volume.
Change the display information.
Change the sources. ☞ page 9
Display <AV Menu> screen.
☞ page 43

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Monitor panel/touch panel

Remote sensor

• Display <Open/Tilt> menu.
• Eject the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
menu. [Hold]
• Close the monitor panel when <Open/Tilt>
menu is displayed.

• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power. [Hold]
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

<Open/Tilt> menu

Reset the unit.
• Use only when the internal system malfunctions.
•
•
•
•
•
•

• In the explanation, buttons on the touch panel
are indicated inside [ ].
• For details on the touch panel operations, see
each source operation section.
5

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 5

[OPEN]: Open the monitor panel.
[EJECT]: Eject the disc.
[CLOSE]: Close the monitor panel.
[TILT +/–]: Tilt the monitor panel.
[Exit]: Erase this screen.
Shaded icons cannot be used.

INTRODUCTION
07.12.17 5:02:37 PM

ENGLISH

Basic operations — Remote controller (RM-RK252)
Installing the battery

Main elements and features
R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace both batteries.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

1

• Turns on the power.
• Attenuates the sound if the power is on.
• Turns off the power if pressed and held (while
the power is on).

2

• Reverse search
• Reverse slow motion (during pause)

3

Adjusts the volume level.
• Does not function as “2nd VOL.”

4

• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

5

• DVD/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.

6

Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “ .“

6

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 6

07.12.17 5:02:37 PM

Functions with other buttons (see i and o).

8

Changes the display information.

9

For disc operations:
• 5 / ∞:
DVD: Selects the title.
DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
Other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders.
• 4 / ¢:
– Press briefly: reverse skip/forward skip
– Press and hold: reverse search/forward
search
For FM/AM operations:
• 5 / ∞: Selects the preset stations.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for stations.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For Apple iPod operations:
• ∞: Starts playback/pauses
• 5: Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞
/ 4 / ¢ work as menu selecting
buttons).
In the main menu:
• 5: Returns to the previous menu.
• ∞: Confirms the selection.
• 4/¢
– Press briefly: Selects an item.
– Press and hold: Skips ten items at a time.
For Bluetooth operations:
• 4 / ¢: reverse skip/forward skip (for
audio player operation)

p

• Forward search
• Forward slow motion (during pause)

q

Selects the source.

w

For disc operations:
Starts playback/pauses.
For Bluetooth operations:
• Answers incoming calls.
• Starts playback/pauses. (for audio player
operation).

e

Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.

r

“TUNER”: Selects the bands.
“DISC”: Stops playback.
“Bluetooth PHONE”: Ends the call.
“Bluetooth AUDIO”: Starts playback/pauses.

t

VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

y

• DVD Video/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.

u

• Makes selection/settings.
• @ / #: Skips back or forward by five minutes
for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2.
• % / fi: Changes discs for “CD-CH.”

ENGLISH

7

i*3 • Switches number entry mode for “DISC.”
• Erases the misentry after entering a wrong
number.
• Does not function as “SURROUND.”
o*3 Number buttons
• Enters numbers.
• “TUNER”: Selects the preset station directly.
*1 Functions as a number button only (see o ).
*2 Not used for this unit.
*3 Functions when pressed with SHIFT.

7

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 7

INTRODUCTION
07.12.17 5:02:38 PM

ENGLISH

Before operating the unit
@

You can cancel the demonstration on the screen and set
the clock.
• Non-available items will be shaded on the AV Menu
screens.

Set the clock settings.
Moves to the preceding menu page

Indication language:
In this manual, English indications are used
for purpose of explanation. You can select the
indication language. (☞ page 45)
Moves to the succeeding menu page

~

Turn on the power.

Ÿ

Display <AV Menu> screen.

!

Display <Setup> menu.

¤
⁄

Finish the procedure.

Cancel the demonstration.
Select <Off>.

Return to the previous screen.

8

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 8

07.12.17 5:02:38 PM

Selecting the playback source

ENGLISH

Common operations
Changing the display
information

• Available sources depend on the external
components you have connected, media you have
attached, and the <Input> settings you have made
(☞ page 47).

• Available display information varies among the
playback sources.

On the monitor panel only:

On the touch panel:

• Each time you press DISP, the display changes to
show the various information.
Ex. When the playback source is a DivX disc.
Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen
Exit

On the monitor panel:
Track list

Clock time in large numbers

TUNER = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD) =CD-CH, iPod, or
EXT-IN = Bluetooth PHONE = Bluetooth AUDIO
= AV-IN = (back to the beginning)
Navigation screen
(When <Navigation> is
selected for <AV Input>)
(☞ page 47)

• You cannot select these sources if they are not ready.

Back to the beginning

9

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 9

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:02:39 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the radio
Preset no.

Assigned station name (☞ page 42). If no name is assigned,
the frequency of the station is displayed instead.

Band
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
☞ page 11,
Tuner indicators

☞ page 9

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ
!

Press [BAND].

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In
the explanation,
they are
indicated inside
[ ].

Press [4] or [¢] to search for a station—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.
• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

3

When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
1

Press [AV MENU].

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• The MONO indicator lights up.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

Press [Mode].

To restore stereo effect, select <Off>.

10

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 10

07.12.17 5:02:40 PM

FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)

This function works only for FM bands. Once you have
activated this function (selected <Local>), it always
works when searching for FM stations.

1

This function works only for FM bands.
You can preset six stations for each band.

Press [AV MENU].

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

ENGLISH

Tuning in to stations with
sufficient signal strength

Press [AV MENU].

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Mode].

2

3

Press [Mode].

3

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be
detected.
• The DX indicator goes off, then the LO indicator
lights up.
• You can also change <IF Band Width> setting
(for details, ☞ page 47).
<IF Band Width> menu can be accessed by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then..
☞ page 41

11

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 11

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:02:40 PM

ENGLISH

Manual presetting

Selecting a preset station

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number
4 of the FM1 band.

On the remote:

1

1

Display the Preset List.

2
or
Hold

On the unit:
• To select directly on the touch panel

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

• To select from the Preset List

1
3

Select a preset number.

2
[Hold]

The station selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 4.

12

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 12

07.12.17 5:02:41 PM

The disc type is automatically detected, and playback starts automatically (for some discs: automatic start depends
on its internal program).
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks on it will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject
the disc.

ENGLISH

Disc operations

If “ ” appears on the screen, the unit cannot accept the operation you have tried to do.
• In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted.

~

!

Open the monitor panel.

Insert a disc.

Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Ÿ

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [CLOSE].

Press [OPEN].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

When playing back a multi-channel encoded disc,
the multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• You can fully enjoy multi-channel sound by
connecting an amplifier or a decoder compatible
with these multi-channel sources. (☞ also page
57)

Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
13

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 13

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:02:42 PM

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information. (☞ page 9)

DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter no./Playing time

Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal
channel no.

Disc type *1
Audio format
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
Playback mode

☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select chapter
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2
[5 ∞]
Select title/program/playlist

*1 DVD-VR also indicates either PRG (program) or PLAY (playlist) playback.
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback pictures
on the screen).

14

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 14

07.12.17 5:02:42 PM

For DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2: Folder no./Track no./Playing time
For JPEG: Folder no./File no.

ENGLISH

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information (☞ page 9).

Disc type
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total track no.
included on the
disc

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 *1
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

Track no./Playing time

The PBC indicator
lights up when PBC is
in use.

Total track no.
included on the
disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total playing time

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10
15

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 15

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:02:43 PM

ENGLISH

Track no./Playing time

Only for CD Text *3
Total track no.
included on the disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total playing time
☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

Audio format
(MP3/WMA/WAV)
Tag data appears
only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
Total track no. included on the disc

☞ page 19

[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

*3 “No Name” appears for conventional CDs.
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10
16

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 16

07.12.17 5:02:43 PM

You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• While the operation buttons are displayed, aspect ratio is fixed to <Full>. (☞ page 45)
• If no operation is done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is
displayed).

ENGLISH

Operation buttons on the screen

☞ pages 20 to 24 on how the operation buttons
particularly work for a variety of the discs

A
[SOURCE]
[AV MENU]
[SHORT CUT]
[3 / 8]
[7]
[4 ¢]

Display <Source Menu> screen
Display <AV Menu> screen
Display the Short Cut buttons
Start and pause playback
Stop playback
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Select folders
• The above buttons also work when they are not shown on
the screen (while watching the playback picture).
* While a disc menu is played back for DVD, [KEY] is
automatically displayed. On the disc menu, you can select a
menu item directly by touching it on the screen.

Touch the screen (center portion).

*

Touch [KEY].

B
For DVD/VCD/DivX menu operation playback
[2 3 5 ∞] Select the menu items
[ENT]
Confirm the selection
[TOP MENU] Display the disc menu
[MENU]
Display the disc menu
[RETURN]
Return to the previous menu or display the
menu (only for VCD with PBC)

Touch [KEY].

C
For entering the numbers
[DIRECT CLR] • Switch between chapter/track entry and
title/group/folder entry
• Erase the last entry when you enter a
wrong number
[0]–[9]=[ENT]
Enter numbers
Ex.: To enter “105,” press [1], [0], [5], then [ENT]

Touch [KEY].

To erase the operations, touch the screen again.
17

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 17

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:02:44 PM

ENGLISH

Selecting playback modes
You can use the following playback modes—Repeat or Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat

1

3

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Title: Repeats current title
Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Program: Repeats current program (not
available for Playlist playback)
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Repeats current folder

Folder: Repeats current folder

—
—
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks
—

Track:

Repeats current track (PBC not in
use)

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks (PBC not
in use)

Track:

Repeats current track*1

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

Track: Repeats current track*1
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder

Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

*1 You can also use [SHORT CUT] to turn on and off Track Repeat.

18

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 18

07.12.17 5:02:44 PM

Prohibiting disc ejection

If a disc includes folders, you can display the Folder/
Track (File) Lists, then start playback.

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

ENGLISH

Selecting tracks on the list
1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
at the same time

3

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.

Select a folder (1), then a track (2).

Using Short Cut Icons
You can easily access the some frequently used
functions by using [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel.

1
Selected track starts playing. (* Press to move to
the previous/next pages of the list)
1 Current folder list number/total folder list
number
2 Current track list number/total track list
number of the current folder
You can easily access the Track List by pressing DISP
on the monitor panel.

2
• For video software:
Aspect ratio
(☞ page 45)
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

• For audio software:

Turn on or off Track Repeat
(Repeat play: ☞ page 18)

Selected track starts playing.
19

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 19

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:02:45 PM

ENGLISH

Operations using the remote controller—RM-RK252
Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No sound can be heard.)
Select title (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select title (when not playing).

twice

Select title (during playback or pause).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

You can change the following items using the on-screen bar—audio language, audio stream, audio channel,
subtitle language, view angle, etc. (☞ pages 25 and 26)

20

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 20

07.12.17 5:02:46 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4 (No sound can be heard.)
Forward slow motion during pause*5 (No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*6
Select program.
Select playlist (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.
Select chapter.
Select program (when not playing).
Select program/playlist (during playback or pause).
twice

Using Original Program/Playlist screens ( ☞ page 25)
1

For Original Program
For Playlist

2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3

To erase the screen.

*4 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*5 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*6 Search speed: x2 ] x10

21

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 21

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:02:47 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.

Select track (within the same folder).
twice

Select folder.
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

While playing...
Reverse/advance the scenes by five minutes.
Current playback position

2nd press

1st press

1st press

2nd press

3rd press

For DivX6: Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2 ] ¡3
*2 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2

22

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 22

07.12.17 5:02:47 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause. (Slide show: each file is shown for a few seconds.)
Shows the current file until you change it if pressed during Slide show.
Select file.
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.
Select file (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed
during playback).
Reverse/forward search*3
Forward slow motion during pause*4
(No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5 (No
sound can be heard.)

During PBC playback...

Select aspect ratio.

2 Select the desired track.

Select an item on the menu.
To return to the previous menu, press
To cancel PBC playback
1

• To resume PBC, press
Select track.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*5 Search speed: x2 ] x10

23

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 23

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:02:48 PM

ENGLISH

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

Select track.
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Reverse/forward search*3
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
Select folder.

Select track (within the same folder).

twice

Select folder.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10

24

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 24

07.12.17 5:02:49 PM

Operations using the on-screen
bar

You can use Original Program or Playlist
screen anytime while playing DVD-VR with its data
recorded.

1

2

These operations are possible on the screen using
the remote controller, while playing the following
discs—DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG.

Display the Original Program/Playlist screen.

1

Display the on-screen bar. (☞page 26)

2

Select an item.

3

Make a selection.
If a pop-up menu appears...

ENGLISH

Using the list screens

Select an item you want.

To erase the screen

Ex. For DVD-Video

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
the recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/playlist*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of playlist
8 Total number of chapters included in the playlist
9 Playback time

• For entering time/numbers...
:
Move the entry position

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

:
Select a number
To remove the on-screen bar

25

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 25

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 5:02:50 PM

ENGLISH

On-screen bar
Information
Operation

Above example is of DVD Video. Items shown on the bar vary due to the disc type.
1 Disc type
2 • DVD: Audio signal format
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD Video:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
T. RPT:
Title repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
F. RND: Folder random
A. RND: All (Disc) random
JPEG:
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
VCD:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter

5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
Remaining title time (for DVD)
Remaining disc time (for others)
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track *2
Remaining time of the current
chapter/track *2
6 Playback status
Play
Reverse/forward search
Reverse/forward slow-motion
Pause
Stop
7 Operation icons
Change time indication (see 5)
Time Search (Specify a certain
scene by entering time.)
Title Search (by its number)
Chapter Search (by its number)
Track Search (by its number)
Repeat play *1
Random play *1
Change the audio language, audio
stream, or audio channel
Change or erase the subtitle
language
Change the view angle

Current program/chapter
Current Playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file

*1 ☞ page 18
*2 Not applicable for DVD-VR

26

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 26

07.12.17 5:02:51 PM

For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the
Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD changer jack
on the rear.
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the
countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.

1

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press
[5] or [∞] to select it.

ENGLISH

Bluetooth® operations — Cellular phone/audio player

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

To use a Bluetooth device through the unit (“Bluetooth
PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“Bluetooth PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”).

3

Connecting a new Bluetooth
device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Go to other menu items

Use either of the following items in <Bluetooth>
menu to register and establish the connection with a
device.
• Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as
the source to operate <Bluetooth> menu.
Open

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Search

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating this unit.

4

Enter a PIN (Personal Identification
Number)* code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number).
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.

To register using <Open>
Preparation:
Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth
function.
Continued on the next page

27

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 27

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:02:52 PM

ENGLISH

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Enter]: Confirms the entry.

5

To connect a special device <Special
Device>

1

Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the above
step) on the device to be connected.

2
3
4
5

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use <Connect> (or activate
<Auto Connect>) to connect the same device
from next time (☞ the following, and pages 50
and 51).

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press [5]
or [∞] to select it.
Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Bluetooth].

4
5

6

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Special Device].
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
Select a device you want to connect.
Use <Open> (or <Search>) to connect.

To connect/disconnect a registered
device

To register using <Search>

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to connect/disconnect.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

3
4

Press [Search].
The unit searches for available devices and displays
the list of them. (If no available device is detected,
“Device Unfound” appears.)

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Connect] or [Disconnect].
• Select <Connect> to connect the selected
device.
• Select <Disconnect> to disconnect the selected
device.

To delete a registered device

Select a device you want to connect.
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to
the unit.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Connecting...” is displayed on the
screen.

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to delete.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

3
4

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Delete Pairing].
Confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

28

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 28

07.12.17 5:02:53 PM

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

ENGLISH

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

*1

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 31

Adjust the volume of the incoming calls.*2

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside
[ ].

[AV MENU] Hold: Activates <Voice Dialing> function
[5 ∞] Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can be registered.)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of the other sources.

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ

Press [AV MENU].

!
⁄

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.
• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Bluetooth].
Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu).
☞ pages 50 and 51

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

When <Auto Answer> is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

To end the call
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(☞ page 51)

• You can adjust the microphone volume. (☞ page 51)

29

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 29

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:02:53 PM

3

ENGLISH

When an SMS comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.
When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (☞ page 51)

4

Select a calling method, then call.

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (☞ page 50)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages. (☞ pages
50 and 51)

Cancel

Redial

Shows the list of the phone
numbers you have dialed.
Received Calls Shows the list of the received
calls.
Phonebook
Shows the phone book of the
connected cellular phone.
Missed Calls Shows the list of the missed
calls.
Phone
Shows the phone number entry
Number
screen = “Entering a phone
number” (☞ page 31).
Voice Dialling (Only when the connected
cellular phone has the voice
recognition system): = Speak
the name you want to call.

To make a call

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

30

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 30

07.12.17 5:02:54 PM

To redial previously dialed numbers

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or +/–).

1

/ATT

ENGLISH

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

Entering a phone number
• You cannot use the remote controller to enter phone
numbers.

2

You can enter [0] – [9], [*], [#] (up to 32 numbers)
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Preset]: Goes to Preset List. You can preset the
entered number by selecting a preset
number. (☞ page 32)
• [Dial]: Calls the entered number.

3

• You can easily access <Dial Menu> by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
When using the remote controller, you can
display <Redial> menu anytime .
You can also access <Dial Menu> by holding
SOURCE on the monitor panel.
[Hold]
• You can easily activate <Voice Dialing> by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

You can also activate <Voice Dialing> by
holding [AV MENU].

31

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 31

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:02:55 PM

ENGLISH

Presetting the phone numbers

To call a preset number

You can preset up to six phone numbers.

1

1

Select the phone number you want to preset
from <Phonebook>, <Redial>, <Received
Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
1 Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.
2 Press [Bluetooth].
3 Press [Dial Menu], then...

2
Ex.: Selecting <Received Calls>

2

Select a telephone number to store.

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth phone operations.
[Hold]

3

: • Display <Dial Menu> screen/Answer
the incoming call.
• Display the <Redial> menu if pressed
and held (regardless of the current
source).

Select a preset number.

: End the call.
: Adjust the volume.

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

:
[Hold] Make a call to the preset numbers.

32

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 32

07.12.17 5:02:56 PM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
ENGLISH

*1

*2
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 41
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

[3 / 8] [7] Start and pause playback
[4 ¢] Reverse/forward skip
[5 ∞]
Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can
be registered.*3)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the operation status.
*3 You cannot select “New Device” when a Bluetooth audio player is connected.

~
Ÿ

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth audio operations.

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth
AUDIO]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Start and pause playback.

Start playback.

:
:

Reverse/forward skip
Adjust the volume.

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.
jvc-victor.co.jp/english/car/>
33

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 33

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:02:56 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the CD changer
MP3 indicator

Folder no./Track no./Playing time
Ex. while playing an MP3 disc

Disc no.
Tag data appears only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total track no. included on the
disc
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[ 5 ∞]
Press: Select folders (only for MP3)
Hold: Display Disc list

☞ page 35
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.

⁄

Preparation:
Make sure <Changer> is selected for <External
Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Select a disc to start playing.

Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH]. (☞
page 9)

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

To go to the other list

• If you select an MP3 disc, the Track list of the
current folder appears. You can select a track
and start playing. (☞ also page 19)

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor
panel.

!

Display the Disc List.

• If you select a folder on the list, you can start
playing the first track of the folder.
34

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 34

07.12.17 5:02:57 PM

Selecting playback modes

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Mode].

ENGLISH

You can use following playback modes—Repeat or
Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat for an MP3 disc

When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Track: Repeats current track
Disc:
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
All:

Randomly plays all tracks of the
current disc
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder, then tracks of next folders
folder
Disc: Randomly plays all tracks of the
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
current disc
All:
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller to operate the CD changer.

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

: Select disc.
: Select folder (MP3 only).
• Press: Select track.
• Hold: Reverse/forward search

35

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 35

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:02:57 PM

ENGLISH

Listening to the iPod
Track no./Playing time

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

☞ page 37
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5]
Enter player’s menu
[∞]
Start playback/pause
• To resume, press again.

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

It is required to connect the Interface adapter for iPod (KS-PD100) to the CD changer jack on the rear.
Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod] (☞ page 9)
Playback starts automatically.
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

36

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 36

07.12.17 5:02:58 PM

3

1

Press [5] to enter the player’s menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about five seconds.

2

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.
Press: Select an item.
Hold: Skip ten items at a time if there are more
than ten items.

Repeat

One:
All:

Random

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs Ô
Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the beginning)

3
4

Select an appropriate option.

ENGLISH

Selecting a track from the
player’s menu

Functions the same as
“Repeat One.”
Functions the same as
“Repeat All.”

Album: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Albums.”
Song: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Songs.”

Press [∞] to confirm the selection.
• When the playback modes are selected, the
corresponding indicators light up alternately on
the screen.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [5].

To cancel, select <Off>.

Selecting playback modes
1

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

37

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 37

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:02:58 PM

ENGLISH

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN terminals.
Assigned title (☞ page 42)

Sound mode (☞ page 41)

You can easily access to <Aspect> setting
menu by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback picture).

~
Ÿ

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while watching the playback picture

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• [KEY] does not work when the source is “AV-IN.”

38

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 38

07.12.17 5:02:59 PM

Navigation screen
ENGLISH

You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN terminal so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (☞ page 47)

To view the navigation screen (and listen to the navigation guidance*)
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (☞ page 9)
• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to
<Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (☞ page
45)

* If your Navigation System is equipped with the voice guidance function.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while viewing the navigation screen
• The operation buttons displayed on the screen vary among the playback sources.

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• The above buttons except [KEY] also work when they are not shown on the screen (while viewing the navigation
screen).
When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (☞ page 47)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN terminals.
• Some status messages such as volume level will not appear on the screen.

39

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 39

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 5:03:00 PM

ENGLISH

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter—KS-U57
(not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (☞ page 42)

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

☞ page 41

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

40

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 40

07.12.17 5:03:00 PM

ENGLISH

Sound equalization

While playing back any source other
than “Bluetooth PHONE,” you can easily
access <Equalizer> menu by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

~

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

1

Repeat steps ~ and Ÿ, then in step !...

2

Adjust (1), then store (2).

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Ÿ

!

Select a sound mode.

Ex.: When storing into <User2>.
Move to other six sound modes

• For preset values of each sound mode, ☞ page 58.

41

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 41

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:03:00 PM

ENGLISH

Assigning titles to the sources

In the explanation, buttons on the
touch panel are indicated inside [ ].

!

You can assign titles as follows.
FM/AM stations

Up to 16 characters—up to 30
stations.

AV-IN
EXT-IN

Up to 16 characters

~
Ÿ

Assign a title.

Select the source. (☞ page 9)
• For FM/AM stations: Select the band, then
tune into a station.

You can enter up to 16 characters (for available
characters, ☞ page 59).
• [Store]: Confirm the entry.
• [2/3]: Move the cursor.
• [BS]:
Erase the character before the
cursor.
• [Del]:
Erase the character on the cursor.
• [Cap]:
Change the letter case (upper/
lower).
• [Change]: Change the character set.
• [Space]: Enter a space.

Display <Title Entry> screen.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

42

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 42

07.12.17 5:03:01 PM

ENGLISH

Menu operations

!

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures. Some of the settings do not open the
sub-setting window, but just selecting an option will
change the setting.
• The display indications may change according to
change of the specifications.
Ex.: Changing the <AV Input> setting

~

Ÿ

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Non-available items will be shaded.

43

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 43

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:03:02 PM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Demonstration

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it temporarily,
touch the screen.

Wall Paper

You can select the background picture of the screen.
Horizon, Metal, Art, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

Off: Cancels.
Once: Scrolls the disc information once.
Auto: Repeats scrolling (five-second intervals).
• Holding DISP on the monitor panel scrolls the information regardless
of this setting.

Dimmer

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Auto: Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.*1
Dimmer Time Set : Activates the Dimmer Time setting below.

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On/Off times.

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
1 (bright), 2 (middle), 3 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust brightness of the screen.
–15 (darkest) to +15 (brightest); Initial 00

Picture Adjust*2

You can adjust the following to make the screen clear and legible for
watching the playback picture. The setting will be stored—one for
“DISC” (common) and the other for “AV-IN.”
–15 to +15; Initial 0
Bright: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Contrast: Adjust the contrast.
Color: Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
Tint: Adjust the tint if the human skin color is unnatural. (only when
color system setting is <NTSC>, ☞ next page)
• Press [5] or [∞] to adjust.

Display

ENGLISH

Setup

*1 The ILLUMINATION lead connection is required. (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
*2 Adjustable only when the source is “DISC” (the inserted disc must contain pictures or movies) or “AV-IN.”

44

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 44

07.12.17 5:03:02 PM

Menu items
3

Aspect*

Selectable settings, [reference page]
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.
Aspect ratio of incoming signal
4:3

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures

Clock

Display

Full:
For 16:9 original pictures
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match to the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language*4

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands,
Svenska, Dansk, Руccĸий, Português
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change
according to the language selected. ☞ [59]

NTSC/PAL

Select the color system of the external monitor connected—NTSC, PAL.
• Turn off the power and turn it on again to make the new setting
effective.

Time Set

Initial 1:00AM ☞ [8]

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system.
12Hours, 24Hours ☞ [8]

OSD Clock

When <On> is selected, the clock time is displayed on the playback
picture. ☞ [8]
Off, On

*3 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*4 After you change the indication language setting, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.

45

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 45

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:03:03 PM

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
1

Menu Language*

Select the initial disc menu language; Initial English (☞ also page
58).

Audio Language*1

Select the initial audio language; Initial English (☞ also page 58).

Subtitle*1

Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off); Initial
English (☞ also page 58).

Monitor Type*1
16:9

4:3LB

4:3PS

OSD Position*1

Disc

Position 1

Position 2

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
16:9 : Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor is 16:9.
4:3 LB (Letterbox)/4:3 PS (Pan Scan): Select when the aspect ratio of
the external monitor is 4:3.
• Refer to the illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are
shown on the screen.
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [25]
1: Higher position
2: Lower position

File Type*1

Select playback file type when a disc contains different types of files.
Audio: Plays back audio files.
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
Audio&Video: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

DivX Regist. (Registration)*1

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a
file with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration
Code is overwritten for copyright protection.

D. Audio Output*1

Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (☞ also page 57)
PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio, or when
connecting to a recording device.
Dolby D : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital.
Stream : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.

*1 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
46

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 46

07.12.17 5:03:03 PM

Menu items
1

Selectable settings, [reference page]
When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT terminals.
Dolby SR : Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio by
connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby Surround.
Stereo : Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic) Range
Compres. (Compression)*1

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing
Dolby Digital software.
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded software.
On: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

AV Input*2

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN terminals. ☞ [38, 39]
Off: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is skipped while
selecting the source).
Audio&Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as a
VCR.
Audio: Select when connecting an audio component such as a portable
audio player.
Camera*3 : Select when connecting a rear view camera.
Navigation : Select when connecting a Navigation System.

External Input*4

For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the
rear.
Changer/iPod*5: CD changer or iPod. ☞ [34, 36]
External: Any other than the above. ☞ [40]
• For connecting the Bluetooth adapter, this setting is not required. It is
automatically detected.

Input

Tuner

Disc

Down Mix*

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

*2 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*3 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the control panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.
*4 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*5 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.

47

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 47

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:03:04 PM

Others

ENGLISH

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Beep

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting

Off: Cancels.
Muting1, Muting2: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Power LED Flash

Off: Cancels.
On: When the ignition is turned off, the lamp on the
flashes.

button

TouchPanel Sens.

Change the sensitivity of the touch panel. As the number decreases,
sensitivity becomes higher. 1/2/3

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold
[Enter] to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. ☞ [3]

Equalizer
Flat/Hard Rock/R&B/Pop/Jazz/Dance/Country/Reggae/Classic/User1/User2/User3 ☞ [41]

48

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 48

07.12.17 5:03:05 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Fader/Balance

Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front and rear speakers.
• Upmost—front only (F6)
• Downmost—rear only (R6)
When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the center (0).
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left and right speakers.
• Leftmost—left only (L6)
• Rightmost—right only (R6) Initial 0

Volume Adjust

Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing to
the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
–12 to +12; Initial 00
• You can make the adjustments separately for DVD and other discs.

Amplifier Gain

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Low: VOL 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speakers is less
than 50 W.)
High: VOL 00 to 50

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

Sound

Mode*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Mono

Only for FM. (Off, On) ☞ [10]

DX/Local

Only for FM. (Local, DX) ☞ [11]

SSM

Only for FM. Press and hold to start SSM. ☞ [11]

Title Entry

Only for FM/AM stations, “AV-IN,” and “EXT-IN.” ☞ [42]

Repeat

☞ [18, 35, 37]

Random

☞ [18, 35, 37]

*1 Items listed under <Mode> vary among the playback sources.

List
For “DISC”: Folder List and Track List (☞ page 19)
For “CD-CH”: Disc List, Folder List, and Track List (☞ page 34)
• For the other playback sources, you can display a list by pressing DISP on the monitor panel. (☞ page 9)
49

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 49

SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:03:05 PM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

ENGLISH

Bluetooth*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Dial Menu *

Select the method to make a call. ☞ [30]

Message*3

You can read a message from the following message histories.
Unread: Messages you have not read.
Read: Messages you have read.
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.
Sent: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Open

☞ [27]

Search

☞ [28]

Special Device

Only for “New Device.”
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which require some special procedure to
establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want to connect.
• After selecting the device, use <Open> or <Search> (☞ page 27 or 28)
for connection.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You can
connect the unit and the device by using <Connect> (☞ below) from the
next time.

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ pages 27 and
28), establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the device being connected.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Delete the registered devices.

2

*1 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO.” Select a device (or “New Device”) before operating the
menu.
*2 Only for the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*3 Selectable only when the source is “Bluetooth PHONE” and the connected cellular phone is compatible with SMS
(Short Message Service).

When operating the Bluetooth device, refer also to the instructions supplied with the device.

50

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 50

07.12.17 5:03:06 PM

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
4

When the unit is turned on, the connection is established automatically
with...
Off: No Bluetooth device.
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found first.

Auto Answer *5

Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the calls
manually.
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.

Message Info *5

Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and
displaying “Receiving Message.” To read the message, ☞ page 30.
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.
01/02/03

Version *6

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

Settings

Auto Connect *

ENGLISH

Initial: Underlined

*4 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “New Device” is selected.
*6 If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc-victor.
co.jp/english/car/>

51

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 51

SETTINGS
SETTINGS
07.12.17 5:03:07 PM

ENGLISH

Maintenance
Moisture condensation

To keep discs clean

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.

How to handle discs

To play new discs
Center holder

When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder of
the case and lift the disc out, holding it
by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:
SingleCD—8 cm disc

Unusual shape

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)

Stick-on label

Transparent or semi-transparent on its
recording area

52

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 52

07.12.17 5:03:07 PM

Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

General

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters for file/
folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

ENGLISH

More about this unit

Playing DVD-VR

Disc

• For details about DVD-VR format and Playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

General
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are
interchangeably used.
• This unit can only play back audio CD (CD-DA) files
if different type of audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV) are
recorded on the same disc.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.

File playback
Playing DivX files
• This unit can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx>, <.div>, or <.avi> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit supports the DivX files whose resolution is
720 x 576 pixels or less.
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or Dolby Digital.
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode
may not be played back correctly.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

Ejecting a disc
• If “No disc“ appears after removing a disc, insert a
disc or select another playback source.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust.

Continued on the next page

53

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 53

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:03:07 PM

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO
format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional,
and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

ENGLISH

Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2
files recorded by JVC Everio camcorders.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Playing JPEG files

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
on the disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)

54

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 54

07.12.17 5:03:08 PM

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
p

• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

Current folder (highlighted bar)
Current folder number/total folder number
Folder list
Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not
displayed for JPEG)
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
in the current folder (total number of tracks on
the disc)
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)
Track list
Current track (highlighted)

ENGLISH

Bluetooth operations
General

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error: The device is registered but the
connection has failed. Use <Connect> to connect
the device again. (☞ page 28)
• Error: Try the operation again. If “Error” appears
again, check if the device supports the function you
have tried.
• Device Unfound: No available Bluetooth device is
detected by <Search>.
• Loading: The unit is updating the phone book and/
or SMS.
• Please Wait...: The unit is preparing to use
the Bluetooth function. If the message does not
disappear, turn off and turn on the unit, then connect
the device again (or reset the unit).
• Reset 08: Check the connection between the
adapter and this unit.

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline
JPEG), it will be displayed.

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.

55

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 55

:

Cellular phone

:

Household phone

:

Office

:

General

:

Other than above

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:03:08 PM

ENGLISH

CD changer

Menu settings

• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (☞ page 34), you will hear a
beep. Select another folder including music files.

• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from
<High> to <Low> while the volume level is set
higher than “30,” the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio
Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the
power, and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc)
so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect
ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may
become <4:3LB> for some discs.

iPod operations
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano *1
– iPod video (5th Generation) *2
*1 When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
*2 It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu while the iPod is connected to the
interface adapter.
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the adapter connected to this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the screen. This unit
can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>

56

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 56

07.12.17 5:03:09 PM

2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Through the DIGITAL OUT terminal

ENGLISH

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT)

Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted.
• To reproduce the multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set <D. Audio Output> correctly.
(☞ page 46)
Output signals

<D. Audio Output>
Playback disc
DVD

<Stream>

<Dolby D>

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital bitstream

with DTS
with MPEG Audio

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

DTS bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD, Video CD

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD with DTS

DTS bitstream

DivX/ with Dolby Digital
MPEG
with MPEG Audio

Dolby Digital bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

MP3/WMA

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

WAV

44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the
discs are not copy-protected.

57

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 57

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:03:10 PM

ENGLISH

Preset equalizing values
Frequency
Sound mode
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User1/2/3

60 Hz

150 Hz

400 Hz

1 kHz

2.5 kHz

6.3 kHz

15 kHz

00
+03
+03
00
+03
+04
+02
+03
+02
00

00
+03
+02
+02
+02
+02
+01
00
+03
00

00
+01
+02
00
+01
00
00
00
+01
00

00
00
00
00
+01
–02
00
+01
00
00

00
00
+01
+01
+01
–01
00
+02
00
00

00
+02
+01
+01
+03
+01
+01
+02
+02
00

00
+01
+03
+02
+02
+01
+02
+03
00
00

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)
Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU

Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque

Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian

Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali

Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

58

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 58

07.12.17 5:03:10 PM

• Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation registered in the US, Japan
and other countries.
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®
6) with enhanced playback of DivX® media files
and the DivX® Media Format
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Victor Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
• iPod and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Upper and lower cases

Numbers and symbols

• When any language other than <Руccĸий> is
selected for <Language>. (☞ page 45)
Upper and lower cases

ENGLISH

Characters shown on the screen
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z), you
can use the following characters to assign titles.
(☞ page 42)
• When <Руccĸий> is selected for <Language>.
(☞ page 45)

Numbers and symbols

59

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 59

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:03:11 PM

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
• For operations with the external components, refer also to the instructions supplied with the adapters used for the
connections (as well as the instructions supplied with the external components).
Symptoms
• No sound comes out of the speakers.

• The screen is not clear and legible.

FM/AM

General

• “Position Error Push Open Key” appears on
the screen.
• “Mecha Error Push Reset” appears on the
screen, and the panel does not move.
• “No Signal” appears.

Remedies/Causes
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced through the analog
terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT).
Sunshine from the windshield may cause this symptom.
Adjust <Bright>. (☞ page 44)
The monitor panel angle has been forcibly adjusted, or its
adjustment has been interrupted while opening or closing.
Press OPEN/TILT.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)

• The buttons on the monitor panel do not
work.
• The unit does not work at all.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.

• Change the source.
• Start the playback on the external component connected
to VIDEO IN terminal.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Signal input is too weak.
When the monitor panel is open, only +/– (volume) and
OPEN/TILT work. The other buttons do not function.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
Store stations manually. (☞ page 12)

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

60

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 60

07.12.17 5:03:12 PM

Disc in general

• Disc can be neither recognized nor played
back.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot be
played back.
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable discs
cannot be skipped.
• Playback does not start.
•
•
•

•
•
•

DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/MP3/WMA/WAV

•

•
•
•
•

Remedies/Causes
Eject the disc forcibly. (☞ page 3)
Unlock the disc. (☞ page 19)
• Insert a finalized disc.
• Finalize the discs with the component which you used
for recording.

ENGLISH

Symptoms

• Insert the disc correctly again.
• The format of files is not supported by the unit.
The playback picture is not clear and legible. Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 44)
Sound and pictures are sometimes
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
interrupted or distorted.
• Change the disc.
No playback picture is shown and “Parking
Parking brake lead is not connected properly.
Brake” appears on the screen, even when the (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
parking brake is engaged.
No picture appears on the external monitor. • Connect the video cord correctly.
• Select the correct input on the external monitor.
“Eject Error” or “Loading Error” appears on
Change the source by pressing SOURCE.
the screen.
“Region code error” appears on the screen
Region code is not correct. (☞ page 4)
when you insert a DVD Video.
Disc cannot be played back.
• Change the disc.
• Record the tracks using a compliant application on the
appropriate discs. (☞ page 4)
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file names.
Noise is generated.
The track played back is not a playable file format. Skip to
another file.
Tracks are not played back as you have
Playback order may differ from that played back using
intended them to play.
other players.
Elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded.
“Not Support” appears on the screen and
The track is unplayable.
track skips.

61

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 61

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:03:12 PM

Symptoms

ENGLISH

• Bluetooth device does not detect the unit.

• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth
device.

Bluetooth

• The unit does not make pairing with the
Bluetooth device.

• Echo or noise occurs.
• Phone sound quality is poor.

• The sound is interrupted or skipped during
playback of a Bluetooth audio player.

• “New Device” cannot be selected for
“Bluetooth AUDIO.”
• The connected audio player cannot be
controlled.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

Remedies/Causes
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth cellular
phone and one Bluetooth audio player at a time.
While connected to a device, this unit cannot be detected
from another device. Disconnect currently connected device
and search again.
• Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the device
detects the unit, select <Open> on the unit to connect
the device. (☞ page 27)
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and target
device. If the PIN code of the device is not indicated on its
instructions, try “0000” or “1234.”
• Select the device name from <Special Device>, then
try to connect again. (☞ pages 28, 50)
Adjust the microphone unit position.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
cellular phone.
• Move the car to place where you can get a better signal
reception.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
audio player.
• Disconnect the player connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect the player
again.
Bluetooth audio player is already connected. To select “New
Device,” disconnect it. (☞ page 28)
Check whether the connected audio player supports AVRCP
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.

62

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 62

07.12.17 5:03:13 PM

• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• The CD changer does not work at all.
• The iPod does not turn on or does not work.

AV-IN

iPod

• Sound is distorted.
• “Disconnect” appears on the screen.
• Playback stops.
• “No Files” appears on the screen.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07” appears on the
screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• No picture appears on the screen.
• Playback picture is not clear and legible.

Remedies/Causes
Insert a disc into the magazine.
Insert the magazine.
Current disc does not include playable files. Replace the disc
with one including playable files.
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD changer.
Press the reset button of the CD changer.
Reset the unit. (☞ page 3)
• Check the connection.
• Charge the battery.
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the iPod.
Check the connection.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Restart
playback.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and iPod. Then,
connect them again.
Check the connection between the adapter and this unit.
Reset the iPod.
• Turn on the video component if it is not on.
• Connect the video component correctly.
Adjust items in <Picture Adjust> menu. (☞ page 44)

63

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 63

ENGLISH

CD changer

Symptoms
• “No Disc” appears on the screen.
• “No Magazine” appears on the screen.
• “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen.
• “Reset 08” appears on the screen.

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:03:13 PM

ENGLISH

Specifications
Maximum Power Output:
Continuous Power Output
(RMS):

AMPLIFIER

Load Impedance:
Equalizer Control Range:

Frequency Range:

FM/AM TUNER

Frequencies:
Level:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Audio Output Level
REAR OUT:
Color System:
Video Output (composite):
Other Terminals:

DVD/CD

Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:

FM Tuner

Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:

Input:
Output:

50 W per channel
20 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
6.3 kHz, 15 kHz
±10 dB
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
NTSC/PAL
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
LINE IN, VIDEO IN, Antenna input
VIDEO OUT

Others:

CD changer, Reverse gear signal, DIGITAL
OUT (optical)

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM:

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

65 dB

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation:

35 dB

AM Tuner

Sensitivity/Selectivity:

20 μV/35 dB

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Frequency Response:

DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:

16 Hz to 22 000 Hz

VCD/CD:

16 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

93 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

95 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

64

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 64

07.12.17 5:03:13 PM

7 inch wide liquid crystal display

Number of Pixel:

336 960 pixels: 480 × 3 (horizontal) × 234 (vertical)

Drive Method:

TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format

Color System:

NTSC/PAL

Aspect Ratio:

16:9 (wide)

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

ENGLISH

MONITOR
GENERAL

Screen Size:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System:

Negative ground

Allowable Storage Temperature:

–10°C to +60°C

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

178 mm × 100 mm × 160 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

171 mm × 97 mm × 21 mm

Mass (approx.):

2.6 kg

100

Required space for the monitor ejection

160

CAUTION: When ejecting the monitor, leave an
open space for the monitor to come out. If you do
not, the monitor may obstruct the steering wheel
and gearshift lever operations, and this may result
in a traffic accident.
Unit: mm

90.5

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

65

EN_KW-AVX710[UN].indb 65

REFERENCES
07.12.17 5:03:14 PM

Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Ada MASALAH dengan cara
pengoperasian?
Setel kembali unit Anda
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda

EN, IN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

Rear_KW-AVX710UN.indd 2

1207MNMMDWJEIN

07.12.17 5:23:46 PM

KW-AVX716/KW-AVX710
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan
LVT1780-010A

1207MNMMDWJEIN

[UN]

EN, IN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

ENGLISH

INDONESIA

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

Unit ini didesain untuk beroperasi hanya pada sistem listrik 12 V DC yang di-ground NEGATIVE. Jika
kendaraan Anda tidak dilengkapi sistem ini, maka diperlukan alat pembalik tegangan yang dapat dibeli
di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.

WARNINGS

PERINGATAN

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations, as this may result in a traffic accident.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags, as this may result in a fatal accident.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate any unit while manipulating the steering wheel, as this may result in a traffic accident.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving. It may lead to carelessness and cause an accident.
• If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look around carefully or you may be involved in
a traffic accident.
• If the parking brake is not engaged, “Parking Brake” flashes on the monitor, and no playback picture will
be shown.
– This warning appears only when the parking brake wire is connected to the parking brake system built
in the car.

• JANGAN menginstal unit apa pun atau menjalin kabel apa pun pada lokasi di mana;
– unit dapat menghalangi pengoperasian roda kemudi dan tuas persneling, karena dapat
mengakibatkan kecelakaan lalu lintas.
– unit dapat menghalangi pengoperasian alat keselamatan seperti kantung udara, karena hal ini
dapat mengakibatkan kecelakaan yang fatal.
– ini dapat menghalangi pandangan.
• JANGAN mengoperasikan unit apa pun sewaktu mengendalikan roda kemudi, karena hal ini dapat
mengakibatkan kecelakaan lalu lintas.
• Pengemudi tidak boleh menonton ke monitor sewaktu mengemudi. Ini dapat mengakibatkan
kecerobohan dan menyebabkan kecelakaan.
• Jika Anda harus mengoperasikan unit selagi mengemudi, pastikan Anda melihat ke sekeliling
dengan cermat, karena kalau tidak, Anda bisa terlibat kecelakaan lalu lintas.
• Jika rem parkir tidak bekerja, terlihat tulisan “Parking Brake” berkedip pada monitor dan tidak ada
pemutaran gambar yang akan ditunjukkan.
– Peringatan ini hanya muncul apabila kabel rem parkir terhubung ke sistem rem parkir yang
terpasang dalam mobil.

Notes on electrical connections:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amplifier Gain” setting to prevent the speakers from
being damaged (see page 49 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Catatan mengenai sambungan listrik:
• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan
pada penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W
(keduanya di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω).
Jika maksimum power kurang dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “Amplifier Gain” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”)
untuk mencegah speaker-speaker dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 49 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN
dengan pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika
memindahkan unit ini.

Heat sink
Endapan panas

Parts list for installation and connection

Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan

The following parts are provided for this unit.
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.

Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk unit ini.
Jika ada yang hilang, segera hubungi penyalur Anda.

Main unit
Unit utama

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Sekrup-sekrup kepala datar (M5 × 8 mm)

Remote controller
Remote kontrol

Power cord
Kabel listrik

Round head screws (M5 × 8 mm)
Sekrup-sekrup kepala bulat (M5 × 8 mm)

Crimp connector
Konektor kerut

Batteries
Baterai

Plate for use with a Nissan car
Pelat untuk digunakan dengan
mobil Nissan

TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan sambungan-sambungan
speaker:
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan
speaker dalam mobil Anda.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.

1
AVX710[UN]_install.indb 1

07.12.24 11:30:31 AM

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

PEMASANGAN (DALAM BINGKAI TEMPATNYA)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. However, you should make adjustments
corresponding to your specific car. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan pemasangan yang khas. Namun, Anda harus melakukan penyesuaian pada
mobil tertentu. Jika ada pertanyaan atau perlu informasi mengenai kit pemasangan, tanyakan kepada
penyalur audio mobil JVC atau perusahaan yang menyediakannya.
• Jika Anda tidak tahu pasti cara memasang unit ini dengan benar, serahkan pemasangan kepada
teknisi yang memenuhi syarat.

Before installing the unit
Sebelum memasang unit

• When mounting the unit, be sure to use the screws provided, as instructed. If other screws are used,
parts could become loose or damaged.
• When tightening screws or bolts, be careful not to pinch any connection cord.
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear to maintain proper ventilation when installing the unit.

1

• Apabila memasang unit, pastikan Anda menggunakan sekrup-sekrup yang tersedia sebagaimana
yang diinstruksikan. Jika menggunakan sekrup lain, komponen bisa menjadi longgar atau rusak.
• Sewaktu mengencangkan sekrup-sekrup atau baut, hati-hati, jangan sampai menjepit kabel
sambungan yang manapun.
• Pastikan tidak ada yang menghalangi kipas pada panel belakang untuk menjaga aliran udara yang
baik apabila kipas ini dipasang.

1

Remove the audio system originally installed in the car, together with its mounting brackets.
Note: Be sure to keep all the screws and parts removed from your car for future use.

2
3

Attach the mounting brackets (removed from the car), to this unit (see below).

4

Install this unit using the screws removed in step 1.

Copot sistem audio yang aslinya terpasang dalam mobil berikut braket montasi.
Catatan: Pastikan Anda menyimpan semua sekrup-sekrup dan komponen yang dilepaskan dari
mobil untuk penggunaan di kemudian hari.

Do the required electrical connections.
• See pages 3 and 4.

The following example is for installation in a Toyota car. For more details, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.

2
3

Pasangkan braket montasi (yang dilepaskan dari mobil) ke unit ini (lihat di bawah).

4

Pasang unit ini dengan menggunakan sekrup-sekrup yang dilepaskan pada langkah 1.

Lakukan koneksi listrik yang diperlukan.
• Lihat halaman 3 dan 4.

Berikut adalah contoh pemasangan pada mobil Toyota. Untuk rincian lebih lanjut, tanyakan kepada
penyalur audio mobil JVC.
Supplied screws
Sekrup-sekrup yang disediakan

Mounting bracket removed from the car
Braket montasi dilepaskan dari mobil

Mounting bracket removed from the car
Braket montasi dilepaskan dari mobil

Screws removed from the car in step 1
Sekrup-sekrup yang dilepaskan dari
mobil pada langkah 1

Supplied screws
Sekrup-sekrup yang disediakan

Select the appropriate type fitting to your
audio system space.
Pilih tipe sambungan yang sesuai untuk
ruang sistem audio Anda.

If necessary, restore the protruding tabs.
Jika perlu, pasang kembali tab yang menonjol keluar.

When installing the unit in a Nissan car
Apabila memasang unit dalam mobil Nissan

Plate for use with a Nissan car
Pelat untuk digunakan dengan mobil Nissan

Note :

When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the supplied screws
(M5 x 8 mm). If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Catatan : Apabila memasang unit pada braket montasi, pastikan Anda menggunakan sekrup-sekrup
yang disediakan (M5 x 8 mm). Jika menggunakan sekrup-sekrup yang lebih panjang, bisa
merusak unit.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚, taking it into account that the monitor would eject when
in use.
Pasang unit tersebut pada sudut kurang dari 30˚, perhitungkan bahwa monitor akan keluar ketika
sedang digunakan.

100

Required space for the monitor ejection
Ruang yang diperlukan untuk pengeluaran monitor

30˚
160

90.5

Unit: mm
Unit: mm

TROUBLESHOOTING

PEMECAHAN MASALAH

• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• Sekring meledak.
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?

• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?

• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?

• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?

• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Suara terdistorsi.
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek
dan tertebal?

• Unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Alat penerima ini menjadi panas.
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?

• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?
2

AVX710[UN]_install.indb 2

07.12.24 11:30:36 AM

ENGLISH

INDONESIA

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.

1
2
3

1
2
3

Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
Connect the antenna cord.
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.
Sambungkan kabel antena.
Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.

Rear ground terminal
Terminal tanah belakang

Fan
Kipas
See each diagram on page 4.
Lihat setiap diagram di halaman 4.

15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A

*1 Not included for this unit
*1 Tidak disertakan untuk unit ini

To metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil
tersebut

Red
Merah

To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA.)

Blue with white stripe
Biru dengan strip putih

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
power cannot be turned on.

Orange with white stripe
Oranye dengan strip putih

*2 Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit
ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah
dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat
dihidupkan.

Brown
Cokelat

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA.)

To car light control switch
Ke saklar kontrol lampu mobil
To cellular phone system
Ke sistem telepon selular

Light green
Hijau muda

Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip
hitam

Left speaker (front)
Speaker kiri (depan)

To parking brake (see below).
Ke rem parkir (lihat di bawah).
Crimp connector
Konektor kerut

Gray
Green with black stripe
Abu-abu Hijau den gan strip
hitam

Right speaker (front)
Speaker kanan (depan)

A Connecting the parking brake lead

Green
Hijau

Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip
hitam

Left speaker (rear)
Speaker kiri (belakang)

Purple
Ungu

Right speaker (rear)
Speaker kanan
(belakang)

Menghubungkan ujung rem parkir

Connect the parking brake lead to the parking brake system built in the car.

Menghubungkan ujung rem parkir ke sistem rem parkir yang terpasang dalam mobil.

a

Parking brake
Rem parkir

Fuse block
Blok sekring

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Ke terminal aksesori dalam blok sekring

Blue
Biru

White
Putih

*1

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch)
Ke terminal aktif dalam blok sekring yang menghubungkan ke baterai
mobil (tanpa melalui kunci kontak)

Yellow *2
Kuning *2

White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip
hitam

Ignition switch
Saklar kontak

*1

Black
Hitam

Parking brake lead (light green)
Ujung rem parkir (hijau muda)

Crimp connector
Konektor kerut

To metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut

Parking brake switch (inside the car)
Saklar rem parkir (di dalam mobil)
3
AVX710[UN]_install.indb 3

07.12.24 11:30:38 AM

A

Connecting an external amplifier / Penyambungan penguat eksternal

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• You can supply the power to the amplifier by connecting the remote leads (blue with white stripe) of
this unit to the amplifier. (To connect other equipment using the remote leads, Y-connectors need to
be separately purchased.)
• Disconnect the speakers from the unit, and connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of
the unit unused.
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only to the external amplifier
to get clear sound and to prevent internal heat built-up inside the unit. See page 49 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.

Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
• Anda dapat mengalirkan daya listrik ke amplifier dengan menghubungkan kabel penyambung
(warna biru dengan strip putih) unit ini ke amplifier. (Untuk menghubungkan peralatan lain dengan
menggunakan kabel penyambung, konektor Y harus dibeli secara terpisah.)
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari unit ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan ujung
speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.
• Anda dapat mematikan amplifier built-in dan mengirimkan sinyal audio hanya ke amplifier
eksternal untuk mendapatkan suara yang bersih dan mencegah penimbunan panas di bagian
dalam unit. Lihat BUKU PETUNJUK di halaman 49.

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (Biru dengan strip putih)

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)
Remote lead
Ujung jauh

To the remote lead of other equipment
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain
Rear speakers
3
Speaker-speaker * Firmly attach the ground lead to the metallic body or to the chassis of the
car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the
belakang
paint before attaching the lead). Failure to do so may cause damage to the
unit.
*3 Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari
mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat (jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan
cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin
menyebabkan kerusakan pada unit tersebut.

JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC

Front speakers
Speaker-speaker
depan

B

Connections for external component playback / Koneksi untuk pemutaran komponen eksternal
Crimp connector (not supplied)*5
Konektor kerut (tidak disediakan)*5
Extension lead (not supplied)
Kabel sambungan (tidak disertakan)
To car battery

AV amplifier or decoder
Amplifier AV atau decoder

To reverse lamp
Ke lampu mundur
Reverse lamp
Lampu mundur

Ke baterai
Reverse lamp lead*4
Ujung lampu mundur*4

Digital optical cable (not supplied)
Kabel optik digital (tidak disediakan)

Audio/video cord (not supplied)
Kabel audio/video (tidak disediakan)

Video cord (not
supplied)
Kabel video (tidak
disediakan)

Camcorder, Navigation System, etc.
Camcorder, Navigation System, dsb..

External monitor
Monitor eksternal

Rear view camera KV-CM1*6
Kamera tampak belakang KV-CM1*6

C

*4 Required only when connecting a rear view camera to
VIDEO IN terminal.
*5 Refer to å in diagram Å on page 3.
*6 Set “AV Input” setting to “Camera” when using (see
page 47 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
*4 Hanya diperlukan apabila menghubungkan kamera
tampilan belakang ke terminal VIDEO IN.
*5 Lihat å di diagram Å di halaman 3.
*6 Tetapkan pengaturan “AV Input” ke “Camera” bila
menggunakan (lihat BUKU PETUNJUK di halaman 47).

Connections to the CD changer jack / Koneksi ke jack CD changer

When connecting the external components, refer also to the manuals supplied for the components and adapter. Bila menghubungkan komponen eksternal, rujuk juga buku petunjuk yang dibekalkan untuk komponen dan adaptor.

CAUTION:

Peringatan:

Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

Sebelum menyambungkan komponen eksternal, pastikan bahwa unit sudah dimatikan.
Anda dapat menghubungkan komponen JVC berikut ini ke jack CD changer.

You can connect the following JVC components to the CD changer jack.
JVC component

Model name

Komponen JVC

Nama model

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, etc.

CD changer (CD-CH)

CH-X1500, dsb.

Anda juga dapat menghubungkan komponen berikut ini melalui berbagai adaptor JVC.
• Kabel koneksi mungkin harus dibeli secara terpisah.

You can also connect the following components through the various JVC adapters.
• Connection cords may need to be purchased separately.
Component

Adapter

Model name

Komponen

Adaptor

Nama model

Bluetooth device
iPod
Portable audio player with line output jacks
Portable audio player with 3.5 mm stereo mini jack

Bluetooth adapter
Interface adapter for iPod
Line input adapter
AUX input adapter

KS-BTA200
KS-PD100
KS-U57
KS-U58

Perangkat Bluetooth

Adaptor Bluetooth

KS-BTA200

iPod

Adaptor interface untuk iPod KS-PD100

Audio player portabel dengan jack line output

Adaptor line input

Audio player portabel dengan jack stereo mini 3,5 mm Adaptor AUX input

When connecting more than one component (maximum: two), it is recommended that you connect the
components in series as explained below.

KS-U57
KS-U58

Bila menghubungkan beberapa komponen (maksimum: dua), dianjurkan agar anda menghubungkan
komponen dalam rangkaian seperti dijelaskan di bawah.

When connecting two components in series /
Bila menghubungkan dua komponen dalam rangkaian

To disconnect the connector / Untuk memutuskan konektor
Hold the connector top tightly ( 1 ), then pull it out ( 2 ).
Pegang erat konektor ( 1 ) lalu tarik keluar ( 2 ).

CD changer jack / Konector CD changer

*7 To use these components, set the external input setting correctly (see page 47 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
*7 Untuk menggunakan komponen ini, lakukan pengaturan masukan eksternal yang benar (lihat
halaman 47 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).

A KS-BTA200
B*7 CD-CH / KS-PD100 / KS-U57 / KS-U58

iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di negara-negara lain.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
4
AVX710[UN]_install.indb 4

07.12.24 11:30:40 AM

DVD RECEIVER WITH MONITOR

KW-AVX716
KW-AVX710

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS
LVT1780-001A
[A]

Cover_KW-AVX710_A.indd 2

07.12.17 2:27:41 PM

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1.
2.
3.
4.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Cautions on the monitor:

WARNINGS:
To prevent accidents and damage

• The monitor built in this unit has been produced
with high precision, but it may have some
ineffective dots. This is inevitable and is not
malfunction.
• Do not expose the monitor to direct sunlight.
• Do not operate the touch panel using a ball-point
pen or similar tool with the sharp tip.
Touch the buttons on the touch panel with your
finger directly (if you are wearing a glove, take it
off).
• When the temperature is very cold or very hot...
– Chemical changes occur inside, causing
malfunction.
– Pictures may not appear clearly or may move
slowly. Pictures may not be synchronized with
the sound or picture quality may decline in
such environments.

• DO NOT install any unit or wire any cable in a
location where;
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and
gearshift lever operations.
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices
such as air bags.
– it may obstruct visibility.
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully.
• The driver must not watch the monitor while
driving.

[European Union only]

2

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 2

07.12.17 4:48:39 PM

How to reset your unit

Contents
INTRODUCTION
Playable disc types .......................... 4
Basic operations—
Monitor panel/touch panel............ 5
Basic operations—
Remote controller (RM-RK252) ...... 6

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc
ENTER

NO EJECT?
EMERGENCY EJECT?

3

OPERATIONS
Before operating the unit ................ 8
Common operations ........................ 9
Listening to the radio ...................... 10
Disc operations ................................ 13

Exit

Back

2
1

at the same time

EXTERNAL DEVICES
Bluetooth® operations—
Cellular phone/audio player .......... 27
Listening to the CD changer .............. 34
Listening to the iPod........................ 36
Using other external components ..... 38

1

• If this does not work, reset the unit.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.

SETTINGS
Sound equalization .......................... 41
Assigning titles to the sources .......... 42
Menu operations ............................. 43

Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.

REFERENCES
Maintenance ................................... 52
More about this unit ........................ 53
Troubleshooting .............................. 60
Specifications .................................. 64

3

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 3

INTRODUCTION
07.12.17 4:48:45 PM

Playable disc types
Disc type

Recording format, file type, etc.

DVD

DVD Video (Region Code: 4)*1

Playable

DVD Audio
DVD-ROM
DVD Recordable/Rewritable
DVD Video
(DVD-R/-RW*2, +R/+RW*3)
DVD-VR
• DVD Video: UDF bridge
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
• DVD-VR
JPEG
• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/
MP3/WMA/WAV
WMA/WAV: ISO 9660 level 1,
AAC
level 2, Romeo, Joliet
MPEG4
DVD+VR
DVD-RAM
Dual Disc
DVD side
Non-DVD side
CD/VCD
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA)/DTS-CD
VCD (Video CD)
SVCD (Super Video CD)
CD-ROM
CD-I (CD-I Ready)
CD Recordable/Rewritable
CD-DA
(CD-R/-RW)
MP3/WMA/WAV
• ISO 9660 level 1, level 2, Romeo, JPEG
Joliet
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2
AAC
MPEG4
*1 If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect Region Code, “Region code error” appears on the screen.
*2 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).
DVD-RW dual layer discs are not playable.
*3 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video format only) discs.
+RW double layer discs are not playable.
Caution for DualDisc playback
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.
4

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 4

07.12.17 4:48:45 PM

Basic operations — Monitor panel/touch panel
Display <AV Menu> screen. ☞ page 43
Display <Source Menu> screen. ☞ page 9
Display and erase the Short Cut windows.
Available functions vary among the sources. For details, see each source operation
section.

Adjust the volume.
Change the display information.
Change the sources. ☞ page 9
Display <AV Menu> screen.
☞ page 43

Remote sensor

• Display <Open/Tilt> menu.
• Eject the disc and display <Open/Tilt>
menu. [Hold]
• Close the monitor panel when <Open/Tilt>
menu is displayed.

• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power. [Hold]
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

<Open/Tilt> menu

Reset the unit.
• Use only when the internal system malfunctions.
•
•
•
•
•
•

• In the explanation, buttons on the touch panel
are indicated inside [ ].
• For details on the touch panel operations, see
each source operation section.
5

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 5

[OPEN]: Open the monitor panel.
[EJECT]: Eject the disc.
[CLOSE]: Close the monitor panel.
[TILT +/–]: Tilt the monitor panel.
[Exit]: Erase this screen.
Shaded icons cannot be used.

INTRODUCTION
07.12.17 4:48:46 PM

Basic operations — Remote controller (RM-RK252)
Installing the battery

Main elements and features
R03/LR03/AAA

Insert the batteries into the remote controller by
matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace both batteries.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

1

• Turns on the power.
• Attenuates the sound if the power is on.
• Turns off the power if pressed and held (while
the power is on).

2

• Reverse search
• Reverse slow motion (during pause)

3

Adjusts the volume level.
• Does not function as “2nd VOL.”

4

• Displays <Dial Menu> screen.
• Displays <Redial> menu if pressed and held.
• Answers incoming calls.

5

• DVD/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Original Program screen.

6

Shows the on-screen bar.
• Does not function as “ .“

6

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 6

07.12.17 4:48:47 PM

7

Functions with other buttons (see i and o).

8

Changes the display information.

9

For disc operations:
• 5 / ∞:
DVD: Selects the title.
DVD-VR: Selects the program/Playlist.
Other discs (except VCD/CD): Selects the
folders.
• 4 / ¢:
– Press briefly: reverse skip/forward skip
– Press and hold: reverse search/forward
search
For FM/AM operations:
• 5 / ∞: Selects the preset stations.
• 4 / ¢: Functions to search for stations.
– Press briefly: Auto Search
– Press and hold: Manual Search
For Apple iPod operations:
• ∞: Starts playback/pauses
• 5: Enters the main menu (then 5 / ∞
/ 4 / ¢ work as menu selecting
buttons).
In the main menu:
• 5: Returns to the previous menu.
• ∞: Confirms the selection.
• 4/¢
– Press briefly: Selects an item.
– Press and hold: Skips ten items at a time.
For Bluetooth operations:
• 4 / ¢: reverse skip/forward skip (for
audio player operation)

p

• Forward search
• Forward slow motion (during pause)

q

Selects the source.

w

For disc operations:
Starts playback/pauses.
For Bluetooth operations:
• Answers incoming calls.
• Starts playback/pauses. (for audio player
operation).

e

Changes the aspect ratio of the playback
pictures.

r

“TUNER”: Selects the bands.
“DISC”: Stops playback.
“Bluetooth PHONE”: Ends the call.
“Bluetooth AUDIO”: Starts playback/pauses.

t

VCD: Returns to the PBC menu.

y

• DVD Video/DivX 6: Shows the disc menu.
• VCD: Resumes PBC playback.
• DVD-VR: Shows the Playlist screen.

u

• Makes selection/settings.
• @ / #: Skips back or forward by five minutes
for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2.
• % / fi: Changes discs for “CD-CH.”

i*3 • Switches number entry mode for “DISC.”
• Erases the misentry after entering a wrong
number.
• Does not function as “SURROUND.”
o*3 Number buttons
• Enters numbers.
• “TUNER”: Selects the preset station directly.
*1 Functions as a number button only (see o ).
*2 Not used for this unit.
*3 Functions when pressed with SHIFT.

7

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 7

INTRODUCTION
07.12.17 4:48:48 PM

Before operating the unit
@

You can cancel the demonstration on the screen and set
the clock.
• Non-available items will be shaded on the AV Menu
screens.

Set the clock settings.
Moves to the preceding menu page

Indication language:
In this manual, English indications are used
for purpose of explanation. You can select the
indication language. (☞ page 45)
Moves to the succeeding menu page

~

Turn on the power.

Ÿ

Display <AV Menu> screen.

!

Display <Setup> menu.

¤
⁄

Finish the procedure.

Cancel the demonstration.
Select <Off>.

Return to the previous screen.

8

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 8

07.12.17 4:48:48 PM

Common operations
Selecting the playback source

Changing the display
information

• Available sources depend on the external
components you have connected, media you have
attached, and the <Input> settings you have made
(☞ page 47).

• Available display information varies among the
playback sources.

On the monitor panel only:

On the touch panel:

• Each time you press DISP, the display changes to
show the various information.
Ex. When the playback source is a DivX disc.
Playback picture screen
(only for video sources)

Source information screen
Exit

On the monitor panel:
Track list

Clock time in large numbers

TUNER = DISC (DVD/VCD/CD) =CD-CH, iPod, or
EXT-IN = Bluetooth PHONE = Bluetooth AUDIO
= AV-IN = (back to the beginning)
Navigation screen
(When <Navigation> is
selected for <AV Input>)
(☞ page 47)

• You cannot select these sources if they are not ready.

Back to the beginning

9

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 9

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 4:48:49 PM

Listening to the radio
Preset no.

Assigned station name (☞ page 42). If no name is assigned,
the frequency of the station is displayed instead.

Band
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
☞ page 11,
Tuner indicators

☞ page 9

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [TUNER]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ
!

Press [BAND].

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Buttons on the
touch panel. In
the explanation,
they are
indicated inside
[ ].

Press [4] or [¢] to search for a station—Auto Search.
• Manual Search: Hold either [4]or [¢] until “Manual Search” appears on the screen, then press it
repeatedly.
• The ST indicator lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

3

When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
1

Press [AV MENU].

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• The MONO indicator lights up.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

Press [Mode].

To restore stereo effect, select <Off>.

10

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 10

07.12.17 4:48:50 PM

Tuning in to stations with
sufficient signal strength

FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)

This function works only for FM bands. Once you have
activated this function (selected <Local>), it always
works when searching for FM stations.

1

This function works only for FM bands.
You can preset six stations for each band.

Press [AV MENU].

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

Press [AV MENU].

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Mode].

2

3

Press [Mode].

3

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

Only stations with sufficient signal strength will be
detected.
• The DX indicator goes off, then the LO indicator
lights up.
• You can also change <IF Band Width> setting
(for details, ☞ page 47).
<IF Band Width> menu can be accessed by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then..
☞ page 41

11

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 11

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 4:48:50 PM

Manual presetting

Selecting a preset station

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number
4 of the FM1 band.

On the remote:

1

1

Display the Preset List.

2
or
Hold

On the unit:
• To select directly on the touch panel

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

• To select from the Preset List

1
3

Select a preset number.

2
[Hold]

The station selected in step 2 is now stored in
preset number 4.

12

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 12

07.12.17 4:48:51 PM

Disc operations
The disc type is automatically detected, and playback starts automatically (for some discs: automatic start depends
on its internal program).
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks on it will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject
the disc.
If “ ” appears on the screen, the unit cannot accept the operation you have tried to do.
• In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted.

~

!

Open the monitor panel.

Insert a disc.

Label side

<Open/Tilt> menu is displayed.
• By pressing and holding the button, you can
open the monitor panel and eject the disc.

Ÿ

Monitor panel closes automatically.
If not, press [CLOSE].

Press [OPEN].

Caution:
Do not place your finger behind the monitor panel.

When playing back a multi-channel encoded disc,
the multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• You can fully enjoy multi-channel sound by
connecting an amplifier or a decoder compatible
with these multi-channel sources. (☞ also page
57)

Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
13

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 13

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 4:48:52 PM

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information. (☞ page 9)

DVD Video: Title no./Chapter no./Playing time
DVD-VR: Program no. (or Playlist no.)/Chapter no./Playing time

Sampling frequency/Bit
rate/Recorded signal
channel no.

Disc type *1
Audio format
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
Playback mode

☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select chapter
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2
[5 ∞]
Select title/program/playlist

*1 DVD-VR also indicates either PRG (program) or PLAY (playlist) playback.
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback pictures
on the screen).

14

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 14

07.12.17 4:48:52 PM

While playing the following discs, press
.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the different information (☞ page 9).

For DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2: Folder no./Track no./Playing time
For JPEG: Folder no./File no.

Disc type
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total track no.
included on the
disc

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search for DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 *1
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

Track no./Playing time

The PBC indicator
lights up when PBC is
in use.

Total track no.
included on the
disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total playing time

☞ page 19
[ 3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10
15

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 15

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 4:48:53 PM

Track no./Playing time

Only for CD Text *3
Total track no.
included on the disc

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total playing time
☞ page 19
[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4

Folder no./Track no./Playing time

Audio format
(MP3/WMA/WAV)
Tag data appears
only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)
Total track no. included on the disc

☞ page 19

[3 / 8]
Start and pause playback
[ 7]
Stop playback
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
[5 ∞]
Press: Select folder
Hold: Display Folder list

*3 “No Name” appears for conventional CDs.
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10
16

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 16

07.12.17 4:48:53 PM

Operation buttons on the screen
You can display the following operation buttons while watching the playback pictures on the screen.
• While the operation buttons are displayed, aspect ratio is fixed to <Full>. (☞ page 45)
• If no operation is done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear (except when a disc menu is
displayed).

☞ pages 20 to 24 on how the operation buttons
particularly work for a variety of the discs

A
[SOURCE]
[AV MENU]
[SHORT CUT]
[3 / 8]
[7]
[4 ¢]

Display <Source Menu> screen
Display <AV Menu> screen
Display the Short Cut buttons
Start and pause playback
Stop playback
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5 ∞]
Select folders
• The above buttons also work when they are not shown on
the screen (while watching the playback picture).
* While a disc menu is played back for DVD, [KEY] is
automatically displayed. On the disc menu, you can select a
menu item directly by touching it on the screen.

Touch the screen (center portion).

*

Touch [KEY].

B
For DVD/VCD/DivX menu operation playback
[2 3 5 ∞] Select the menu items
[ENT]
Confirm the selection
[TOP MENU] Display the disc menu
[MENU]
Display the disc menu
[RETURN]
Return to the previous menu or display the
menu (only for VCD with PBC)

Touch [KEY].

C
For entering the numbers
[DIRECT CLR] • Switch between chapter/track entry and
title/group/folder entry
• Erase the last entry when you enter a
wrong number
[0]–[9]=[ENT]
Enter numbers
Ex.: To enter “105,” press [1], [0], [5], then [ENT]

Touch [KEY].

To erase the operations, touch the screen again.
17

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 17

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 4:48:54 PM

Selecting playback modes
You can use the following playback modes—Repeat or Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat

1

3

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Title: Repeats current title
Chapter: Repeats current chapter
Program: Repeats current program (not
available for Playlist playback)
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Repeats current folder

Folder: Repeats current folder

—
—
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks
—

Track:

Repeats current track (PBC not in
use)

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks (PBC not
in use)

Track:

Repeats current track*1

Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

Track: Repeats current track*1
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder

Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
folder, then tracks of next folders
Disc (All): Randomly plays all tracks

*1 You can also use [SHORT CUT] to turn on and off Track Repeat.

18

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 18

07.12.17 4:48:55 PM

Selecting tracks on the list

Prohibiting disc ejection

If a disc includes folders, you can display the Folder/
Track (File) Lists, then start playback.

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2
at the same time

3

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure to select <EJECT OK?>.

Select a folder (1), then a track (2).

Using Short Cut Icons
You can easily access the some frequently used
functions by using [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel.

1
Selected track starts playing. (* Press to move to
the previous/next pages of the list)
1 Current folder list number/total folder list
number
2 Current track list number/total track list
number of the current folder
You can easily access the Track List by pressing DISP
on the monitor panel.

2
• For video software:
Aspect ratio
(☞ page 45)
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

• For audio software:

Turn on or off Track Repeat
(Repeat play: ☞ page 18)

Selected track starts playing.
19

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 19

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 4:48:55 PM

Operations using the remote controller—RM-RK252
Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Slow motion during pause*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*3 (No sound can be heard.)
Select title (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.

Select chapter.
Select title (when not playing).

twice

Select title (during playback or pause).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x10

You can change the following items using the on-screen bar—audio language, audio stream, audio channel,
subtitle language, view angle, etc. (☞ pages 25 and 26)

20

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 20

07.12.17 4:48:56 PM

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*4 (No sound can be heard.)
Forward slow motion during pause*5 (No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select chapter (during playback or pause).
Hold: Reverse/forward search*6
Select program.
Select playlist (during playback or pause).
Select aspect ratio.
Select chapter.
Select program (when not playing).
Select program/playlist (during playback or pause).
twice

Using Original Program/Playlist screens ( ☞ page 25)
1

For Original Program
For Playlist

2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3

To erase the screen.

*4 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*5 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*6 Search speed: x2 ] x10

21

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 21

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 4:48:57 PM

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1 (No sound can be heard.)
Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2 (No sound can be heard.)
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.

Select track (within the same folder).
twice

Select folder.
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

While playing...
Reverse/advance the scenes by five minutes.
Current playback position

2nd press

1st press

1st press

2nd press

3rd press

For DivX6: Using menu driven features
1
2 Select an item you want to start playback.
3
*1 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2 ] ¡3
*2 Search speed: ¡1 ] ¡2

22

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 22

07.12.17 4:48:58 PM

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause. (Slide show: each file is shown for a few seconds.)
Shows the current file until you change it if pressed during Slide show.
Select file.
Select folder.
Select aspect ratio.
Select file (within the same folder).
Select folder.
twice

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed
during playback).
Reverse/forward search*3
Forward slow motion during pause*4
(No sound can be heard.)
• Reverse slow motion does not work.
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*5 (No
sound can be heard.)

During PBC playback...

Select aspect ratio.

2 Select the desired track.

Select an item on the menu.
To return to the previous menu, press
To cancel PBC playback
1

• To resume PBC, press
Select track.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Slow motion speed: 1/32 ] 1/16 ] 1/8 ] 1/4 ] 1/2
*5 Search speed: x2 ] x10

23

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 23

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 4:48:58 PM

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Reverse/forward search*1
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*2

Select track.
*1 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*2 Search speed: x2 ] x10

Stop playback.
Start playback/pause (if pressed during playback).
Also functions as CLR (clear):
Erases a misentry if pressed
while holding SHIFT.

Reverse/forward search*3
Press: Select track.
Hold: Reverse/forward search*4
Select folder.

Select track (within the same folder).

twice

Select folder.
*3 Search speed: x2 ] x5 ] x10 ] x20 ] x60
*4 Search speed: x2 ] x10

24

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 24

07.12.17 4:48:59 PM

Using the list screens

Operations using the on-screen
bar

You can use Original Program or Playlist
screen anytime while playing DVD-VR with its data
recorded.

1

2

These operations are possible on the screen using
the remote controller, while playing the following
discs—DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG.

Display the Original Program/Playlist screen.

1

Display the on-screen bar. (☞page 26)

2

Select an item.

3

Make a selection.
If a pop-up menu appears...

Select an item you want.

To erase the screen

Ex. For DVD-Video

1 Original Program/Playlist number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of
the recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/playlist*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of playlist
8 Total number of chapters included in the playlist
9 Playback time

• For entering time/numbers...
:
Move the entry position

* The title of the original program or playlist may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.

:
Select a number
To remove the on-screen bar

25

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 25

OPERATIONS
07.12.17 4:49:00 PM

On-screen bar
Information
Operation

Above example is of DVD Video. Items shown on the bar vary due to the disc type.
1 Disc type
2 • DVD: Audio signal format
• VCD: PBC
3 Playback mode *1
DVD Video:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
T. RPT:
Title repeat
DVD-VR:
C. RPT:
Chapter repeat
PG. RPT: Program repeat
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
F. RND: Folder random
A. RND: All (Disc) random
JPEG:
F. RPT:
Folder repeat
VCD:
T. RPT:
Track repeat
A. RND: All (Disc) random
4 Playback information
Current title/chapter

5 Time indication
Elapsed playing time of the disc
Remaining title time (for DVD)
Remaining disc time (for others)
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track *2
Remaining time of the current
chapter/track *2
6 Playback status
Play
Reverse/forward search
Reverse/forward slow-motion
Pause
Stop
7 Operation icons
Change time indication (see 5)
Time Search (Specify a certain
scene by entering time.)
Title Search (by its number)
Chapter Search (by its number)
Track Search (by its number)
Repeat play *1
Random play *1
Change the audio language, audio
stream, or audio channel
Change or erase the subtitle
language
Change the view angle

Current program/chapter
Current Playlist/chapter
Current track
Current folder/track
Current folder/file

*1 ☞ page 18
*2 Not applicable for DVD-VR

26

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 26

07.12.17 4:49:01 PM

Bluetooth® operations — Cellular phone/audio player
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the
Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD changer jack
on the rear.
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the
Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the
countries where you may use the Bluetooth®
function.

1

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press
[5] or [∞] to select it.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

To use a Bluetooth device through the unit (“Bluetooth
PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”) for the first time,
you need to establish Bluetooth wireless connection
between the unit and the device.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in
the unit even if you reset your unit. Up to five devices
can be registered in total.
• Only one device can be connected at a time for each
source (“Bluetooth PHONE” and “Bluetooth AUDIO”).

3

Connecting a new Bluetooth
device
Registration (Pairing) methods
Go to other menu items

Use either of the following items in <Bluetooth>
menu to register and establish the connection with a
device.
• Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO” as
the source to operate <Bluetooth> menu.
Open

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating the Bluetooth device.

Search

Make the unit ready to establish
a new Bluetooth connection.
The connection is established by
operating this unit.

4

Enter a PIN (Personal Identification
Number)* code to the unit.
• You can enter any number you like (1-digit to
16-digit number).
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the
specified PIN code to the unit.

To register using <Open>
Preparation:
Operate the Bluetooth device to turn on its Bluetooth
function.
Continued on the next page

27

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 27

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 4:49:02 PM

You can enter [0] – [9] only.
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Enter]: Confirms the entry.

5

To connect a special device <Special
Device>

1

Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Open...” is displayed on the screen.
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the above
step) on the device to be connected.

2
3
4
5

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.
The device remains registered even after you
disconnect the device. Use <Connect> (or activate
<Auto Connect>) to connect the same device
from next time (☞ the following, and pages 50
and 51).

• Make sure “New Device” is selected. If not, press [5]
or [∞] to select it.
Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Bluetooth].

4
5

6

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Special Device].
The unit displays the list of the preset devices.
Select a device you want to connect.
Use <Open> (or <Search>) to connect.

To connect/disconnect a registered
device

To register using <Search>

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to connect/disconnect.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

3
4

Press [Search].
The unit searches for available devices and displays
the list of them. (If no available device is detected,
“Device Unfound” appears.)

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Connect] or [Disconnect].
• Select <Connect> to connect the selected
device.
• Select <Disconnect> to disconnect the selected
device.

To delete a registered device

Select a device you want to connect.
Enter the specific PIN code of the device to
the unit.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the device
to check the PIN code.
Operate the Bluetooth device to connect
while “Connecting...” is displayed on the
screen.

Now connection is established and you can use the
device through the unit.

1

Select “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth
AUDIO,” then select a registered device you
want to delete.

2

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

3
4

Press [Bluetooth].
Press [Delete Pairing].
Confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

28

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 28

07.12.17 4:49:03 PM

Using the Bluetooth cellular phone

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

*1

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 31

Adjust the volume of the incoming calls.*2

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside
[ ].

[AV MENU] Hold: Activates <Voice Dialing> function
[5 ∞] Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can be registered.)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 This adjustment does not affect the volume level of the other sources.

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth PHONE]. (☞ page 9)

Ÿ

Press [AV MENU].

!
⁄

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.
• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Press [Bluetooth].
Establish the connection with a device, then make a call (or settings using <Bluetooth>
menu).
☞ pages 50 and 51

When a call comes in...
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE”
automatically.

When <Auto Answer> is deactivated...
To answer the incoming call
• Press any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Press the message displayed on the touch panel.

Name and phone number (if acquired)

To end the call
• Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
/ATT or +/–).
• Hold the message displayed on the touch panel.

When <Auto Answer> is activated...
The unit answers the incoming call automatically.
(☞ page 51)

• You can adjust the microphone volume. (☞ page 51)

29

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 29

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 4:49:04 PM

3

When an SMS comes in...
If the cellular phone is compatible with SMS (Short
Message Service), you can read the messages on the
screen.
• You cannot edit or send a message through the unit.
When <Message Info> is set to <Auto>...
The unit rings and the following screen is displayed to
inform you of a message arrival. (☞ page 51)

4

Select a calling method, then call.

To read the message, press [Yes].
The source is changed to “Bluetooth PHONE.”
To read the message later, press [No].
• The message is stored into <Message> =
<Unread>. (☞ page 50)
When <Message Info> is set to <Manual>...
Access the message list to read messages. (☞ pages
50 and 51)

Cancel

Redial

Shows the list of the phone
numbers you have dialed.
Received Calls Shows the list of the received
calls.
Phonebook
Shows the phone book of the
connected cellular phone.
Missed Calls Shows the list of the missed
calls.
Phone
Shows the phone number entry
Number
screen = “Entering a phone
number” (☞ page 31).
Voice Dialling (Only when the connected
cellular phone has the voice
recognition system): = Speak
the name you want to call.

To make a call

1

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

30

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 30

07.12.17 4:49:04 PM

To stop ringing (canceling the outgoing call)

To redial previously dialed numbers

Hold any button on the monitor panel (except
or +/–).

1

/ATT

Entering a phone number
• You cannot use the remote controller to enter phone
numbers.

2

You can enter [0] – [9], [*], [#] (up to 32 numbers)
• [BS]: Erases the character before the cursor.
• [Del]: Erases the character on the cursor.
• [Preset]: Goes to Preset List. You can preset the
entered number by selecting a preset
number. (☞ page 32)
• [Dial]: Calls the entered number.

3

• You can easily access <Dial Menu> by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
When using the remote controller, you can
display <Redial> menu anytime .
You can also access <Dial Menu> by holding
SOURCE on the monitor panel.
[Hold]
• You can easily activate <Voice Dialing> by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

You can also activate <Voice Dialing> by
holding [AV MENU].

31

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 31

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 4:49:05 PM

Presetting the phone numbers

To call a preset number

You can preset up to six phone numbers.

1

1

Select the phone number you want to preset
from <Phonebook>, <Redial>, <Received
Calls>, or <Missed Calls>.
1 Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.
2 Press [Bluetooth].
3 Press [Dial Menu], then...

2
Ex.: Selecting <Received Calls>

2

Select a telephone number to store.

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth phone operations.
[Hold]

3

: • Display <Dial Menu> screen/Answer
the incoming call.
• Display the <Redial> menu if pressed
and held (regardless of the current
source).

Select a preset number.

: End the call.
: Adjust the volume.

Now “Tom” is stored into preset no. 1.

:
[Hold] Make a call to the preset numbers.

32

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 32

07.12.17 4:49:06 PM

Using the Bluetooth audio player
*1

*2
Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Status of the device
Signal strength/Battery
remainder
(only when the information
comes from the device)

The Bluetooth icon
lights up when
the adapter is
connected.
☞ page 41
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

[3 / 8] [7] Start and pause playback
[4 ¢] Reverse/forward skip
[5 ∞]
Select the registered device
(“New Device” appears when a new device can
be registered.*3)

*1 When a cellular phone with audio function is connected, appears.
*2 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the operation status.
*3 You cannot select “New Device” when a Bluetooth audio player is connected.

~
Ÿ

You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller for the Bluetooth audio operations.

Press [SOURCE], then press [Bluetooth
AUDIO]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

: Start and pause playback.

Start playback.

:
:

Reverse/forward skip
Adjust the volume.

Bluetooth Information:
If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.
jvc-victor.co.jp/english/car/>
33

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 33

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 4:49:07 PM

Listening to the CD changer
MP3 indicator

Folder no./Track no./Playing time
Ex. while playing an MP3 disc

Disc no.
Tag data appears only when it is
recorded.

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

Total track no. included on the
disc
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[ 5 ∞]
Press: Select folders (only for MP3)
Hold: Display Disc list

☞ page 35
: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.

⁄

Preparation:
Make sure <Changer> is selected for <External
Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Select a disc to start playing.

Press [SOURCE], then press [CD-CH]. (☞
page 9)

• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor
panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

To go to the other list

• If you select an MP3 disc, the Track list of the
current folder appears. You can select a track
and start playing. (☞ also page 19)

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor
panel.

!

Display the Disc List.

• If you select a folder on the list, you can start
playing the first track of the folder.
34

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 34

07.12.17 4:49:07 PM

Selecting playback modes
You can use following playback modes—Repeat or
Random.
Ex.: To select Track Repeat for an MP3 disc

1

Press [AV MENU] on the touch panel or AV
MENU on the monitor panel.

2
3

Press [Mode].
When one of the playback modes is selected, the
corresponding indicator lights up on the source
information screen.
To cancel, select <Off>.

Disc type

Repeat

Random

Track: Repeats current track
Disc:
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
All:

Randomly plays all tracks of the
current disc
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
Track: Repeats current track
Folder: Randomly plays all tracks of current
Folder: Repeats all tracks of the current
folder, then tracks of next folders
folder
Disc: Randomly plays all tracks of the
Disc: Repeats all tracks of the current disc
current disc
All:
Randomly plays all tracks of all
loaded discs
You can use the following buttons on the remote
controller to operate the CD changer.

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

: Select disc.
: Select folder (MP3 only).
• Press: Select track.
• Hold: Reverse/forward search

35

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 35

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 4:49:08 PM

Listening to the iPod
Track no./Playing time

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

☞ page 37
[4 ¢] Press: Select track
Hold: Reverse/forward search
[5]
Enter player’s menu
[∞]
Start playback/pause
• To resume, press again.

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the
explanation, they are indicated
inside [ ].

It is required to connect the Interface adapter for iPod (KS-PD100) to the CD changer jack on the rear.
Preparation:
Make sure <iPod> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [iPod] (☞ page 9)
Playback starts automatically.
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Press [4] or [¢] to select a track.

36

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 36

07.12.17 4:49:09 PM

3

Selecting a track from the
player’s menu
1

Press [5] to enter the player’s menu.
“SEARCH” flashes on the screen during menu
operations.
• This mode will be canceled if no operations are
done for about five seconds.

2

Press [4] or [¢] to select the desired
item.
Press: Select an item.
Hold: Skip ten items at a time if there are more
than ten items.

Repeat

One:
All:

Random

Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs Ô
Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to the beginning)

3
4

Select an appropriate option.

Functions the same as
“Repeat One.”
Functions the same as
“Repeat All.”

Album: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Albums.”
Song: Functions the same as
“Shuffle Songs.”

Press [∞] to confirm the selection.
• When the playback modes are selected, the
corresponding indicators light up alternately on
the screen.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a track.
• When a track is selected finally, playback starts.
• To return to the previous menu, press [5].

To cancel, select <Off>.

Selecting playback modes
1

You can easily turn on or off Track Repeat by
pressing [SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

2

37

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 37

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 4:49:09 PM

Using other external components
AV-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the LINE IN/VIDEO IN terminals.
Assigned title (☞ page 42)

Sound mode (☞ page 41)

You can easily access to <Aspect> setting
menu by pressing [SHORT CUT] on the
touch panel, then...
☞ page 41

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [ ].
These buttons also work when they are not shown on the touch panel (while watching the playback picture).

~
Ÿ

Press [SOURCE], then press [AV-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while watching the playback picture

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• [KEY] does not work when the source is “AV-IN.”

38

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 38

07.12.17 4:49:10 PM

Navigation screen
You can also connect a Navigation System to the VIDEO IN terminal so that you can watch the navigation screen.
Preparation:
Make sure <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input>. (☞ page 47)

To view the navigation screen (and listen to the navigation guidance*)
Press DISP on the monitor panel repeatedly. (☞ page 9)
• The aspect ratio of the navigation screen is fixed to
<Full> regardless of the <Aspect> setting. (☞ page
45)

* If your Navigation System is equipped with the voice guidance function.

To display the operation buttons (☞ page 17) while viewing the navigation screen
• The operation buttons displayed on the screen vary among the playback sources.

Touch the screen (center portion).

Touch the screen (center portion).

• If no operations are done for about five seconds, the operation buttons disappear.
• The above buttons except [KEY] also work when they are not shown on the screen (while viewing the navigation
screen).
When <Navigation> is selected for <AV Input> (☞ page 47)
• You can use the source “AV-IN” for listening to an audio source connected to the LINE IN terminals.
• Some status messages such as volume level will not appear on the screen.

39

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 39

EXTERNAL DEVICES
07.12.17 4:49:10 PM

EXT-INPUT
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter—KS-U57
(not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).
Assigned title (☞ page 42)

Sound mode
(☞ page 41)

☞ page 41

: Buttons on the touch panel. In the explanation, they are indicated inside [

].

Preparation:
Make sure <External> is selected for <External Input>. (☞ page 47)

~

Press [SOURCE], then press [EXT-IN]. (☞ page 9)
• You can also use SOURCE on the monitor panel. Press it repeatedly.

Ÿ

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

40

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 40

07.12.17 4:49:10 PM

Sound equalization

While playing back any source other
than “Bluetooth PHONE,” you can easily
access <Equalizer> menu by pressing
[SHORT CUT] on the touch panel, then...

~

Storing your own adjustments
You can store your adjustments into <User1>,
<User2>, and <User3>.

1

Repeat steps ~ and Ÿ, then in step !...

2

Adjust (1), then store (2).

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Ÿ

!

Select a sound mode.

Ex.: When storing into <User2>.
Move to other six sound modes

• For preset values of each sound mode, ☞ page 58.

41

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 41

SETTINGS
07.12.17 4:49:11 PM

Assigning titles to the sources

In the explanation, buttons on the
touch panel are indicated inside [ ].

!

You can assign titles as follows.
FM/AM stations

Up to 16 characters—up to 30
stations.

AV-IN
EXT-IN

Up to 16 characters

~
Ÿ

Assign a title.

Select the source. (☞ page 9)
• For FM/AM stations: Select the band, then
tune into a station.

You can enter up to 16 characters (for available
characters, ☞ page 59).
• [Store]: Confirm the entry.
• [2/3]: Move the cursor.
• [BS]:
Erase the character before the
cursor.
• [Del]:
Erase the character on the cursor.
• [Cap]:
Change the letter case (upper/
lower).
• [Change]: Change the character set.
• [Space]: Enter a space.

Display <Title Entry> screen.

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

⁄

Finish the procedure.

42

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 42

07.12.17 4:49:12 PM

Menu operations

!

The following steps are one of the fundamental
procedures. Some of the settings do not open the
sub-setting window, but just selecting an option will
change the setting.
• The display indications may change according to
change of the specifications.
Ex.: Changing the <AV Input> setting

~

Ÿ

• You can also use AV MENU on the monitor panel.

Non-available items will be shaded.

43

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 43

SETTINGS
07.12.17 4:49:12 PM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Setup

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Demonstration

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the demonstration on the screen. To stop it temporarily,
touch the screen.

Wall Paper

You can select the background picture of the screen.
Horizon, Metal, Art, Plain

Color

You can select the color of the background picture.
Blue, Light-Blue, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Purple, Dark-Blue,
Dark-Green, Brown, Light-Brown, Black

Scroll

Off: Cancels.
Once: Scrolls the disc information once.
Auto: Repeats scrolling (five-second intervals).
• Holding DISP on the monitor panel scrolls the information regardless
of this setting.

Dimmer

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates dimmer.
Auto: Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.*1
Dimmer Time Set : Activates the Dimmer Time setting below.

Dimmer Time Set

Sets the Dimmer On/Off times.

Dimmer Level

You can select the brightness for dimmer.
1 (bright), 2 (middle), 3 (dark)

Bright

You can adjust brightness of the screen.
–15 (darkest) to +15 (brightest); Initial 00

Picture Adjust*2

You can adjust the following to make the screen clear and legible for
watching the playback picture. The setting will be stored—one for
“DISC” (common) and the other for “AV-IN.”
–15 to +15; Initial 0
Bright: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.
Contrast: Adjust the contrast.
Color: Adjust the color of the picture—lighter or darker.
Tint: Adjust the tint if the human skin color is unnatural. (only when
color system setting is <NTSC>, ☞ next page)
• Press [5] or [∞] to adjust.

Display

Menu items

*1 The ILLUMINATION lead connection is required. (☞ Installation/Connection Manual)
*2 Adjustable only when the source is “DISC” (the inserted disc must contain pictures or movies) or “AV-IN.”

44

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 44

07.12.17 4:49:13 PM

Initial: Underlined
Menu items
3

Aspect*

Selectable settings, [reference page]
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.
Aspect ratio of incoming signal
4:3

16:9

Regular:
For 4:3 original pictures

Clock

Display

Full:
For 16:9 original pictures
Auto:

• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is automatically
selected to match to the incoming signals.
• For the other video sources: Aspect ratio is
fixed to <Regular>.

Language*4

Select the indication language shown on the screen.
English, Español, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands,
Svenska, Dansk, Руccĸий, Português
• The characters you can enter for assigning the titles also change
according to the language selected. ☞ [59]

NTSC/PAL

Select the color system of the external monitor connected—NTSC, PAL.
• Turn off the power and turn it on again to make the new setting
effective.

Time Set

Initial 1:00AM ☞ [8]

Time Format

Select either 12-hour system or 24-hour system.
12Hours, 24Hours ☞ [8]

OSD Clock

When <On> is selected, the clock time is displayed on the playback
picture. ☞ [8]
Off, On

*3 Not adjustable when no picture is shown.
*4 After you change the indication language setting, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.

45

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 45

SETTINGS
07.12.17 4:49:13 PM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
1

Menu Language*

Select the initial disc menu language; Initial English (☞ also page
58).

Audio Language*1

Select the initial audio language; Initial English (☞ also page 58).

Subtitle*1

Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off); Initial
English (☞ also page 58).

Monitor Type*1
16:9

4:3LB

4:3PS

OSD Position*1

Disc

Position 1

Position 2

Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on the external
monitor.
16:9 : Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor is 16:9.
4:3 LB (Letterbox)/4:3 PS (Pan Scan): Select when the aspect ratio of
the external monitor is 4:3.
• Refer to the illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are
shown on the screen.
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [25]
1: Higher position
2: Lower position

File Type*1

Select playback file type when a disc contains different types of files.
Audio: Plays back audio files.
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.
Audio&Video: Plays back audio files and DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2 files.

DivX Regist. (Registration)*1

This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you have played back a
file with which the Registration Code recorded, this unit’s Registration
Code is overwritten for copyright protection.

D. Audio Output*1

Select the signal format emitted through the DIGITAL OUT (optical)
terminal. (☞ also page 57)
PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio, or when
connecting to a recording device.
Dolby D : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital.
Stream : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a decoder
compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.

*1 Selectable only for “DISC.” (Playback stops when you change the setting.)
46

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 46

07.12.17 4:49:14 PM

Initial: Underlined
Menu items
1

Selectable settings, [reference page]
When playing back a multi-channel disc, this setting affects the signals
reproduced through the LINE OUT terminals.
Dolby SR : Select this to enjoy multi-channel surround audio by
connecting an amplifier compatible with Dolby Surround.
Stereo : Normally select this.

D. (Dynamic) Range
Compres. (Compression)*1

You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing
Dolby Digital software.
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded software.
On: Select to always use this function.

IF Band Width

Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.

AV Input*2

You can determine the use of LINE IN and VIDEO IN terminals. ☞ [38, 39]
Off: Select when no component is connected (“AV-IN” is skipped while
selecting the source).
Audio&Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as a
VCR.
Audio: Select when connecting an audio component such as a portable
audio player.
Camera*3 : Select when connecting a rear view camera.
Navigation : Select when connecting a Navigation System.

External Input*4

For connecting an external component to the CD changer jack on the
rear.
Changer/iPod*5: CD changer or iPod. ☞ [34, 36]
External: Any other than the above. ☞ [40]
• For connecting the Bluetooth adapter, this setting is not required. It is
automatically detected.

Input

Tuner

Disc

Down Mix*

*2 Not selectable when “AV-IN” is selected as the source.
*3 The REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL lead connection is required. See Installation/Connection Manual. The rear view through
the camera appears on the screen in <Full> aspect ratio (regardless of the aspect ratio setting) when you shift the
gear to the reverse (R) position. When you press DISP on the control panel, or when you shift the gear to another
position other than the reverse (R) position, the rear view screen is cleared.
*4 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.
*5 The name of the component detected through the CD changer jack is shown.

47

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 47

SETTINGS
07.12.17 4:49:15 PM

Others

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Beep

Off: Cancels.
On: Activates the key-touch tone.

Telephone Muting

Off: Cancels.
Muting1, Muting2: Select either one which mutes the sounds while
using the cellular phone.

Power LED Flash

Off: Cancels.
On: When the ignition is turned off, the lamp on the
flashes.

button

TouchPanel Sens.

Change the sensitivity of the touch panel. As the number decreases,
sensitivity becomes higher. 1/2/3

Initialize

Initialize all settings you have made in <AV Menu>. Press and hold
[Enter] to initialize the settings, then reset the unit. ☞ [3]

Equalizer
Flat/Hard Rock/R&B/Pop/Jazz/Dance/Country/Reggae/Classic/User1/User2/User3 ☞ [41]

48

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 48

07.12.17 4:49:15 PM

Initial: Underlined

Sound
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Fader/Balance

Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front and rear speakers.
• Upmost—front only (F6)
• Downmost—rear only (R6)
When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the center (0).
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left and right speakers.
• Leftmost—left only (L6)
• Rightmost—right only (R6) Initial 0

Volume Adjust

Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each source, comparing to
the FM volume level. The volume level will automatically increase or decrease
when you change the source.
–12 to +12; Initial 00
• You can make the adjustments separately for DVD and other discs.

Amplifier Gain

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.
Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.
Low: VOL 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speakers is less
than 50 W.)
High: VOL 00 to 50

Mode*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Mono

Only for FM. (Off, On) ☞ [10]

DX/Local

Only for FM. (Local, DX) ☞ [11]

SSM

Only for FM. Press and hold to start SSM. ☞ [11]

Title Entry

Only for FM/AM stations, “AV-IN,” and “EXT-IN.” ☞ [42]

Repeat

☞ [18, 35, 37]

Random

☞ [18, 35, 37]

*1 Items listed under <Mode> vary among the playback sources.

List
For “DISC”: Folder List and Track List (☞ page 19)
For “CD-CH”: Disc List, Folder List, and Track List (☞ page 34)
• For the other playback sources, you can display a list by pressing DISP on the monitor panel. (☞ page 9)
49

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 49

SETTINGS
07.12.17 4:49:16 PM

The procedure for setting an item is shown on page 43.

Bluetooth*1
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

Dial Menu *

Select the method to make a call. ☞ [30]

Message*3

You can read a message from the following message histories.
Unread: Messages you have not read.
Read: Messages you have read.
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.
Sent: Messages you have sent.
• The number of messages in each history is also shown.

Open

☞ [27]

Search

☞ [28]

Special Device

Only for “New Device.”
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which require some special procedure to
establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want to connect.
• After selecting the device, use <Open> or <Search> (☞ page 27 or 28)
for connection.
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You can
connect the unit and the device by using <Connect> (☞ below) from the
next time.

Connect

Only for the registered devices.
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ pages 27 and
28), establish the connection with it.

Disconnect

Only for the device being connected.
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device.

Delete Pairing

Only for the registered devices.
Delete the registered devices.

2

*1 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE” or “Bluetooth AUDIO.” Select a device (or “New Device”) before operating the
menu.
*2 Only for the device connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*3 Selectable only when the source is “Bluetooth PHONE” and the connected cellular phone is compatible with SMS
(Short Message Service).

When operating the Bluetooth device, refer also to the instructions supplied with the device.

50

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 50

07.12.17 4:49:17 PM

Initial: Underlined
Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]
4

When the unit is turned on, the connection is established automatically
with...
Off: No Bluetooth device.
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found first.

Auto Answer *5

Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the calls
manually.
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.

Message Info *5

Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and
displaying “Receiving Message.” To read the message, ☞ page 30.
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.

MIC Setting *5

Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.
01/02/03

Version *6

The Bluetooth software and hardware versions are shown.

Settings

Auto Connect *

*4 Selectable only for “Bluetooth PHONE.”
*5 Only for the cellular phone connected for “Bluetooth PHONE.” Not selectable when “New Device” is selected.
*6 If you wish to receive more information about Bluetooth, visit the following JVC web site: <http://www.jvc-victor.
co.jp/english/car/>

51

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 51

SETTINGS
SETTINGS
07.12.17 4:49:17 PM

Maintenance
Moisture condensation

To keep discs clean

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.

How to handle discs

To play new discs
Center holder

When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder of
the case and lift the disc out, holding it
by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:
SingleCD—8 cm disc

Unusual shape

Warped disc

Sticker and sticker residue

C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)

Stick-on label

Transparent or semi-transparent on its
recording area

52

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 52

07.12.17 4:49:18 PM

More about this unit
Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs

General

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files and 250
folders (a maximum of 999 files per folder).
• Use only “finalized” discs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters for file/
folder names.
• Some discs or files may not be played back due to
their characteristics or recording conditions.

Turning on the power
• By pressing SOURCE on the monitor panel, you
can also turn on the power. If the source is ready,
playback starts.

Tuner (FM only)
Storing stations in memory
• When SSM is over, received stations are preset in no.
1 (lowest frequency) to no. 6 (highest frequency).

Playing DVD-VR

Disc

• For details about DVD-VR format and Playlist, refer
to the instructions supplied with the recording
equipment.

General
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are
interchangeably used.
• This unit can only play back audio CD (CD-DA) files
if different type of audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV) are
recorded on the same disc.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.

File playback
Playing DivX files
• This unit can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx>, <.div>, or <.avi> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit supports the DivX files whose resolution is
720 x 576 pixels or less.
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or Dolby Digital.
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode
may not be played back correctly.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Inserting a disc
• When a disc is inserted upside down or has no
playable files, “Cannot play this disc Check the disc”
appears on the screen. Eject the disc.

Ejecting a disc
• If “No disc“ appears after removing a disc, insert a
disc or select another playback source.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust.

Continued on the next page

53

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 53

REFERENCES
07.12.17 4:49:18 PM

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time indication.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO
format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional,
and voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.

Playing MPEG1/MPEG2 files
• This unit can play back MPEG1/MPEG2 files with the
extension code <.mpg>, <.mpeg>, or <.mod>*.
* <.mod> is an extension code used for the MPEG2
files recorded by JVC Everio camcorders.
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or Dolby Digital.
• The maximum bit rate for video signals (average) is 4
Mbps.

Playing JPEG files

Disc/file information shown on the
external monitor

• This unit can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg>, or <.jpeg>.
• It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution.
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be
played.

The following screens appear only on the external
monitor.
• CD
T. RPT

Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files
• This unit can play back files with the extension code
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can play back the files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate:
MP3/WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 22.05 kHz (for WMA)
44.1 kHz (for WAV)
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3).
• This unit can also show WAV/WMA Tag.

Track Information
Album
Four seasons
Artist
Robert M. Smith
Title
Rain

TIME

00:14

Track : 6 / 14
Cloudy
Fair
Fog
Hail
Indian summer
Rain
Shower
Snow
Thunder
Typhoon
Wind
Winter sky

1
2
3
4

Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
on the disc
5 Track information
6 Track list
7 Current track (highlighted bar)

54

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 54

07.12.17 4:49:19 PM

• DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV

Bluetooth operations
General

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
p

• While driving, do not perform complicated operation
such as dialing the numbers, using phone book, etc.
When you perform these operations, stop your car in
a safe place.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected to
this unit depending on the Bluetooth version of the
device.
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth devices.
• Connecting condition may vary depending on
circumstances around you.
• When the unit is turned off, the device is
disconnected.

Current folder (highlighted bar)
Current folder number/total folder number
Folder list
Selected playback mode
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not
displayed for JPEG)
Operation status
Current track number/total number of tracks
in the current folder (total number of tracks on
the disc)
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)
Track list
Current track (highlighted)

Warning messages for Bluetooth operations
• Connection Error: The device is registered but the
connection has failed. Use <Connect> to connect
the device again. (☞ page 28)
• Error: Try the operation again. If “Error” appears
again, check if the device supports the function you
have tried.
• Device Unfound: No available Bluetooth device is
detected by <Search>.
• Loading: The unit is updating the phone book and/
or SMS.
• Please Wait...: The unit is preparing to use
the Bluetooth function. If the message does not
disappear, turn off and turn on the unit, then connect
the device again (or reset the unit).
• Reset 08: Check the connection between the
adapter and this unit.

* If tag data includes “Jacket Picture” (baseline
JPEG), it will be displayed.

Icons for phone types
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the device.

55

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 55

:

Cellular phone

:

Household phone

:

Office

:

General

:

Other than above

REFERENCES
07.12.17 4:49:19 PM

CD changer

Menu settings

• If you select a folder, which does not include any
music files, on the list (☞ page 34), you will hear a
beep. Select another folder including music files.

• If you change the <Amplifier Gain> setting from
<High> to <Low> while the volume level is set
higher than “30,” the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “VOL 30.”
• After you change any of <Menu Language/Audio
Language/Subtitle> settings, turn off then on the
power, and re-insert the disc (or insert another disc)
so that your setting takes effect.
• When you select <16:9> for a picture whose aspect
ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
• Even if <4:3PS> is selected, the screen size may
become <4:3LB> for some discs.

iPod operations
• You can control the following types of iPods through
the interface adapter.
– iPod with dock connector (3rd Generation)
– iPod with Click Wheel (4th Generation)
– iPod mini
– iPod photo
– iPod nano *1
– iPod video (5th Generation) *2
*1 When you connect the iPod nano to the interface
adapter, be sure to disconnect the headphones;
otherwise, no sound is heard.
*2 It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Videos” menu while the iPod is connected to the
interface adapter.
• If the iPod does not play correctly, please update your
iPod software to the latest version. For details about
updating your iPod, visit <http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through the adapter connected to this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
• The text information scrolls on the screen. This unit
can display up to 40 characters.
Notice:
When operating an iPod, some operations may not
be performed correctly or as intended. In this case,
visit the following JVC web site:
<http://www.jvc.co.jp/english/car/support/
ks-pd100/index.html>

56

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 56

07.12.17 4:49:20 PM

Sound signals emitted through the rear terminals
Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/REAR OUT)
2-channel signal is emitted. When playing multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.
• DTS sound cannot be reproduced.

Through the DIGITAL OUT terminal
Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted.
• To reproduce the multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an amplifier or a
decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set <D. Audio Output> correctly.
(☞ page 46)
Output signals

<D. Audio Output>
Playback disc
DVD

<Stream>

<Dolby D>

<PCM>

48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*

96 kHz, Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

with Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital bitstream

with DTS
with MPEG Audio

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

DTS bitstream
MPEG bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD, Video CD

44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM /
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM

Audio CD with DTS

DTS bitstream

DivX/ with Dolby Digital
MPEG
with MPEG Audio

Dolby Digital bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bits stereo
Linear PCM

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

MP3/WMA

32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

WAV

44.1 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM

* Digital signals may be emitted at 20 or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DIGITAL OUT terminal if the
discs are not copy-protected.

57

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 57

REFERENCES
07.12.17 4:49:20 PM

Preset equalizing values
Frequency
Sound mode
Flat
Hard Rock
R&B
Pop
Jazz
Dance
Country
Reggae
Classic
User1/2/3

60 Hz

150 Hz

400 Hz

1 kHz

2.5 kHz

6.3 kHz

15 kHz

00
+03
+03
00
+03
+04
+02
+03
+02
00

00
+03
+02
+02
+02
+02
+01
00
+03
00

00
+01
+02
00
+01
00
00
00
+01
00

00
00
00
00
+01
–02
00
+01
00
00

00
00
+01
+01
+01
–01
00
+02
00
00

00
+02
+01
+01
+03
+01
+01
+02
+02
00

00
+01
+03
+02
+02
+01
+02
+03
00
00

Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)
Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

Code Language

AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU

FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA

KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE

NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
QU
RM
RN
RO
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS

ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU

Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque

Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian

Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali

Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati

Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu

58

EN_KW-AVX710[A].indb 58

0